manual hardware fanuc

GE Fanuc Automation

Programmable Control Products

Series 90™-30 PLCInstallation and Hardware Manual

GFK-0356Q August 2002

GFL-002

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication

Warning

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,

currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this

equipment or may be associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to

equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note

Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding andoperating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While effortshave been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency inconnection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described hereinwhich are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes noobligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutorywith respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, orusefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness forpurpose shall apply.

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Alarm Master Field Control Modelmaster Series 90CIMPLICITY GEnet Motion Mate Series OneCIMPLICITY Control Genius PowerMotion Series SixCIMPLICITY PowerTRAC Genius PowerTRAC ProLoop Series ThreeCIMPLICITY 90–ADS Helpmate PROMACRO VuMasterCIMSTAR Logicmaster Series Five Workmaster

©Copyright 1998—2002 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

RFI Standards

GFK-0356Q iii

The Series 90-30 PLC and its associated modules have been tested and found to meet or exceed the

requirements of FCC Rule, Part 15, Subpart J. The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

requires the following note to be published according to FCC guidelines.

NOTE

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed in

accordance with this instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a

residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to

correct the interference at his own expense.

The following note is required to be published by the Canadian Department of Communications.

NOTE

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital

apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of

Communications.

The following statements are required to appear in the Series 90_-30 Installation Manual and the

Series 90_-30 I/O Specifications Manual for Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations.

1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D,

DIV. 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2,

GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.

2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY

IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2:

3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS

POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE

NON-HAZARDOUS.

4. ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES MUST BE POPULATED WITH FILLER

MODULES, IC693ACC310, OR EQUIVALENT.

Preface

GFK-0356Q v

This manual describes the GE Fanuc Series 90-30 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). It

contains a description of hardware components and provides basic hardware installation

procedures. The Series 90-30 PLC is a member of the Series 90_ family of Programmable Logic

Controllers from GE Fanuc.

For a list of product standards, refer to data sheet GFK-0867B or later, GE Fanuc Approvals,

Standards, General Specifications which lists all of the standards for GE Fanuc products.

Installation instructions in this manual are provided for installations that do not require special

procedures for noisy or hazardous environments. For installations that must conform to more

stringent requirements (such as CE Mark), see GFK-1179, Installation Requirements for

Conformance to Standards.

What’s New in This Manual

Added the model 374 CPU, which supports connection to an Ethernet network through two

built-in 10BaseT/100BaseTx auto-negotiating full-duplex Ethernet ports. Models 364 (release

9.10 and later) and 374 are the only Series 90-30 CPUs that support Ethernet Global Data.

Note that the CPU374 is supported only by the Windows®-based programmers.

Other corrections and clarifications as necessary.

Related Publications

For more information on Series 90-30 products, refer to these publications. (For a publication to

product catalog number cross-reference refer to Appendix G):

GFK-0255 - Series 90 PCM and Support Software User’s Manual

GFK-0256 - MegaBasic Programming Reference Manual

GFK-0293 - Series 90 -30 High Speed Counter User’s Manual

GFK-0401 - Workmaster® II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation

GFK-0402 - Series 90 -30 and 90-20 PLC Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual

GFK-0412 - Genius® Communications Module User’s Manual

GFK-0466 - Logicmaster 90 Series 90 -30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual

GFK-0467 - Series 90 -30/20/Micro Programmable Controllers Reference Manual

GFK-0487 - Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual

GFK-0499 - CIMPLICITY® 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual

Preface

vi Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

GFK-0582 - Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual

GFK-0631 - Series 90 -30 I/O LINK Interface User’s Manual

GFK-0641 - CIMPLICITY® 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual

GFK-0664 - Series 90 -30 PLC Axis Positioning Module Programmer’s Manual

GFK-0685 - Series 90 Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User’s Manual

GFK-0695 - Series 90 -30 Enhanced Genius) Communications Module User’s Manual

GFK-0726 - Series 90 -30 PLC State Logic Processor User’s Guide

GFK-0732 - Series 90 -30 PLC ECLiPS User’s Manual

GFK-0747 - Series 90 -30 PLC OnTOP User’s Guide

GFK-0750 - OnTop for Series 90 -30 (State Logic) Program User’s Manual

GFK-0781 - Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90 -30 PLC Follower Mode User’s Manual

GFK-0823 - Series 90 -30 I/O LINK Master Module User’s Manual

GFK-0828 - Series 90 -30 Diagnostic System User’s Manual

GFK-0840 - Motion Mate APM300 for Series 90 -30 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual

GFK-0867 - GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications

GFK-0898 - Series 90 -30 PLC I/O Module Specifications

GFK-1028 - Series 90 -30 I/O Processor Module User’s Manual

GFK-1034 - Series 90 -30 Genius® Bus Controller User’s Manual

GFK-1037 - Series 90 -30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual

GFK-1056 - Series 90 -30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual

GFK-1186 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90_-30 PLC Station Manager Manual

GFK-1179 - Series 90 PLC Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards

GFK-1464 - Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90 -30 PLCs User’s Manual

GFK-1466 - Temperature Control Module for the Series 90 -30 PLC User’s Manual

GFK-1541 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual

Contents

GFK-0356Q vii

Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC .....................................................................1-1

The Basic Parts of a Series 90-30 PLC....................................................................... 1-1

Assembling a Basic Series 90-30 PLC System .......................................................... 1-2

What else would be needed to make this basic system functional? ........................... 1-6

What if the application requires more than five modules? ......................................... 1-6

What if the application requires more than ten modules? .......................................... 1-7

What is the Difference Between Expansion and Remote baseplates?........................ 1-8

What if I need to cover more than 700 feet (213 meters)? ......................................... 1-9

Chapter 2 Installation ...........................................................................................................2-1

Receiving your Products - Visual Inspection ............................................................. 2-1

Pre-installation Check ................................................................................................ 2-1

Warranty Claims......................................................................................................... 2-1

Working with Series 90-30 Modules.......................................................................... 2-2Module Features........................................................................................................ 2-2Installing a Module.................................................................................................... 2-3Removing a Module .................................................................................................. 2-4Installing a Module’s Terminal Board ...................................................................... 2-5Removing a Module’s Terminal Board..................................................................... 2-6I/O Module Terminal Board Posts ............................................................................ 2-7Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws ............................. 2-7

Baseplate Mounting.................................................................................................... 2-8

Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel ................................................................................ 2-8

Mounting a Baseplate to a 19" Rack .......................................................................... 2-8

Grounding Procedures .................................................................................................... 2-11

System Grounding Procedures ................................................................................. 2-11Ground Conductors ................................................................................................. 2-11

Series 90-30 PLC Equipment Grounding................................................................. 2-12Baseplate Safety Grounding.................................................................................... 2-12Grounding 19" Rack-Mounted Baseplates .............................................................. 2-13Programmer Grounding........................................................................................... 2-13

Module Shield Grounding ........................................................................................ 2-14Shield Grounding Information for CPUs with External Port Connections.............. 2-14CPU351 and 352 Shield Grounding ........................................................................ 2-14CPU363, CPU364, and CPU374 Shield Grounding................................................ 2-16Additional Modules with Shield Grounding Requirements .................................... 2-16

General Wiring Guidelines ............................................................................................. 2-17

Discrete I/O Module Connection Methods............................................................... 2-18

Connections to I/O Module Terminal Boards .......................................................... 2-18

Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16-Point Discrete Modules ........... 2-19

Installation of 32-Point Discrete, 50-Pin Connector Modules ................................. 2-19Using Weidmuller #912263 Terminal Block .......................................................... 2-19Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip................................................................ 2-20Direct Method ......................................................................................................... 2-20

Installation of Discrete 32-Point, Dual 24-Pin Connector Modules......................... 2-20Using a TBQC......................................................................................................... 2-20

Contents

viii Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

With a Generic Terminal Block/Strip...................................................................... 2-20Direct Method ......................................................................................................... 2-21

General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules......................................................... 2-21

Analog Input Module Wiring Methods .................................................................... 2-21Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip................................................................ 2-21Direct Method ......................................................................................................... 2-21TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules ...................................................... 2-22

Analog Output Module Wiring ................................................................................ 2-22General .................................................................................................................... 2-22Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip................................................................ 2-22Direct Method ......................................................................................................... 2-22TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules ...................................................... 2-22

AC Power Source Connections....................................................................................... 2-23

AC Input Wiring to AC/DC Power Supplies ........................................................... 2-23

Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices........................................................ 2-24

Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems ............................... 2-25

Definition of Floating Neutral Systems.................................................................... 2-25

Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems............... 2-26

DC Power Source Connections....................................................................................... 2-27

DC Input Wiring to AC/DC and DC-Only Power Supplies ..................................... 2-27

+24 VDC Output (All Supplies)............................................................................... 2-27

Basic Installation Procedure ........................................................................................... 2-28

Chapter 3 Baseplates .............................................................................................................3-1

Baseplate Types ................................................................................................................ 3-1

Common Baseplate Features ...................................................................................... 3-1

Two Baseplate Sizes................................................................................................... 3-2

Baseplate Terms................................................................................................................ 3-3

CPU Baseplates................................................................................................................. 3-4

Embedded CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-2 and 3-3) ..................................................... 3-4

Modular CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-4 and 3-5) ........................................................ 3-6

Expansion Baseplates (Figures 3-6 and 3-7) .............................................................. 3-7

Remote Baseplates (Figures 3-8 and 3-9)................................................................... 3-8

I/O Bus Expansion Cables........................................................................................ 3-10

Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks................................................ 3-11

Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System ................................................. 3-11

Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System ......................................... 3-12

Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates ....................................... 3-12

Series 90-30 PLC Backplane .......................................................................................... 3-12

Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remote Baseplates.................................. 3-13

Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example............................................... 3-15

Baseplate Mounting Dimensions .................................................................................... 3-16

Embedded CPU (311, 313, and 323) Baseplate Dimensions ................................... 3-16

Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote Baseplate Dimensions ............................... 3-18

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents ix

Load Ratings, Temperature, and Mounting Position ...................................................... 3-19

Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19" Rack Mounting ...................................................... 3-20

Baseplate Comparison Table.................................................................................... 3-22

Chapter 4 Power Supplies.....................................................................................................4-1

Power Supply Categories .................................................................................................. 4-1

Power Supply Feature Comparison................................................................................... 4-1

AC/DC Input Power Supplies ........................................................................................... 4-2

IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input .............. 4-2

IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC/125 VDC Input ......... 4-4

Field Wiring Connections for the AC/DC Input Power Supplies............................... 4-5

Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections............................................................ 4-6

DC Input Only Power Supplies......................................................................................... 4-7

IC693PWR322 Standard Power Supply, 24/48 VDC Input....................................... 4-7

Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322 ............................................. 4-8

IC693PWR328 Standard Power Supply, 48 VDC Input .......................................... 4-10

Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR328..................................... 4-11

Input Power/Current Calculation for IC693PWR328 Power Supply ....................... 4-12

IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply, 24 VDC Input ................................. 4-13

Current Derating for Higher Temperatures .............................................................. 4-14

Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR331..................................... 4-15

Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input-Only Power Supplies ........................... 4-15

Common Series 90-30 Power Supply Features............................................................... 4-16

Status Indicator Lights on all Power Supplies.......................................................... 4-16

Input Overvoltage Protection Devices...................................................................... 4-16

Output Voltage Connections to Backplane (All Supplies) ....................................... 4-17

Overcurrent Protection (all Supplies) ....................................................................... 4-18

Timing Diagram ....................................................................................................... 4-18

CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply (All Supplies)................................... 4-19

CPU Serial Port Information .................................................................................... 4-19

Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies) ................................................... 4-20

Chapter 5 CPUs .....................................................................................................................5-1

CPU Types for Series 90-30 PLCs ................................................................................... 5-1

Embedded CPUs......................................................................................................... 5-1

Modular CPUs............................................................................................................ 5-2

General CPU Features ................................................................................................ 5-3Microprocessor.......................................................................................................... 5-3CPU Serial Port (Connector on Power Supply)......................................................... 5-3Memory Volatility..................................................................................................... 5-4RAM Memory........................................................................................................... 5-5RAM Memory Backup/Backup Battery Information ................................................ 5-5Programmable Read-Only Memory (PROM) Types................................................. 5-5Uses of PROM devices in the 90-30 CPUs ............................................................... 5-5

Contents

x Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

CPU Firmware........................................................................................................... 5-6Determining CPU Revision Levels (Versions) ......................................................... 5-7

EPROM and EEPROM User Program Storage Options................................................... 5-8

Comparing EPROM and EEPROM Features............................................................. 5-8

Procedure for Creating an EPROM............................................................................ 5-9

Flash Memory............................................................................................................. 5-9

Series 90-30 CPU Capacities.................................................................................... 5-10

User Memory Addresses (References) ..................................................................... 5-10

Difference Between a Memory Address and a Nickname........................................ 5-10

User Memory Reference Types................................................................................ 5-11Application Program Compatibility ........................................................................ 5-12CPU Time-of-Day (TOD) Clock Accuracy............................................................. 5-12Breakfree SNP Protocol .......................................................................................... 5-13

350–374 CPUs.......................................................................................................... 5-13Compatibility With Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) and Memory Card................. 5-13350–374 CPU Advanced Features........................................................................... 5-14Details of 350 – 374 CPU Advanced Features ........................................................ 5-14

Hardware Features of the 350–364 CPUs....................................................................... 5-18

CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features ............................................................... 5-18CPU Firmware Upgrade.......................................................................................... 5-18

CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Hardware Features............................................... 5-19CPU Firmware Upgrade.......................................................................................... 5-19Keyswitch................................................................................................................ 5-19Shield Ground Connection Tab............................................................................... 5-20Serial Ports .............................................................................................................. 5-20Serial Port Front Panel Connectors ......................................................................... 5-20Serial Port Status LEDs........................................................................................... 5-20Protocols Supported ................................................................................................ 5-21Pin Assignments for CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Serial Ports 1 & 2 .............. 5-22

CPU364 Hardware Features ..................................................................................... 5-23LED Indicators ........................................................................................................ 5-23Ethernet Restart Pushbutton .................................................................................... 5-23Keyswitch................................................................................................................ 5-24Front Panel Connectors ........................................................................................... 5-24Shield Ground Connection Tab............................................................................... 5-24Firmware Upgrade................................................................................................... 5-24

CPU374 Hardware Features ..................................................................................... 5-25LED Indicators ........................................................................................................ 5-25Ethernet Restart Pushbutton .................................................................................... 5-25Keyswitch................................................................................................................ 5-26Front Panel Connectors ........................................................................................... 5-26Shield Ground Connection Tab............................................................................... 5-26Firmware Upgrade................................................................................................... 5-26

CPU Data Sheets............................................................................................................. 5-27

CPU311 Catalog Number IC693CPU311 ........................................ 5-28




Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xi










Chapter 6 Memory Backup/Battery Backup ......................................................................6-1

Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)............................................................ 6-1

Battery Replacement Instructions ..................................................................................... 6-2

Battery Replacement/Memory Protection Factors ............................................................ 6-3

The Importance of Backing up Your Program.................................................................. 6-3

Factors Affecting Battery Life .......................................................................................... 6-4

Low Battery Warning Methods......................................................................................... 6-4

Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery ................................................................. 6-6

RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path ............................................................. 6-8

Super Capacitor Memory Backup..................................................................................... 6-8

Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a CPU.......................... 6-9Modular CPUs........................................................................................................... 6-9Embedded CPUs ....................................................................................................... 6-9Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315).................................................................... 6-9Battery Accessory Kit Installation........................................................................... 6-10

External Battery Module (IC693ACC302) ..................................................................... 6-10

Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks ......................................... 6-11

Chapter 7 Input/Output Modules ........................................................................................7-1

Basic I/O Module Types ................................................................................................... 7-1

Discrete I/O Modules ........................................................................................................ 7-2

Discrete I/O Module Point Density ............................................................................ 7-2

Standard Density Discrete I/O Module Features........................................................ 7-2

Wiring Standard Density (16-Point or Less) Discrete Modules................................. 7-4

Discrete Relay Output Module Protection ................................................................. 7-4

High Density (32-Point) Discrete Module Features ................................................... 7-4

Wiring Methods for 32-Point Discrete I/O Modules.................................................. 7-6Modules with Single 50-Pin Connector .................................................................... 7-6Modules with Dual 24-Pin Connectors ..................................................................... 7-7

Analog Module Features................................................................................................... 7-8

Wiring Methods for Analog Modules ........................................................................ 7-9Analog Input Module Wiring Methods ..................................................................... 7-9Analog Output Module Wiring ............................................................................... 7-10

I/O Module Power Supply Current Draw ....................................................................... 7-10

Contents

xii Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

I/O Module Wire Routing............................................................................................... 7-11

Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated ............................................................... 7-11

IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module................................................................ 7-12

Indicator LEDs ......................................................................................................... 7-12

DVM Specifications ................................................................................................. 7-13

Fuses......................................................................................................................... 7-13

Chapter 8 Option Modules ...................................................................................................8-1

Third-Party Option Modules and the Accompany Program ............................................. 8-1

Option Modules Discussed in this Chapter....................................................................... 8-1

IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM) .............................................. 8-2

Status LEDs................................................................................................................ 8-3

GCM Documentation ................................................................................................. 8-3

IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+) ........................... 8-4

Status LEDs................................................................................................................ 8-5

GCM+ Documentation ............................................................................................... 8-5

IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller (GBC) ................................................................. 8-6

Number of Genius Bus Controllers ............................................................................ 8-7

Status LEDs................................................................................................................ 8-7

Compatibility.............................................................................................................. 8-7Series 90-30 PLC ...................................................................................................... 8-7Series Six PLC .......................................................................................................... 8-7Genius Hand-Held Monitor....................................................................................... 8-8Hand-Held Programmer ............................................................................................ 8-8Genius I/O Blocks ..................................................................................................... 8-8Genius Bus ................................................................................................................ 8-8

Diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 8-8

Datagrams................................................................................................................... 8-9

Global Data................................................................................................................. 8-9Sending Global Data ................................................................................................. 8-9Receiving Global Data .............................................................................................. 8-9Genius Bus Controller Documentation ..................................................................... 8-9

IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (FBC) Module ........................................................ 8-10

Status LEDs.............................................................................................................. 8-11

Serial Port ................................................................................................................. 8-11

FIP Bus Connectors.................................................................................................. 8-11

IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner Module .......................................................... 8-12

Features of the Remote I/O Scanner......................................................................... 8-12

FIP Bus Interface...................................................................................................... 8-13

Module Description.................................................................................................. 8-13

Connectors................................................................................................................ 8-14

LEDs......................................................................................................................... 8-14

FIP Remote I/O Scanner Documentation: ................................................................ 8-14

IC693APU301/302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module (APM) .............................. 8-15

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xiii

APM Cables ............................................................................................................. 8-16

Motion Mate APM Module Documentation ............................................................ 8-16

IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM302).................................... 8-17

Features. ................................................................................................................... 8-18

IC693DSM302 Documentation................................................................................ 8-18

IC693DSM314 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM314).................................... 8-20Features ................................................................................................................... 8-21IC693DSM314 Documentation............................................................................... 8-22

IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module ...................................................... 8-23

IC693BEM320 I/O LINK Interface (Slave) Module ...................................................... 8-24

IC693BEM321 I/O LINK Master Module...................................................................... 8-25Compatibility........................................................................................................... 8-26

IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module ............................................................................ 8-27Module Features...................................................................................................... 8-28

IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module.................................................................... 8-29

IC693PCM300/301/311 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) ........................... 8-31

IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM)................................... 8-34

IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC).......................................... 8-35

IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Modules (TCM) .......................................... 8-37Connections............................................................................................................. 8-37LED Indicators ........................................................................................................ 8-38Internal Fuse............................................................................................................ 8-38Automatic Data Transfers Between TCM and PLC................................................ 8-38Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 Modules .................................................... 8-39

IC693PTM100/101 Power Transducer (PTM) ............................................................... 8-40

Difference Between PTM100 and PTM101............................................................. 8-40

Capabilities............................................................................................................... 8-40

Operating Modes ...................................................................................................... 8-40

Automatic Data Transfers Between PTMPM and PLC............................................ 8-41

Compatibility............................................................................................................ 8-41

Dimensions............................................................................................................... 8-42

PTMPM Indicator LEDs .......................................................................................... 8-42

General Mounting Information................................................................................. 8-42

Baseplate Type and Allowable Number of PTMPM Modules................................. 8-43

Power Supply Requirement...................................................................................... 8-43

Memory Requirement............................................................................................... 8-43

Configuration............................................................................................................ 8-43

Ordering Information................................................................................................ 8-43Documentation ........................................................................................................ 8-43

Chapter 9 State Logic Products............................................................................................9-1

State Logic Overview ....................................................................................................... 9-1

State Logic Products ......................................................................................................... 9-1

Baseplates and Power Supply, I/O, and Option Modules........................................... 9-1

Contents

xiv Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module (SCM)............................ 9-2

Description ................................................................................................................. 9-2OK LED .................................................................................................................... 9-2Reset Button .............................................................................................................. 9-2Serial Connector........................................................................................................ 9-3

Cable Information....................................................................................................... 9-3

State Logic SCM Documentation............................................................................... 9-3

IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module .................................................................. 9-4

Description ................................................................................................................. 9-4

SLP Features............................................................................................................... 9-5

Memory ...................................................................................................................... 9-5

Installation .................................................................................................................. 9-5

Status Light................................................................................................................. 9-6

Pushbutton .................................................................................................................. 9-6

Battery ........................................................................................................................ 9-7

Cable Information....................................................................................................... 9-7

Hardware Specifications............................................................................................. 9-7

State Logic Processor (SLP) Documentation ............................................................. 9-7

State Logic CPUs.............................................................................................................. 9-8

Features of State Logic CPUs..................................................................................... 9-8

Model CSE311, CSE313 and CSE323 Embedded CPU Baseplates .......................... 9-9

Model CSE331 and CSE340 Modular CPUs.................................................................. 9-10

CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply .......................................................... 9-11

Configuring the State Logic CPUs ........................................................................... 9-11

State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations .......................................... 9-13

State Logic CPU Data Sheets ......................................................................................... 9-13

CSE311 Catalog Number IC693CSE311 ........................... 9-14





Chapter 10 Cables .................................................................................................................10-1

Cable Data Sheets ........................................................................................................... 10-7

IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU (SNP Port) Cable ................... 10-8Function of cable..................................................................................................... 10-8

IC690CBL701 PCM, ADC, CMM to Workmaster (PC-XT) Cable ............................. 10-12Function of cable................................................................................................... 10-12Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. 10-12Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................... 10-12

PCM to Programmer Cable Installation ................................................................. 10-13

IC690CBL702 PC-AT to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable .................................................... 10-14Function of cable................................................................................................... 10-14Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. 10-14

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xv

Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................... 10-14


IC690CBL705 Workmaster II (PS/2) to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable ............................. 10-16Function of cable................................................................................................... 10-16Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. 10-16Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................... 10-16


IC690CBL714A Multidrop Cable ................................................................................ 10-18Purpose.................................................................................................................. 10-18Specifications ........................................................................................................ 10-18IC690CBL714A Multi-Drop Cable Wiring Diagram............................................ 10-19

Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable.................................................. 10-20

IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313/314 I/O Bus Expansion Cables ................................ 10-22Description ............................................................................................................ 10-22Cable Lengths........................................................................................................ 10-22Function of Cables ................................................................................................ 10-22Connecting the Cables........................................................................................... 10-23Important Notes About I/O Bus Expansion Cables............................................... 10-23Cable Application Suggestions.............................................................................. 10-23Using Standard Cables .......................................................................................... 10-23Using Custom Built cables .................................................................................... 10-24

Building Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables ............................................. 10-24Two Types of Custom Built Cables ...................................................................... 10-24Components Needed to Build Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables ........... 10-24Expansion Port Pin Assignments........................................................................... 10-25I/O Expansion Bus Termination............................................................................ 10-25Shield Treatment ................................................................................................... 10-26Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions ............................................ 10-26Making a 100% Shielded Cable ............................................................................ 10-27Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................................... 10-28Application Examples ........................................................................................... 10-31Expansion System Cable Connections .................................................................. 10-31Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection Example................................. 10-31

IC693CBL303 Hand-Hand Programmer and Converter (IC690ACC900) Cable ........ 10-33

Function of cable .................................................................................................... 10-33

Cable Specifications ............................................................................................... 10-33

Wiring Diagram...................................................................................................... 10-34

Connecting the Cable ............................................................................................. 10-34

IC693CBL304/305 Port Expansion (WYE) Cables for PCM, ADC, and CMM.......... 10-35



Wiring Information................................................................................................. 10-36

IC693CBL306/307 Extension Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules.......................... 10-38



IC693CBL308/309 I/O Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules .................................... 10-40

Specifications ......................................................................................................... 10-40


Contents

xvi Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

IC693CBL310 I/O Interface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules.............................. 10-42


Replacement/Obsolescence Information ................................................................ 10-43Connector Depth for Cable IC693CBL310........................................................... 10-43

IC693CBL311/317/319/320 I/O Interface Cables for Power Mate APM Modules...... 10-45


Specifications ......................................................................................................... 10-45


IC693CBL315 I/O Interface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules.............................. 10-49


Building Custom Length Cables for 24-Pin Connectors ........................................ 10-49

Replacement/Obsolescence Information ................................................................ 10-51Connector Depth for IC693CBL315 ..................................................................... 10-51

IC693CBL316 Serial Cable, 9-Pin D-Shell to RJ-11 Connector .................................. 10-53

Description ............................................................................................................. 10-53

Typical Applications .............................................................................................. 10-53

IC693CBL321/322/323 I/O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector, 24-Pin10-54


Cable Specifications ............................................................................................... 10-54Connector Depth ................................................................................................... 10-55

IC693CBL327/328 I/O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24-Pin Connector ........... 10-57

Description ............................................................................................................. 10-57

Applications............................................................................................................ 10-57

Specifications ......................................................................................................... 10-58Connector Depth for Cables IC693CBL327/328 .................................................. 10-58

Building Custom Length 24-pin Connector Cables ............................................... 10-59Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables............................................................ 10-60

Possible Uses for These Cables (Factory or Custom Built) ................................... 10-61

IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables 24-Pin I/O Faceplate Connector to TerminalBlock Connector ........................................................................................................... 10-62

Description ............................................................................................................. 10-62Connector Depth ................................................................................................... 10-63

Applications............................................................................................................ 10-64

IC693CBL340/341 PTM Interface Cables ................................................................... 10-65

Documentation ....................................................................................................... 10-67

Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products ....................................................................11-1

Products Discussed in this Chapter................................................................................. 11-1

IC640WMI310/320 Work Station Interface Boards ....................................................... 11-2

Replacing Workmaster Computers........................................................................... 11-3

IC690ACC900 RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter.................................................... 11-3

IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit .................................................................................. 11-4

IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP).............................................................. 11-5

HHP Features ........................................................................................................... 11-6

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xvii

HHP Memory Card (IC693ACC303)...................................................................... 11-6HHP Modes of Operation........................................................................................ 11-6Documentation ........................................................................................................ 11-6

IC693PIF301/400 Personal Computer Interface (PCIF) Cards ...................................... 11-7

IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter ........................................................... 11-8

IC690ACC903 Port Isolator ..................................................................................... 11-8

Chapter 12 System Design ....................................................................................................12-1

Introduction..................................................................................................................... 12-1

Step 1: Planning Your System................................................................................. 12-1

Step 2: Determining I/O Requirements ................................................................... 12-1Additional I/O Module Selection Factors................................................................ 12-2

Step 3: Selecting Option Modules........................................................................... 12-2

Step 4: Selecting a CPU .......................................................................................... 12-4

Step 5: Selecting Baseplates.................................................................................... 12-5

Step 6: Selecting Power Supplies ............................................................................ 12-6

Reducing PLC Module Count by Using Other GE Fanuc Products ............................... 12-7

Designing For Safety ...................................................................................................... 12-8

Protection From Electrical Shock............................................................................. 12-8

Fire Prevention ......................................................................................................... 12-8

Protection From Mechanical Hazards ...................................................................... 12-8

Protection From Electrical Failure ........................................................................... 12-8Protection From Design Changes or Overrides....................................................... 12-9Safety Documentation ........................................................................................... 12-10Guarding Against Unauthorized Operation........................................................... 12-10Labeling, Guarding, and Lighting Issues............................................................... 12-10Equipment Accessibility Issues............................................................................. 12-10

Number of Modules Per Series 90-30 PLC System...................................................... 12-11

Calculating Power Supply Loading .............................................................................. 12-12

Load Requirements for Hardware Components ..................................................... 12-12Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples ...................................................... 12-14

Scan (Sweep) Time Calculation.................................................................................... 12-15

Major Design Factors Affecting Scan Time........................................................... 12-16

Where to Find Scan Time Information................................................................... 12-16

Calculating PLC Heat Dissipation ................................................................................ 12-17

System Layout Guidelines ............................................................................................ 12-17

Benefits of a Good Layout - Safe, Reliable, and Accessible.................................. 12-17

PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement ................................................... 12-17

Location of Modules in the PLC Racks ................................................................. 12-18

Allowable Module Locations ................................................................................. 12-19

Series 90-30 PLC Layout Example............................................................................... 12-20

PLC Mounting Position ................................................................................................ 12-21

Recommended Upright Mounting Orientation....................................................... 12-21

Derated Horizontal Mounting Orientation ............................................................. 12-21

Contents

xviii Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ..................................................................13-1

Troubleshooting Features of Series 90-30 Hardware...................................................... 13-1

Indicator Lights (LEDs) and Terminal Board .......................................................... 13-1

Module LED Indicators .................................................................................................. 13-2

Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software ..................................................... 13-3

Ladder Screens ......................................................................................................... 13-3

Configuration Screens .............................................................................................. 13-3

Fault Tables .............................................................................................................. 13-3

System Status References......................................................................................... 13-3

Reference Tables ...................................................................................................... 13-4

Override feature........................................................................................................ 13-4

Sequential Event Recorder (SER), DOIO functional instruction ............................. 13-4

Replacing Modules ......................................................................................................... 13-5

Series 90-30 Product Repair..................................................................................... 13-5

Module Fuse List...................................................................................................... 13-6

Spare/Replacement Parts ................................................................................................ 13-7

Preventive Maintenance Suggestions.............................................................................. 13-8

Getting Additional Help and Information....................................................................... 13-9

Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables ......................................................................................A-1

RS-422 Interface .............................................................................................................. A-1

Cable and Connector Specifications.......................................................................... A-2

Series 90 PLC Serial Port .......................................................................................... A-3

Workmaster Serial Port.................................................................................................... A-4

RS-232/RS-485 Converter ............................................................................................... A-7

IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit ............................................................................. A-7

IC690ACC900 Obsolete Converter........................................................................... A-7

Serial Cable Diagrams ..................................................................................................... A-8

RS-232 Point-to-Point Connections .......................................................................... A-8

RS-422 Point-to-Point Connection.......................................................................... A-10

Multidrop Connections............................................................................................ A-10

Appendix B IC690ACC900 Converter .................................................................................. B-1

Features ............................................................................................................................ B-1

Functions.......................................................................................................................... B-1

Location in System .......................................................................................................... B-2

Installation........................................................................................................................ B-2

Cable Description............................................................................................................. B-3

RS-232 Interface Pin Assignments............................................................................ B-4

RS-422/RS-485 Interface Pin Assignments .............................................................. B-5

Logic Diagram ................................................................................................................. B-6

Jumper Configuration ...................................................................................................... B-7

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xix

Example of Cable Configurations ............................................................................. B-9

Appendix C IC655CCM690 Isolated Repeater/Converter ..................................................C-1

Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter............................................................... C-1

Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter ......................................................... C-3

Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter ..................................................... C-4

System Configurations..................................................................................................... C-5

Simple Multidrop Configuration ............................................................................... C-6

Complex Multidrop Configuration............................................................................ C-6

Rules for Using Repeater/Converters in Complex Networks.................................... C-7

Cable Diagrams................................................................................................................ C-8

Appendix D IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit.....................................................................D-1

Description of Miniconverter........................................................................................... D-1

Pin Assignments............................................................................................................... D-2

Pin Assignments, RS-232 Port .................................................................................. D-2

Pin Assignments, RS-422 Port .................................................................................. D-2

System Configurations..................................................................................................... D-3

Cable Diagrams (Point-To-Point).............................................................................. D-3

Appendix E IC690ACC903 Port Isolator .............................................................................. E-1

Connectors ........................................................................................................................E-2

Logic Diagram ..................................................................................................................E-3

Installation.........................................................................................................................E-4

Specifications....................................................................................................................E-7

Appendix F Calculating Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation ....................................................... F-1

Overview...........................................................................................................................F-1

Information Required........................................................................................................F-1

Procedure ..........................................................................................................................F-2

Step 1: Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation.............................................F-2

Step 2: Calculation for PLC Power Supplies.............................................................F-3

Step 3: Output Calculations for Discrete Output Modules........................................F-3

Step 4: Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules ..............................................F-4

Step 5: Final Calculation ............................................................................................F-6

Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing ................................................................F-6

Appendix G Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference ...........................................G-1

General System Information ............................................................................................ G-2

Analog I/O Modules ........................................................................................................ G-2

Baseplates ........................................................................................................................ G-2

Communications Modules ............................................................................................... G-3

Contents

xx Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

CPU Modules, CPU311-CPU341 .................................................................................... G-3

CPU Modules, CPU350 - CPU374 .................................................................................. G-4

Digital Valve Driver Module ........................................................................................... G-5

Discrete I/O Modules ....................................................................................................... G-5

Genius Modules ............................................................................................................... G-6

Motion Modules............................................................................................................... G-6

Other Option Modules ..................................................................................................... G-6

Power Supply Modules .................................................................................................... G-7

Programming Device ....................................................................................................... G-7

State Logic Products ........................................................................................................ G-7

Publication Revision Letters ............................................................................................ G-8

Other Sources of Information .......................................................................................... G-8

Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components ..................................................H-1

Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16-Point Modules............................... H-2

Terminal Blocks ........................................................................................................ H-2

Cable Current Rating................................................................................................. H-2

Cable Selection and Cross-Reference ....................................................................... H-3

I/O Face Plate for 16-Point Modules......................................................................... H-3

I/O Face Plate Installation ......................................................................................... H-3

Module Wiring Information ...................................................................................... H-4

Cable Information...................................................................................................... H-4

Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal.............................. H-5

Terminal Block Information...................................................................................... H-5IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block .................................................................... H-6IC693ACC330 TBQC Terminal Block .................................................................... H-7IC693ACC331 TBQC Terminal Block .................................................................... H-8IC693ACC332 TBQC Terminal Block .................................................................... H-9IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block .................................................................. H-10

Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 32-Point Modules............................. H-11

Terminal Block........................................................................................................ H-12

Cable Selection and Cross-Reference ..................................................................... H-12

Cable Current Rating............................................................................................... H-12

Cable Data ............................................................................................................... H-13

Terminal Block Data ............................................................................................... H-13IC693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block .................................................................. H-13

Appendix I SNP Multidrop..................................................................................................... I-1

SNP Multidrop Overview ..................................................................................................I-1

Multidrop Cables .........................................................................................................I-2

Limitations...................................................................................................................I-2

Cable and Connector Specifications ..................................................................................I-2

MultiDrop Cable Wiring Diagram.....................................................................................I-3

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xxi

SNP Multidrop Examples ..................................................................................................I-4

Configuring and Connecting a Programmer to a Multidrop Network ...............................I-5

Assigning a PLC SNP ID to a PLC with Logicmaster ................................................I-6

Connecting your Logicmaster Programmer to a PLC on a Multidrop System............I-6

SNP Multidrop Troubleshooting........................................................................................I-7

Appendix J Ethernet Transceivers .........................................................................................J-1

IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver ............................................................. J-1

Power Requirement .................................................................................................... J-1

LED Indicator Lights.................................................................................................. J-1

IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver............................................................... J-2

Power Requirement .................................................................................................... J-2

LED Indicator Light ................................................................................................... J-2

Appendix K Tables and Formulas..........................................................................................K-1

AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion ..................................................................... K-2

Temperature Conversion ........................................................................................... K-3Formulas................................................................................................................... K-3

Conversion Information ................................................................................................... K-4

English and Metric Equivalents................................................................................. K-5

Appendix L 44A420084-001 EMI Line Filter........................................................................ L-1

44A720084-001 Optional EMI Line Filter .......................................................................L-1

44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions..........................................................L-3

Contents

xxii Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

Figure 1-1. Five-Slot CPU Baseplate ........................................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1-2. Power Supply Module................................................................................................................ 1-3

Figure 1-3. CPU Module .............................................................................................................................. 1-4

Figure 1-4. I/O Module................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Figure 1-5. Assembling the System.............................................................................................................. 1-5

Figure 1-6. A Basic System.......................................................................................................................... 1-6

Figure 1-7. Ten-Slot Rack ............................................................................................................................ 1-6

Figure 1-8. I/O Bus Expansion Cable........................................................................................................... 1-7

Figure 1-9. Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates ......................................................................... 1-8

Figure 1-10. Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules ................................................................... 1-9

Figure 2-1. Features of Series 90-30 Module ............................................................................................... 2-2

Figure 2-2. Installing a Module .................................................................................................................... 2-3

Figure 2-3. Removing a Module................................................................................................................... 2-4

Figure 2-4. Installing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board............................................................................... 2-5

Figure 2-5. Removing a Module’s Terminal Board ..................................................................................... 2-6

Figure 2-6. Terminal Board with Holding Screws ....................................................................................... 2-7

Figure 2-7. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation....................................................... 2-9

Figure 2-8. Dimensions for 19-inch Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket..................... 2-9

Figure 2-9. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket................................................................... 2-10

Figure 2-10. Recommended System Grounding......................................................................................... 2-11

Figure 2-11. Baseplate Grounding.............................................................................................................. 2-12

Figure 2-12. CPU 351 or 352 - Attaching Shield Ground Wire ................................................................. 2-14

Figure 2-13. CPU 351 or 352 - Mounting the Shield Grounding Bracket and Wire .................................. 2-15

Figure 2-14. CPU 363, CPU364, or CPU374 - Attaching Ground Wire.................................................... 2-16

Figure 2-15. Power Supply Terminal Boards ............................................................................................. 2-24

Figure 2-16. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap................................................................ 2-24

Figure 3-1. Common Baseplate Features...................................................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3-2. Models IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates ..................... 3-5

Figure 3-3. Model IC693CPU323 (10-slot) Embedded CPU Baseplate ...................................................... 3-5

Figure 3-4. IC693CHS397 5-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate ......................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-5. IC693CHS391 10-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate ....................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3-6. IC693CHS398 5-Slot Expansion Baseplate............................................................................... 3-7

Figure 3-7. IC693CHS392 10-Slot Expansion Baseplate............................................................................. 3-8

Figure 3-8. IC693CHS399 5-Slot Remote Baseplate ................................................................................... 3-9

Figure 3-9. IC693CHS393 10-Slot Remote Baseplate ................................................................................. 3-9

Figure 3-10. I/O Bus Expansion Cables ..................................................................................................... 3-10

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xxiii

Figure 3-11. Rack Number Selection Switch (Shown with Rack 2 Selected)............................................ 3-13

Figure 3-12. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates...................................................................... 3-14

Figure 3-13. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates.................................................. 3-15

Figure 3-14. Model 311 and 313 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements ..................... 3-16

Figure 3-15. Model 323 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements ................................. 3-17

Figure 3-16. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and SpacingRequirements ..................................................................................................................... 3-18

Figure 3-17. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and SpacingRequirements ..................................................................................................................... 3-18

Figure 3-18. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation.................................................... 3-20

Figure 3-19. Dimensions for 19” Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket..................... 3-21

Figure 3-20. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket................................................................. 3-21

Figure 4-1. Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR321 ........................................................... 4-2

Figure 4-2. High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR330 .................................................. 4-4

Figure 4-3. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap.................................................................... 4-6

Figure 4-4. Series 90-30 24/48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR322 ............................................... 4-7

Figure 4-5. Typical Efficiency Curve for 24/48 VDC Power Supply .......................................................... 4-8

Figure 4-6. Series 90-30 48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR328 .................................................. 4-10

Figure 4-7. Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply ................................................. 4-11

Figure 4-8. Series 90-30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply - IC693PWR331 .......................... 4-13

Figure 4-9. 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50°C (122°F) ................................ 4-14

Figure 4-10. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap................................................................ 4-17

Figure 4-11. Interconnection of Power Supplies ........................................................................................ 4-17

Figure 4-12. Timing Diagram for all Series 90-30 Power Supplies .......................................................... 4-18

Figure 4-13. Serial Port Connector ............................................................................................................. 4-19

Figure 4-14. Backup Battery for RAM Memory ........................................................................................ 4-20

Figure 5-1. Models 311 and 313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates......................................................... 5-2

Figure 5-2. IC693CHS397 5-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate ......................................................................... 5-3

Figure 5-3. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply............................................................................ 5-4

Figure 5-4. CPUs 351, 352, and 363 .......................................................................................................... 5-19

Figure 6-1. Backup Battery for RAM Memory ............................................................................................ 6-1

Figure 6-2. Installing the Battery Accessory Kit ........................................................................................ 6-10

Figure 7-1. Example of Series 90-30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module........................................ 7-3

Figure 7-2. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL654) With Dual Connectors ............................. 7-5

Figure 7-3. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL653) With Single Connector ............................ 7-5

Figure 7-4. 50-PIN, 32 Point I/O Module Connection Method.................................................................... 7-6

Figure 7-5. Example of Series 90-30 Analog Current Output Module......................................................... 7-9

Figure 7-6. IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module......................................................................... 7-12

Contents

xxiv Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

Figure 8-1. The IC693CMM301 GCM Module ........................................................................................... 8-2

Figure 8-2. Genius Bus Wiring Schematic ................................................................................................... 8-3

Figure 8-3. Example of Genius Communications Network.......................................................................... 8-3

Figure 8-4. Enhanced Genius Communications Module.............................................................................. 8-4

Figure 8-5. Genius Bus Controller Module .................................................................................................. 8-6

Figure 8-6. Example of FIP I/O System Configuration.............................................................................. 8-10

Figure 8-7. Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller .............................................................................................. 8-11

Figure 8-8. Example of FIP Remote I/O Scanner System Configuration................................................... 8-12

Figure 8-9. FIP Bus Interface Module........................................................................................................ 8-13

Figure 8-10. Motion Mate APM Module ................................................................................................... 8-15

Figure 8-11. Example of Motion Mate APM Servo System ...................................................................... 8-16

Figure 8-12. Motion Mate DSM302 Module ............................................................................................. 8-17

Figure 8-13. Motion Mate DSM314 Module ............................................................................................. 8-20

Figure 8-14. High Speed Counter (HSC) ................................................................................................... 8-23

Figure 8-15. Example of a Series 90-30 PLC in a Fanuc I/O LINK Configuration ................................... 8-24

Figure 8-16. Example of I/O LINK Master System Configuration ............................................................ 8-25

Figure 8-17. I/O Processor Module ............................................................................................................ 8-27

Figure 8-18. Ethernet Interface Module ..................................................................................................... 8-29

Figure 8-19. Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM).......................................................................... 8-31

Figure 8-20. Communications Control Module.......................................................................................... 8-34

Figure 8-21. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (ADC)............................................................. 8-35

Figure 8-22. IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Module (TCM).................................................... 8-37

Figure 8-23. IC693PTM100/101 Components .......................................................................................... 8-41

Figure 8-24. IC693PTM100/101 Component Mounting............................................................................ 8-42

Figure 9-1. AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module................................................. 9-2

Figure 9-2. IC693CBL305 WYE Cable ....................................................................................................... 9-3

Figure 9-3. IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series 90-30................................................. 9-4

Figure 9-4. State Logic Processor Module User Details .............................................................................. 9-6

Figure 9-5. Model CSE311 or CSE313 5-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate .................................................. 9-9

Figure 9-6. Model CSE323 10-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate................................................................... 9-9

Figure 9-7. CPU Models CSE 331 or CSE 340.......................................................................................... 9-10

Figure 9-8. Serial Port Connector............................................................................................................... 9-11

Figure 10-1. Serial Port to Work Station Interface Board Cable Connection ............................................ 10-8

Figure 10-2. Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Serial Cable ....................................................................... 10-9

Figure 10-3. Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter ......................................................... 10-10

Figure 10-4. Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8-Wire Multidrop, Serial Data Configuration..................... 10-11

Figure 10-5. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-XT Serial Cable ............................................ 10-12

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xxv

Figure 10-6. PCM to Workmaster Computer or PC-XT Personal Computer........................................... 10-13

Figure 10-7. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-AT Serial Cable ............................................ 10-14

Figure 10-8. PCM to PC-AT Personal Computer..................................................................................... 10-15

Figure 10-9. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster II or PS/2 Serial Cable............................................. 10-16

Figure 10-10. PCM to Workmaster II Computer or PS/2 Computer........................................................ 10-17

Figure 10-11. Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable IC690CBL714A.............................................. 10-19

Figure 10-12. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System............................................ 10-20

Figure 10-13. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable ......................... 10-20

Figure 10-14. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System.................................. 10-21

Figure 10-15. Detail of I/O Bus Expansion Cables .................................................................................. 10-22

Figure 10-16. How to use Split-Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield................................... 10-26

Figure 10-17. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables ................... 10-28

Figure 10-18. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity10-28

Figure 10-19. Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram .................. 10-29

Figure 10-20. Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram .... 10-30

Figure 10-21. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates................................................................. 10-31

Figure 10-22. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates.............................................. 10-32

Figure 10-23. Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 and Custom-Built Cables.................................... 10-34

Figure 10-24. Hand-Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90-30 PLC................................... 10-34

Figure 10-25. Wye Cable.......................................................................................................................... 10-35

Figure 10-26. Wye Cable Connections..................................................................................................... 10-36

Figure 10-27. 32 Point I/O Module to Weidmuller Terminal Block Assembly ....................................... 10-39

Figure 10-28. IC693CBL310 Cable ......................................................................................................... 10-42

Figure 10-29. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC......................................................... 10-44

Figure 10-30. I/O Connector Cable Specifications................................................................................... 10-45

Figure 10-31. IC693CBL315 Cable ......................................................................................................... 10-49


Figure 10-33. IC693CBL316A Serial Cable Illustration and Connector Pinouts .................................... 10-53

Figure 10-34. Connector Orientation on I/O Faceplate ............................................................................ 10-55

Figure 10-35. I/O Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable ............................................................................. 10-55


Figure 10-37. C693CBL327/328 Cables .................................................................................................. 10-57

Figure 10-38. Dimension for Depth of Connector for IC693CBL327/328 .............................................. 10-58

Figure 10-39. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables................. 10-61

Figure 10-40. IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables .................................................................... 10-62

Figure 10-41. Dimension for Depth of Connector.................................................................................... 10-63

Figure 10-42. Figure IC693CBL340/341 PTM Interface Cables ............................................................ 10-65

Contents

xxvi Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

Figure 10-43. PTM Component Mounting and Cable Connection........................................................... 10-65

Figure 11-1. WSI Board for the Workmaster II Computer......................................................................... 11-2

Figure 11-2. Location of WSI in a Series II 90-30 PLC System ................................................................ 11-2

Figure 11-3. Example of IC690ACC900 Converter Connection................................................................ 11-3

Figure 11-4. IC690ACC901 Series 90 SNP Port to RS-232 Adapter......................................................... 11-4

Figure 11-5. Hand-Held Programmer for the Series 90-30 PLC................................................................ 11-5

Figure 11-6. Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90-30 I/O..................................................................... 11-7

Figure 12-1. Hard-Wired MCR Circuit Example ....................................................................................... 12-9

Figure 12-2. Allowable Location of Modules .......................................................................................... 12-19

Figure 12-3. Series 90-30 Example Layout .............................................................................................. 12-20

Figure 12-4. Recommended PLC Mounting Orientation ......................................................................... 12-21

Figure 12-5. Derated PLC Mounting Orientation..................................................................................... 12-21

Figure 13-1. Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections ......................................... 13-1

Figure A-1. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Connector Configuration ................................................. A-3

Figure A-2. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Connector Configuration...................................................... A-4

Figure A-3. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port ........................................................................................................... A-5

Figure A-4. IBM-AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs ............................................... A-9

Figure A-5. Workmaster or IBM-XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs ...................... A-9

Figure A-6. Typical RS-422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking.............................................. A-10

Figure A-7. Workmaster II/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection............................................................ A-11

Figure A-8. Workmaster/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection ............................................................... A-12

Figure A-9. IBM-AT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection..................................................................... A-12

Figure A-10. IBM-XT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection................................................................... A-13

Figure B-1. Front and Rear View of Converter ........................................................................................... B-2

Figure B-2. Typical Configuration with Series 90-70 PLC......................................................................... B-3

Figure B-3. Typical Configuration with Series 90-30 PLC......................................................................... B-4

Figure B-4. RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram............................................................. B-6

Figure B-5. Location of Jumpers for User Options ..................................................................................... B-7

Figure C-1. Isolated/Repeater Converter ..................................................................................................... C-2

Figure C-2. RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram ................................................. C-3

Figure C-3. Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection ........................................ C-5

Figure C-4. Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter .................................... C-6

Figure C-5. Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter................................. C-6

Figure C-6. Cable A; RS-232 CMM To Converter ..................................................................................... C-8

Figure C-7. Cable B; RS-422 CMM To Converter ..................................................................................... C-8

Figure C-8. Cable C; RS422 Twisted Pair................................................................................................... C-9

Figure C-9. Cable D; RS-422 Twisted Pair ............................................................................................... C-10

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xxvii

Figure C-10. Cable E; RS-232 Converter to CMM................................................................................... C-10

Figure D-1. Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Miniconverter ................................................................................. D-1

Figure D-2. Miniconverter to PC-AT .......................................................................................................... D-3

Figure D-3. Miniconverter to Workmaster II, PC-XT, PS/2 ....................................................................... D-3

Figure D-4. Miniconverter to 9-Pin Workmaster or PC-XT Computer....................................................... D-4

Figure E-2. IC690ACC903 Block Diagram .................................................................................................E-3

Figure E-3. RS-485 Port Isolator in PLC Network.......................................................................................E-4

Figure E-4. Mounting Port Isolator to Panel ................................................................................................E-4

Figure E-5. Multidrop Configuration Connecting Devices with 15-Pin Ports and 25-Pin Ports..................E-5

Figure E-6. Cable for Supplying External Power Through the Port Isolator................................................E-6

Figure H-1. Typical TBQC Terminal Block................................................................................................ H-1

Figure H-2. TBQC Faceplate....................................................................................................................... H-5

Figure H-3. IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block.................................................................................... H-6




Figure H-7. IC693ACC333 TBQC Terminal Block.................................................................................. H-10

Figure H-8. IC693MDL654 32-Point Module........................................................................................... H-11

Figure H-9. IC693ACC337 TBQC Terminal Block.................................................................................. H-13

Figure I-1. Series 90-30 Multidrop Example.................................................................................................I-1

Figure I-2. Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram ...............................................................................................I-3

Figure I-3. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable...................................I-4

Figure I-4. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System............................................I-4

Figure I-5. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System .....................................................I-5

Figure J-1. IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver ...................................................................... J-1

Figure J-2. IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver ........................................................................ J-2

Figure L-1. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Connections to Series 90-30 Power Supply ...............................L-2

Figure L-2. Equivalent Circuit for 44A720084-001 Line Filter ...................................................................L-2

Figure L-3. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions ..................................................................L-3

Contents

xxviii Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

Table 3-1. Rack Number Selection Switch Settings................................................................................... 3-13

Table 3-2. Series 90-30 Baseplate Comparison.......................................................................................... 3-22

Table 4-1. Power Supply Comparison.......................................................................................................... 4-1

Table 4-2. IC693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities ................................................................................... 4-2

Table 4-3. Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply.................................. 4-3

Table 4-4. IC693PWR330 Power Supply Capacities .................................................................................. 4-4

Table 4-5. Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply......................... 4-5

Table 4-6. IC693PWR322 Power Supply Capacities ................................................................................... 4-7

Table 4-7. Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply........................................................................ 4-8

Table 4-8. IC693PWR328 Power Supply Capacities ................................................................................. 4-10

Table 4-9. Specifications for IC693PWR328 Power Supply...................................................................... 4-11

Table 4-10. IC693PWR331 Power Supply Capacities ............................................................................... 4-13

Table 4-11. Specifications for IC693PWR331 Power Supply.................................................................... 4-14

Table 5-1. CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations................................................................................. 5-6

Table 5-2. EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers .................................................................................. 5-9

Table 5-3. Series 90-30 CPU Capacities .................................................................................................... 5-10

Table 5-4. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311-341................................................. 5-11

Table 5-5. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 350 through 374.................................... 5-12

Table 5-6. Port 1 (RS-232) ......................................................................................................................... 5-22

Table 5-7. Port 2 (RS-485) ......................................................................................................................... 5-22

Table 7-1. IC693DVM300 Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-13

Table 7-2. IC693DVM300 Connections..................................................................................................... 7-14

Table 7-3. Series 90-30 Discrete I/O Modules ........................................................................................... 7-15

Table 7-4. Series 90-30 Analog I/O Modules............................................................................................. 7-16

Table 8-1. Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 ..................................................................................... 8-39

Table 9-1. System Specifications for Series 90-30 State Logic CPUs ....................................................... 9-12

Table 10-1. Series 90-30 Cable Cross-Reference....................................................................................... 10-1

Table 10-2. Expansion Port Pin Assignments .......................................................................................... 10-25

Table 10-3. Wire List for 32 Point I/O Cables ......................................................................................... 10-40

Table 10-4. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors ........................................................................................... 10-43

Table 10-5. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits ........................................................................ 10-46

Table 10-6. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319............................................ 10-47

Table 10-7. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320............................................ 10-48

Table 10-8. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits ........................................................................ 10-50

Table 10-9. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors ........................................................................................... 10-51

Table 10-10. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits ...................................................................... 10-59

Contents

GFK-0356Q Contents xxix

Table 10-11. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors ......................................................................................... 10-60

Table 10-12. TBQC Cable Cross-Reference Table .................................................................................. 10-63

Table 11-1. Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table............................................................ 11-7

Table 12-1. Power Supply Feature Comparison Table............................................................................... 12-6

Table 12-2. Maximum Number of Modules Per System.......................................................................... 12-11

Table 12-3. Load Requirements (in milliamps)........................................................................................ 12-12

Table 13-1. Fuse List for Series 90-30 Modules ........................................................................................ 13-6

Table 13-2. Spare/Replacement Parts......................................................................................................... 13-7

Table A-1. Connector/Cable Specifications ................................................................................................ A-2

Table A-2. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Pin-out ............................................................................... A-4

Table A-3. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Pins-out.................................................................................. A-5

Table A-4. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port Pins-out .............................................................................................. A-6

Table B-1. RS-232 Interface for Converter ................................................................................................. B-4

Table B-2. RS-422/RS-485 Interface for Converter.................................................................................... B-5

Table B-3. Jumper Configuration for RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter.............................................. B-8

Table B-4. Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter............................................................................. B-9

Table C-1. Isolated Repeater/Converter Pin Assignments .......................................................................... C-4

Table D-1. Miniconverter RS-232 Port ....................................................................................................... D-2

Table D-2. Miniconverter RS-422 Port ....................................................................................................... D-2

Table D-3. Miniconverter Specifications .................................................................................................... D-4

RS-485 Connectors........................................................................................................................................E-2

Table H-1. TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table .................................................................................... H-2

Table I-1. Connector and Cable Specifications .............................................................................................I-2

Table K-1. Standard ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) Codes..................... K-1

Table K-2. AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion ..................................................................................... K-2

Table K-3. Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion.............................................................................................. K-3

Table K-4. General Conversions ................................................................................................................. K-4

Table K-5. Length Equivalents.................................................................................................................... K-5

Table K-6. Area Equivalents ....................................................................................................................... K-5

Table K-7. Volume Equivalents I ................................................................................................................ K-6

Table K-8. Volume Equivalents II............................................................................................................... K-6

GFK-0356Q 1-1

Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC

The Series 90 -30 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a member of the GE Fanuc Series 90

PLC family.

The Basic Parts of a Series 90-30 PLC

The Series 90-30 PLC is very versatile because (1) it is programmable, and (2) it is assembled from

a wide variety of modular, plug-together components. Therefore, by choosing the correct

components and developing an appropriate program, the PLC can be used for an almost unlimited

variety of applications. Although there are many choices of individual hardware components to use

in a system, there are just a few basic categories. Each of these component categories is covered in

detail in a separate chapter in this manual. They are introduced in this chapter so you can see how

they fit together:

Baseplates

Power Supplies

CPUs

I/O Modules

Option Modules

Cables

Baseplates

The baseplates are the foundation of the PLC system because most other components mount on

them. As a basic minimum, every system has at least one baseplate, which usually contains the

CPU (in which case, it is referred to as “the CPU Baseplate”). Many systems require more modules

than can be mounted on one baseplate, so there are also Expansion and Remote baseplates that

connect together. The three categories of baseplates, CPU, Expansion, and Remote, are available in

two sizes, 5-slot and 10-slot, named according to the number of modules they can hold.

Power Supply Modules

Every baseplate must have its own power supply. The power supply always mounts in a

baseplate’s left-most slot. There are several power supply models available to meet a variety of

requirements.

1Chapter

1-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

1

CPUs

The CPU is the manager of the PLC. Every PLC system must have one. A CPU uses the

instructions in its firmware and application program to direct the PLC’s operation and to monitor

the system to make sure there are no basic faults. Some Series 90-30 CPUs are built into

baseplates, but most are contained in plug-in modules. In some cases, the CPU resides in a

Personal Computer using a Personal Computer Interface Card that interfaces to Series 90-30 Input,

Output, and Option modules.

Input and Output (I/O) Modules

These modules enable the PLC to interface with input and output field devices such as switches,

sensors, relays, and solenoids. They are available in both discrete and analog types.

Option Modules

These modules extend the capability of the PLC beyond the basic functions. These provide such

things as communications and networking options, motion control, high speed counting,

temperature control, interfacing to operator interface stations, etc.

Cables

These connect the PLC components together or to other systems. Many standard prefabricated

cables are available from GE Fanuc. They are primarily used to:

Interconnect baseplates

Connect a programmer to the CPU or to an option module

Connect option modules to field devices or other systems.

Assembling a Basic Series 90-30 PLC System

Let’s assemble, on paper, a basic system using the following components:

Baseplate

Power Supply module

CPU module

Some I/O modules

We’ll start with the baseplate. To keep it simple, we’ll use a 5-slot size. Note that a 5-slot

baseplate actually has six slots, but the power supply slot is not numbered. Note also, that this

baseplate has a CPU slot, which is slot number 1, and it has an expansion connector on the right

end, which is used for connecting to another baseplate if the system has more than one baseplate.

GFK-0356Q Chapter 1 Overview of the Series 90-30 PLC 1-3

1

USER PROGRAM

1 HOUR.LONGER THAN

REMOVED FORSUPPLY IS

LOST IF POWERVALUES MAY BEAND REGISTER

CPU/1 2 3 4 5

EXPANSI

ON

Memory Backup

Warning Label

CPU Slot (Slot 1)

I/O BusExpansion

ConnectorPower

Supply

CAUTION

PROGRAMMABLECONTROLLER

BASE 5-SLOT

Figure 1-1. Five-Slot CPU Baseplate

Next, we’ll add a power supply module. It mounts in the unnumbered slot on the left end of the

baseplate. This slot has a unique connector that will only fit a power supply module.

100-240 VAC

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

+

PWR

OK

RUN

BATT

GE FanucSeries 90-30

POWER SUPPLY

50/60 HZ 100VA

125VDC, 50W

INPUT

24 VDC

OUTPUT0.8A MAX.

HIGH CAPACITY

BATTERY

Figure 1-2. Power Supply Module


1

Then add a CPU module. A CPU module can only mount in baseplate slot 1, next to the power

supply. Slot 1 has a unique connector that will only fit CPU or special Option modules.

CPU331

Figure 1-3. CPU Module

To finish, we will add some I/O modules to baseplate slots 2 through 5.

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

Figure 1-4. I/O Module


1

+

GE Fanuc

Series 90-30

PWR

OK

RUN

BATT

HIgh CapacityPower Supply

Power Supply

CPU

I/O Modules

CPU/1POWER

a44564A

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

BASE 5-SLOT


USER PROGRAM

CAUTION

SUPPLY

AND REGISTER

VALUES MAY BE

LOST IF POWER

SUPPLY IS

REMOVED FOR

LONGER THAN

1 HOUR

CP

U

NON-CPU SLOTS

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

CPU331

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

Figure 1-5. Assembling the System


1

When assembled, the system will look like this:

0.8A MAX.OUTPUT

HIGH CAPACITY

125 VDC, 50W

+

100-240 VAC

50/60HZ 100VA

24 VDC

INPUT

POWER SUPPLYPROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

SERIES 90-30

GE Fanuc

~

PWR

OK

RUN

BATT

B

A

TT

E

R

Y

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CPU

Figure 1-6. A Basic System

An assembly of baseplate and modules such as this one is called a “Rack.”

What else would be needed to make this basic system functional?

To make this basic system functional, you would need:

Mounting. Safe, secure mounting for the PLC in a protective enclosure.

Wiring. This includes properly installed incoming power to the power supply, as well as

wiring from the I/O modules to field devices such as switches, sensors, solenoids, relays, etc.

Program. An application program for the PLC to run. This is developed with GE Fanuc PLC

programming software.

What if the application requires more than five modules?

You could use a 10-slot baseplate, shown in the next picture:

HIGH CAPACITY

125 VDC, 50W

+

100-240 VAC

50/60HZ 100VA

24 VDC

OUTPUT

0.8A MAX.

INPUT

POWER SUPPLYPROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

SERIES 90-30

GE Fanuc

~

B

A

T

T

E

R

Y

PWR

OK

RUN

BATT

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CPU

I/O Bus Expansion Connector

Figure 1-7. Ten-Slot Rack


1

What if the application requires more than ten modules?

You can add one or more Expansion or Remote racks to this system. Some CPUs can support up to

seven additional racks. If you added seven additional 10-slot racks, you could have 70 more

modules.

Racks are interconnected in a “daisy-chain” cabling arrangement. This interconnection system is

called the “I/O Expansion Bus.” The connections are made from one baseplate’s I/O Bus

Expansion Connector (shown in the figure above) to the next one’s. The I/O Bus Expansion

Cables, shown below, have a double connector on one end to facilitate these connections.

Male Connector Male Connector

Female Connector

Figure 1-8. I/O Bus Expansion Cable


1

The next figure shows a system that has a CPU baseplate, one Expansion rack and three Remote

racks. Notice that the last rack, the one at the end of the I/O Expansion Bus, must be terminated.

A convenient way of terminating the bus is with an IC693ACC307 I/O Bus Terminator Plug, as

shown.

CPU

CPU BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATE

EXPANSIONBASEPLATE

MAXIMUM DISTANCE

FROM CPU = 50 FEET

(15 METERS)

CPUBASEPLATE

REMOTEBASEPLATE

I/O BUSTERMINATOR

PLUGIC693ACC307

REMOTE BASEPLATE

REMOTEBASEPLATE

MAXIMUM DISTANCEFROM CPU = 700 FEET

(213 METERS)

REMOTEBASEPLATE

Figure 1-9. Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates

What is the Difference Between Expansion and Remote baseplates?

The main factor to consider is distance. How far will the baseplate be from the CPU baseplate? If

the cabling distance from the CPU baseplate is 50 feet (15 meters) or less, use an Expansion

baseplate. The Expansion baseplate is preferable because of its higher communication speed with

the CPU baseplate. However, if a baseplate must be located where it requires a cabling distance

from the CPU rack in excess of 50 feet, an Expansion baseplate will not work - a Remote baseplate

must be used. The limit for a Remote baseplate is a cabling distance of 700 feet (213 meters) from

the CPU baseplate to the farthest Remote baseplate.


1

What if I need to cover more than 700 feet (213 meters)?

You can cover much greater distances by using Series 90-30 communications option modules. For

example, Genius Bus Controller Modules (GBC) can communicate at distances up to 7,500 feet

(2,286 meters) over a shielded twisted-pair cable, as shown in Example 1 below. Or, serial

communications with Communications Coprocessor Modules (CMM) using the RS-485 standard

can cover up to 4,000 feet (1,219 meters), as shown in Example 2 below. And virtually unlimited

communication distances can be attained with modems and telephone lines or radio transmitters.

Also, there are numerous networking options available such as Ethernet or WorldFIP.

CPU GBC

CPU GBC

Shielded, Twisted-Pair Cable, 7,500Feet (2,286 Meters) Maximum Length

Series 90-30 PLC

CPU CMM

CPU CMM

Serial Cable, 4,000 Feet (1,219Meters) Maximum Length

Series 90-30 PLC

Series 90-30 PLC

Series 90-30 PLC

Example 1 - GBC Example 2 - CMM

Figure 1-10. Connecting PLCs Using GBC or CMM Modules

GFK-0356Q 2-1

Installation

This chapter discusses installation details only. Other information about the products such as

hardware descriptions and specifications, is covered in the applicable chapters.

Important NoteSeries 90-30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure.

The installation instructions described in this chapter apply to PLC installations

that do not require special procedures for noisy or hazardous environments. For

installations that must conform to more stringent requirements (such as CE

Mark), see GFK-1179, Installation Requirements for Conformance to

Standards. Also see GFK-0867, GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals,

Standards, General Specifications.

Receiving your Products - Visual Inspection

When you receive your Series 90-30 PLC system, carefully inspect all shipping containers for

damage that may have occurred during shipping. If any part of the system is damaged, notify the

carrier immediately. The damaged shipping container should be saved as evidence for inspection

by the carrier.

As the consignee, it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage incurred

during shipment. However, GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you if such action is necessary.

Pre-installation Check

After unpacking Series 90-30 PLC racks, cables, modules, etc., record all serial numbers. Serial

numbers are printed on the module packaging. Serial numbers are required to make a claim during

the warranty period of the equipment. All software product registration cards should be completed

and returned to GE Fanuc. See “Module Features” in this chapter for location of module serial

numbers. See “Common Baseplate Features” in chapter 3 for location of baseplate serial numbers.

You should verify that all components of the system have been received and that they agree with

your order. If the parts received do not agree with your order, call Programmable Control

Customer Service at 1-800-432-7521. A Customer Service representative will provide further

instructions.

If you require assistance with your installation, GE Fanuc’s Technical Support department offers

expert help. Call the support number for your area from the list in Chapter 13, “Maintenance and

Troubleshooting.” The GE Fanuc web site support address is www.gefanuc.com/support/plc.

Warranty Claims

Record the serial number of the defective item and contact your distributor for instructions.

2Chapter


2

Working with Series 90-30 Modules

Module Features

IC693CPUxxxCPU MODULE

25 MHZ

LISTEDxxxxxxx

123456789

123456789

13 81

2

3

4

5

6

2

6 7 8 9

10

11

127

14

Figure 2-1. Features of Series 90-30 Module

1. Pivot hook

2. Circuit board holding tabs (two on each side of module)

3. Catalog number and description section of label (Includes MAC address for CPU374.)

4. Certification (UL, CE, etc.) section of label

5. Module connector - plugs into baseplate backplane connector

6. Release lever - spring loaded

7. Ventilation openings in module case (top and bottom)

8. Front cover holding tabs (two on each side of module)

9. Front cover (shown) or terminal board (for I/O modules).

10. Front cover faceplate or hinged cover for terminal board.

11. Lens cap (some modules do not have).

12. Lens cap holding tabs (one on each side of module)

13. Module label

14. Serial Number - used to determine module warranty status. (On some modules, the Serial

Number may be on a small tag on the back of the module.)

GFK-0356Q Chapter 2 Installation 2-3

2

Installing a Module

Warning

Do not insert or remove modules with power applied. This could cause the

PLC to stop or malfunction. Injury to personnel and damage to the module

or baseplate may result. Also, attempts to force a module into an improper

slot type will result in damage to the module and/or the baseplate. Modules

will mount in the correct slot type easily, with a minimum of force.

Use the following instructions as a guide when inserting a module into a baseplate slot.

Check that module catalog number matches slot configuration. Each slot is, or will be,

assigned a particular module type during configuration. A Power Supply module must be

installed in the left end unnumbered slot only, and a CPU module and some special Option

modules can only be installed in Slot 1 of a CPU baseplate. I/O Modules and most Option

modules install in slots numbered 2 and higher.

Grasp the module firmly with terminal board toward you and with rear pivot hook facing

away from you.

Align the module with the desired baseplate slot and connector. Tilt the module upwards so

that top rear pivot hook of the module engages the baseplate’s top module retainer.

Swing the module downward until the module’s connector engages the baseplate’s backplane

connector, and the release lever on the bottom of the module snaps into place in the

baseplate’s bottom module retainer.

Visually inspect the module to be sure that it properly seated.

a43055A

PIVOT HOOK

RELEASE LEVER

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

BOTTOM RETAINER

Figure 2-2. Installing a Module


2

Removing a Module

Warning

Do not insert or remove modules with power applied. This could cause the

PLC to stop or malfunction. Injury to personnel and damage to the module

or baseplate may result. Also potentially dangerous voltages from user

devices may be present on a module’s screw terminals even though power to

the rack is turned off. Care must be taken any time that you are handling

the module’s removable terminal board or any wires connected to it.

If the module has wiring, remove the module’s terminal board (NOTE: You do not have to

unwire the terminal board) or cables. The procedure for removing a terminal board is

described later in this section.

Locate the release lever at the bottom of the module and firmly press it up, towards the

module.

While holding the module firmly at its top and fully depressing release lever, swing (pivot) the

module upward (release lever must be free of its retaining slot).

Disengage pivot hook at the top rear of the module by moving the module up and away from

the baseplate.

a43056

PRESSRELEASE LEVER

PIVOT HOOK

Figure 2-3. Removing a Module

Note

Modules in expansion or remote baseplates can be added, removed, or replacedwhile the PLC is in RUN mode if power is first removed from the expansion orremote baseplate. I/O data to/from this baseplate will not be updated whilepower is removed.


2

Installing a Module’s Terminal Board

Note: Modules IC693MDL730F (and later) and IC693MDL731F (and later) have special terminal

boards that are equipped with holding screws. For Installation and Removal instructions, please

see the section “Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws” later in this

chapter.

To install a terminal board (circled numbers refer to drawing below):

Hook the pivot hook ➀ , located on the bottom of the terminal board, to the lower slot on the

module.

Push the terminal board toward the module ➁ until it snaps into place.

Open the terminal board cover ➂ and ensure that the latch on the module is securely holding

the terminal board in place.

Caution

Compare the module catalog number on the label on the back of the hinged

door (see Figure 2-6) and the label on the side of the module (see below) to

ensure that they match. If a wired terminal board is installed on the wrong

module type, damage to the module may occur when the system is powered up.

a43062

2

3

1

REFER TO TEXT FOR

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

ModuleLabel

Figure 2-4. Installing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board


2

Removing a Module’s Terminal Board

To remove a terminal board:

Open the plastic terminal board cover.

Push up on the jacking lever to release the terminal block.

JACKINGLEVER

Grasp pull-tab and pull it towards you until contacts have separated from module

housing and bottom pivot hook has disengaged.

PULLa43715

TAB

Figure 2-5. Removing a Module’s Terminal Board


2

I/O Module Terminal Board Posts

The terminal board has three posts on the left side. The top and bottom posts hold the terminal

board cover in place. The middle post keeps the terminal board wiring in place. If you do not

require it to hold the wiring in place, the middle post can be easily snapped off. (Be careful that you

do not inadvertently snap it off if you need it to keep your wiring in place.)

Installing and Removing Terminal Boards with Holding Screws

Discrete output modules IC693MDL730F (and later) and IC693MDL731F (and later) have a

special terminal board that is equipped with holding screws, shown in the figure below. These

screws prevent the terminal board-to-module connections from deteriorating in applications where

the PLC is subjected to severe vibration .

A1

A2

A4

A3

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

2

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

4

A2

A5

IC693MDL730F

A1

A6

Removeable Terminal Board

Hinged Cover

Holding Screw

Holding Screw

A3

A4

A7

A8

+

-

Module Catalog Number

Figure 2-6. Terminal Board with Holding Screws

Removing: To Remove these terminal boards, first loosen the two holding screws on the front

of the terminal board, then follow the standard removal instructions in the section “Removing

an I/O Module’s Terminal Board.” The holding screws are held captive in the terminal board

and do not have to be completely removed.

Installing: To install these terminal boards, follow the standard installation instructions in the

section “Installing an I/O Module’s Terminal Board,” then tighten the two holding screws to 8

to 10 inch-pounds (1 Newton-meter) of torque.


2

Baseplate Mounting

Warning

Be sure to follow baseplate grounding instructions in this chapter. Failure to

properly ground the PLC can result in improper operation, damage to

equipment, and injury to personnel.

Mounting a Baseplate to a Panel

Use four good-quality 8-32 x 1/2 (4 x 12mm) machine screws, lock washers and flat washers.

Install the screws in four tapped holes. The “Baseplates” chapter has the applicable

dimensions and mounting clearances. Alternately, 10-slot baseplates can be mounted in

standard 19-inch racks by using the appropriate adapter. This is also discussed in the

“Baseplates” chapter.

A vertical mounting orientation is preferred for maximum heat dissipation. Other mounting

orientations will require derating the Power Supply current capabilities. See Chapter 12,

“System Design,” for details.

All baseplates must be grounded. The “Baseplate Safety Grounding” section of this chapter

has details.

The Rack Number Selection switch must be set on each Expansion or Remote baseplate. A

CPU baseplate does not require this switch. Rack numbers should be assigned by the system

designer. Failure to set the Rack Number Selection switches properly will result in system

malfunction. See the “Baseplates” chapter for details on setting these switches.

Mounting a Baseplate to a 19" Rack

Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10-slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19 inch

rack. Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets.

IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to mount a baseplate to the front face

of a 19” rack. Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the

adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the plastic baseplate

cover. NOTE: Although Figure 2-7 shows the plastic baseplate cover removed, this is for

illustration purposes only. It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket. With

the bracket in place, insert and tighten the two screws (included with the bracket) through the

back of the baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket.


2

IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to recess mount a baseplate inside

a 19” rack. A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using four 8-32

(4mm) screws, nuts, lock washers, and flat washers. The Adapter Bracket bolts through its

four slotted holes to the face of the 19” rack using applicable hardware (lock washers

recommended).

RIGHT SIDE OFBASEPLATE

Insert two screws (1 at top; 1 at bottom)from back of base unit through base unitand bracket. Tighten screws to securebracket to base unit.

Note: Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes. It is not necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket.

Figure 2-7. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation

Dimensions for rack mounting a 10-slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter

Bracket are shown in the following figure.

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES)

18.89(480)

18.47(469)

Figure 2-8. Dimensions for 19-inch Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket


2

0.160 (4.06) dia. x 4

0.842 (21.4)

0.346 (8.8)Inside

1.630 (41.4)

16.850 (428)

18.122 (460.3)

3.540 (90) 4.000 (101.6)

0.280 (7.1)

1.368 (34.7)

0.439 (11.2)


Figure 2-9. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket


2

Grounding Procedures

System Grounding Procedures

Warning

In addition to the following grounding information, we strongly urge that

you follow all applicable codes that apply to your area. For example, in the

United States, most areas have adopted the National Electrical Code

standard and specify that all wiring conform to its requirements. In other

countries, different codes will apply. For maximum safety to personnel and

property you must follow these codes. Failure to do so can mean injury or

death to personnel, damage to property, or both.

All components of a programmable logic control system and the devices it is controlling must be

properly grounded. This is particularly important for the following reasons.

A low resistance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes exposure to shock in the

event of short circuits or equipment malfunction.

The Series 90-30 PLC system requires proper grounding for correct operation.

Ground Conductors

Ground conductors should be connected in a tree fashion with branches routed to a central

earth ground point, shown in the figure below. This ensures that no ground conductor carries

current from any other branch. This method is shown in the following figure.

Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible. Braided straps or

ground cables (typically green insulation with a yellow tracer - AWG #12 (3.3 mm2) or larger)

can be used to minimize resistance. Conductors must always be large enough to carry the

maximum short circuit current of the path being considered.

CENTRALGROUND POINT

MOTOR DRIVESAND OTHERELECTRICAL

CONTROLEQUIPMENT

MACHINERYSERIES 90-30PLC CABINET

PROGRAMMINGDEVICE

SIGNAL AND POWERCONNECTIONS

ARE NOT SHOWN

NOTE

EARTHGROUND

RACK

RACK

Figure 2-10. Recommended System Grounding


2

Series 90-30 PLC Equipment Grounding

Equipment grounding recommendations and procedures are listed below. These grounding

procedures must be properly followed for safe, proper operation of your Series 90-30 PLC system.

Baseplate Safety Grounding

The following recommendations are offered, but applicable safety codes for your area or equipment

type should also be consulted. The baseplate’s metal back must be grounded using a separate

conductor; the baseplate mounting screws are not considered to an acceptable ground connection

by themselves. Use a minimum AWG #12 (3.3 mm2) wire with a ring terminal and star lock

washer under the head of one of the baseplate’s two lower mounting holes. These two holes have

openings to the side to allow connecting a wire and ring terminal under the head of a mounting

screw. Connect the other end of this ground wire to a tapped hole in the panel that the baseplate is

mounted to, using a machine screw, star lock washer, and flat washer. Alternately, if your panel

has a ground stud, it is recommended you use a nut and star lock washer for each wire on the

ground stud to ensure adequate grounding. Where connections are made to a painted panel, the

paint should be removed so clean, bare metal is exposed at the connection point. Terminals and

hardware used should be rated to work with the aluminum baseplate material.

POWER

EXPA

N

S

I

ON

BASE 5-SLOT

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

USER PROGRAM

CAUTION

SUPPLY

AND REGISTER

VALUES MAY BE

LOST IF POWERSUPPLY IS

REMOVED FOR

LONGER THAN1 HOUR

Paint RemovedFrom Panel Here

Screw, Star Lock washer,

Flat Washer, Ring Terminal,

installed in tapped hole.

AWG #12 orLarger Wire

Alternate location

for Ground connection

CPU/1

NON-CPU SLOTS

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

Figure 2-11. Baseplate Grounding

Warning

All baseplates must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard.

Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury.


2

All baseplates grouped together in a Series 90-30 PLC system must have a common ground

connection. This is especially important for baseplates that are not mounted in the same control

cabinet.

Grounding 19" Rack-Mounted Baseplates

There are two Adapter Brackets used for mounting a 10-slot Series 90-30 baseplate to a 19” Rack.

Regardless of which of the two Adapter Brackets is used, the 19” Rack should be grounded as per

the instructions in “System Grounding Procedures,” including Figure 2-10. (For details on the

Adapter Brackets, see the “Mounting a Baseplate to a 19” Rack” section earlier in this chapter.)

Nineteen-Inch Rack-mounted PLC baseplates should be grounded according to the guidelines in

the “Baseplate Safety Grounding” section, using a separate ground wire from the PLC baseplate as

shown in the previous figure (Fig. 2-11).

If using the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC313), the ground wire can be

installed as shown in Figure 2-11 with the ground attached to the Recessed Mount Adapter

Bracket. An additional ground wire connecting the Adapter Bracket to a solid chassis ground

on the 19” Rack should be installed. Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal

scheme as shown in Figure 2-11.

If using the Surface Mount Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC308), the ground wire should be

run from the baseplate as shown in Figure 2-11, to a solid chassis ground on the 19” Rack.

Use the same or equivalent hardware and paint removal scheme as shown in Figure 2-11.

Programmer Grounding

For proper operation, the computer (programmer) running the PLC software must have a ground

connection in common with the CPU baseplate. Normally, this common ground connection is

provided by ensuring that the programmer’s power cord is connected to the same power source

(with the same ground reference point) as the baseplate. If it is not possible to ensure this common

ground scheme, use a port isolator (IC690ACC903) between the programmer and PLC serial

connection. If the programmer ground is at a different potential than the PLC ground, a shock

hazard could exist. Also, damage to the ports or converter (if used) could occur when the

programmer serial cable is connected between the two.

Warning

Failure to follow programmer grounding recommendations could result in

personal injury, equipment damage, or both.


2

Module Shield Grounding

In general, the aluminum PLC baseplate is used for module shield grounding. On some Series

90-30 modules, shield connections to the user terminal connector on the module are routed to the

baseplate through the module’s backplane connector. Other modules, such as CPUs 351, 352, 363,

364, and 374 require a separate shield ground. These are discussed in the next several sections.

Shield Grounding Information for CPUs with External Port Connections

CPUs with external port connections, the 351, 352, 363, 364, and 374 must have a separate shield

ground connection to provide shielding for these ports. Because the design of the ground

connection for the CPU351 and 352 is different from that of the CPU363, 364, and 374, each

grounding method is discussed in a separate section.

CPU351 and 352 Shield Grounding

The CPU 351 or 352 module must be connected to frame ground at the slot where it is installed.

Two methods are provided for making this ground connection. Each CPU comes with an EMC

Grounding Kit (44A737591-G01) that contains a ground wire, grounding bracket, and screws.

1. The connection from the CPU to frame ground can be made using the ground wire (part

number 44A735970-001R01) that comes with the module in the EMC Grounding Kit. This

wire has a stab-on connector on one end for connection to a mating terminal on the bottom of

the CPU, and a ring terminal on the other end for connection to a grounded enclosure. Where

the ring terminal contacts a painted enclosure panel, either a star lock washer can be installed

between the terminal and the panel to cut through the paint, or the paint can be scraped away

down to clean, bare metal to ensure a good contact. Note: The star lock washer method is

suitable for a shield ground, but not suitable for a safety ground.

MOUNT ONGROUNDEDENCLOSURE

USE 1 #6MACHINE SCREWSTAB-ON

CONNECTOR

44A735970-001R01

REMOVE PAINT UNDERRING TERMINAL OR INSTALLSTAR LOCK WASHER BETWEENTERMINAL AND PANEL

CPU351 or 352

BOTTOM OFCPU MODULE

#6 TAPPED HOLE

Figure 2-12. CPU 351 or 352 - Attaching Shield Ground Wire


2

2. The second method, which can be used for systems in noisy environments consists of installing

the green ground wire and the optional grounding bracket (part number 44C715646-001R01).

This bracket attaches to the CPU using two #4 thread-rolling screws (part number

N666P9004B6) and to the grounded enclosure using two #6 thread-rolling screws (part number

N666P13006B6). Two holes must be drilled in the enclosure for mounting this bracket. Also,

if the bracket will be attached to a painted surface, the paint should be removed down to bare

metal under the bracket to ensure good contact between the bracket and the surface. See the

next figure.


USE 2 #6THREAD ROLLING SCREWS

(N666P13006B6

USE 2 #4THREAD ROLLING SCREWS

(N666P9004B6)

44C715646-001R01

CPU351 or 352

PAINT REMOVED WHEREBRACKET MOUNTS TO PANEL

BRACKET

Figure 2-13. CPU 351 or 352 - Mounting the Shield Grounding Bracket and Wire

Note: When the grounding bracket is used, pin 1 of the cable connector that plugs into the Port 2

connector should not be connected. A metal connector shell must be used on the cable for

this port, and the cable shield must be terminated at the metal shell instead of pin 1 of the

connector.


2

CPU363, CPU364, and CPU374 Shield Grounding

The CPU363, CPU364, and CPU374 modules must be connected to frame ground at the slot where

they are installed. Each module comes with a grounding wire for this purpose. These modules do

not support or require the use of a grounding bracket. If the ring terminal on the grounding wire is

to be mounted to a painted surface, remove the paint under the ring terminal to ensure good contact,

or place a star lock washer between the ring terminal and the painted surface. See the next figure.

Note: The star lock washer method is suitable for a shield ground, but not suitable for a

safety ground.


USE 1 #6MACHINE SCREW

STAB-ONCONNECTOR

44A735970-001R01

BOTTOMOF CPU MODULE

REMOVE PAINT UNDERRING TERMINAL ORINSTALL STAR LOCKWASHER BETWEENRING TERMINAL ANDPANEL

CPU363, CPU364,

or CPU374

#6 TAPPED HOLE

Figure 2-14. CPU 363, CPU364, or CPU374 - Attaching Ground Wire

Additional Modules with Shield Grounding Requirements

Some of the Series 90-30 Option modules, such as the FIP Remote I/O Scanner (IC693BEM330),

and DSM modules (IC693DSM302 and IC693DSM314) also have shield grounding requirements.

These modules come equipped with suitable grounding hardware. Please refer to each module’s

user’s manual for grounding instructions. Appendix G contains a product to publication cross-

reference to help you identify the correct manual.


2

General Wiring Guidelines

Warning

In addition to the following wiring suggestions, we strongly urge that you

follow all wiring and safety codes that apply to your area or your type of

equipment. For example, in the United States, most areas have adopted the

National Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its

requirements. In other countries, different codes will apply. For maximum

safety to personnel and property you must follow these codes. Failure to do

so can lead to personal injury or death, property damage or destruction, or

both.

Color Coding Wires

These color codes are commonly used in industrial equipment manufactured in the United States.

They are cited here as a reference. Where they are in conflict with codes that apply to your area or

your type of equipment, you should follow your applicable codes instead. Besides satisfying code

requirements, wire color coding makes testing and troubleshooting safer, faster, and easier.

Green or green with stripe- Ground

Black - Primary AC

Red - Secondary AC

Blue - DC

White - Common or neutral

Yellow - Secondary power source not controlled by the main disconnect. Alerts maintenancepersonnel that there may be power present (from an external source) even if the equipment isdisconnected from its main power source.

Wire Routing

To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires, it is recommended you keep electrically noisy wiring,

such as AC power wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring, physically separated from low-level

signal wiring such as DC and Analog Input module wiring or communications cables. This can be

accomplished by grouping separately, where practical, the following categories of wiring:

AC power wiring. This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply, as well as other ACdevices in the control cabinet.

Analog Input or Output Module wiring. This should be shielded to further reduce noisecoupling. See the Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898 for details.

Discrete Output Module wiring. These often switch inductive loads that produce noisespikes when switched off.

DC Input Module wiring. Although suppressed internally, these low-level inputs should befurther protected against noise coupling by observing these wiring practices.

Communications Cables. Wiring such as Genius Bus or serial cables should be kept awayfrom noise-producing wiring.


2

Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near noise-sensitive signal wiring bundles, avoid

running them beside each other. Route them so that, if they have to cross, they do so at a right

angle. This will minimize coupling between them.

Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated

If practical, grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring segregated.

For example, one rack could contain only AC modules, and a different rack only DC modules, with

further grouping in each rack by input and output types. For smaller systems, as an example, the

left end of a rack could contain Analog modules, the middle could contain DC modules, and the

right end could contain AC modules.

Discrete I/O Module Connection Methods

For modules with 16 points or less, the standard method is to use the removable terminal board

which comes with these modules. The removable terminal board makes it easy to prewire

field wiring to the user supplied input and output devices, and to replace modules in the field

without disturbing existing field wiring.

Some discrete 16-point I/O modules can be used with an optional Terminal Block Quick

Connect (TBQC) assembly. This assembly contains a module faceplate, with built-in

connector, that replaces the removable terminal board. The assembly also contains a DIN-rail

mounted terminal block and a cable to connect the module to the terminal block. The

advantage of this method is that it saves about two hours of wiring time per module compared

with hand wiring from a module’s removable terminal board to a user-supplied, panel-mounted

terminal block or strip.

Older 32-point I/O modules have one 50-pin connector on the front of the module that is either

connected by a cable with a connector on each end to a Weidmuller panel-mounted terminal

block (Weidmuller catalog no. 912263), or is connected by a cable with stripped, tinned leads

to a user-supplied terminal block or strip.

Newer 32-point I/O modules have two 24-pin connectors on the front of the module. These

module may be wired in one of three ways. (1) Use a pair of cables (IC693CBL327/328 - see

data sheet in “Cables” chapter) to connect the module to a user-supplied, panel-mounted

terminal block or strip. These cables have a 24-pin connector on one end, and stripped, tinned

leads with wire markers on the other end. (2) Use a pair of dual-connector cables to connect

the module to a Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) terminal block (IC693ACC377). See

Appendix H for details. (3) Make your own custom cables. Instructions are found in the

IC693CBL327/328 data sheet in Chapter 10.

Connections to I/O Module Terminal Boards

Series 90-30 PLC I/O terminal boards have either 10 or 20 screw terminals that will accept from

two AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) to two AWG #16 (1.3 mm2), or one AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) copper 90°C

(194°F) wire(s). Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into any given

terminal should be the same type (both solid or both stranded) to ensure a good connection. Wires

are routed to and from the terminals out of the bottom of the terminal board cavity. The suggested

torque for the I/O terminal board connection screws is from 9.6 in-lbs to 11.5 in-lbs (1.1–1.3

Newton-meters).


2

For 24 volt DC input modules, an internal 24 volt power connection is provided on the terminal

board to supply a limited number of input devices. Also, a 24 volt DC output is available on the

power supply module’s terminal board to supply a limited number of output devices.

Terminal Block Quick Connect Installation for 16-Point Discrete Modules

The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is an option for certain Series 90-30

discrete I/O modules. See Appendix H for more information.

Remove standard terminal board from module.

Install TBQC faceplate (it has a 24-pin connector).

Mount the TBQC terminal block. It has a 24-pin connector and a terminal strip, and mounts

on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.

Connect a TBQC cable between the TBQC faceplate connector on the module and the

connector on the TBQC terminal block.

Wire I/O devices to the terminal block.

Installation of 32-Point Discrete, 50-Pin Connector Modules

These 50-Pin modules are an older design and are not generally used on new systems, unless to

fulfill standardization requirements. They are mainly used as replacements for existing

installations. For new installations, we recommend the dual 24-pin connector style because they

have additional features not found on the older modules (LED indicators, TBQC), and it is much

easier to fabricate custom-length cables for them. Installation information is provided here for the

convenience of those still using these modules.

Using Weidmuller #912263 Terminal Block

Note: The TBQC is not available for these modules, but you may purchase a Weidmuller #912263

from your electronics distributor for this application.

Mount the Weidmuller#912263 terminal block. It has a 50-pin connector and a terminal strip,

and mounts on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.

Connect an IC693CBL306/307 cable between the module’s faceplate connector and the

connector on the Weidmuller terminal block. See Chapter 10 for cable data.

Wire I/O devices to the terminal block. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications

Manual, GFK-0898, for pin-out information.


2

Using a Generic Terminal Block or Strip

Mount terminal block/strip to the enclosure panel.

Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable, or a custom made cable, to the module’s faceplateconnector and wire the stripped ends of the cable to the terminal block/strip. See Chapter 10for cable data.

Wire I/O devices to the terminal block/strip.

Direct Method

Connect an IC693CBL308 or 309 cable, or a custom made cable, to the module’s faceplateconnector and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field devices. See Chapter 10for cable data. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, forpin-out information.

Installation of Discrete 32-Point, Dual 24-Pin Connector Modules

Using a TBQC

Mount two TBQC terminal blocks. Each has a 24-pin connector and a terminal strip, andmounts on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.

Connect a pair of TBQC cables (IC693CBL329 - 334) between the module’s faceplateconnector and the connectors on the two TBQC terminal blocks. Note that both a right sideand left side cable is required. See Appendix H for a list of cables.

Wire I/O devices to the terminal blocks. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module SpecificationsManual, GFK-0898, for pin-out information.

The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is an option for certain Series 90-30

discrete I/O modules. See Appendix H for more information.

With a Generic Terminal Block/Strip

Mount terminal block/strip to the enclosure panel.

Connect an IC693CBL327/328 cables, or a custom made cables, to the module’s faceplateconnectors, and wire the stripped ends of the cables to the terminal block/strip. Note that botha right side and left side cable is required. See Appendix H for a list of cables. See Chapter 10for cable data sheets.

Wire I/O devices to the terminal block/strip. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O ModuleSpecifications Manual, GFK-0898, for pin-out information.


2

Direct Method

Connect an IC693CBL327/328 cable, or a custom made cable, to the module’s faceplateconnectors, and wire the stripped ends of the cable directly to the field devices. See Chapter10 for cable data. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898,for pin-out information.

General Wiring Methods for Analog Modules

Twisted, shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module input or

output signal connections. Proper grounding of the shield is also important. For maximum

electrical noise suppression, the cable shield should only be grounded at one end of the cable. For

Input modules, ground the end that is in the noisiest environment (which often is at the field device

end). For Output modules, ground at the module end. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O

Module Specifications, for more shield grounding information.

Analog Input Module Wiring Methods

Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trial-and-error routine. However, in

general, it is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source of the noise as possible,

which is usually at the device end. In troubleshooting noise problems, sometimes it is beneficial to

experiment with the shield grounding point location. Remember, the cable shield should be

grounded at one end only. Also, it is best to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as

possible to minimize the length of unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy

environment. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898 for

additional details.


Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from the terminalstrip to each input circuit on the module’s terminal board terminals.

Connect each cable’s shield to the metal panel next to the terminal strip. Do not connect theshields at the module end (cut shield off at module end of cable and insulate with shrinktubing).

Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded cable, grounding the shield at thedevice end only (cut shield off at terminal strip end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing).Also, keep the length of exposed (outside of shield) leads at the terminal strip and device endsas short as possible.

Direct Method

Run a shielded cable from the field device (transducer, potentiometer, etc.) directly to themodule.

Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module’s terminal board.


2

Ground the shield at the field device end, exposing a minimum amount of conductor to thenoisy environment. Do not connect the shield at the module end (cut shield off at module endof cable and insulate with shrink tubing).

TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules

The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is not recommended for use with analog

modules due to cable shielding requirements.

Analog Output Module Wiring

General

Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the cable shield grounded

at the module end. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications, for more

information.


Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a shielded cable from the terminal

strip to each output circuit on the module’s terminal board terminals.

Ground each cable’s shield at the module end only. Do not connect the shields at the terminal

strip end (cut shields off at terminal strip end of cables and insulate with shrink tubing).

Wire the field device to the terminal strip with shielded cables, grounding the shields at the

terminal strip end only (cut shields off at field device end of cables and insulate with shrink

tubing). Also, keep the length of exposed (outside of shield) leads at the terminal strip and

device ends as short as possible.

Direct Method

Run a shielded cable from each field device (transducer, potentiometer, etc.) directly to the

module.

Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module’s terminal board.

Ground the shield at the module end only, exposing a minimum amount of conductor to the

noisy environment. Do not connect the shield at the device end (cut shield off at device end of

cable and insulate with shrink tubing).

TBQC not Recommended for Analog Modules

The Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) Assembly is not recommended for use with analog

modules due to cable shielding requirements.


2

AC Power Source Connections

AC Input Wiring to AC/DC Power Supplies

Warning

If the same AC power source is used to provide AC power to other baseplates

in a Series 90-30 PLC System, ensure that all AC input connections are

identical at each rack. Do not cross Line 1 (L1) and Line 2 (L2). A resulting

difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage to equipment.

Each baseplate must be connected to a common ground.

Ensure that the protective cover is installed over all terminal boards.

During normal operation with an AC power source either 120 VAC or 240

VAC is present on the AC Power Supply. The cover protects against

accidental shock hazard which could cause severe or fatal injury to the

operator or maintenance personnel.

Both the Standard (IC693PWR321) and High Capacity (IC693PWR330) AC/DC power supplies

currently have six terminals for user connections. Early versions of some Series 90-30 power

supplies had five terminals (see next figure). The wiring methods for both five-terminal and six-

terminal types is similar, except that step 3 below does not apply to the five-terminal type.

The power supply terminal boards will accept one AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) or two AWG #16 (1.3

mm2) copper 75_ C (167_ F) wires. Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires

in any given terminal should be the same type. The suggested torque for the power supply terminal

board is 12 in-lbs (1.36 Newton-meters). Open the door protecting the terminal board and make

the following connections from the AC power source, and ground connections (system grounding

requirements are described in detail later in this chapter).

1. These are wide range supplies that can operate from an AC power source within the nominal

range of 100 VAC to 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz. This may vary -15% to +10% for a total

maximum range of 85 VAC to 264 VAC. These are auto-ranging supplies that do not require

jumper or switch settings for selection of power source voltage.

2. Connect the hot and neutral wires or lines L1 and L2 to the upper two terminals on the

terminal board. Connect the safety ground wire to the ground terminal, which is the third

terminal from the top, and is marked with a ground symbol.

3. For power supplies with six terminals, the factory jumper between the 3rd and 4th terminals

(see figure below), should be left in place for normal installations. However, this jumper must

be removed and external surge suppressors installed in installations with a “Floating Neutral”

input. Please see the section “Special Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems” later in

this chapter for details.

4. After all connections to Power Supply terminal board have been completed, the protective

cover plate should be carefully reinstalled.


2

100-240 VAC

125 VDC, 50W

50/60HZ 90VA

+24 VDC

OUTPUT

0.8A MAX.

INPUT

Six-Terminal Board

Factory Jumper

24 VDC OutputFor I/O Modules

Input Power

100-240 VAC

125 VDC, 50W

50/60HZ 90VA

+24 VDC

OUTPUT

0.8A MAX.

INPUT

Five-Terminal Board

24 VDC OutputFor I/O Modules

Input Power

Figure 2-15. Power Supply Terminal Boards

Power Supply Overvoltage Protection Devices

The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are connected internally to pin 4 on the

user terminal board. This pin is normally connected to frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied

jumper strap which is installed at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is

supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by leaving pin 4 unconnected by removing the

jumper strap. Also, this jumper must be removed and external surge suppressors installed in

installations with a “Floating Neutral” input, please see the following section “Special Instructions

for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems” later in this chapter.

If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the test by

removing the terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling

the strap.

1

2

3

4

a47086

Jumper Strap ConnectsOvervoltage Protection

Devices to Frame Ground

Screw Terminals on Terminal Board

Frame Ground

Figure 2-16. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper Strap


2

Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems

When the AC input power supplies listed below are installed in a system where the Neutral line is

not referenced to Protective Earth Ground, these special installation instructions must be followed

to prevent damage to the power supply.

IC693PWR321S (or later version)

IC693PWR330A (or later version)

Definition of Floating Neutral Systems

A Floating Neutral System is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral and Protective

Earth Ground are not tied together by a negligible impedance. In Europe this is referred to as an

IT system (see IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System, voltages measured from input terminals to

protective earth ground may exceed the 264 Volts AC maximum input voltage specified in the

power supply specifications in Chapter 24in this manual.

Example of Floating Neutral System

L1

N

PE

This system must be installed using the special installation instructions on the following page.

Systems in which one leg of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap

between two legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth are not Floating

Neutral Systems.

Examples of Non-Floating Neutral System

L1

N

PE

L

N/PE

L1

PE

L2

These non-floating neutral systems do not require these special installation instructions.


2

Use These Special Installation Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems

1. The input power terminals should be wired according to the instructions in the “AC Power

Source Connections” section of this chapter.

2. The factory installed jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the Power Supply module must be

removed if using one of the Power Supplies that have this feature. See the “Overvoltage

Protection Devices” section of the “Power Supplies” chapter for details.

3. Voltage surge protection devices, such as MOVs, MUST be installed between the following

terminals:

From L1 to earth ground

From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground

The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the system is protected from power line

transients that exceed Line voltage + 100V +(N-PE)MAX.

The expression N-PE refers to the voltage potential between neutral and Protective Earth (PE)

ground.

For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral floating 50V above earth ground, the transient

protection should be rated at:

240V + 100V +50V = 390V


2

DC Power Source Connections

DC Input Wiring to AC/DC and DC-Only Power Supplies

DC Input power can range from 12 to 30 VDC for the 24 VDC supply, 18 to 56 VDC for the 24/48

VDC supply or 100 to 150 VDC for the 125 VDC supply. All Series 90-30 power supplies have

DC input capabilities. The following connection information applies to all of them:

Connect the + and - wires from the power source to the top terminals on the terminal board (+ to

the top terminal, - to the second terminal). Connect the third terminal from the top to system

ground.

+24 VDC Output (All Supplies)

The bottom two terminals are connected to the isolated 24 volt DC output that can be used to

supply power to input circuits (within power limitations of the supply).

Warning

If the same DC input power source is used to provide power to two or more

power supplies in a Series 90-30 PLC System, ensure that connection

polarity is identical at each rack (top terminal + and second terminal -). Do

not cross the Positive (+) and Negative (-) lines. A resulting difference in

potential can injure personnel or cause damage to equipment. Also, each

baseplate must be connected to a common system ground, described earlier

in this chapter.


2

Basic Installation Procedure

Note: Series 90-30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure. The enclosure should be

capable of properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it.

For details on calculating heat dissipation, refer to Appendix F.

The system design, which includes producing the layout and wiring drawings, should be completed

before beginning the installation procedure. This section offers a basic step-by-step approach to

installing a Series 90-30 PLC system. Some steps refer to earlier sections of this chapter for

additional details. An attempt was made to place the steps in an order that will make the process as

efficient as possible. However, due to the wide variance in system designs, this order may not be

the most efficient for your system, so you may wish modify this procedure to fit your needs.

1. Gather the schematics, layouts, prints, and other information for the job.

Warning

To avoid the possibility of electrical shock to personnel or damage to your

PLC, we recommend that you shut off all power to the system before

mounting and wiring the PLC. Also, keep all electronic components away

from the area while drilling and tapping to keep metal chips and filings out

of these sensitive components.

2. From the layout drawing, determine where the baseplate(s) will be mounted. Lay out the hole

locations, either using the dimensions given on your layout drawing or from the “Baseplates”

chapter of this manual.

3. Mark the hole locations for the baseplate safety ground wire (see “Baseplate Safety Ground” in

this chapter).

4. Mark the hole locations for module shield ground connections (if any). See “Module Shield

Ground” (and accompanying sections) in this chapter for instructions.

5. Finish laying (marking hole locations) out the rest of the system. This includes any terminal

blocks you will be using. DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks for some of the 32-point I/O

modules are manufactured by Weidmuller. DIN-rail mounted GE Fanuc Terminal Block

Quick Connect (TBQC) assemblies are optional for some of the 16-point and 32-point discrete

I/O modules. If using these TBQCs, refer to Appendix H for data. Also, APM and DSM

modules use DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks.

Note

We recommend drilling and tapping all holes before mounting any components.This will avoid getting chips and filings in the components.

6. Drill and tap the marked holes. For baseplate mounting, use 8-32 or 4mm size.

7. Mount the baseplates. Use good quality 8-32 x 1/2 inch or 4 x 12mm size screws. We

recommend using star lock washers and flat washers under the screw heads (star lock washer

should be located between screw head and flat washer) to ensure a tight baseplate ground

connection, and to keep the screws from loosening. Connect each baseplate ground wire as

shown in the “Baseplate Safety Ground” section of this chapter.

8. If you have Expansion or Remote racks, determine the correct rack number for each one, then

set the rack numbers using the Rack Number Selection dual in-line package (DIP) switch on


2

the baseplate. Please refer to the “Baseplates” chapter for details on setting these DIP

switches. Rack numbers should be assigned by the system programmer because they

correspond to system configuration settings and program memory addressing.

9. If you have more than one baseplate (rack), connect the I/O Bus Expansion Cables between

the I/O Bus Expansion Connectors, which are located on the right end of the baseplates. The

cables are connected in a “daisy-chain” arrangement from one baseplate to the other. This is

made possible by the fact that the cables have a dual connector on one end. Therefore, when

the cable is plugged into a baseplate connector, the second connector on that end of the cable

provides a socket for connecting to the next cable. The data sheet for the I/O Bus Expansion

cables (IC693CBL300 etc.) in the “Cables” chapter has sample wiring figures.

10. On the last I/O Bus Expansion Connector, plug in an I/O Bus Expansion Terminator, Catalog

Number IC693ACC307 (unless using a cable with built-in terminator resistors, which would

either be GE Fanuc cable IC693CBL302, or your own custom-built cable).

11. Install the modules in their correct slots using your system layout drawings. (The label on the

side of each module identifies the module type and catalog number.) Refer to the section

“Installing Modules” if you are not familiar with how to do this.

12. Connect cables to Option modules. Route cables away from noise-producing wires. See the

”Wire Routing” section of this chapter.

13. Be sure to follow the information in the “Wiring Guidelines” section of this chapter to protect

the system from electrical noise. Install the power wires to the Power Supply and I/O

modules:

I/O modules with removable terminal boards. You can wire the terminal boards in-

place on the modules or remove them from the modules before wiring. Although

removing them may help make wiring easier (a previous section “Working with

Removable Terminal Boards” shows how to remove a terminal board), care should be

taken to avoid mixing them (each terminal board has the catalog number of the module

printed on it, and the hinged cover has a wiring diagram for that module type). If you are

using wire duct, routing each module’s wires through the opening in the duct directly

under the module will help to keep each terminal board in its correct position.

I/O Modules with terminal blocks. Some modules use terminal blocks that mount to the

enclosure panel. This includes all 32-point modules and, can include other I/O modules if

they are fitted with the optional Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly. Connect the

terminal blocks to the connectors on the modules with the provided cables.

14. Connect the signal (switches, sensors, solenoids, etc.) wires to the terminal boards, or terminal

blocks/strips. If wiring to terminal boards, these can be removed for ease of wiring, if desired.

See the section “Removing a Module’s Terminal Board.”

15. When finished wiring the I/O terminal boards (if used and if you removed them for ease of

wiring), re-install them on the modules, being careful to match each one with the correct

module.

GFK-0356Q 3-1

Baseplates

Baseplate Types

A baseplate is composed of three main parts: (1) a circuit board mounted to (2) a metal back-plate

with (3) a plastic cover. The circuit board, called the “backplane,” contains sockets for plug-in

modules. The metal back-plate has four holes for mounting the baseplate, and retainers for

mounting the modules. The plastic cover provides protection for the circuit board, slotted holes for

the module connectors and retainers, and printed labels such as the baseplate description, serial

number, and slot number labels. There are three basic types of baseplates discussed in this chapter:

CPU

Expansion

Remote

Common Baseplate Features

The following figure shows the features that are common to all Series 90-30 baseplates. Note that

a modular CPU baseplate is shown.

3Chapter


3

CPU/1I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

CP

U

2

4

3

5 6 1 7 8

4

2

91 10

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

BASE 5-SLOT

CAUTION

USER PROGRAM

AND REGISTERVALUES MAY BELOST IF POWER

SUPPLY ISREMOVED FORLONGER THAN

1 HOUR

POWER

SUPPLY

NON-CPU SLOTS

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

1. Module retainers

2. Upper mounting holes

3. Baseplate description

4. Lower mounting holes. The plastic cover is slotted at these two holes to facilitate a ground

connection. See the “Baseplate Safety Grounding” section of the “Installation” chapter for

ground connection details.

5. Backplane connector for Power Supply

6. Serial number label (on bottom edge of baseplate)

7. Backplane connectors for I/O or Option modules (slots 2-4) . Note that the slot labeled CPU/1

is the backplane connector for a CPU module; however, on Embedded CPU, Expansion, and

Remote baseplates, this would be another I/O or Option module slot.

8. Slot number labels

9. Compliance label

10. Catalog number and certification (UL, CE, etc.) label. On an Embedded CPU baseplate, this

label will be located between Slots 4 and 5.

Figure 3-1. Common Baseplate Features

Two Baseplate Sizes

Series 90-30 baseplates come in two sizes: 5-slot and 10-slot. Be aware that the Power Supply slot

is not numbered, and is not considered to be one of the 5 or 10 slots. A 5-slot baseplate has slots

for a Power Supply and five other modules, and a 10-slot baseplate has slots for a Power Supply

and ten other modules.

GFK-0356Q Chapter 3 Baseplates 3-3

3

Baseplate Terms

Backplane: Refers to the circuit board in the baseplate. It contains the baseplate circuitry and

sockets for plug-in modules.

Rack: This term applies to an assembly consisting of a baseplate, power supply, and other

modules.

Rack Number: In systems that require more than one rack, each rack is given its own unique

number, which enables the CPU to distinguish one rack from another. The CPU rack always has a

rack number of 0 (zero).

Slot Number: Each module location (called a ”slot”) on a baseplate has a unique number (except

for the unnumbered left slot, which is for the Power Supply). The slot to the right of the Power

Supply slot is always called Slot 1. These slot numbers are marked on the baseplate’s plastic

cover. Each slot has a connector for module connections and top and bottom retainers for holding

the module in place.

Module Location: Since each rack is assigned a unique number, and since each slot in a rack’s

baseplate has a unique slot number, each individual module’s location in a system can be identified

by its rack and slot numbers. For example, a module could be referred to as ”the module in Rack 1,

Slot 4.” This numbering method enables the CPU to correctly read from and write to a particular

module, and report the location of a faulted module.

CPU Baseplate: A baseplate that either has a CPU built-in to its backplane circuit board

(embedded CPU) or one that has a slot for a plug-in CPU module (modular CPU). There can only

be one CPU baseplate in a Series 90-30 PLC system and it will always be called Rack 0 (zero). A

CPU module can only mount in Slot 1 of a modular CPU baseplate. A few special Option

modules, such as the FIP Remote I/O Scanner module (IC693BEM330) can also be used in Slot 1

of a modular CPU baseplate. Power Supply, Input/Output (I/O), and most Option modules cannot

fit in a CPU slot.

Expansion Baseplate: One that does not contain a CPU and that can be mounted up to 50 cable-

feet from the CPU baseplate. An Expansion baseplate cannot operate on its own. It must be used

in a system that has a controlling CPU.

Remote Baseplate: One that does not contain a CPU and that can be mounted up to 700 cable-feet

from the CPU baseplate. A remote baseplate cannot operate on its own. It must be used in a

system that has a controlling CPU.

Power Supply Slot: Each baseplate must contain its own Power Supply module, which must

mount in the Power Supply slot. It is the slot located on the left end of the baseplate, it is not

numbered, and it has a unique size and shape so that only a Power Supply module can mount in it.

Caution

Attempts to force a module into an improper slot type will damage the

module and/or the baseplate. Modules will mount in the correct slot easily

and with a minimum of force.


3

CPU Baseplates

There are two basic kinds of CPU baseplates, embedded and modular. The embedded types fulfill

the need for a good low cost PLC, but lack the power, expandability, and versatility of the modular

systems.

Embedded CPU Baseplate: This type has CPU and memory integrated circuit chips soldered to

its backplane circuit board. All of its numbered slots, including slot 1, are of the same type, and

they accept only I/O modules and standard options modules.

Modular CPU Baseplate: This type does not have CPU and memory chips on its backplane.

Instead, it has a connector in Slot 1 for a plug-in CPU module, which contains the CPU and

memory chips on an internal circuit board. The slot 1 connector is a special type that only mates

with connectors on CPUs and a few special option modules.

Embedded CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-2 and 3-3)

There are three models of embedded baseplates, the 311, 313, and 323. These model numbers are

based upon the CPU type that each contains. This chapter discusses only the baseplate features of

these products. CPU specifications for the embedded CPU are located in Chapter 4. The

embedded CPU baseplates have the following features:

The CPU type cannot be changed.

They do not support the use of expansion or remote racks, so these racks do not have an

expansion connector like the modular CPU baseplates do.

The models 311 and 313 are 5-slot baseplates, and the model 323 is a 10-slot baseplate.

Since they do not require a plug-in CPU module, all numbered slots, including Slot 1, can be

used for I/O or Option modules.

The memory back-up battery is located in the Power Supply module; so if the Power Supply is

unplugged from the baseplate, the battery will be disconnected from the memory circuits,

which are located on the backplane circuit board. However, the backplane circuit board

contains a high value capacitor, sometimes called a ”super capacitor,” that can store enough

charge to maintain the memory circuits for about 1 hour if the Power Supply is removed or its

battery is disconnected. Chapter 6 discusses the IC693ACC315 Battery Accessory kit that can

be used to maintain memory contents when the Power Supply is removed from an embedded

CPU baseplate.

There are no configuration switches or jumpers on the Model 311, 313, or 323 baseplates.

An embedded CPU baseplate is always assigned, by default, Rack Number Zero (0).


3

POWER

1

BASE 5-SLOT

USER PROGRAM


SYSTEM

PROM

PROGRAM

PROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



1 HOUR

WITH CPU

Memory BackupWarning Label

Description LabelSays "With CPU"

Replaceable System (firmware) PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM

I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

NON-CPU SLOTS

CPU

Figure 3-2. Models IC693CPU311 and IC693CPU313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates

POWER I/O-1

1

BASE 10-SLOT


USER PROGRAM

1 HOUR.LONGER THANREMOVED FOR

SUPPLY ISLOST IF POWERVALUES MAY BEAND REGISTER

CAUTION

SUPPLY

WITH CPU

NON-CPU SLOTS

CP

U

SYSTEM

PROM

PROGRAM

PROM

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10

Figure 3-3. Model IC693CPU323 (10-slot) Embedded CPU Baseplate


3

Modular CPU Baseplates (Figures 3-4 and 3-5)

A Power Supply module must be plugged into the left slot (which is not numbered) of these

baseplates. The left slot is a unique size and type that only supports a Power Supply module.

A CPU module (or a special Option module) must be installed in Slot 1 of these baseplates.

Slot 1 is a unique size and type that only supports a CPU module or a special Option module

like the FIP Remote I/O Scanner (IC693BEM330). Slot 1 is labeled CPU/1.

Slots numbered 2 and above are of a unique size and type that only supports I/O or Option

modules.

Expansion and Remote baseplates are supported, so a 25-pin D-type female expansion

connector is located at the right end of the baseplate for connecting to an Expansion or Remote

baseplate.

Since the CPU is modular, it can be replaced or changed to a different type if additional

features are desired.

Only one CPU baseplate is allowed per system. If more than one baseplate is used in a system,

the additional ones must be either Expansion or Remote types.

A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned, by default, Rack Number 0.

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

CP

U

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

BASE 5-SLOT

CAUTION

USER PROGRAM



1 HOUR

POWER

SUPPLY

NON-CPU SLOTS

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

CPU/1

Figure 3-4. IC693CHS397 5-Slot Modular CPU Baseplate


BASE 10-SLOT

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10CPU/1POWER

SUPPLY

NON-CPU SLOTS NON-CPU SLOTS

CPU

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

USER PROGRAM

AND REGISTER

VALUES MAY BE

LOST IF POWER

SUPPLY IS

REMOVED FOR

LONGER THAN

1 HOUR

CAUTION



3

Expansion Baseplates (Figures 3-6 and 3-7)

There can be no more than a total of 50 feet (15 meters) of cable interconnecting Expansion

baseplates and the CPU baseplate.

An Expansion baseplate cannot stand alone. It must be connected to a system that has a CPU.

The CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is equipped with a Personal

Computer Interface Card (see Chapter 11).

Maximum number of Expansion baseplates allowed per system depends on the type of CPU

they are used with. For CPUs 331, 340, and 341, the maximum is 4. For CPUs numbered 350

and higher, the maximum is 7.

Each Expansion baseplate has a 25-pin female D-type I/O Bus Expansion connector mounted

at its right end for connection to other baseplates.

Available in two versions; 5-slot (IC693CHS398) and 10-slot (IC693CHS392)

An Expansion backplane does not support the following intelligent option modules: PCM,

ADC, BEM330, and CMM311. These modules must be mounted in a CPU baseplate. All

other I/O and option modules can be mounted in any type of rack.

All Expansion baseplates must be connected to a common ground (see the “Installation”

chapter for details).

Expansion baseplates are the same physical size, use the same type power supplies, and

support the same I/O and option modules as the Remote baseplates.

Each Expansion baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch.

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

BASE 5-SLOTEXPANSION

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5I/O-1POWER

SUPPLY

NON-CPU SLOTS

CPU

EXPANSION

EXPANSION RACK #1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DIPSW

123

X X XX X XX X X

X = CLOSED

Figure 3-6. IC693CHS398 5-Slot Expansion Baseplate


3

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER


I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10I/O-1POWER

SUPPLY


CPU

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

EXPANSION RACK #1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DIP

SW

1

2

3

X X X

X X X

X X X

X = CLOSED

Figure 3-7. IC693CHS392 10-Slot Expansion Baseplate

Remote Baseplates (Figures 3-8 and 3-9)

There can be no more than 700 feet of cable connecting all baseplates in a system that uses

Remote baseplates.

A Remote baseplate cannot stand alone. It must be connected to a system that has a CPU. The

CPU can be in a PLC or in a Personal Computer that is equipped with a Personal Computer

Interface Card (see Chapter 11).

Remote capability is facilitated by the Remote baseplate’s built-in isolation between the +5

volt logic supply used by the I/O modules residing in the Remote baseplate and the supply for

the interface circuit associated with the I/O Bus Expansion Interface. Isolation helps prevent

problems associated with unbalanced ground conditions.

Maximum number of Remote baseplates allowed per system depends on the type of CPU they

are used with. For CPUs 331, 340, and 341, the maximum is 4. For CPUs numbered 350 and

higher, the maximum is 7.

Each remote baseplate has a 25-pin female D-type Expansion connector mounted at its right

end for connection to other baseplates.

Remote baseplates are available in two sizes; 5-slot (IC693CHS398) and 10-slot

(IC693CHS392)

A Remote backplane does not support the following intelligent option modules: PCM, ADC,

BEM330, and CMM. These modules must be mounted in a CPU baseplate. All other I/O and

option modules can be mounted in any type of baseplate.

Remote baseplates are the same physical size, use the same type power supplies, and support

the same I/O and option modules as the Expansion baseplates.

Each Remote baseplate has a Rack Number Selection DIP switch.


3

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

BASE 5-SLOT

REMOTE

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5I/O-1POWER

SUPPLY

NON-CPU SLOTS

CPU

EXPANSION

EXPANSION RACK #1 2 3 4 5 6

DIPSW

1

23

X X X

X X XX X X

X = CLOSED

Figure 3-8. IC693CHS399 5-Slot Remote Baseplate


BASE 10-SLOTREMOTE

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 I/O-9 I/O-10I/O-1POWER

SUPPLY


CPU

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

EXPANSION RACK #

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DIP

SW

1

2

3

X X X

X X X

X X X

X = CLOSED

Figure 3-9. IC693CHS393 10-Slot Remote Baseplate


3

I/O Bus Expansion Cables

Five prewired I/O Bus Expansion cables are available from GE Fanuc. Catalog numbers and

lengths of these cables are listed in the following figure. You can build custom cables to suit the

needs of your application if cable lengths other than those listed are required. Refer to the “Cables”

chapter for detailed information on cable type and connectors. Note that the same cables can be

used with both Expansion and Remote baseplates, however the cables used in a remote expansion

system must use the cable type described in the “Cables” chapter.

.5, 3, 6, 26 FOOTCABLES

50 FOOTCABLE

FEMALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

Figure A

Figure B

Catalog Number Length Figure

IC693CBL300 3 feet (1 meter), continuous shield A

IC693CBL301 6 feet (2 meters), continuous shield A

IC693CBL302 50 feet (15 meters), continuous shield withbuilt in terminator (this is not a Wye cable)

B

IC693CBL312 0.5 feet (.15 meters), continuous shield A

IC693CBL313 25 feet (8 meters), continuous shield A

Figure 3-10. I/O Bus Expansion Cables

Note

The 3 foot cable (IC693CBL300) can be used as a Wye adapter between custom-built cables and Remote baseplates.


3

Differences Between Remote and Expansion Racks

Basically, Remote racks provide the same functionality as Expansion racks, but with the longer

distance (700 feet/213 meters verses 50 feet/15 meters for Expansion racks) capability. To

minimize unbalanced ground conditions, Remote baseplates have extra isolation circuitry.

Unbalanced ground conditions can occur when systems are located long distances from each other

and do not share the same ground system. However, distance is not always the problem; even

racks that are mounted near each other can experience problems if the system is not grounded

properly. See Chapter 2 for grounding information.

The use of Remote racks requires a special consideration pertaining to scan time. In order to

operate at long distances, the I/O Bus runs at a lower clock speed (compared to that used for

Expansion racks) when communicating with Remote racks, which will have an impact on

performance. The impact will be relatively small for discrete I/O and slightly more for other

modules, such as the High Speed Counter or Genius Communications Module. The increase in

time needed to communicate with modules in a remote baseplate will usually be small with respect

to the overall scan time. For more detailed information on scan time calculations, refer to Chapter

2 of GFK-0467, the Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual.

Another important scan time consideration is the cable type used for communicating at longer

distances. Data propagation delay must be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins.

Any deviation in cable type may result in erratic or improper system operation. Suggested cable

types are specified in the “Cables” chapter in the IC693CBL300/etc. data sheet.

Mixing Expansion and Remote Baseplates in a System

Expansion and remote baseplates can be used in the same system as long as certain requirements

are met:

You do not exceed the 50 foot (15 meter) maximum cable distance from the CPU to the last

Expansion baseplate

You do not exceed the 700 foot (213 meter) maximum cable distance from the CPU to the last

Remote baseplate.

The cable type recommended for use with Remote baseplates must be used throughout the

system. The exception to this requirement is that the prewired 3 foot (1 meter) cable,

IC693CBL300, can be used as a Wye adapter to simplify the custom cable assembly associated

with the “daisy chain” connections between baseplates. Information on building cables for use

with Remote baseplates can be found in the “Cables” chapter in the IC693CBL300/etc. data

sheet..


3

Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System

When two or more baseplates are connected via the I/O Bus Expansion System, the I/O Expansion

Bus must be properly terminated. The most common method of terminating the I/O Expansion

Bus is by installing a termination resistor pack (IC693ACC307) on the open connector on the last

(most distant from the CPU) Expansion or Remote baseplate in the system. The resistor pack is

physically mounted inside of a connector. Although a termination resistor pack is shipped with

each baseplate, only the last baseplate in the chain needs to have this termination connector

installed. Unused termination packs can be discarded. The prewired 50 foot (15 meter) cable

(IC693CBL302) has termination resistors wired inside the connector on one end of the cable. This

cable can be used if only one expansion rack is needed in a system and a 50 foot cable link is

required (the IC693ACC307 resistor pack is not needed in this case). Also, a custom-built cable

with built-in resistors would eliminate the need for the IC693ACC307 resistor pack.

Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Baseplates

Expansion or Remote baseplates can be powered-down individually without affecting the operation

of other baseplates; however, powering off a baseplate generates a loss of module

(LOSS_OF_MODULE) fault in the PLC Fault Table for each module in the baseplate. When this

fault condition occurs, and until the baseplate is powered back on and all modules recovered, the

lost I/O modules are not scanned. For more information on the power-up and power-down

sequence, see Chapter 2 in the Series 90-30 Programmable Controller Reference Manual,

GFK-0467.

Series 90-30 PLC Backplane

The Series 90-30 PLC backplane (on all three types of baseplates) has a dedicated I/O

communications bus. The signals on the remote baseplate backplane are optically coupled and an

isolated DC-DC power supply converter is provided to isolate the signals from other backplanes.

Power bus - connects the power supply outputs to the modules in the baseplate.

I/O Communications bus - the CPU communicates with I/O modules over this bus. This bus

is connected to the I/O busses in Expansion and Remote racks via the I/O Bus Expansion

connectors and cables.

Special Intelligent Module bus - exists only on a CPU baseplate; therefore, certain special

intelligent option modules, such as the Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) ,

Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC), and CMM (Communications Control Module –

IC693CMM311), only work in a CPU baseplate.


3

Rack Number DIP Switch on Expansion and Remote Baseplates

Each baseplate in a Series 90-30 system is identified with a unique number called a “Rack

Number.” Rack Numbers for Expansion and Remote baseplates are selected by setting a DIP

switch located on each baseplate directly above the connector for Slot 1. Rack number 0 must

always be present and is assigned, by default, to the CPU rack (the CPU baseplate does not have

this DIP switch). Racks do not need to be contiguously numbered, although for consistency and

clarity, it is recommended that rack numbers not be skipped (use 1, 2, 3 – not 1, 3, 5). Rack

numbers must not be duplicated within a system. The following table shows the DIP switch

positions for rack number selection.

Table 3-1. Rack Number Selection Switch Settings

Rack Number

DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5* 6* 7*

1 open closed open closed open closed open

2 closed open open closed closed open open

3 closed closed closed open open open open

* Rack numbers 5, 6, and 7 only valid for CPUs 350 and higher.

The particular CPU module used determines how may expansion and remote baseplates are

allowed:

The 331, 340, and 341 CPUs support a total of four Expansion and/or Remote racks.

The 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, 364, and 374 CPUs support a total of seven Expansion and/or

Remote racks.

Each baseplate has a label above the DIP switch that shows the settings for each rack number. The

following figure shows this DIP switch package with an example of rack #2 number selected.

Note

Use a ball-point pen to set the DIP switches. In general, it is best to avoid using apencil to set DIP switches since graphite from the pencil can damage the switch.

SERIES 90-30

PROGRAMMABLE

1

DIPSW 1 2 3 4

EXPANSION RACK #

X = CLOSED

G E F a n u c


CONTROLLER

= CLOSED (Switch pushed down on right side)

X

X

X

XX

X X

2

3

5

X

6

X

7

Figure 3-11. Rack Number Selection Switch (Shown with Rack 2 Selected)


3

Expansion Rack Connection Example

The following example shows a system that includes Expansion baseplates.

CPU BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

DISCRETE/ANALOG/OPTION


I/O BUSTERMINATOR

PLUG (See *NOTE)IC693ACC307

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE




NOTE

TOTAL MAXIMUMDISTANCE FROMCPU BASEPLATE

TO LAST EXPANSIONBASEPLATE IS

50 FEET (15 METERS)

I/O EXPANSION CABLES

SERIAL CPU

*NOTE

Each signal pair on the I/O bus mustbe terminated at the end of the I/Obus with120 ohm resistors. Thistermination can be done with the I/OBus Terminator Plug (IC693ACC307),by using the 50 foot (15 meter) cable(IC693CBL302) with built-in terminating resistors, or by building acustomcable with the resistors installedinthe connector at the end of thebus.

PROGRAMMER

Figure 3-12. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates


3

Expansion and Remote Baseplates Connection Example

The following example shows cable connections in a system that includes both remote and

expansion baseplates. A system can have a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as

long as the distance and cable requirements are followed.

CPU

CPU BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATE

IC693CHS392/398

EXPANSIONBASEPLATE

(15 meters)

IC693CHS391/397

CPUBASEPLATE

IC693CHS393/399

REMOTEBASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATEIC693CHS393/399

REMOTEBASEPLATE

IC693CHS393/399

REMOTEBASEPLATE

1

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Standard Wye Cable

Custom Built Point-to-Point Cable

IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable, Used as Wye Jumper

IC693ACC307 Bus Terminator

Maximum Cable Distancefrom CPU = 50 Feet

(213 meters)

Maximum Cable Distancefrom CPU = 700 Feet

Figure 3-13. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates


3

Baseplate Mounting Dimensions

Note: Series 90-30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure. The enclosure should be

capable of properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it.

For details on calculating heat dissipation, refer to Appendix F.

Series 90-30 PLC baseplates are designed to be panel mounted. Each baseplate has standard

attachment flanges for mounting on an electrical panel. Baseplate dimensions and proper spacing

requirements for installation purposes for both the 5 and 10-slot baseplates with embedded CPU

(Models 311 and Model 313 are 5-slot baseplates; Model 323 is a 10-slot baseplate), and the 5 and

10-slot baseplates for Modular CPUs are shown in figures 3-1 through 3-4.

Note

All 5-slot baseplates have the same mounting dimensions and all 10-slotbaseplates have the same mounting dimensions. Baseplates must be mounted in

the orientation as shown in the following figures for proper cooling.

Embedded CPU (311, 313, and 323) Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Models 311, 313, and 323

baseplates are shown below.

4.00(102)

REMOVABLEI/O

TERMINALBLOCK

FRONT VIEW

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES,MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS

3.54(90)

.79(20)

ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING*

POWERSUPPLY

5.12

(130)

.20 DIA.(5.08)

(TYPICAL)

*

*

HINGEDDOOR

5.59

(142)

SIDE VIEW

* 4.00(102)

4.00

(102)

4.00

(102)

*10.43(265)

9.84(250)

8.60

(218)

Figure 3-14. Model 311 and 313 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements


3

4.00(102)

REMOVABLEI/O

TERMINALBLOCK

FRONT VIEW


17.44(443)

16.85(428)

15.60(396)

3.54(90)

.79(20)


POWERSUPPLY

5.12

(130)

.20 DIA.

(5.08)(TYPICAL)

*

*

HINGEDDOOR

5.59(142)

SIDE VIEW

* 4.00(102)

4.00(102)

4.00

(102)

*

Figure 3-15. Model 323 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing Requirements


3

Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote Baseplate Dimensions

Baseplate dimensions and spacing requirements for installation for Modular CPU baseplates are

shown below.

.20 DIA.(5.08)

(TYPICAL)

SEENOTE

4.00(102)

REMOVABLEI/O

TERMINALBLOCK

FRONT VIEW


3.54(90)

.79(20)

If the cable is used, allow about 6 inch horizontal clearanceon the right side of the rack for access to the connector.

NOTE:

Allowance for cooling*

POWERSUPPLY

5.12(130)

*

*

HINGEDDOOR

5.59(142)

SIDE VIEW

*4.00(102)

4.00(102)

4.00

(102)

*10.43(265)

9.84(250)

8.60(218)

Figure 3-16. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 5-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing

Requirements

FRONT VIEW


3.54

(90)

.79

(20)


POWERSUPPLY

5.12

(130)

.20 DIA.

(5.08)(TYPICAL)

*

*

HINGEDDOOR

REMOVABLE

I/O

TERMINAL

BLOCK

5.59

(142)

SIDE VIEW

* 4.00

(102)4.00

(102)

4.00

(102)

CONNECTOR

FOR

EXPANSION

CABLE

* 4.00

(102)

SEENOTE

IF THE CABLE IS USED, ALLOW ABOUT 6 INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE

ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.

17.44

(443)16.85

(428)

15.60

(396)

NOTE:

Figure 3-17. Modular CPU, Expansion, and Remote 10-Slot Baseplate Dimensions and Spacing

Requirements


3

Load Ratings, Temperature, and Mounting Position

The power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the ambient

temperature.

The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is:

100% at 60°C (140°F)

Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are:

temperature at 25°C (77°F) – full load

temperature at 60°C (140°F) – 50% of full load


3

Baseplate Adapter Brackets for 19" Rack Mounting

Two optional Baseplate Adapter Brackets allow a 10-slot baseplate to be mounted in a 19 inch

rack. Each baseplate installation requires only one of the adapter brackets.

Warning

Be sure to follow grounding instructions in Chapter 2 when using these

adapter brackets. Failure to properly ground the PLC can result in

improper operation, damage to equipment, and injury to personnel.

IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to mount a baseplate to the front face

of a 19" rack. Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs at the top and bottom of the

adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the plastic baseplate

cover. NOTE: Although the figure below shows the plastic baseplate cover removed, this

is for illustration purposes only. It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the

bracket. With the bracket in place, insert and tighten the two screws (included with the

bracket) through the back of the baseplate holes into the threaded holes in the bracket.

IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket. Used to recess mount a baseplate inside

a 19" rack. A baseplate mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using four 8-32

(4mm) screws, nuts, lock washers, and flat washers. The Adapter Bracket bolts through its

four slotted holes to the face of the 19" rack using applicable hardware (lock washers

recommended).

RIGHT SIDE OFBASEPLATE

Insert two screws (1 at top; 1 at bottom)from back of base unit through base unitand bracket. Tighten screws to securebracket to base unit.

Note: Baseplate is shown with cover removed for illustration purposes. It is not necessary to remove the baseplate cover to install the bracket.

Figure 3-18. IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket Installation


3

Dimensions for rack mounting a 10-slot baseplate with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter

Bracket are shown in the following figure.

DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MILLIMETERS IN

18.89(480)

18.47(469)

Figure 3-19. Dimensions for 19” Rack Mounting Using IC693ACC308 Adapter Bracket

0.160 (4.06) dia. x 4

0.842 (21.4)

0.346 (8.8)Inside

1.630 (41.4)

16.850 (428)

18.122 (460.3)

3.540 (90) 4.000 (101.6)

0.280 (7.1)

1.368 (34.7)

0.439 (11.2)


Figure 3-20. IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket


3

Baseplate Comparison Table

Table 3-2. Series 90-30 Baseplate Comparison

Series 90-30 Baseplates

Catalog Number Type Size (Slots)

IC693CPU311 Embedded CPU 5



IC693CHS397 Modular CPU 5

IC693CHS391 Modular CPU 10

IC693CHS398 Expansion 5

IC693CHS392 Expansion 10

IC693CHS399 Remote 5

IC693CHS393 Remote 10

GFK-0356Q 4-1

Power Supplies

Power Supply Categories

Series 90-30 power supplies are modular types that plug into the left slot of all 90-30 baseplates.

They have been placed into two categories for the purpose of this chapter:

AC/DC Input Power Supplies

IC693PWR32 , Standard 20/240 VAC or 25 VDC input, 30 watts total output

IC693PWR330, High Capacity 20/240 VAC or 25 VDC input, 30 watts total output

DC Input-Only Power Supplies

IC693PWR322, 24/48 VDC input, 30 watts total output

IC693PWR328 48 VDC input, 30 watts total output

IC693PWR33 , High Capacity 24 VDC input, 30 watts total output

Power Supply Feature Comparison

The following table lists the features of the Series 90-30 PLC Power Supplies.

Table 4-1. Power Supply Comparison

Catalog

Number

Load

Capacity

Nominal

Input Output Capacities (Voltage/Power * )

IC693PWR32 30 Watts 00 to 240 VAC or25 VDC

+5 VDC5 watts

+24 VDC Isolated20 watts

+24 VDC Relay5 watts


+5 VDC30 watts



IC693PWR322 30 Watts 24 or 48 VDC +5 VDC5 watts



IC693PWR328 30 Watts 48 VDC +5 VDC5 watts






* Total of all outputs combined cannot exceed 30 watts.

4Chapter


4

AC/DC Input Power Supplies

IC693PWR321 Standard Power Supply, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC Input

The IC693PWR32 is a 30 watt supply that can operate from an input voltage source in the range

of 85 to 264 VAC or 00 to 300 VDC. This power supply provides three outputs:

+5 VDC output,

+24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90-30 Output Relaymodules.

Isolated +24 VDC, which is used internally by some modules, can also be used to provideexternal power for 24 VDC Input modules.

The load capacity for each output of this power supply is shown in the following table.

Table 4-2. IC693PWR321 Power Supply Capacities

Catalog

Number

Load

Capacity

Nominal



+5 VDC5 watts




STANDARD

125 VDC, 50W

+

100-240 VAC

50/60HZ 90 VA

24 VDC

OUTPUT

0.8A MAX.

INPUT

POWER SUPPLY


SERIES 90-30

GE FanucIC693PWR321

CONNECTIONS

SOURCEAC/DC POWER

FOR

INTERNAL

24VDCMODULES REQUIRING

FORPOWER SOURCE

PWR

OK

RUN

BATT

BATTERYLITHIUM

BATTERY

RS-485

SYSTEM

BATTERYBACK-UP

SERIAL PORTCOMPATIBLE

CONNECTORS

INDICATORSSTATUS

∼

Figure 4-1. Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR321

Power supplies must be installed in the leftmost slot in all baseplates.

GFK-0356Q Chapter 4 Power Supplies 4-3

4

Table 4-3. Specifications for IC693PWR321 Standard AC/DC Input Power Supply

Nominal Rated Voltage

Input Voltage Range

AC

DC

20/240 VAC or 25 VDC

85 to 264 VAC00 to 300 VDC

Input Power

(Maximum with Full Load)

90 VA with VAC Input50 W with VDC Input

Inrush Current 4A peak, 250 milliseconds maximum

Output Power 5 VDC and 24 VDC Relay: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Relay: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Isolated: 20 watts maximumNOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)

Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5. VDC nominal)Relay 24 VDC: 24 to 28 VDCIsolated 24 VDC: 2 .5 VDC to 28 VDC

Protective Limits

Overvoltage:

Overcurrent:

5 VDC output: 6.4 to 7 V5 VDC output: 4 A maximum

Holdup Time: 20 milliseconds minimum


4

IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply, 120/240 VAC/125 VDC Input

The IC693PWR330 High Capacity Power Supply is rated for 30 watts output. For applications

requiring greater +5V current capacity than is available with the standard supply

(IC693PWR321), this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed from the +5V supply. It can

operate from an input voltage source in the range of 85 to 264 VAC or 00 to 300 VDC. This

power supply provides the following outputs:

+5 VDC output.

+24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90-30 Output Relaymodules.

Isolated +24 VDC, which is used internally by some modules, can also be used to provideexternal power for 24 VDC Input modules.



Catalog

Number

Load

Capacity

Nominal



+5 VDC30 watts




100-240 VAC

PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

SYSTEMSTATUS

INDICATORS

+

PWROK

RUN

BATT

BATTERY

LITHIUMBACK-UPBATTERY

BATTERYCONNECTORS

RS-485COMPATIBLESERIAL PORT

CONNECTIONS FORAC/DC POWER SOURCE

INTERNAL POWER SOURCE FORMODULES REQUIRING 24VDC

IC693PWR330 GE Fanuc

Series 90-30

POWER SUPPLY

50/60 HZ 100VA

125VDC, 50W

INPUT

24 VDC

OUTPUT0.8A MAX.

HIGH CAPACITY

Figure 4-2. High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR330


4

Table 4-5. Specifications for IC693PWR330 High Capacity AC/DC Input Power Supply


Input Voltage Range

AC

DC

20/240 VAC or 25 VDC

85 to 264 VAC00 to 300 VDC

Input Power

(Maximum with Full Load)

00 VA with VAC Input50 W with VDC Input

Inrush Current 4A peak, 250 ms maximum

Output Power 5 VDC: 30 watts maximum

24 VDC Relay: 5 watts maximum

24 VDC Isolated: 20 watts maximumNOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)

Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5. VDC nominal)

24 VDC Relay: 24 to 28 VDC

24 VDC Isolated: 2 .5 VDC to 28 VDC

Protective Limits

Overvoltage:

Overcurrent:5 VDC output: 6.4 to 7 V

5 VDC output: 7 A maximum

Holdup Time: 20 ms minimum

Field Wiring Connections for the AC/DC Input Power Supplies

The two AC/DC input power supplies have six terminals for user connections. These connections

are described below.

AC Power Source Connections

The Hot, Neutral, and Ground wires from the 20 VAC power source or L , L2, and

Ground wires from the 240 VAC power source connect to the system through the top three

terminals of the terminal strip on the front of the power supply.


Connect the + and - wires from the 25 VDC (nominal) power source to the top two

terminals on the terminal connector. These connections are not polarity-sensitive on an

AC/DC input power supply. (However, the DC Input-only type supplies, which are

discussed later in this chapter, are polarity sensitive.)

Input Overvoltage Protection Devices

This information applies to all Series 90-30 power supplies except IC693PWR322

and IC693PWR328. The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are

connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip. This pin is normally connected to

frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory. If

overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled

by removing the jumper strap from pins 3 and 4.


4

If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the

test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after

testing by reinstalling the strap.

1

2

3

4



Screw Terminalson Terminal Board

Frame Ground


Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections

The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections to the

Isolated +24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for external circuits

(within power limitations of the supply).

Caution

If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted, the

Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation.


4

DC Input Only Power Supplies

IC693PWR322 Standard Power Supply, 24/48 VDC Input

The IC693PWR322 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 24 VDC or 48 VDC nominal

inputs. It will accept an input voltage range from 8 VDC to 56 VDC. Although it is capable of

maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 8 VDC, it will not start

with initial input voltages of less than 2 VDC. This power supply provides the following outputs:

+5 VDC output.

+24 VDC Relay power output which provides power to circuits on Series 90-30 Output Relay

modules.

Isolated +24VDC, which is used internally by some modules, can also be used to provide

external power for 24VDC Input modules.



Catalog

Number

Load

Capacity Input Output Capacities (Voltage/Power * )


+24 VDC Isolated 20watts

+24 VDC Relay 5watts


SYSTEMSTATUS

INDICATORS

+

PWROK

RUN

BATT

BATTERY


BATTERYCONNECTORS


CONNECTIONSFOR

DC POWERSOURCE

INTERNAL POWERSOURCE FOR

MODULES REQUIRING24VDC

IC693PWR322

+

GE Fanuc

Series 90-30

PROGRAMMABLE

STANDARDPOWER SUPPLY

CONTROLLER

24 VDC

OUTPUT0.8A MAX.

INPUT

24/48 VDC50 WATT


Figure 4-4. Series 90-30 24/48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR322


4

Table 4-7. Specifications for IC693PWR322 Power Supply


Input Voltage Range

Start

Run

24 or 48 VDC

2 to 56 VDC8 to 56 VDC

Input Power 50 watts maximum at full load


Output Power 5 VDC: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Relay: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Isolated: 20 watts maximumNOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)

Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5. VDC nominal)24 VDC Relay: 24 to 28 VDC24 VDC Isolated: 2 .5 VDC to 28 VDC

Protective Limits

Overvoltage:

Overcurrent;



Standards Refer to data sheet, GFK-0867B, or later version forproduct standards, and general specifications.

Calculating Input Power Requirements for IC693PWR322

The following graph is a typical 24/48 VDC power supply efficiency curve. A basic procedure for

determining efficiency of the 24/48 VDC power supply follows the figure.

5 10 15 25 30

AVERAGEINPUT

POWER(WATTS)

TOTAL OUTPUT POWER (WATTS)

50

20

10

20

30

40

45W

Figure 4-5. Typical Efficiency Curve for 24/48 VDC Power Supply

Note

Start-up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds (maximum).


4

Input Power/Current Calculation

Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in

Chapters 2 and 3.

Use the graph to determine average input power.

Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current

requirements.

Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current.

Allow for start-up surge current requirements.

Allow margins ( 0% to 20%) for variations.


4

IC693PWR328 Standard Power Supply, 48 VDC Input

The IC693PWR328 is a 30 watt output power supply designed for 48 VDC nominal input. It will

accept an input voltage range from 38 VDC to 56 VDC. This power supply provides the following

outputs:

+5 VDC output.


modules.

Isolated +24 VDC, which is used internally by some modules, can also be used to provide

external power for 24 VDC Input modules.



Catalog

Number

Load






SYSTEMSTATUS

INDICATORS

+

PWROK

RUN

BATT

BATTERY


BATTERYCONNECTORS


CONNECTIONSFOR

DC POWERSOURCE

INTERNAL POWERSOURCE FOR

MODULES REQUIRING24VDC

IC693PWR328

+

GE Fanuc

Series 90-30

PROGRAMMABLE

STANDARDPOWER SUPPLY

CONTROLLER

24 VDC

OUTPUT0.8A MAX.

INPUT

48 VDC50 WATT

PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER

Figure 4-6. Series 90-30 48 VDC Input Power Supply - IC693PWR328


4



Input Voltage Range

48 VDC38 to 56 VDC



Output Power 5 VDC: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Relay: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Isolated: 20 watts maximumNOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)

Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5. VDC nominal)24 VDC Relay: 24 to 28 VDC24 VDC Isolated: 2 .5 VDC to 28 VDC

Protective Limits

Overvoltage:

Overcurrent;





The following graph is a typical 48 VDC power supply efficiency curve. A basic procedure for

determining efficiency of the 48 VDC power supply follows the figure.

5 10 15 25 30

AVERAGE

INPUT

POWER

(WATTS)

TOTAL OUTPUT POWER (WATTS)

50

20

10

20

30

40

45W

Figure 4-7. Typical Efficiency Curve for IC693PWR328 Power Supply

Note

Start-up surge at full load is 4 amps for 250 milliseconds (maximum).


4

Input Power/Current Calculation for IC693PWR328 Power Supply

Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules in

Chapter 2.

Use the graph to determine average input power.

Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current

requirements.

Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current.

Allow for start-up surge current requirements.

Allow margins ( 0% to 20%) for variations.


4

IC693PWR331 High Capacity Power Supply, 24 VDC Input

The Series 90-30 DC input High Capacity power supply (IC693PWR33 ) is a 30 watt wide range

supply designed for 24 VDC nominal inputs. For applications requiring greater +5V current

capacity than is available with the standard supply, this supply allows all 30 watts to be consumed

from the +5 V output. It will accept an input voltage range from 2 VDC to 30 VDC. Although it

is capable of maintaining all outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as 2 VDC, it

will not start with initial input voltages of less than 8 VDC. This power supply provides the

following outputs:

+5 VDC output.


modules.

Isolated +24 VDC, which is used internally by some modules, can also be used to provide

external power for 24 VDC Input modules.



Catalog

Number

Load


IC693PWR33 30 Watts 2 to 30VDC

+5 VDC30 watts




PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLER

SYSTEMSTATUS

INDICATORS

+

PWROK

RUN

BATT

BATTERY


BATTERYCONNECTORS


CONNECTIONS FORDC POWER SOURCE

INTERNAL POWER SOURCEFORMODULES REQUIRING 24VDC

IC693PWR331 GE FanucSeries 90-30

POWER SUPPLY

24 VDC

OUTPUT0.8A MAX.

HIGH CAPACITY

+ INPUT

24 VDC50 WATT

Figure 4-8. Series 90-30 24 VDC Input High Capacity Power Supply - IC693PWR331


4



Input Voltage Range

Start

Run

24 VDC

8 to 30 VDC2 to 30 VDC


Inrush Current *

Output Power 5 VDC: 30 watts maximum **24 VDC Relay: 5 watts maximum24 VDC Isolated: 20 watts maximumNOTE: 30 watts maximum total (all three outputs)

Output Voltage 5 VDC: 5.0 VDC to 5.2 VDC (5. VDC nominal)24 VDC Relay: 9.2 to 28.8 VDC24 VDC Isolated: 9.2 VDC to 28.8 VDC

Protective Limits

Overvoltage:

Overcurrent;




* Dependent on installation and power supply impedance characteristics.

** Derate per Figure 2-22 at ambient temperatures above 50°C ( 22°F).

Current Derating for Higher Temperatures

Figure 4-9. 5 VDC Current Output Derating for Temperatures above 50°C (122°F)

10 30 55

5 VDC

CURRENT

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C)

0

°

60

4.0

5.0

6.0

6.1

4.2

4.4

4.6

4.8

5.2

5.4

5.6

5.8

20 5040


4


Use the following procedure to determine input power requirements for the 24 VDC High Capacity

Power Supply:

Determine total output power load from typical specifications listed for

individual modules at the end of this chapter.

Multiply the output power by .5 to determine the input power value.

Divide the input power value by the operating source voltage to determine the

input current requirements

Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current

Allow for start-up surge current requirements

Allow margins ( 0% to 20%) for variations

Field Wiring Connections to the DC Input-Only Power Supplies


The + and - wires from the DC power source connect to the top two terminals on the

terminal strip. The + wire should be connected to the top terminal screw, and the - wire to

the second screw (counting from the top down). The ground connection connects to the

third screw. This connection scheme is clearly marked on the front of these power

supplies.

Isolated 24 VDC Supply Output Connections

The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide connections to the

Isolated +24 volt DC output which can be used to provide power for external circuits

(within power limitations of the supply).

Caution

If the Isolated 24 VDC supply is overloaded or shorted, the

Programmable Logic Controller will stop operation.


4

Common Series 90-30 Power Supply Features

Status Indicator Lights on all Power Supplies

Four LEDs are located on the upper right front of the power supply faceplate. The purpose of these

LEDs is as follows:

PWR

The top green LED, labeled PWR, provides an indication of the operating state of the

power supply. The LED is ON when the power supply has a correct source of power and

is operating properly, and OFF when a power supply fault occurs or power is not applied.

OK

The second green LED, labeled OK, is steady ON if the PLC is operating properly, and

OFF if a problem is detected by the PLC.

RUN

The third green LED, labeled RUN, is steady ON when the PLC is in the RUN mode.

BATT

The bottom red LED, labeled BATT, will be ON if the memory backup battery voltage is

too low to maintain the memory under a loss of power condition; otherwise it remains

OFF. If this LED is ON, the Lithium battery must be replaced before removing power

from the rack, or PLC memory may be lost.

Input Overvoltage Protection Devices

This information applies to all Series 90-30 power supplies except IC693PWR322

and IC693PWR328. The overvoltage protection devices for this power supply are

connected internally to pin 4 on the user terminal strip. This pin is normally connected to

frame ground (pin 3) with the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory. If

overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled

by removing the jumper strap from pins 3 and 4.

If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage protection must be disabled during the

test by removing the terminal strip jumper strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after

testing by reinstalling the strap.


4

1

2

3

4



Screw Terminalson Terminal Board

Frame Ground


Output Voltage Connections to Backplane (All Supplies)

The following figure illustrates how these three output voltages are connected internally to the

backplane on the baseplate. The voltage and power required by modules installed on the baseplate

is supplied through the baseplate connectors.

POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE

DC

DC

R24V

RGND

P5V

LGND

FGND

2 POINTCONNECTION

SINGLEPOINT

CONNECTION

USED INTERNALLY ON ANALOG INPUT,ANALOG OUTPUT, AND DC INPUT MODULES.

ALSO AVAILABLE ON EXTERNALTERMINALS ON DC INPUT MODULES ANDON FRONT OF POWER SUPPLY FORUSER APPLICATIONS.

USED INTERNALLY ONRELAY OUTPUTS

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONTO EARTH GROUND.

USED INTERNALLY ON CPU,INPUTS, OUTPUTS, ETC.

USE/COMMENTS

I 24V

IGND

Figure 4-11. Interconnection of Power Supplies


4

Overcurrent Protection (all Supplies)

The 5V logic output is electronically limited to 3.5 amps (7 amps for high capacity supplies). An

overload (including short circuits) is sensed internally and causes the supply to shut down. The

supply will continually try to restart until the overload is removed. An internal fuse in the input

line is provided as a backup. The supply will usually shut down before the fuse blows. The fuse

also protects against internal supply faults.

Timing Diagram

The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the DC input to the DC outputs and to the

Power Supply OK signal (PSOK) generated by the power supply. When power is first applied, the

PSOK signal goes false. This line remains false for a minimum of 20 msec after the +5V bus is

within specifications, then it becomes true.

If input power is interrupted, the +5V bus will remain within specifications and PSOK will remain

true a minimum of 0 milliseconds. PSOK then goes false. The +5V bus will remain within

specifications for an additional 4 milliseconds minimum to allow an orderly shutdown of the

system.

(5.1V TYP.)+5V OUTPUT

INPUTPOWER

ON

INPUTPOWER

OFFMOMENTARY

POWERLOSS

VOLTAGEOVERSHOOT

5% (MAX)

VOLTAGEOVERSHOOT

5% (MAX)

97% (MIN) HOLDUP

TIME*

20MS

(MIN)

HOLDUP

TIME

10MS

(MIN)

4MS(MIN)

4MS(MIN)

20MS

(MIN)

PSOK

*HOLD-UP TIME: 20 ms, minimum for IC693PWR321/330

14 ms, minimum for IC693PWR322

10 ms, minimum for IC693PWR331/332

Figure 4-12. Timing Diagram for all Series 90-30 Power Supplies


4

CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply (All Supplies)

A 5-pin D-type female connector, accessed by opening the hinged door on the right front of the

power supply, provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to connect to:

A programmer (usually a personal computer) running GE Fanuc PLC programming software.

The GE Fanuc Hand-Held Programmer.

Other serial devices.

a43832


Figure 4-13. Serial Port Connector

The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate

that also contains the CPU. The serial port is not functional on a power supply that is installed

in an expansion or remote baseplate.

Any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC power from the Series 90-30 power

supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption (see “Power

Supply Loading Calculations” in Chapter 2).

CPU Serial Port Information

The serial port connector on the power supply accesses the CPU serial port, which is a feature of all

Series 90-30 CPUs. See Chapter 5, “CPUs” for information on this serial port.


4

Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)

The long-life Lithium battery (IC693ACC30 ) used to maintain the contents of the CMOS RAM

memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the bottom of the power

supply faceplate. This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached to the inside of this cover.

The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two Berg male

connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board. This battery can be replaced with

power applied to the PLC.

BATTERY

BATTERYCONNECTORS


Figure 4-14. Backup Battery for RAM Memory

Caution

If a Low Battery Warning (BATT LED turns ON) occurs, replace the

battery located in the power supply before removing power from the rack.

Otherwise, there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the

application program will be cleared from memory.

Additional Battery Information

For additional information on the memory backup battery, see the chapter, “Memory Backup and

Backup Battery.”

GFK-0356Q 5-1

CPUs

CPU Types for Series 90-30 PLCs

There are numerous CPU models available for the Series 90-30 PLC which differ in speed, I/O

capacity, size of user memory, and advanced features. This variety of models gives a system

designer considerable flexibility in choosing the one best suited to the system being designed.

There are two basic types of CPUs, Embedded and Modular. The embedded types fulfill the need

for a good low cost PLC, but lack the power, expandability, and versatility of the modular systems.

In the embedded types, the CPU is built into the baseplate. In the modular types, the CPU is

contained inside a plug-in module.

Embedded CPUs

The embedded CPUs are part of an embedded CPU baseplate. In these products, the CPU and

memory integrated circuit chips are soldered to the backplane board of the baseplate. This chapter

discusses the CPU features of these products. Details about the baseplate features are located in

Chapter 2. There are three different embedded CPUs: Model 311 (IC693CPU311), Model 313

(IC693CPU313), and Model 323 (IC693CPU323). The embedded CPUs have the following basic

features:

The CPU type cannot be changed. It is soldered to the backplane board in the baseplate.

They do not support the use of Expansion or Remote racks, so an embedded CPU baseplate

does not have an expansion connector like the modular baseplates do. This means that if you

have an application that requires more than 10 modules, you will have to use a modular CPU

system.

The models 311 and 313 are 5-slot baseplates, and the model 323 is a 10-slot baseplate. Since

they do not require a plug-in CPU module, all numbered slots, including Slot 1, can be used

for I/O or Option modules.

The memory back-up battery is located in the Power Supply module; so if the Power Supply is

unplugged from the baseplate, the battery will be disconnected from the memory circuits,

which are located on the backplane circuit board. However, the backplane circuit board

contains a high value capacitor, called a ”super capacitor,” that can store enough charge to

maintain the memory circuits for a short period of time if the Power Supply is removed or its

battery is disconnected. See the section “Super Capacitor Memory Backup” in Chapter 6.

These CPUs do not have a time-of-day (TOD) clock.

5Chapter


5

a44563A

POWER

1

BASE 5-

USER

PROGRAMMABLCONTROLLER

SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAPROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



1 HOUR

WITH CPU


Description LabelSays "With CPU"

Replaceable System (firmware) PROM Socket for Optional Program PROM

I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

NON-CPU SLOTS

CP

U

Figure 5-1. Models 311 and 313 (5-Slot) Embedded CPU Baseplates

Modular CPUs

The modular CPUs consist of a CPU, memory, and associated integrated circuit chips soldered to

circuit board which is mounted in a plug-in module. The modular CPUs include the model CPU331

and higher. The modular CPUs have the following basic features:

A CPU module must be installed in Slot 1 of a modular CPU baseplate. Slot 1 is a unique size

and type that only fits a CPU module (or special Option modules). Slot 1 is labeled CPU/1.

Details on modular CPU baseplates are located in Chapter 2.

Modular CPUs support expansion and remote baseplates, so A 25-pin D-type female

expansion connector is located at the right end of the CPU baseplate for connection to an

expansion or remote baseplate.

Since the CPU is modular, it can readily be replaced or changed to a different type if desired.

Only one CPU is allowed per system, and it must be mounted in a CPU baseplate. If more

than one baseplate is used in a system, the additional ones must be either expansion or remote

types that do not contain a CPU.

A modular CPU baseplate is always assigned, by default, Rack Number 0.

All have a time-of-day (TOD) clock.

GFK-0356Q Chapter 5 CPUs 5-3

5

CPU/1POWER

E

X

P

A

N

S

I

O

N

BASE 5-SLOT


USER PROGRAM

CAUTION

SUPPLY

AND REGISTER

VALUES MAY BE

LOST IF POWERSUPPLY IS

REMOVED FOR

LONGER THAN1 HOUR


CPU Slot (Slot 1)

I/O BusExpansionConnector

CPU

NON-CPU SLOTS

I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5


General CPU Features

Microprocessor

The microprocessor type varies by the CPU model:

80188 microprocessor for CPU models 311/313/323/331

80C188XL microprocessor for CPU models 340/341

80386EX microprocessor for CPU models 350-364

586 microprocessor for CPU model 374

The microprocessor provides all fundamental sweep and operation control, and execution of all

non-boolean (as used here, the term boolean refers to discrete logic such as contacts and coils)

functions. Boolean functions in the modular CPUs are handled by a dedicated VLSI (Very Large

Scale Integration) Instruction Sequencer Coprocessor (ISCP). All Series 90-30 CPUs use RAM

working memory.

CPU Serial Port (Connector on Power Supply)

A 15-pin D-type female connector, accessed by opening the hinged door on the right front of the

power supply, provides the connection to a CPU serial port which is used to connect to:

a programmer (usually a personal computer) running GE Fanuc PLC programming software.

The IC690ACC901 Miniconverter/cable kit is a convenient way to access this port. See

Appendix D for details.

the IC693PRG300 GE Fanuc Hand-Held Programmer (CPU374 does not support the HHP.)

See Chapter 11 for details.

the IC200ACC003 EZ Program Store device. See GFK-1811 for details. (CPU374 only)

other serial devices.


5


Figure 5-3. CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply

This serial port is RS-485 compatible, and uses the GE Fanuc SNP (Series Ninety Protocol)

protocol (slave only). Breakfree SNP became the default protocol on all serial ports on the

Series 90-30 CPUs, starting with firmware release 9.00 for CPUs 350–364, and firmware

release 8.20 for CPUs 311–341. For details, see page 5-13.

The serial port connector is only functional in a power supply that is installed in a baseplate

that also contains the CPU. It is not functional on a power supply that is installed in an

expansion or remote baseplate.

Any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC power from the Series 90-30 power

supply must be included in the calculation for maximum power consumption (see the heading

“Power Supply Loading Calculations” in Chapter 12).

All Series 90-30 CPUs have this serial port arrangement. The 351, 352, and 363 CPUs have

additional serial ports, described in a later section of this chapter.

Caution

Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met for

connections to this serial port. Common mode conditions that exceed those

specified will result in errors in transmission and/or damage to Series 90

PLC components. Common mode specifications are discussed in

Appendix A. When the common mode voltage specification is exceeded, a

port isolator such as the GE Fanuc IC690ACC903 must be used. See

Appendix G for details on this port isolator.

Memory Volatility

The term volatility refers to the issue of whether or not a certain memory type retains or loses its

contents (data) when power is removed from it.

Volatile memory - memory that loses its contents when power is removed. RAM memory is

inherently volatile. Therefore, when the PLC is turned off, a backup battery is necessary if

data loss in RAM memory is to be prevented.

Non-volatile memory - memory that retains its contents when power is removed. The various

types of PROM (Programmable Read-Only Memory) memory are non-volatile.


5

RAM Memory

Every Series 90-30 CPU uses RAM memory for its ”working memory.” The RAM chips used are

of the CMOS type. CMOS RAM is an acronym for Complimentary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor,

Random Access Memory. CMOS RAM is a relatively fast, low power memory that can be easily

examined (read) and changed (written to).

In the embedded CPU models, RAM memory is mounted on the backplane board. In the modular

CPU models, RAM memory is mounted inside the CPU module. A backup battery is usually used

to preserve the contents of RAM memory when power is off.

RAM Memory Backup/Backup Battery Information

Please see Chapter 6 for the following information:

RAM memory backup recommendations.

Backup battery information such as estimated life, replacing, determining battery age using

date codes, etc.

Running without a backup battery.

Low battery warning methods.

Programmable Read-Only Memory (PROM) Types

There are three types of PROM devices used in Series 90-30 CPUs:

EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. It is a plug-in integrated circuit memory

device that can be erased with an ultraviolet light. EPROMs can be read when installed in the PLC,

however in order to write new data to them, they must be removed from the PLC and written to

using an external PROM burning device.

EEPROM: Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. It is a plug-in integrated

circuit memory device that can be erased and written to while installed in the PLC.

Flash Memory: A variation of the EEPROM type memory. It also is an integrated circuit device

that can be erased and written to while installed in the PLC. One advantage of CPUs having flash

memory storage of firmware, is that firmware can be updated by writing from a Personal Computer

through a PLC serial port to flash memory. No modules have to be removed for flash firmware

upgrade.

Uses of PROM devices in the 90-30 CPUs

PROM-type devices are used in two ways in the 90-30 CPUs:

To store CPU firmware

To store user data, which consists of program, configuration, and register data.

The following table shows the types of PROM devices each CPU uses.


5

Table 5-1. CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations

CPU

Firmware

(standard)

EPROM

(for user memory)

EEPROM

(for user memory)

Flash

(for user memory)

CPU311 EPROM Optional Optional N/A




CPU340 EPROM N/A N/A Optional

CPU341 EPROM *Optional * Optional *Optional

CPU350 Flash N/A N/A Standard







* Early versions of the CPU341 support optional EPROM and optionalEEPROM only. Starting with hardware version IC693CPU341-J and Firmwareversion 4.61, only optional Flash is supported.

CPU Firmware

The CPU firmware contains the basic operating instructions for the PLC. Firmware is developed

by a GE Fanuc product engineering group. It is stored in either EPROM or Flash memory,

depending on the particular CPU.

CPU Firmware Upgrade (Update)

From time to time, new firmware is released. A new firmware version may contain support for

new features or improvements to existing features. Once a new version of CPU firmware is

released, all new CPU modules will be sold with that version. The Technical Support section of

the GE Fanuc Web site lists CPU revision histories, matching version numbers to associated

features. See Chapter 13 for information on the GE Fanuc Web site. Users who could benefit from

a new firmware release may choose to upgrade their CPU by installing new firmware. Upgrades

come in two formats, depending on the type of CPU to be upgraded. The ”CPU Firmware and

PROM Configuration” table in this chapter shows which type of firmware storage device each CPU

has. The two types are:

EPROM - For CPUs with firmware stored in EPROM, the upgrade is done by replacing the

CPU’s EPROM chips(s). The upgrade kit contains new EPROM chip(s), update labels, and

installation instructions. To upgrade the EPROM in an embedded CPU system, the module in

slot 1 must be unplugged to gain access to the PROM socket on the baseplate. In the case of a

modular CPU, the CPU must be unplugged and disassembled.

Flash - For CPUs with firmware stored in Flash, the upgrade is done by copying a new

firmware file to the CPU’s Flash memory. An upgrade kit may be purchased from GE Fanuc.

The upgrade kit contains the necessary files, update labels, and instructions. This method does

not require disassembling the module. The file downloading is done either through the port on


5

the power supply, or through a port on the front of the CPU module (if it has one). The

applicable method will be documented in your upgrade kit instructions. Downloadable

firmware upgrade files are also found in the Technical Support area of the GE Fanuc Web site.

See Chapter 13 for Web site information.

To order an upgrade kit, write down the full catalog number of your module from the module

identification label on the side of the module, determine your current firmware revision level, then

call your PLC distributor. If you are not sure what firmware version you currently have, see the

heading on the next page “Determining CPU Revision Levels (Versions).”

Flash Firmware Upgrade Procedure

The operating system firmware is updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to the

applicable PLC serial port and running the PC Loader software included with the firmware floppy

disk.

The computer used for this task should be an IBM AT compatible or better PC with a minimum

640K of RAM, one 3.5” or high density 5.25” floppy drive, MS-DOS version 3.3 or later, a hard

drive, and an RS-232 serial port. In addition, a miniconverter/serial cable is required. The following

miniconverter/serial cable kit is available:

IC690ACC901, Miniconverter Kit (RS-232/RS-485) with cable and 9-pin to 25-pin adapter.

(This product is documented in Appendix D.)

Determining CPU Revision Levels (Versions)

If you plan to make changes to your system, you will need to know if your CPU can support those

changes. The features and capabilities of your CPU are determined by its revision levels (hardware

and firmware). This section discusses methods that you can use to determine your CPU’s revision

levels and associated features and capabilities.

Direct Methods

Obtain the information from the Important Product Information (IPI) sheet that came with your

CPU. However, if your CPU firmware has been upgraded, the IPI will not indicate the current

revision level.

The surest way to determine a CPU’s firmware revision level is to read it from the CPU by

using your programmer. Your programmer must be connected to the PLC and be in Online or

Monitor mode, and the PLC must be powered up. For example, on the Logicmaster ”PLC

STATUS and CONTROL” screen is an item called ”SOFTWARE REVISION.” The data

displayed in that field (such as 6.04) is the firmware revision level. See the Logicmaster 90-30

Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466 (or the user’s manual for the programming

software you use), for additional details.

Indirect Method

Check the catalog number printed on the module identification label on the side of the module.

On all Series 90-30 modules, this catalog number indicates the module’s revision level(s). For

some CPUs, the catalog number contains a single letter at the end to indicate the CPU’s overall

revision level. For example,


5

IC693CPU341-J

This tells us that the module has a revision level J. Later CPU modules are produced with two

revision letters, such as:

IC693CPU351-EK

The first letter stands for the hardware revision level and the second for the firmware revision

level.

These letters can be cross-referenced to the firmware version. A revision history list for Series

90-30 products, including CPUs, can be found in the GE Fanuc web site technical support area

(www.gefanuc.com/support/) that cross-references revision letters, firmware versions, and

related features. Also, if you have access to the progression of IPIs that were issued for the

particular CPU (these are available on the GE Fanuc PLC InfoLink CD-ROM) you can find

the desired cross-reference. Of course, you can also contact your distributor or GE Fanuc for

help.

If your firmware has been upgraded in the past, a small label that comes in the upgrade kit

should be attached to the side of the module next to the module identification label to indicate

the current firmware revision level. However, the label could have been forgotten; so to be

sure, you may want to read the information from the CPU with a programmer as described in

the “Direct Method” above. On models with EPROM firmware, the firmware revision level

will also be printed on the EPROM.

EPROM and EEPROM User Program Storage Options

The Model 311, 313, 323, 331, and an earlier version of the Model 341 CPUs have a User PROM

option for storing user application programs, register data, and configuration data in non-volatile

memory. Application programs are usually developed in a CPU’s battery-backed RAM memory

and executed from this RAM memory. But, if additional program integrity, or operation of the

PLC without a battery is desired, an optional EEPROM or EPROM can be installed in a spare

socket (labeled PROGRAM PROM) on the embedded CPU baseplates or in a socket inside the

Model 331 CPU module (and inside the early versions of Model 341 CPU prior to hardware

version IC693CPU341-J and firmware release 4.61). The Model 331 CPU module (and the early

versions of Model 341) has a jumper labeled JP1 located next to the EEPROM/EPROM socket to

allow you to select either EEPROM or EPROM. These jumper positions are shown below.

Jumper Selects

3 - 2 EEPROM

2 - 1 EPROM

Comparing EPROM and EEPROM Features

For one-time applications, an EEPROM is the more practical of the two. It can be created in the

PLC itself and doesn’t require any additional outside equipment. An EPROM is not as convenient

to create. It must be created outside the PLC using an EPROM burner. Because an EPROM is less

expensive than an EEPROM, if you need to reproduce multiple copies of a program to use on a

large number of identical controls, it may be cost effective to use EPROMs, especially if you

already have an EPROM burner.


5

Procedure for Creating an EPROM

1. Install an EEPROM in the PROM socket of the PLC you will use to develop the application

program.

2. Develop and debug the program in RAM memory, then write it to the EEPROM.

3. Remove the EEPROM from the PLC and install it in the EPROM burner as a master to make

one or more EPROMs.

4. Install the blank EPROM in the EPROM burner and copy the program on the EEPROM to the

blank EPROM.

5. Install the EPROM in the PLC’s PROM socket, then copy its contents into RAM memory.

The EPROM then serves as an on-board backup to RAM memory.

Note: Your CPU can be configured to load the application program stored in the PROM device

automatically into RAM memory when the CPU is powered-up. See “Running Without a

Memory Backup Battery” in Chapter 6 for details.

Caution

If PROM is configured (on the CPU configuration screen) as the power-up

program source and a PROM device is not present in the PROM socket, or a

blank PROM is in the socket, on a power-up cycle, a blank program will be

copied into the CPU’s RAM memory and the program in RAM memory will

be lost. Always keep a backup copy of your current program files in case of

an emergency.

EEPROM and EPROM devices, listed in the following table, are available from GE Fanuc.

Table 5-2. EPROM and EEPROM Catalog Numbers

Catalog Number Description

GE Fanuc

Part Number

Third Party Source

Vendor Part Number

IC693ACC305 (Qty 4) 28C256 EEPROM, 350ns 44A725999-000 XICOR X28C256PXICOR X28C256P25XICOR X28HC256P-15

IC693ACC306 (Qty 4) 32Kx8 UV EPROM, 150ns 44A723379-000 NEC PD27C256AD-15Atmel AT27C256-15DC1Toshiba TC57256AD-15Hitachi HN27C256AG-15AMD AM27C256-150DCIntel TD27C256A-1

Flash Memory

The Model 340, 341 (later versions), 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, 364, and 374 CPUs have Flash

memory for user program storage. (Note that versions of the Model 341 CPU prior to firmware

release 4.61 had EEPROM memory.) The Read/Write/Verify process for user programs is the

same for Flash memory as it is for EEPROM operations. Flash memory operations (Read, Write,

or Verify) are accessed from the Program Utilities Function menu or from another Program

Utilities screen in the Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software.


5

Series 90-30 CPU Capacities

The following table describes the maximum capacities and operating features for the Series 90-30

PLC CPU models. For State Logic CPUs, see “System Specifications for Series 90-30 State Logic

CPUs” in Chapter 9.

Table 5-3. Series 90-30 CPU Capacities

CPU

Model

Speed,

(MHz) Processor

Input

Points

Output

Points

Register

Memory

User Program

Memory

(Maximum)

Floating

Point

Math

CPU311 10 80188 160 1 160 1 1K (Bytes) 6K (Bytes) no



CPU331 10 80188 512 512 4K (Bytes) 16K (Bytes) no

CPU340 20 80C188XL 512 512 19.9K (Bytes) 32K (Bytes) no

CPU341 20 80C188XL 512 512 19.9K (Bytes) 80K (Bytes) no

CPU350 25 80386EX 2048 2048 19.9K (Bytes) 32K (Bytes) yes

CPU351 25 80386EX 2048 2048 Note 3 Note 4 yes

CPU352 25 80386EX 2048 2048 Note 3 Note 4 yes5




CPU374 133 586 2048 2048 Note 3 Note 4 yes5

1Maximum of 160 combined I + O points.

2 Maximum of 320 combined I + O points.

3 Configurable from 128 to 32,640 words, in 128 word increments.

4 Depends on assigned values for configurable word memory (%R, %AQ, %AI). Maximum is 240K Bytes.

5 CPU352 and CPU374 have hardware-based floating point math. Other CPUs have firmware-based floating point math.

User Memory Addresses (References)

Data in the Series 90-30 PLC programs is referenced by its memory address. A reference indicates

the way that data is stored in the PLC. A reference specifies both a memory type and a precise

location (number) within that memory type. For example:

%I00001 specifies address 1 in input memory.

%R00256 specifies address 256 in register memory.

Difference Between a Memory Address and a Nickname

The % symbol is used to distinguish memory addresses from nicknames. For example, %I17 (or%I000017) is a memory address. The similar term, I17 (it has no % sign), is viewed by the PLC asa nickname and could be used with most memory addresses. For example, if you had a motor inyour plant called “Infeed No. 17,” and it was commonly referred to as ”I17” by the people in yourplant, you might wish to use I17 as the nickname for the output coil (%Q11) that turns on thatmotor. You are allowed to do so because the PLC can distinguish between the nickname, I17 (yournickname for memory address %Q11), and memory address %I17.


5

User Memory Reference Types

The user references referred to in the following tables are explained in the Series 90-30 PLC CPU

Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467.

Table 5-4. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 311-341

Reference (Memory) Type Model 311/313/323 Model 331/340/341

Reference Range Size Reference Range Size

User program logic Not applicable 6K bytes Not applicable CPU331: 16K bytesCPU340: 32K bytesCPU341: 80K bytes

Discrete inputs %I0001 – %I0320* 512 bits %I0001 – %I0512 512 bits

Discrete outputs %Q0001 – %Q0320* 512 bits %Q0001 – %Q0512 512 bits

Discrete globals %G0001 – %G1280 1280 bits %G0001 – %G1280 1280 bits

Internal coils %M0001 – %M1024 1024 bits %M0001 – %M1024 1024 Bits

Temporary coils %T0001 – %T0256 256 bits %T0001 – %T0256 256 bits

System status references %S0001 – %S0032 32 bits %S0001 – %S0032 32 bits

%SA001 – %SA032 32 bits %SA0001 – %SA0032 32 bits

%SB001 – %SB032 32 bits %SB0001 – %SB0032 32 bits

%SC001 – %SC032 32 bits %SC0001 – %SC0032 32 bits

System register references %R0001 – %R0512 (311) 512 words %R0001 – %R2048 2K words (331)

%R0001 – %R1024 (313) 1024 words %R0001 – %R9999 9999 words (340/341)

Analog inputs %AI001 – %AI064 64 words %AI0001 – %AI0128 128 words (331)

%AI0001 – %AI1024 1024 words (340/341)

Analog outputs %AQ001 – %AQ032 32 words %AQ001 – %AQ064 64 words (331)

%AQ001 – %AQ256 256 words (340/341)

System registers** %SR001 – %SR016 16 words %SR001 – %SR016 16 words

* 160 physical I/O maximum with 16 point modules installed; 320 maximum with 32 point modules installed.

** May be viewed only with a Hand-Held Programmer (see the Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual, GFK-0402) ; may not be

referenced in a user’s logic program.


5

Table 5-5. Range and Size of User References for CPU Models 350 through 374

Reference Type Model 350/351/352/360/363/364/374 CPU

Reference Range Size

Maximum User memory* Not applicable 240K Bytes, configurable(CPU350: 32K Bytes, fixed)

Discrete inputs %I0001 – %I2048 2048 bits

Discrete outputs %Q0001 – %Q2048 2048 bits

Discrete globals %G0001 – %G1280 1280 bits

Internal coils %M0001 – %M4096 4096 bits

Temporary coils %T0001 – %T0256 256 bits

System status references %S0001 – %S0032 32 bits

%SA001 – %SA032 32 bits

%SB001 – %SB032 32 bits

%SC001 – %SC032 32 bits

System register references %R0001 – %R32640* 128 – 32,640 words, configurable. (CPU350: 9999 words, fixed,)

Analog inputs %AI001– %AI32640* 128 – 32,640 words, configurable. (CPU350: 2048 words, fixed)

Analog outputs %AQ001–%AQ32640* 128 – 32,640 words, configurable. (CPU350: 512 words, fixed)

System registers** %SR001 – %SR028 28 words

* Depends on user-defined value(s) of configurable memory.

** May be viewed only with a Hand-Held Programmer (see the Hand-Held Programmer User’s

Manual, GFK-0402) ; may not be referenced in a user’s logic program.

Application Program Compatibility

Programs that have been developed on Series 90-30 CPUs 311-341 will automatically be

translated by the programming software when used on CPUs 350-374. Programs created or

translated for CPUs 350-374 will automatically be translated when used with CPUs 311-341;

however, be aware that some CPUs support features, such as floating-point math or larger memory

sizes, that are not supported by other CPUs. In those cases, attempting to load a program to a CPU

not supporting one or more of the programmed or configured features will result in an error.

However, in some cases it may be possible to edit the program and configuration to make them

compatible with the targeted CPU.

CPU Time-of-Day (TOD) Clock Accuracy

The accuracy of the Series 90-30 time-of-day clock is ?9 seconds per day across the rated

operating temperature range of 0-60°C. The accuracy is relatively stable at any fixed temperature.

For applications that require greater accuracy, the following suggestions are furnished:

For an installation where the temperature of the CPU is stable, measure the amount of time

drift for a 24 hour period, then program a “correction” factor into the ladder program to add or

subtract seconds periodically to keep the CPU time accurate. The instruction to use in this

case is Service Request #7, “Change/Read Time-of-Day Clock.” At the appropriate time, a


5

Service Request would read the TOD clock, an ADD instruction would add the correction

value to it, and another Service Request would write the new value to the TOD clock. A

possible drawback to this method is that if you replace your CPU you will have to determine a

new correction factor. Also, this method is affected by temperature changes, so its success is

based on holding the CPU’s ambient temperature stable.

If more accuracy is needed, the PLC could be interfaced to a third party solution such as a

radio link or Global Positioning System (GPS) satellite system.

Breakfree SNP Protocol

Breakfree SNP became the default protocol on all serial ports on the Series 90-30 CPUs, starting

with Firmware Release 9.00 for CPUs 350–364, and Firmware Release 8.20 for CPUs 311–341.

The breakfree feature makes the protocol compatible with a wider variety of modems. This feature

is compatible with existing SNP master units such as computers running PLC programming

software, or PCM modules. In a few applications, primarily where a combination of multi-drop

SNP communications and very short PLC sweep times are used, users may desire, for performance

reasons, to disable breakfree SNP. Breakfree SNP can be disabled and re-enabled via

Communications Request instructions. The Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual,

GFK-0582 documents these Communications Request instructions.

350–374 CPUs

The 350–374 group of CPUs was developed to meet the needs of customers requiring increased

memory size, faster processing speed, and additional features not available on the 311–341 CPUs.

Compatibility With Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) and Memory Card

The user program in CPUs 350—374 cannot be viewed or edited with the Series 90-30 Hand-

Held Programmer (IC693PRG300). You must use one of the GE Fanuc programming

software packages to create or edit CPU 350—-374 user programs.

The Series 90 Memory Card (used on the Hand-Held Programmer) is not supported by CPUs

350—374.

The only operations supported by the HHP’s PROGRAM mode are writing to and reading from

the CPU’s flash memory.

Although the HHP’s CONFIG mode can be used to perform basic configuration of these

CPUs, it cannot handle specialized parameters such as those pertaining to the embedded

Ethernet Interface in the CPU364/374.

The HHP can be used to change the Time-of-Day Clock unless the Mem Protect configuration

parameter is set to Enabled and the keylock switch is in the ON (Protect) position.

The HHP can be used to edit data values in %R registers.

The HHP can be used to invoke or clear overrides on CPUs 350—364

The CPU374 does not support the HHP.


5

350–374 CPU Advanced Features

Advanced

features of

350 – 374

CPUs

Feature CPU350 CPU351 CPU352 CPU360 CPU363 CPU364 CPU374

Memory 32Kfixed

240K1

Configurable240K1

Configurable240K1

Configurable240K1

Configurable240K1

Configurable240K1

Configurable

Serial Ports 1 3 3 1 3 1 1

Floating-Point Math

Yes1

(Firmware)Yes1

(Firmware)Yes(Hardware)

Yes1

(Firmware)Yes1

(Firmware)Yes1

(Firmware)Yes1

(Hardware)

FlashMemory

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Key Switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

SequentialEventRecorder

Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1

EmbeddedEthernetInterface

No No No No No Yes1 Yes1

1 Denotes features supported in CPU firmware release 9.0 and later.

Details of 350 – 374 CPU Advanced Features

Upgrading Older CPUs

Older versions of the CPU firmware do not support some of the features in the table above (see

table footnote). These features may be added to older 350 – 360 CPUs by upgrading them to CPU

firmware version 9.0 or later. (The 363 and 364 CPUs were equipped with firmware version 9.0

when released as new products.) No hardware changes are required for this upgrade. For more

information on the subject of upgrading, see the heading “CPU Firmware Upgrades” earlier in this

chapter.

Memory/Configurable Memory

Starting with CPU firmware version 9.0, the 351–374 CPUs have 240K of user-configurable

memory. The CPU350 has 32K of fixed memory. The configurable memory feature lets you

specify the amount of %R, %AI, and %AQ word memory. Discrete memory (%I, %Q, %M, etc.)

sizes are not configurable. Word memory can be configured from 128 to 32,640 words in 128

word increments, which gives 255 possible sizes. The amount of memory available for a user

program depends on how much is configured for word memory.

Note: Configurable Memory has limited support in Logicmaster Version 9.02and later (limited to 16K %R words, 8K %AI words, and 8K %AQwords), and full support in Control (Version 2.2 and later), VersaPro (allversions), and CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer-PLC(all versions).


5

Additional Serial Ports (CPU351, CPU352, CPU363)

Although all Series 90-30 CPUs have a serial port that is accessed through the connector on the

power supply, the CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 each have two additional serial ports. The

connectors for these additional serial ports are mounted on the front of each CPU. These two built-

in serial ports eliminate the need for the CPU to access serial ports across the PLC backplane,

resulting in better system performance. These two ports support the SNP/SNP-X master and slave

protocols (see “Breakfree SNP Protocol” on page 5-13.), RTU slave protocol (in Firmware Version

8.0 and later), and the Serial I/O feature (in Firmware Version 8.0 and later) that lets you create a

custom serial output. Instructions on how to use these ports can be found in the Series 90 PLC

Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-0582C or later.

Floating-Point Math

All Series 90-30 CPUs can work with integer numbers. (The set of integer numbers consists of all

positive and negative whole numbers, including zero.) The floating-point math feature enables a

CPU to work with decimal numbers in addition to integer numbers. It also provides trigonometric,

logarithmic, exponential, and radian conversion functions. Floating-point math is also referred to as

“real number” math. The CPU352 and CPU374 have always had hardware-based floating-point

math capabilities due to the built-in math co-processor chip. Starting with CPU firmware release

9.0, all of the other CPUs in the 350–364 CPU group were provided with firmware-based floating-

point math capability. Although there is a speed difference between the hardware-based floating-

point math of the CPU352 and CPU374 and the firmware-based type, this will not be significant to

many users. For applications where faster performance is important, the CPU352 and CPU374 are

the best choice. The floating-point math instructions are explained in the Series 90-30 PLC CPU

Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467K or later.

Flash Memory

All of the 350–374 CPUs have built-in Flash memory, which serves two purposes:

It provides non-volatile storage of the CPU firmware.

It gives you the option of storing program, configuration, and register data in non-volatile

Flash memory. Two ways of using this memory are: (1) to store an on-board backup copy of

user memory (although we still recommend that you keep a separate backup copy of your

complete program folder), and (2) for running in a battery-less scheme. For details, please see

Chapter 6.

Keyswitch

All 350 – 374 CPUs have a keyswitch; however, some versions of the CPU firmware do not

support all of the keyswitch features (see the section “Determining CPU Revision Levels” earlier in

this chapter). These differences are described in this section. Note that the keyswitches on some of

these CPUs are labeled ON/RUN and OFF/STOP and on others are just labeled ON and OFF.

Regardless of the labeling, all of these keyswitches work as described below:

Flash Memory Protection: This standard, hard-wired feature can be used to prevent Flash

memory from being changed by unauthorized people (people without a key). When the key

switch is in the ON position, Flash memory cannot be changed (written to). This keyswitch

feature will always be in effect, regardless of how the next two configurable features are set.


5

Run/Stop (configurable): This feature was introduced in CPU firmware release 7.0. It is, by

default, disabled. It is not functional unless the R/S Switch: parameter on the CPU

configuration screen is set to Enabled. This feature, when enabled, lets you stop the PLC by

turning the key switch to OFF, or start the PLC running by turning the key switch to ON (if

there are no faults).

If the PLC has a non-fatal fault, turning the key switch from OFF to ON will cause the RUN

light on the power supply to flash for 5 seconds. If you again turn the key switch OFF, then

ON during the 5 seconds, the fault will clear and the PLC will go into run mode (and the RUN

light will stay ON).

If the PLC has a fatal fault, you will not be able to use the keyswitch to either clear the fault

or put the PLC into run mode. You will have to correct the cause of the fault before being able

to resume operation.

RAM Memory and Override Protection (configurable): This feature was introduced in

CPU firmware release 8.0. This feature is, by default, disabled. It is not functional unless the

Mem Protect: parameter on the CPU configuration screen is set to Enabled. If this feature is

enabled and the keyswitch is ON, (1) user RAM memory cannot be changed (2) discrete points

cannot be overridden, and (3) the TOD clock cannot be changed with the Hand Held

Programmer (however, the TOD clock can still be changed using programming software).

Protect your keys. Each new 350–374 CPU is supplied with a pair of keys for the key switch. If

you use one or more of the key switch protection features described above, we recommend you

carefully guard your keys. If they are lost, misplaced, or stolen, you may be locked out from

working on your PLC, and unauthorized persons may have access to it. Replacement keys can be

purchased under part number 44A736756-G01. This kit contains three sets of CPU keys. All 350–

374 CPUs use the same key.

Of course, you can choose to not use any of the keyswitch protection features, in which case you

can leave the keyswitch set to the OFF position, and leave the two configurable keyswitch features

set at their default (disabled) settings. Then, you will not need to use a key to access the PLC.

Sequential Event Recorder (SER) Instruction

This functional instruction (programmed in ladder logic) was introduced in CPU firmware release

9.0 and is available in all of the 350 – 374 CPUs that have this firmware. The purpose of the SER

is to provide a dynamic troubleshooting and debugging tool. In effect, it takes ”snapshots” of the

on/off status of groups of discrete points that you specify. You also specify how many of these

snapshots to take, when and how often they will be taken, and where in memory they will be

stored. The stored snapshots can be analyzed to see the time relationship of the bits sampled.

Please see the Series 90-30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467K or later for

details on using this instruction. Some feature highlights:

An SER function block collects up to 32 contiguous or non-contiguous bits per sample.

Each SER function block can capture up to 1024 samples.

If the SER is embedded in a periodic subroutine, sampling rate is determined by the periodic

subroutine execution rate.

Only the trigger sample is time stamped. The trigger sample can be time-stamped in BCD

(maximum resolution of 1 s) or POSIX format (maximum resolution of 10ms). The time


5

stamp is only placed once at the trigger point. The SER does not support more than one time

stamp per recording.

The SER can be configured for pre-, mid-, or post-trigger modes.

Embedded Ethernet Interface (CPU364 and CPU374)

The CPU364 and CPU374 consist of a CPU and an Ethernet Interface combined in one module.

These modules offer Ethernet capabilities formerly available only with the separate

IC693CMM321 Ethernet module. The CPU364 and CPU374 offer several advantages compared

to using a separate CPU and Ethernet module:

It only occupies one slot in the PLC baseplate compared to the two slots required by separate

CPU and Ethernet modules.

The CPU374 has two 10/100 BASE-T/TX ports connected to an embedded network switch.

The IC693CMM321 Ethernet module requires an external transceiver. The CPU364 does not

require one since it has this functionality built-in. To use this internal transceiver, connect to

the 10BASE-T port. However, if you choose, you may use an external transceiver by

connecting to the CPU364’s AAUI port, which bypasses the internal transceiver (see

Appendix J for GE Fanuc transceiver information).

The CPU374 does not require an external transceiver for either of its 10/100 BASE T/TX

ports.

Because they both reside in the CPU module, the CPU and Ethernet Interface can

communicate without using the PLC backplane. This provides faster communications speed

compared to using separate CPU and Ethernet modules, which have to use the slower path

across the PLC backplane.

Beginning with Firmware Release 9.1, the Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and configurable

Name Resolution features were added to the CPU364. The CPU374 supports EGD, but not

Name Resolution. These features are not supported by the IC693CMM321 Ethernet module.

Logicmaster software does not support these features. They are supported only in Control,

Version 2.2 or later, all versions of VersaPro software, and CIMPLICITY Machine Edition

software Logic Developer-PLC. For details about these features, please see publication GFK-

1541A or later, TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.


5

Hardware Features of the 350–364 CPUs

CPU350 and CPU360 Hardware Features

These two modules look identical except for labeling.

These modules feature an LED light, labeled “PS Port” that indicates serial port activity

through the serial connector on the PLC power supply. Typically, this LED will flash while

data is being transferred through the port, and will stay off when the port is inactive.

These modules also have the keyswitch, described earlier in this chapter, that is standard on the

350–364 CPUs.

CPU Firmware Upgrade

The CPU firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the serial port connector on

the PLC Power Supply.

CPU 350

PORT

ON

OFF

PSPORT

ON

OFF

PS

CPU 360


5

CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Hardware Features

These three modules are similar in features and functionality. The CPU351 and CPU352 look

identical except for labeling. The CPU363 has the same features as the other two, but the

orientation of its Port 1 and Port 2 connectors is reversed from those of the CPU351 and CPU352,

and its LED indicator lights, key switch, and shield ground connector are in different locations.

(The shield ground connector is on the front panel of the CPU363, labeled “FRAME,” but is

located on the bottom of the CPU351 and CPU352 modules.)

CPU 351SNP

P1

P2

ON/RUN

OFF/

RS-232

PORT 1

RS-485

PORT 2

STOP

PIN 1

CPU 363

PORT

ON

OFF

PS

RS-232PORT 1

RS-485PORT 2

P1

P2

FRAME

PIN 1

PIN 1

Shield GroundConnector

Figure 5-4. CPUs 351, 352, and 363

CPU Firmware Upgrade

The CPU firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the Port 1 connector on

these modules’ faceplate using Loader software supplied with the firmware upgrade kit. The

IC693CBL316 cable can be used for this purpose (see Chapter 10 for data sheet on this cable).

Keyswitch

This is a standard CPU keyswitch, discussed earlier in this chapter.


5

Shield Ground Connection Tab

This tab is located on the bottom of the CPU351 and 352 modules and on the front of the CPU363

module. It is used to make the module’s shield ground connection. A wire with the applicable

terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose. Please see the section ”Module Shield

Grounding” in Chapter 2 (“Installation”) for details.

Serial Ports

The 351, 352, and 363 CPUs have three serial ports. One is accessed through a connector on the

PLC power supply (standard serial port found on all Series 90-30 CPUs), and the connectors for the

other two are on the modules’ front panel, labeled Port 1 and Port 2.

The CPU351, 352, and 363 serial ports are configurable using the programming software

configuration function. Each port can also be configured using a COMM_REQ. For details about

using these ports and about the COMM_REQ instruction, please see publication GFK-0582, Series

90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual.

Serial Port Front Panel Connectors

Port 1, the top port is RS-232 compatible. This port has a 6-pin RJ-11 connector. This

connector has female contacts and is similar to modular jacks commonly used for telephones

and modems. The IC693CBL316 can be used to access this port, providing a direct connection

to an RS-232 device without the need for a converter. See Chapter 10 for a datasheet on this

cable.

Port 2, the bottom port is RS-485 compatible. Access to Port 2 is through a 15-pin D

connector that has female contacts.

Serial Port Status LEDs

The CPU351 and CPU352 have three LEDs that indicate the status of serial port activity on the

CPU.

The SNP LED on the CPU351 and CPU352 is called PS Port on the CPU363. This refers to

the port that uses the serial connector on the PLC’s power supply. This LED flashes when data

is being transferred through the port. It remains off when the port is inactive.

The P1 LED will flash when data is being transferred through Port 1, the RS-232 port. It

remains off when the port is inactive.

The P2 LED will flash when data is being transferred through Port 2, the RS-485 port. It

remains off when the port is inactive.


5

Protocols Supported

Starting with Firmware Release 9.00, breakfree SNP became the default protocol on the three

Serial Ports on these modules. See “Breakfree SNP Protocol” on page 5-13 for details.

SNP Port (Through Power Supply Connector)

SNP slave

SNP-X slave

Port 1 and Port 2 (Through Module’s Front Panel Connectors)

SNP master and slave

SNP-X master and slave

RTU slave (starting with Firmware Release 8.0)

Serial I/O - Limited functionality (write only) starting with Firmware Release 8.0, will have

full functionality (read and write) starting with Firmware Release 10.0. Used with autodialer

feature to call a pager. To use this feature, configure protocol as Custom. See GFK-0582,

Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual for details.


5

Pin Assignments for CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363 Serial Ports 1 & 2

The following two tables describe the pin assignments for each of the two front panel serial ports

on the CPU351, CPU352, and CPU363.

Table 5-6. Port 1 (RS-232)

Pin

Number

Signal

Name Description

1 CTS Clear To Send

2 TXD Transmit Data

3 0V Signal Ground

4 0V Signal Ground

5 RXD Receive Data

6 RTS Request to Send

Table 5-7. Port 2 (RS-485)

Pin

Number

Signal

Name Description

1 Shield Cable Shield

2 NC No Connection

3 NC No Connection

4 NC No Connection

5 +5VDC Logic Power *

6 RTS(A) Differential Request to Send

7 SG Signal Ground

8 CTS(B‘) Differential Clear To Send

9 RT Resistor Termination

10 RD(A‘) Differential Receive Data

11 RD(B‘) Differential Receive Data

12 SD(A) Differential Send Data

13 SD(B) Differential Send Data

14 RTS(B’) Differential Request To Send

15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send

* Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA maximum) for

powering external options.


5

CPU364 Hardware Features

This module has four LED indicator lights, an Ethernet Restart pushbutton, a standard CPU

keyswitch, three port connectors, and a shield ground connection tab (labeled “FRAME”).

CPU 364

PSPORT

RS-232PORT 1

AAUI

EOK

LAN

FRAME

STAT

ETHERNETRESTART

10BASE T

ON

OFF

PIN 1

LED Indicators

There are four LED Indicators. Three relate to the Ethernet interface: EOK, LAN, and STAT.

These can be ON, OFF, FLASHING slow, or FLASHING fast in several different combinations.

The full functionality of these LEDs is detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet Communications

for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.

The fourth LED, PS PORT, is for the CPU’s serial port and is not related to the Ethernet interface.

This LED will flash while data is being transferred through the SNP serial port connector on the

PLC power supply, and will stay off when the port is inactive. (On some early production 364

CPUs, this LED is labeled “SNP.”) All Series 90-30 CPUs have this standard serial port.

Ethernet Restart Pushbutton

This pushbutton performs four functions: LED test, Restart, Restart and enter Software Load state,

and Restart and enter Maintenance state. These are detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet

Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.


5

Keyswitch

This is a standard CPU keyswitch, discussed earlier in this chapter.

Front Panel Connectors

The full functionality of these ports is detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for

the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.

Port 1, RS-232 - This connector is used for two purposes: (1) To connect a terminal or

terminal emulator to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface. (2) To

connect to a Personal Computer that will be used to update the Ethernet Interface firmware

(the CPU firmware is updated separately through the connector on the power supply). This

RJ-11 connector has the same pinout as Port 1 of the CPUs 351, 352, and 353, shown in Table

5-5. The IC693CBL316 cable can be used to access this port. See Chapter 10 for a data sheet

on this cable.

AAUI port - This 14-pin AAUI port connects via a user-supplied IEEE 802.3 transceiver

cable to an external Ethernet-compatible transceiver such as the GE Fanuc catalog number

IC649AEA102 (for 10Base T) or IC649AEA103 (for 10Base 2). See Appendix J for details on

these transceivers.

10Base T port - This 8-pin, RJ-45 port provides a direct connection to a 10Base T (twisted

pair) Ethernet network without the need for an external transceiver.


This tab is used to make the module’s shield ground connection. A wire with the applicable

terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose. Please see the section “CPU363 and

364 Shield Grounding” in Chapter 2 (“Installation”) for details.

Firmware Upgrade

The CPU firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the serial port

connector on the PLC Power Supply using a personal computer that has been equipped with

the loader and CPU firmware software.

The Ethernet Interface firmware, stored in Flash memory, is loaded through the module’s front

panel Port 1 connector using a personal computer that has been equipped with the loader and

Ethernet firmware software. Cable IC693CBL316 is required (see Chapter 10 for details on

this cable).


5

CPU374 Hardware Features

This module has eight LED indicators, an Ethernet Restart pushbutton, a standard CPU keyswitch,

three port connectors, and a shield ground connection tab (labeled “FRAME”).

CPU 374

PSPORT

MGRSTATION

FRAME

EOK

LAN

STAT

ETHERNETRESTART

ON

OFF

PIN 1

10/ 1

00 E

TH

ER

NE

T

LINK/ACT

100Mbps10/1

00 E

TH

ER

NE

T

LINK/ACT

100Mbps

PORT 1

PORT 2

LED Indicators

There are four LED Indicators. Three relate to the Ethernet interface: EOK, LAN, and STAT.

These can be ON, OFF, FLASHING slow, or FLASHING fast in several different combinations.

The full functionality of these LEDs is detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet Communications

for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.

The fourth LED, PS PORT, is for the CPU’s serial port and is not related to the Ethernet interface.

This LED will flash while data is being transferred through the SNP serial port connector on the

PLC power supply, and will stay off when the port is inactive. All Series 90-30 CPUs have this

standard serial port.

Ethernet Restart Pushbutton

This pushbutton performs four functions: LED test, Restart, Restart and enter Software Load state,

and Restart and enter Maintenance state. These are detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet

Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.


5

Keyswitch

This is a standard CPU keyswitch, discussed on page 3-15.

Front Panel Connectors

The full functionality of these ports is detailed in GFK-1541, TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for

the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual.

Station Mgr - This connector is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator to access the

Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface. This RJ-11 connector has the same pinout

as Port 1 of the CPUs 351, 352, 353, and 364 shown in Table 5-5. The IC693CBL316 cable

can be used to access this port. See Chapter 10 for a data sheet on this cable.

10/100 Ethernet (Port 1 and Port 2) – these two 8-pin, RJ-45 ports provide a direct

connection to an Ethernet network via an embedded network switch.

The two Ethernet ports are 10-BASE-T/100-BASE-Tx Autonegotiating Full-Duplex ports,

which provide direct connection to one or two 10-BASE-T/100-BASE-TX cat 5 (twisted pair)

Ethernet LAN cables. Cables may be shielded or unshielded, and direct or cross-over. Please

note that the ports are connected to an embedded switch. There is not a separate IP address for

each port.

The LINK/ACT LED on each port goes on when a network link is established and blinks when

data is being transferred through the port. The 100Mbps LED goes on if the network link has

been established at 100 MBPS and goes off if the network link has been established at

10Mbps.


This tab is used to make the module’s shield ground connection. A wire with the applicable

terminal ends is supplied with the module for this purpose. Please see the section “CPU363, 364,

and 374 Shield Grounding” in Chapter 2 (“Installation”) for details.

Firmware Upgrade

The CPU and Ethernet Interface firmware, which is stored in Flash memory, is loaded through

the serial port connector on the PLC Power Supply using a personal computer that has been

equipped with the loader and CPU firmware software.


5

CPU Data Sheets

This section provides data sheets describing each of the Series 90-30 CPU modules. For

information on the State Logic CPUs, see Chapter 9, “State Logic Products.”

CPU Model List

IC693CPU311 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU, 1K Byte Register Memory

IC693CPU313 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU, 2K Bytes Register Memory

IC693CPU323 10-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

IC693CPU331 CPU module, 10 MHz

IC693CPU340 CPU module, 20 MHz, 32K Bytes User Program Memory

IC693CPU341 CPU module, 20 MHz, 80K Bytes User Program Memory


IC693CPU351 CPU module, 25 MHz, with two extra serial ports

IC693CPU352 CPU module, 25 MHz, math coprocessor, two extra serial ports


IC693CPU363 CPU module, 25 MHz, with two extra serial ports

IC693CPU364 CPU module, 25 MHz, with Ethernet interface

IC693CPU374 CPU module, 133 MHz, 240K bytes User Program Memory with

Ethernet communications


5

CPU311 Catalog Number IC693CPU311

POWER 1 2 3 4 5

1

BASE 5-SLOT

USER PROGRAM


SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



i HOUR

WITH CPU

CPU Type 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

Total Baseplates per System 1

Load Required from Power Supply 410 milliamps from +5 VDC supply

Processor Speed 10 MegaHertz

Processor Type 80188

Operating Temperature 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F) ambient

Typical Scan Rate 18 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)

User Program Memory (maximum) 6K Bytes

Discrete Input Points - %I 160 (maximum - combined inputs + outputs)

Discrete Output Points - %Q 160 (maximum - combined outputs + inputs)

Discrete Global Memory - %G 1280 bits

Internal Coils - %M 1024 bits

Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits

System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each)

Register Memory - %R 512 words

Analog Inputs - %AI 64 words

Analog Outputs - %AQ 32 words

System Registers (for reference table viewing

only; cannot be referenced in user logic program)

16 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters 170

Shift Registers yes

Built-in Serial Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP slaveand SNP-X slave protocols.

Communications LAN - Supports multidrop. Also supports Ethernet, FIP,Profibus, GBC, GCM, GCM+ option modules.

Override no

Battery Backed Clock no

Interrupts no

Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM

PCM/CCM Compatibility no


5


POWER 1 2 3 4 5

1

BASE 5-SLOT

USER PROGRAM


SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



i HOUR

WITH CPU







Typical Scan Rate 0.6 milliseconds per 1K of logic (boolean contacts)

User Program Memory (maximum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior to release 7)












16 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters 170

Shift Registers yes

Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP slaveand SNP-X slave protocols.


Override no


Interrupts no




5









User Program Memory (maximum) 12K Bytes (6K bytes prior to release 7)











only; cannot be referenced in user logicprogram)

16 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters 340

Shift Registers yes

Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP slaveand SNP-X slave protocols.


Override no


Interrupts no




5


CPU Type Single slot CPU module

Total Baseplates per System 5 (1 CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remote)







Discrete Input Points - %I 512

Discrete Output Points - %Q 512










16 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters 680

Shift Registers yes

Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). SupportsSNP/SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM modulefor SNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave support;PCM module for RTU master support.

Communications LAN - Supports multidrop. Also supports Ethernet,FIP, Profibus, GBC, GCM, GCM+ option modules.

Override yes

Battery Backed Clock yes

Interrupts no


PCM/CCM Compatibility Yes


5






Processor Type 80C188XL















16 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters >2000

Shift Registers yes

Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). SupportsSNP/SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM module forSNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave support; PCMmodule for RTU master support.


Override yes


Interrupts yes

Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional Flash

PCM/CCM Compatibility yes

CPU340


5






Processor Type 80C188XL















16 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters >2000

Shift Registers yes

Built-in Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). SupportsSNP/SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM module forSNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave support; PCMmodule for RTU master support.


Override yes


Interrupts yes

Type of Memory Storage RAM and optional EPROM or EEPROM for earlyversions. Starting with hardware version IC693CPU341-Jand firmware Release 4.61, only RAM and optional Flashare supported.

PCM/CCM Compatibility yes

CPU341


5



Total Baseplates per System 8 (CPU baseplate + 7 expansion and/or remote)



Processor Type 80386EX



User Program Memory (maximum) 32K Bytes (not configurable)

Discrete Input Points - %I 2,048

Discrete Output Points - %Q 2,048

Discrete Global Memory - %G 1,280 bits

Internal Coils - %M 4,096 bits



Register Memory - %R 9,999 words

Analog Inputs - %AI 2,048 words




28 words (%SR)

Timers/Counters >2,000

Shift Registers Yes

Built-in Serial Port 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). SupportsSNP/SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM module forSNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave protocolsupport; PCM module for RTU master support.


Override Yes

Battery Backed Clock Yes

Interrupts Supports the periodic subroutine feature

Type of Memory Storage RAM and Flash


Floating Point Math Support Yes. Firmware-based in firmware releases 9.0 and later.

CPU 350

PORT

ON

OFF

PS


5









User Program Memory (maximum) Starting with firmware Release 9.0, 240K Bytes. Note:Actual size of available user program memory depends on theamounts configured for the %R, %AI, and %AQ configurableword memory types (see below).For firmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 80K bytes.







Register Memory - %R Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

Analog Inputs - %AI Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

Analog Outputs - %AQ Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.


only; cannot be referenced in logic program)

28 words (%SR)


Shift Registers Yes

Built-in Serial Ports Three ports. Supports SNP/SNPX slave (on power supplyconnector) and RTU slave, SNP/SNPX master/slave , SerialI/O (on Ports 1 and 2). Requires CMM module for CCM;PCM module for RTU master support.


Override Yes


Interrupt Support Supports the Periodic Subroutine feature.



Floating Point Math Support Yes, firmware-based in firmware Release 9.0 and later.

CPU 351SNP

P1

P2

ON/RUN

OFF/

RS-232

PORT 1

RS-485

PORT 2

Model 351 CPU

STOP

The CPU351 is supported by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming and configuration software Release 6.00 and

later releases, and Control programming and configuration software Release 2.0 and later releases.


5









User Program Memory (maximum) Starting with firmware Release 9.0, 240K Bytes. Note: Actualsize of available user program memory depends on theamounts configured for the %R, %AI, and %AQ configurableword memory types (see below).For firmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 80K bytes.







Register Memory - %R Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

Analog Inputs - %AI Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

Analog Outputs - %AQ Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 word with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

System Registers (for reference table

viewing only; cannot be referenced in logicprogram)

28 words (%SR)


Shift Registers Yes

Built-in Serial Ports Three ports. Supports SNP/SNPX slave (on power supplyconnector) and RTU slave, SNP/SNPX master/slave , SerialI/O (on Ports 1 and 2). Requires CMM module for CCM;PCM module for RTU master support.


Override Yes


Interrupt Support Supports the Periodic Subroutine feature.



Floating Point Math Support Yes, hardware-based (built-in math co-processor)

CPU 352SNP

P1

P2

ON/RUN

OFF/

RS-232

PORT 1

RS-485

PORT 2

Model 352 CPU

STOP

The CPU352 is supported by Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming and configuration software Release 7.00 and

later releases, and Control programming and configuration software Release 2.0 and later releases.


5









User Program Memory (maximum) Starting with firmware Release 9.0, 240K Bytes. Note: Actualsize of available user program memory depends on theamounts configured for the %R, %AI, and %AQ configurableword memory types (see below). For firmware prior toRelease 9.0, fixed size is 80K bytes.







Register Memory - %R Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 words with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

Analog Inputs - %AI Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 words with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

Analog Outputs - %AQ Starting with firmware Release 9.0, configurable in 128 wordincrements from 128 to 16,384 words with Logicmaster andfrom 128 to 32,640 words with Control version 2.2. Forfirmware prior to Release 9.0, fixed size is 9,999 words.

System Registers (for reference tableviewing only; cannot be referenced inlogic program)

28 words (%SR)


Shift Registers Yes

Built-in Serial Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC power supply). Supports SNP slaveand SNP-X slave protocols. Requires CMM module forSNP/SNP-X master, CCM, or RTU slave protocol support;PCM module for RTU master support.

Communications LAN - Supports multidrop. Also supports Ethernet, FIP,Profibus, GBC, GCM, and GCM+ option modules.

Override Yes


Interrupts Yes



Floating Point Math Support Yes, firmware-based in firmware Release 9.0 and later.

CPU 360

PORT

ON

OFF

PS


5



Total Baseplates per System 8(CPU baseplate + 7 expansion and/or remote)






User Memory (total) 240K (245,760) Bytes. Actual size of available userprogram memory depends on the amounts configured for%R, %AI, and %AQ configurable word memory types(see below).







Register Memory - %R Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 wordswith Control version 2.2.

Analog Inputs - %AI Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 wordswith Control version 2.2.

Analog Outputs - %AQ Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384words with Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 wordswith Control version 2.2.

System Registers (for reference table viewing only;

cannot be referenced in user logic program)

28 words (%SR)


Shift Registers Yes

Built-in Ports Three ports. Supports SNP/SNPX slave (on powersupply connector). On Ports 1 and 2, supportsSNP/SNPX master/slave and RTU slave. Requires CMMmodule for CCM; PCM module for RTU master support.


Override Yes


Interrupt Support Supports the periodic subroutine feature.



Floating Point Mat h Support Yes, firmware-based in firmware Release 9.0 and later.

CPU 363

PORT

ON

OFF

PS

RS-232

PORT 1

RS-485

PORT 2

P1

P2

FRAME


5


CPU Type Single slot CPU module with embedded Ethernet Interface


Load Required from Power Supply 1.51 Amps from +5 VDC supply



Ethernet fuse, replaceable 2.69x2.69x6.1 mm, 125V, 1A, slow acting

Operating temperature 0 to 60 degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F) ambient


User Memory (total) 240K Bytes. Note: Actual size of available user program memorydepends on the amounts configured for %R, %AI, and %AQconfigurable word memory types (see below).







Register Memory - %R Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384 wordswith Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 words with Controlversion 2.2.

Analog Inputs - %AI Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384 wordswith Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 words with Controlversion 2.2.

Analog Outputs - %AQ Configurable in 128 word increments from 128 to 16,384 wordswith Logicmaster and from 128 to 32,640 words with Controlversion 2.2.

System Registers (for reference table

viewing only; cannot be referenced in logicprogram)

28 words (%SR)


Shift Registers Yes

Built-in Serial Ports 1 (uses connector on PLC Power Supply). Supports SNP/SNPXslave. Requires CMM module for SNP/SNP-X master, RTU slave,or CCM; PCM module for RTU master support.

Communications Ethernet (internal) - AAUI or 10BASE-T. AAUI requiresexternal transceiver. 10BASE-T is direct.Ethernet (additional) - Supports Ethernet option modules.LAN-Requires option modules for Genius, Profibus, FIP.

Override Yes





Floating Point Math Support Yes, firmware-based.

CPU 364

SNP

RS_232

PORT 1

AAUI

EOK

LAN

FRAME

STAT

ETHERNETRESTART

10BASE T

ON

OFF

Note: On some early modules, the LED labeled “PS PORT” may say “SNP” instead; otherwise,

the modules are identical.


5


CPU type Single slot CPU module with embedded Ethernet Interface

Processor speed 133 MHz

Processor Type Embedded 586



User Memory (total) 240KB (245,760) Bytes. Note: Actual size of available userprogram memory depends on the amounts configured for %R,%AI, and %AQ configurable word memory types.

Discrete Input Points - %I 2,048 (fixed)

Discrete Output Points - %Q 2,048 (fixed)

Discrete Global Memory - %G 1,280 bits (fixed)

Internal Coils - %M 4,096 bits (fixed)

Output (Temporary) Coils - %T 256 bits (fixed)

System Status References - %S 128 bits (%S, %SA, %SB, %SC - 32 bits each) (fixed)

Register Memory - %R Configurable 128 to 32,640 words

Analog Inputs - %AI Configurable 128 to 32,640 words

Analog Outputs - %AQ Configurable 128 to 32,640 words

System Registers - %SR 28 words (fixed)

Timers/Counters >2,000 (depends on available user memory)


Battery Back Up (Number of monthswith no power)

1.2 months for internal battery (installed in the power supply)

15 months with external battery (IC693ACC302)

Load Required from Power Supply 7.4 watts of 5VDC. High Capacity power supplies recommended.

EZ Program Store Device Yes



Communications and ProgrammableCoprocessor Compatibility

Yes

Override Yes

Floating Point Math Yes, Hardware Floating Point Math

Programming Support VersaPro 2.03 or later. CIMPLICITY Machine Edition LogicDeveloper 2.60 or later. Control software version 2.50 or later.

Built-in Serial Ports None. Supports RS-485 port on power supply.

Protocol Support SNP and SNPX on power supply RS-485 port

Built-in Ethernet Communications Ethernet (built-in) – 10/100 base-T/TX Ethernet Switch

Number of Ethernet Ports Two, both are 10/100baseT/TX ports with auto sensing. RJ-45connection.

Number of IP Addresses One

Protocols SRTP and Ethernet Global Data (EGD). No channel support.

Web Server Support None

Operating Temperature 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F) ambient

Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C

Agency Approvals UL508, C-UL (Class I, DIV II, A, B, C, D), CE Mark

Low Temperature (LT) Testing Yes. The CPU374 is available for -40° to 60°C operation.

CPU 374

PSPORT

MGRSTATION

FRAME

EOK

LAN

STAT

ETHERNETRESTART

ON

OFF

10/1

00 E

TH

ER

NE

T

LINK/ACT

100Mbps

LINK/ACT

100Mbps

PORT 1

PORT 2

10/1

00 E

TH

ER

NE

T

GFK-0356Q 6-1

Memory Backup/Battery Backup

Backup Battery for RAM Memory (All Supplies)

The long-life Lithium battery (IC693ACC301) used to maintain the contents of the CMOS RAM

memory in the CPU is accessed by removing the cover plate located at the bottom of the power

supply faceplate. This battery is mounted on a plastic clip attached to the inside of this cover.

The battery is wired to a small Berg female connector that connects to either of the two Berg male

connectors mounted on the Power Supply printed circuit board. This battery can be replaced with

power applied to the PLC.

BATTERY

BATTERYCONNECTORS


Battery Cover Removal Notch

BATT

RUN

OK

PWR

Low BatteryWarning LED

BatteryCavity

Figure 6-1. Backup Battery for RAM Memory

Caution

If a Low Battery Warning (BATT LED turns ON) occurs, replace the

battery located in the power supply before removing power from the rack.

Otherwise, there is a possibility that data will be corrupted or the

application program will be cleared from memory.

6Chapter


6

Battery Replacement Instructions

Warning

To avoid the chance of losing the contents of RAM memory, you can

carefully perform the following steps with PLC power ON. This procedure

should only be performed by qualified electrical personnel who are trained

in applicable electrical safety rules and procedures. Failure to follow

standard electrical safety practice can result in injury or death to personnel,

damage to equipment, or both.

Carefully insert the tip a small pocket-size screwdriver approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) into thebattery cover removal slot, located beneath the battery cover (see previous figure).

Gently rotate the screwdriver about 45 degrees to loosen the cover.

Remove cover with fingers. The battery is mounted in a clip on the back of the cover. It has apair of leads with a connector that is plugged-in to a connector on a circuit board inside thepower supply.

Carefully reach into battery cavity with your fingers (do not use a metal object to do this) andunplug the battery connector.

Remove the old battery from the clip on the battery cover and set it aside. Be careful not tomix it up with the new battery.

Carefully reach into battery cavity with your fingers (do not use a metal object to do this) andplug in new battery connector.

Clip new battery into clip on battery cover.

Snap battery cover back onto power supply.

GFK-0356Q Chapter 6 Memory Backup/Battery Backup 6-3

6

Battery Replacement/Memory Protection Factors

Since there are differences in each PLC application, each user will have to determine on an

individual basis what strategy to use. There are several factors to consider when planning a battery

replacement/memory protection strategy:

How critical is the application? Will considerable loss be sustained if the PLC goes down? Ifso, frequent replacement of the battery would be a wise choice. For critical applications, thecost of a battery would be quite low in comparison to the cost of a PLC shut-down.

How readily can a backup program be loaded? Are there technicians on-site who know how toload a backup program? Is the backup program accessible at all times to those responsible formaintaining the equipment? Is a personal computer or equivalent equipped with GE Fanucprogramming software available at all times for use in loading the backup program?

Do you have a preventive maintenance program? A formal program would help ensure thatthe battery is replaced on time. Some users replace the backup battery each year during theirannual shut-down period.

How accessible is the PLC? In some applications, the PLC may be mounted in a remotelocation that is not easily accessed.

Safety codes. Some users may have safety rules that would not allow replacing the batterywith power applied.

How is the PLC used? Is power left on all the time, or is it shut down every day? See theheading “Factors Affecting Battery Life.”

Some users run without a backup battery by using one of the PROM options. See the sectionbelow called “Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery” to determine if this strategy issuitable for your application.

The Importance of Backing up Your Program

Regardless of what strategy you use to maintain PLC memory, you should always keep an up-to-

date backup copy of your application program. Other suggestions to help minimize down time:

Make sure the backup copy is readily accessible to those who may need to use it.

Train more than one person to load the backup program in case that one person is not availablewhen needed. Information on creating a backup can be found in GE Fanuc ’s software user’smanuals. This procedure is also covered in applicable GE Fanuc programming softwaretraining courses.

Ensure that a suitable computer is equipped with GE Fanuc PLC programming software andwill be readily available to load the backup program to the PLC.

Create a written backup procedure. Fortunately, restoring your program from the backup copyis probably not something you will do very often. As a result, however, some of the stepscould easily be forgotten.


6

Factors Affecting Battery Life

Replacing your battery once per year is a good rule of thumb. However, no one can predict

precisely how long a backup battery will last because this depends upon what CPU is used, what

temperature it is subjected to, and how it used. Considering the following list of factors that affect

battery life will help you decide how frequently to replace the battery in your application:

A battery that is not in use has an estimated life (called its ”shelf life”) of 5 years at ”roomtemperature” (25 degrees C, or 77 degrees F).

A battery that is used continuously (supplying current to memory circuits with PLC power off)if used at room temperature has an estimated average life as follows:

Model Estimated Average Life

at Room Temperature

CPU models 311, 313 and 323 2 years

CPU models 331—364 1 year

CPU374 1.2 months

As long as a PLC is powered up, its battery is not being used; so how often you power down

your PLC has a direct affect on battery life. Some users keep their PLC powered up all of the

time while others turn theirs off every night.

Temperature has a relatively large affect on battery life. Temperatures considerably above

room temperature (25 degrees C, or 77 degrees F), or below freezing (0 degrees C, or 32

degrees F) will appreciably shorten battery life.

The type of CPU has a small affect on battery life. Some CPUs have more memory than

others. Some memory types require more power. Also, some CPUs have a clock and some do

not. More memory requires more battery current to maintain its contents; and a clock requires

battery current to maintain its operation.

Low Battery Warning Methods

There are three basic ways that the PLC warns of a low battery:

The red ”BATT” LED on the Power Supply module lights when the battery is low. Thedisadvantage of this method is that the PLC is often mounted in an enclosure, so this LEDmight not be easily seen.

The PLC Fault Table is updated with a battery low message. Viewing the PLC Fault Tablerequires that a programmer be connected to the PLC.

Certain System Reference bits are set to logic 1 when the battery is low. These are %SA011(LOW_BAT), %SC009 (ANY_FLT), %S010 (SY_FLT), and %SC012 (SY_PRES). The mostspecific is %SA011 (LOW_BAT). This bit could be used as a contact in your ladder logicprogram to turn on an output that controls a warning light on an operator panel (as in theexample rung below), or to send a warning to an operator interface terminal.

%SA011 %Qxxx


6

In the rung shown above, the %SA011 contact will close when a low battery is detected by the

PLC. This will turn on the %Q output coil, which addresses an output module’s output that will

turn on a warning light. An alternate method would be to communicate the status of the coil

(which, in that case, would probably be a %M coil) to a Human to Machine Interface (HMI)

terminal such as a GE Fanuc CIMPLICITY HMI unit. The HMI could be programmed to display a

warning message when that particular bit goes to a logic 1. For more information about System

Reference bits and ladder logic programming, see the Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction

Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467.


6

Operating Without a Memory Backup Battery

Whether it would be to your advantage to use a battery-less scheme depends on your application.

There are various advantages and disadvantages to consider in making your decision.

Possible Advantage

The obvious advantage of operating without a memory backup battery is that you are freed from

the need to maintain the battery. To be able to run without a battery, you need to have a PROM

device - either an EPROM, EEPROM, or Flash PROM - installed in your system. These devices

can store program logic, configuration, and register values without the need for a backup battery,

and you can configure your CPU to read the contents of PROM into RAM memory each time the

PLC is powered up.

Possible Disadvantages

Information is not stored to your PROM device automatically. To store information, you must stop

the PLC, then use a programming device to tell the CPU to write the current PLC (RAM) memory

contents to the PROM device. This requirement may make battery-less operation undesirable for

many users. For example, in many applications, important data is gathered and stored in RAM

register memory, data such as the current level of material in a tank that is being filled, or a running

count of parts produced, etc. This constantly changing data is not being copied automatically to

the PROM device. It only exists in RAM memory. Therefore, if power is lost and there is no

RAM memory backup battery, this data will be lost.

However, one way to preserve data in a battery-less system is to send it over a network to a

computer that can store the data on its hard drive. Also, static data (data that doesn’t change)

contained in RAM memory, such as mathematical constants or look-up table type information, can

be stored initially in PROM and automatically written back to RAM each time the PLC powers up.

Another consideration is that if you change your program (or configuration), someone will have to

remember to write the changed information to the PROM device. If that step is forgotten, the

change only exists in RAM memory, and in a battery-less system, it will be lost the next time

power is removed from the PLC.


6

Configuring a Battery-Less System

Here are the basic steps to configure a system to run battery-less. When configured this way, the

contents of PROM memory will be written into RAM memory each time the PLC powers up.

Equip your CPU with a PROM device. On some CPUs a PROM device is purchased as anoption; on others, it is a standard feature. For a table that identifies the standard PROMconfiguration for each CPU, see “CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations” in chapter 5.

There are three CPU configuration parameters involved. Configure them as follows: Pwr UpMode: RUN; Logic/Cfg: PROM; Registers: PROM.

Store your folder (include Program Logic, Configuration, and Register Data) to the PLC. Thisplaces your entire folder into RAM (working) memory.

Write PLC (RAM) memory to the PROM device. Make sure you write all data (ProgramLogic, Configuration, and Register Data) to the PROM. Note that the type of PROM devicedepends on what model CPU you have and how it is equipped.

If you are using a 340 or higher CPU (such as a CPU350, CPU351, etc.), read the next sectionfor an additional requirement.

Operation Without a Memory Backup Battery Using a 340 or Higher CPU

This information is applicable only to CPU model numbers 340 and higher (such as CPU350,

CPU351, etc.). In systems that do not use a memory backup battery, a standard 0.1” Berg jumper

should be installed across either of the two power supply battery connectors to ensure reliable

restarting of the CPU after a power cycle. This jumper should not be installed if a battery is

plugged into either the power supply or CPU battery connector.

Determining Battery Age Using Battery Date Code

Battery age can be determined from the date code stamped on the battery.

The battery, manufactured by Panasonic, will have a four-digit date code. It will be something like

5615 or 7Y34. Use the following information to determine the date of manufacture.

First digit shows the year in a rotating 10-year cycle. For example, 0=1990, 1=1991, 2=1992... 9=1999, 0=2000, 1=2001, 2=2002, etc. This seeming duplication should not be a problembecause the shelf life of these batteries is 5 years. Batteries in inventory that are older than 4years old should be discarded according to the manufacturer’s instructions (since they haveless than one year of life remaining we would not recommend using them in a PLC). This willensure that outdated batteries are not mistaken for newer batteries.

Second digit shows the month. 1=January, 2=February, 3=March, 4=April, 5=May, 6=June,7=July, 8=August, 9=September, O=October, Y=November, Z=December.

Third digit shows the week of the month.

Fourth digit shows the day of the week. 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday,5=Friday, 6=Saturday, 7=Sunday.

For example, the code 7612 is interpreted as:

Manufactured on June 3, 1997


6

RAM Memory Battery Backup Connection Path

CMOS RAM and DRAM memory is a volatile type of memory, which means that it can lose its

contents (ladder program, configuration, etc.) if power is removed. To retain RAM memory

contents under no-power conditions, a long-life lithium battery is provided. This battery is

normally mounted in the rack’s Power Supply module. To avoid accidental disconnection of the

memory backup battery, it is beneficial to know the connection path between the battery and the

memory circuits:

For embedded CPUs: The battery connection path to RAM memory is through the Power

Supply’s baseplate connector and across the backplane board to the RAM circuits.

For modular CPUs: The battery connection path to RAM memory is through the Power Supply’s

baseplate connector, across the backplane board, and through the CPUs baseplate connector to the

RAM circuits inside the CPU module.

Obviously, removing the Power Supply module from the PLC breaks the connection between the

backup battery and the RAM memory circuits for both embedded and modular CPUs. Also, in a

modular CPU system, removing the CPU module would disconnect the backup battery from the

memory circuits. In addition, to avoid the possible problems associated with losing the contents

of RAM memory, we recommend that you maintain an up-to-date backup copy of your program

folder. Instructions for creating program folder backups can be found in the Logicmaster 90,

Series 90-30 Programming Software User’s Manual, GFK-0466, and the online help and user’s

guides for the Windows-based programming software products.

Super Capacitor Memory Backup

Besides the backup battery, the RAM memory circuits in both Embedded and Modular CPUs are

further protected by a ”super capacitor,” which can store enough charge to maintain memory for a

short time if the battery is disconnected. The amount of protection time provided by the super

capacitor depends on the following:

The PLC power supply supplies 5 VDC to the memory circuits, including the super capacitor.Therefore, when PLC power is turned off, the super capacitor has an initial 5 VDC charge. Ifthe battery is also disconnected shortly after PLC power is turned off, the super capacitor willbegin discharging from the 5 VDC level until its charge reaches 2 VDC, at which timememory contents will be lost. When used this way, the super capacitor can maintain memorycontents for a minimum of 1 hour.

The memory backup battery supplies 3 VDC to the memory circuits, including the supercapacitor. Therefore, if PLC power has been turned off for an hour or more and only thebattery is powering the memory circuits, the super capacitor has a 3 VDC charge. Then, if thebattery is disconnected, the super capacitor will begin discharging from the 3VDC level untilits charge reaches 2 VDC, at which time memory contents will be lost. When used this way,the super capacitor can maintain memory contents for a minimum of 20 minutes.


6

Maintaining RAM Memory During Storage or Shipment of a CPU

Modular CPUs

Modular CPUs have an internal connector for a backup battery so that RAM memory contents can

be retained while the CPU is being stored or shipped. This arrangement should not to be used

when the CPU module is installed in the baseplate and the backup battery is installed in the power

supply. To use a backup battery in the CPU module, it is necessary to remove the front cover of

the CPU module. This can be accomplished by following these steps:

To avoid losing memory contents once the CPU is removed from the PLC, we recommend youinstall the backup battery into the CPU within 20 minutes. First, make sure PLC power is off,then remove the CPU module.

Gently squeeze the front cover of the CPU module and pull it forward, away from the modulecase, while gently pressing in on the 4 front cover tabs sequentially with a small screwdriver.The front cover tabs latch into holes on each side of the module case (refer to Figure 2-1 forlocation of front cover holding tabs).

After removing the front cover, plug the memory backup battery into the two-prong batteryconnector on the front of the CPU module’s printed circuit board.

While the battery is connected to the CPU, you will have to leave the CPU’s front cover off.Also, the battery should be temporarily secured to the module with cable ties or tape to keep itfrom being accidentally damaged or disconnected.

The Battery Accessory Kit, described below, may also be used on a Modular CPU baseplate if the

power supply has to be removed. This would require leaving the CPU module mounted in the

baseplate.

Long-term battery backup can be provided with the use of the External Battery Module, described

on page 6-10.

Embedded CPUs

Embedded CPU Models 311, 313, and 323 can be stored or shipped with a power supply installed

and the power supply battery connected in order to maintain the contents of RAM memory.

However, another option (that doesn’t require the use of a power supply) is to use the Battery

Accessory Kit, described next.

Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315)

The Battery Accessory Kit (IC693ACC315) lets you maintain RAM memory contents without

using a power supply. It is useful for maintaining memory contents while a baseplate is being

stored or shipped. The Battery Accessory Kit consists of a battery with an attached connector

mounted on a circuit board. The circuit board has a connector that plugs into the power supply

backplane connector (see the figure below). The Battery Accessory Kit can be used on either

Embedded or Modular Series 90-30 CPU baseplates.


6

POWERSUPPLY

CONNECTOR

BATTERYPLUG

Figure 6-2. Installing the Battery Accessory Kit

Battery Accessory Kit Installation

1. Insert the plug on the end of the battery cable into the 2-pin connector on the Battery Accessory

board. The battery plug is normally not plugged into the accessory connector. This prevents

accidental discharge of the battery during storage and handling.

2. Align the backplane connector on the Battery Accessory board with the power supply

connector on the baseplate backplane. Push the Battery Accessory board toward the baseplate

until it is fully seated. See the figure above.

3. If the baseplate is to be shipped with the Battery Accessory board installed, ensure that the

board is held in place by packing material or cable ties. The cable ties can be installed in holes

provided on both ends of the accessory board and secured to the baseplate.

Caution

To avoid losing CPU data, the Battery Accessory must be installed within 1

hour after turning off PLC power, or 20 minutes after removing the memory

backup battery. See “Super Capacitor Memory Backup” for details.

When the Battery Accessory is removed, a power supply module with a good

battery must be installed and/or input power applied within 20 minutes to

avoid losing CPU data. See “Super Capacitor Memory Backup” for details.

External Battery Module (IC693ACC302)

This module provides long-term battery backup for all modular Series 90-30 CPUs. Its two-foot

cable plugs into the power supply battery connector. The External Battery Module maintains RAM

contents on a CPU374 for 15 months. CPU models 331—364 maintain RAM contents for

approximately 75 months. For details, see the Datasheet for the External Battery Module,

GFK-2124.


6

Batteries in Power Supplies on Expansion or Remote Racks

Batteries in power supplies on Expansion or Remote racks, are not in use. Only the battery in a

CPU rack supplies backup power to RAM memory. Batteries in non-CPU racks may be removed

and used as spares, if they meet the age requirements stated previously in this chapter.

GFK-0356Q 7-1

Input/Output Modules

The basics of the Series 90-30 Input and Output (I/O) modules are covered in this chapter for your

convenience. A table listing these modules is located at the end of this chapter. For detailed

specifications and installation instructions, please refer to publication GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC

I/O Module Specifications.

Basic I/O Module Types

Discrete Input

Series 90-30 discrete input modules convert AC and DC power levels from user devices to the

logic levels required by the PLC. An optical coupler provides isolation between the incoming

power and the logic circuitry. Discrete input modules with 8, 6, or 32 points are available.

Discrete Output

Series 90-30 discrete output modules convert logic levels into AC or DC power levels required

for driving user supplied devices. Either a power semiconductor or an electromagnetic relay

switches each output point. The discrete output semiconductor-switched modules are available

with 5, 8, 2, 6, or 32 output points. Relay output modules are available with either 8 or 6

Normally Open relay contact outputs.

Discrete Input/Output

Combination discrete input/output modules combine AC inputs and relay outputs or DC

inputs and relay outputs on one module. Each of these modules have 8 input circuits and 8

relay output circuits on one board.

Analog Input

Series 90-30 analog input modules provide A/D (Analog to Digital) conversion by converting

an analog input signal into a scaled digital number which will be transferred into the PLC’s

%AI memory. Analog input modules are provided in four versions, ( ) a 4-channel current

module, (2) a 4-channel voltage module, (3) a 6-channel high-density current input module,

and (4) a 6-channel high-density voltage input module.

Analog Output

Series 90-30 analog output modules provide D/A (Digital to Analog) conversion by converting

a scaled digital number (from the PLC’s %AQ memory) into an analog output voltage. Analog

7Chapter


7

output modules are provided in three versions, ( ) a 2-channel current module, (2) a 2-channel

voltage module, and (3) a high-density current/voltage module with 8 analog output channels.

Analog Combination Module

An analog combination module provides four A/D input channels and two D/A output

channels on one module. Each of the input and output channels can be configured individually

for current or voltage mode.

Third-Party Modules

In addition to the modules discussed in this chapter, numerous third-party I/O modules (and

other hardware and software products) for the Series 90-30 PLC are available to meet a wide

variety of needs. For information on third-party modules, consult the following:

- Your GE Fanuc PLC distributor or sales engineer

- The GE Fanuc web site at http://www.gefanuc.com

Discrete I/O Modules

Discrete I/O Module Point Density

There are two density categories for these modules:

Standard Density Modules: Standard density modules have up to 6 circuits (also called

“points”) per module. These modules are equipped with a removable terminal board. See the

following figure.

High Density Modules: High density modules have 32 circuits per module. These modules

have either a 50-pin connector, or two 24-pin connectors mounted on their faceplates.

Connection choices are discussed later in this chapter.

Standard Density Discrete I/O Module Features

Standard Density( 6 points or less) Modules have the following features (refer to the following

figure):

Removable Terminal Board. You can remove the terminal board from the module in order

to wire it, if desired. Then, when you are finished wiring it, you can easily reinstall it on the

module. However, some prefer to leave it on the module when wiring. If you ever need to

replace a module, you don’t have to do any rewiring if your old terminal board is still in good

condition. Simply remove the wired terminal board from the old module and install it on the

new module. The terminal board screw terminals are also convenient points for measuring

voltages while testing or troubleshooting.

Hinged Front Cover. The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board connections.

Normally it’s kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally touching a hot terminal. Note

in the following figure that the back side of the front cover insert contains a schematic diagram

of the terminal board connections. The module catalog number (IC693MDL940 in the

example shown) is printed on the bottom of the front cover insert. The module catalog

GFK-0356Q Chapter 7 Input/Output Modules 7-3

7

number is also printed on the label on the side of the module. However, in order to see this

side label, the module has to be removed from the PLC

On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module’s I/O points.

You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for each point on the

appropriate line, as shown in the example in the figure.

Also on the front side of the front cover insert, running vertically on the left edge of the insert,

is a color bar that identifies the type of module: Blue = DC, Red = AC, and Gray = Analog.

Module Lens Cap. Located on the top front of the module, it covers the LED (Light Emitting

Diode) status lights . These are labeled in the following figure in two groups, A through A8,

and B through B8. Since this is a figure of a 6-Point Output module, there are 6 LED

status lights. (The number of status lights on any given module is a function of the number of

circuits points on that module.) If you compare these status lights to the connection diagram

on the back of the hinged cover, you will notice that the outputs on this module are in two

groups, labeled A -A8 and B -B8, that correspond to the A and B rows of status LEDs. Note

the additional LED on the right side of the lens cap that is labeled with the letter F. This is a

blown fuse indicator light. This letter F is present on all of the discrete I/O module lens caps,

but is only functional on certain Output Modules that have internal fuses. It only lights if an

internal fuse is blown. A table with a list of modules having fuses as well as other details

about the status LEDs is provided in Chapter 3 of this manual.

A1

A2

A4

A3

a43082A

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

RELAY N.O.

OUTPUT

2 AMP

1

2

3 V

V

V

V

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

A7

A8

B1

B2

B4

B7

B8

44A726782-015FOR USE WITHIC693MDL940

B6

B5

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

B3

Lens Cap

Fuse Indicator

Module Catalog

Module Type

HInged Cover

RemovableInsertRemovable

TerminalBoard

STATUSLEDs

OUTPUTRELAY N.O. 2 AMP

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

ConnectionDiagram onBack of Insert

Pilot

Pilot

Contro

Emargenc

Pump 1 ON

Pump 2 ON

Motor Starter 1

MotorStarter

Hinged Cover Front View

Color BarIndicatesof Module

CR 1

CR 2

CR 3

CR 4

SOL 1

SOL 2

SOL 3

SOL 4

User can WriteSignal Names onFront of Insert

Figure 7-1. Example of Series 90-30 Standard Density Discrete Output Module


7

Wiring Standard Density (16-Point or Less) Discrete Modules

There are three basic wiring methods:

Direct Method. Run the wires from the field devices (switches, relays, etc.) directly to the

screws on the modules’ terminal boards.

Terminal Strip Method. Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and wire from

the terminal strip to the modules’ terminal boards. Then wire field devices to the terminal

strip.

Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly Method. The Terminal Block Quick Connect

Assembly has three pieces: a faceplate, a cable, and a terminal block. The faceplate snaps onto

an I/O module in place of its normal terminal board. This faceplate has a connector that mates

with the cable. In turn, the cable plugs into a connector on the terminal block. The terminal

block mounts on a DIN-rail in a convenient place in your enclosure. The terminal block is

used for connecting to field devices such as switches and relays. This method saves, on the

average, over two hours of wiring time per module when compared with the Terminal Strip

method. For more information, see Appendix J, “Terminal Block Quick Connect

Components.”

Discrete Relay Output Module Protection

Output points on discrete relay output modules that switch an inductive load such as a relay coil,

lamp filament, or solenoid coil should have external protection. This is usually in the form of an R-

C (Resistor-Capacitor) network across an AC load, or a reverse-biased diode across a DC load.

Please see GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications, for details.

High Density (32-Point) Discrete Module Features

There are two types of these modules. One type has a single 50-pin connector on its faceplate,

the other type has a pair of 24-pin connectors on its faceplate (see next two figures).

The dual 24-pin type has LED status indicators. The 50-pin type does not. The LED status

indicators are arranged in four groups of eight across, labeled A, B, C, and D. They are

located at the top of the module (see next figure).

32-point modules are only available in 5, 2, and 24 VDC ratings.

None of the 32-point modules are fused.

These modules are useful in applications where a high count of DC I/O points is required. The

maximum number of I/O points for a Series 90-30 system can be obtained by using a CPU that

supports a total of eight 0-slot racks, and by populating the racks with 32-point modules. The

theoretical maximum number of I/O points possible is calculated by adding the nine available

slots in the CPU rack (the CPU must occupy one slot) to the 70 slots in the seven 0-slot

expansion or remote racks to get a total of 79 slots. Multiply 79 times 32 for a maximum of

2,528 I/O points (only CPUs 350 - 364 support this many I/O points). This assumes that every

slot is populated with a 32-point I/O module. Most practical applications require some slots

for option modules, reducing the number of slots available for I/O modules accordingly.


7

Pin A12

Pin A1

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CD AB

INPUT

5/12 VDCPOS/NEG LOGIC

3.0 mA/Pt at 5VDC

8.5 mA/Pt at 12VDC

Right Side

Connector

Left Side

Connector

LED Indicators

Pin B12 Pin A12

Pin B1 Pin A1

Figure 7-2. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL654) With Dual Connectors

7.5 mA/Pt

INPUT 32 PT

24 VDC ISOL

NEG/POS LOGIC

Connector Pin Numbering

50

19

18

32

33 1

Figure 7-3. Example of 32-Point I/O Module (IC693MDL653) With Single Connector


7

Wiring Methods for 32-Point Discrete I/O Modules

Modules with Single 50-Pin Connector

Three choices are available for connecting these modules.

Connect to a Weidmuller #9 2263 terminal block using one of the two GE Fanuc “extension”

cables (see next figure). Cable IC693CBL306 is 3 feet ( meter) long. Cable IC693CBL307 is

6 feet (2 meters) long. Chapter 0, “Cables,” has details on these cables.

Connect to a user-supplied terminal block/strip or I/O field devices using one of the two GE

Fanuc “interface” cables. These cables have a 50-pin connector on one end that plugs into the

module, and stripped, tinned leads on the other for wiring to a terminal block/strip or I/O field

devices. Cable IC693CBL308 is 3 feet ( meter) long, and cable IC693CBL309 is 6 feet (2

meters) long. These cables are useful if you have to run your wiring through conduit that is

too small for a connector to fit through.

Build a custom length cable. This is required if you need a cable longer than 6 feet (2 meters).

See the IC693CBL308/309 data sheet in Chapter 0 for pin-out details.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910

1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Series 90-30 PLC

EndView

TopView

50-Pin, 32-Point I/O Module a44838A

IC693CBL306/30Extension Cable

Weidmuller 912263

Terminal Block

Mounts onDIN-Rail

1

50

Figure 7-4. 50-PIN, 32 Point I/O Module Connection Method


7

Modules with Dual 24-Pin Connectors

Three choices are available for connecting these modules

Connect to a pair of Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) terminal blocks (IC693ACC337)

using a pair of GE Fanuc cables. Three lengths of cables are available: 20” (0.5 meter), 3 feet

( meter), 6 feet (2 meters). The cables come in right hand and left hand types because the

connectors on the modules are oriented differently (see figure 7-2). For details on the terminal

blocks and cables, please see Appendix J.

Connect to user supplied terminal block/strip or directly to I/O field devices using a pair of 0

foot (3 meter) GE Fanuc interface cables. These cables have 24-pin connectors on one end for

connecting to the module, and stripped, tinned leads on the other for wiring to a terminal

block/strip or I/O devices. Cable IC693CBL327 is for the left side and IC693CBL328 is for

the right side. These cables are useful if you have to run your wiring through conduit that is

too small for a connector to fit through, or if you need a cable longer than six feet. Chapter 0,

“Cables,” has details on these cables.

Build a custom length cable. This is required if you need a cable longer than 0 feet (3

meters). See the IC693CBL327/328 data sheet in Chapter 0 for details on building custom

length cables.


7

Analog Module Features

Analog Modules have the following basic features (refer to the following figure):

Removable Terminal Board. You can remove the terminal board from the module in order

to wire it, if desired. Then, when you are finished wiring it, you can easily reinstall it on the

module. However, some prefer to leave it on the module when wiring. If you ever need to

replace a module, you don’t have to do any rewiring if your old terminal board is still in good

condition. Simply remove the wired terminal board from the old module and install it on the

new module if it is good condition. The terminal board screw terminals are also convenient

points for measuring voltages while testing or troubleshooting.

Hinged Front Cover. The cover is easily opened to access the terminal board connections.

For normal operation, it is kept closed to protect personnel from accidentally touching a hot

terminal. Note in the following figure that the back side of the front cover insert contains a

schematic diagram of the terminal board connections. The module catalog number

(IC693ALG39 in this example) is printed on the bottom of the front cover insert. The module

catalog number is also printed on the label on the side of the module. However, in order to

see this side label, the module has to be removed from the PLC

On the front side of the front cover insert are lines that correspond to the module’s I/O points.

You can temporarily remove the insert and write the signal name for each point on the

appropriate line to aid in testing or troubleshooting.

Also on the front side of the front cover insert, running vertically on the left edge of the insert,

is a colored line that identifies the type of module: Blue = DC, Red = AC, and Gray = Analog.

Module Lens Cap. Located on the top front of the module, it covers the LED (Light Emitting

Diode) OK status light. This light indicates the basic status of the module. For normal

operation, the OK LED should be on.


7

A1

A2

A4

A3

OK

ANALOGCURRENT

OUTPUT

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

44A729182-021R01FOR USE WITHIC693ALG391

Lens Cap

Module OK LED

Removeable TerminalBoard

Module Catalog

No.

Module Type

Connection

Diagram

2

1

VOUT1

VOUT2

IOUT1

RTN1

RTN2

IOUT2

GND

GND

JMPV1

JMPV2

DEF0

0-20mA

*

*CH1

* +

-

24V

CH2

0-20mA

*

*OP

T.

CO

NN

. S

EE

US

ER

'S M

AN

UA

L

Removeable

Insert

Hinged Cover

Figure 7-5. Example of Series 90-30 Analog Current Output Module

Wiring Methods for Analog Modules

Twisted, shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module input or

output signal connections. Proper grounding of the shield is also important. For maximum

electrical noise suppression, the cable shield should only be grounded at one end of the cable. For

Input modules, ground the end that is in the noisiest environment (which often is at the field device

end). For Output modules, ground at the module end. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O

Module Specifications, for more shield grounding information.

Analog Input Module Wiring Methods

Correcting electrical noise problems can sometimes be a trial-and-error routine. However, in

general, it is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source of the noise as possible,

which is usually at the device end. In troubleshooting noise problems, sometimes it is beneficial to

experiment with the shield grounding point location. Remember, the cable shield should be

grounded at one end only. Also, it is best to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as

possible to minimize the length of unshielded conductors that will be exposed to the noisy

environment. See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898 for

additional details.


7

Direct Method. Run a shielded cable from the field device (transducer, potentiometer, etc.)

directly to the module. Connect the conductors to the applicable screws on the module’s

terminal board. Ground the shield at the field device end, exposing a minimum amount of

conductor to the noisy environment. Do not connect the shield at the module end (insulate it

with shrink tubing).

Terminal Strip Method. Mount a terminal strip inside the control enclosure and run a

shielded cable from the terminal strip to the module’s terminal board terminals. Connect the

shield to the metal panel next to the terminal strip. Do not connect the shield at the module

end (insulate it with shrink tubing). Wire the field device to the terminal strip with a shielded

cable, grounding the shield at the device end only (insulate the other end of the shield with

shrink tubing). Also, keep the length of exposed leads at the terminal strip and device ends as

short as possible.

Note

TBQC - The Terminal Block Quick Connect Assembly is not recommended foruse with analog modules due to cable shielding requirements.

Analog Output Module Wiring

Each output should be connected using a good quality shielded wire with the shield grounded at the

module end only. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications, for more

information.

I/O Module Power Supply Current Draw

These values are found in Chapter 2 of this manual, which discusses how to calculate power

supply loading. The information is also found in GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module

Specifications.


7

I/O Module Wire Routing

To reduce noise coupling among PLC wires, it is recommended you keep electrically noisy wiring,

such as AC power wiring and Discrete Output Module wiring, physically separated from low-level

signal wiring such as connections to DC and Analog Input modules. This can be accomplished by

grouping separately, where practical, the following categories of wiring:

AC power wiring. This includes the AC input to the PLC power supply, as well as other AC

devices in the control cabinet.

Analog Input and Output Module wiring. This should also be shielded to further reduce

noise coupling.

Discrete Output Module wiring. These often switch inductive loads that produce noise

spikes when switched off.

DC Input Module wiring. Although suppressed internally, these low-level inputs should be

further protected against noise coupling by observing these wiring practices.

Grouping Modules to Keep Wires Segregated

If practical, grouping similar modules together in the PLC racks can help keep wiring segregated.

For example, one rack could contain only AC modules and a different rack only DC modules, with

further grouping in each rack by input and output types. For smaller systems, as an example, the

left end of a rack could contain Analog modules, the middle could contain DC modules, and the

right end could contain AC modules. Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near low-

level signal wiring bundles, avoid running them beside each other. Route them so that, if they have

to cross, they do so at a right angle. This will minimize coupling between them.


7

IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module

This 4-channel digital valve driver module is capable of driving loads of up to .6 Amps at 24

VDC. Although it mounts in a standard Series 90-30 PLC slot, it does not connect to the PLC

backplane. Its control power and output power come from an external supply. (The GE Fanuc

IC690PWR 24 stand-alone power supply would be a suitable choice.) This module is designed for

TTL (5 VDC) inputs.

OUTPUT

1

2

3

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

DIG CH: 1

2

3

4

PWR

28V 1.6A max.

+28V.IN

+28V.RET

AUX.OUT.+15

AUX.OUT.-15

DIGITAL.1.IN

DIGITAL.2.IN

DIGITAL.3.IN

DIGITAL.4.IN

DIGITAL.RET

+28V1.IN

+28V2.IN

28V1&2.RET

VALVE.1.OUT

VALVE.2.OUT

VALVE.3.OUT

VALVE.4.OUT

VALVE.1.RET

VALVE.2.RET

VALVE.3.RET

VALVE.4.RET

Figure 7-6. IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver Module

Indicator LEDs

DIG CH: 1 – 4: These light when their corresponding input is at a Logic level.

PWR: Lights to indicate the presence of +26 VDC (nominal) input power on terminals

and 2.


7

DVM Specifications

Table 7-1. IC693DVM300 Specifications

OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS

Outputs (Channels) per Module 4

Isolation 2500 Vrms (optical isolation)

Nominal Output Voltage 24 VDC

Power Supply for Output Channels 26 VDC nominal, 2 VDC minimum, 35 VDCmaximum

Output Current .6 Amps maximum per channel6.4 Amps maximum total per module

Output Voltage Drop (fully loaded) 0.32 VDC

Off state leakage current 26 ∝ A at 26 VDC operating voltage

Turn-on response time < ∝ S with resistive load

Turn-off response time < ∝ S with resistive load

Output protection (per channel) Reversed-biased zener diode for free-wheelinginductive current. Also 36 Volt transorb forESD and surge protection.

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS

Input Voltage 5 VDC (TTL) nominal, 2Vdc Maximum

Logic 1 Level Logic : V > 3.5 VDCLogic 0: V < 0.7 VDC

Input Current 3.8 mA nominal

Input protection 3.3 Volt transorb

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS

Voltage and Current + 5 VDC @ 0.3A and - 5 VDC @ 0.2A

Isolation Not isolated

MODULE POWER REQUIREMENTS

Power Consumption (Does not consumeany power from PLC backplane.)

5.6 Watts (with all outputs on) from externalsupply connected to terminals and 2 (doesnot include power consumed by outputs)

Input Voltage +26 VDC nominal, 35 VDC maximumcontinuous

Fuses

Quantity - Module control power. Amp. Buss GDB- A.

Quantity 4 - One for each output. 2 Amps. Littlefuse 239002.


7

DVM Connections

Table 7-2. IC693DVM300 Connections

Pin

No.

Signal Name Connection Description

+28V.IN Module Control Power + input terminal (common on pin 2). Supplies power tomodule’s signal-level circuits and auxiliary + 5 and - 5 Volt power supplies(pins 2, 3, and 4). Requires external 26 VDC (nominal) power supply

2 +28V.RET Common terminal for Module Control Power (pin ).

3 AUX.OUT.+ 5 + 5 VDC @ 0.3A Auxiliary power output for external circuits. Not isolated.Developed from input power on pins and 2.

4 AUT.XOUT.-5

- 5 VDC @ 0.2A Auxiliary power output for external circuits. Not isolated.Developed from input power on pins and 2.

5 DIGITAL. .IN Channel TTL input connection (common on pin 9)

6 DIGITAL.2.IN Channel 2 TTL input connection (common on pin 9)



9 DIGITAL.RET Common connection for Digital Input Channels - 4 (pins 5 - 8)

0 +28V .IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels and 2 (common on pin 2).Required external 26 VDC (nominal) power supply.

+28V2.IN Power Supply connection for Output Channels 3 and 4 (common on pin 2).Required external 26 VDC (nominal) power supply.

2 28V &2.RET Common connection for both Output Channel Power Supply inputs (pins 0 and)

3 VALVE .OUT Channel Output connection (return on pin 4)

4 VALVE .RET Return connection for Channel Output (pin 3)

5 VALVE2.OUT Channel 2 Output connection (return on pin 6)

6 VALVE2.RET Return connection for Channel 2 Output (pin 5)






7

Table 7-3. Series 90-30 Discrete I/O Modules

Catalog

Number

Points Description

IC693MDL230IC693MDL23IC693MDL240IC693MDL24IC693MDL630IC693MDL632IC693MDL633IC693MDL634IC693MDL640IC693MDL64IC693MDL643IC693MDL644IC693MDL645IC693MDL646IC693MDL652IC693MDL653IC693MDL654IC693MDL655IC693ACC300

88

66

8888

666666

32323232

6

Discrete Modules - Input

20 VAC Isolated240 VAC Isolated

20 VAC24 VAC24 VDC Positive Logic

25 VDC Positive/Negative Logic24 VDC Negative Logic24 VDC Positive/Negative24 VDC Positive Logic24 VDC Negative Logic24 VDC Positive Logic, FAST24 VDC Negative Logic, FAST24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic FAST24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic, FAST5/ 2 VDC (TTL) Positive/Negative Logic24 VDC Positive/Negative LogicInput Simulator

IC693MDL3 0IC693MDL330IC693MDL340IC693MDL390IC693MDL730IC693MDL73IC693MDL732IC693MDL733IC693MDL734IC693MDL740IC693MDL74IC693MDL742IC693MDL750IC693MDL75IC693MDL752IC693MDL753IC693MDL930IC693MDL940IC693MDL93IC693DVM300

28

6588886

666

323232328

684

Discrete Modules - Output

20 VAC, 0.5A20/240 VAC, 2A20 VAC, 0.5A20/240 VAC Isolated, 2A2/24 VDC Positive Logic, 2A2/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A2/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A2/24 VDC Negative Logic25 VDC Positive/Negative Logic, A2/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A2/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A2/24 VDC Pos. Logic, Electronic Short Circuit Protect2/24 VDC Negative Logic2/24 VDC Positive Logic

5/24 VDC (TTL) Negative Logic2/24 VDC Positive/Negative Logic, 0.5A

Relay, 4A IsolatedRelay, 2ARelay, Isolated, N.C. and Form C, 8ADigital Valve Driver module, .6A, 24 VDC

Discrete Modules - Combination Input/Output

IC693MAR590 8/8 20 VAC Input, Relay Output

IC693MDR390 8/8 24 VDC Input, Relay Output


7

Table 7-4. Series 90-30 Analog I/O Modules

Catalog

Number

Channels Description

IC693ALG220IC693ALG22IC693ALG222IC693ALG223IC693ALG390IC693ALG39IC693ALG392IC693ALG442

44

66

2284 In/2 Out

Analog Modules

Analog Input, VoltageAnalog Input, CurrentAnalog Input, Voltage, High DensityAnalog Input, Current, High DensityAnalog Output, VoltageAnalog Output, CurrentAnalog Output, Current/Voltage, High DensityAnalog Current/Voltage Combination Input/Output

GFK-0356Q 8-1

Option Modules

This chapter provides an overview of Series 90-30 Option modules. For detailed information, the

applicable user’s manual should be consulted (these manuals are listed for each module at the end

of its section).

Third-Party Option Modules and the Accompany Program

In addition to the modules discussed in this chapter, numerous third-party option modules (and

other hardware and software products) for the Series 90-30 PLC are available to meet a wide

variety of needs. Third-party companies that meet GE Fanuc’s standards may apply for recognition

under the GE Fanuc Accompany Program. Details on the Accompany Program are found in the

GE Fanuc Automation Solutions Catalog or on the GE Fanuc web site, both listed below. For

information on third-party modules, consult the following:

Your GE Fanuc PLC distributor or sales engineer

The GE Fanuc web site at http://www.gefanuc.com

Option Modules Discussed in this Chapter

IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM)

IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+)

IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller (GBC)

IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (FBC)

IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner

IC693APU301/302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module (APM)

IC693DSM302 Motion Mate Digital Servo Module (DSM302)


IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module

IC693BEM320 I/O Link Interface Module

IC693BEM321 I/O Link Master Module

IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module

IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module

IC693PCM300/301/311 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)

8Chapter


8

IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module (CCM)

IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) Module

IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module (TCM)

IC693PTM100 Power Transducer Module (PTM)

IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module (GCM)

The Genius Communications Module (IC693CMM301) for the Series 90-30 PLC provides global

communications on a Genius Communications bus between Series 90-30 PLCs and/or other GE

Fanuc PLCs. Series 90-70, Series Six, and Series Five PLCs can communicate on this bus through

their respective Genius Bus Controllers.

The Genius Communications bus is a token passing peer-to-peer, noise immune network optimized

to provide high speed transfer of real time control data. Up to eight Series 90-30 PLC CPUs, in

any combination, can communicate with each other over a single Genius I/O serial bus using a

standard twisted pair, shielded cable.

OK

COM

GENIUSCOMM

GENIUSCOMMUNICATIONS

MODULE

1

3

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

44A729182-016R02

FOR USE WITHIC693CMM301 / 302

SER1

SER2

SHDIN

SHDOUT

Figure 8-1. The IC693CMM301 GCM Module

GFK-0356Q Chapter 8 Option Modules 8-3

8

Status LEDs

The LEDs on the front of the GCM module indicate its operating status and should be on during

normal operation.

OK Shows the status of the GCM module. This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are

completed.

COM Shows the status of the Genius communications bus. This LED is on steadily when the bus

is operating properly. It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a failed bus. It is

also off when no configuration has been received from the PLC CPU.

FIRSTDEVICE

SHIELDOUT

SHIELDIN

SERIAL2

SERIAL

1

R

SHIELDOUT

SHIELDOUT

LASTDEVICE

SHIELDOUT

R

SHIELDIN

SERIAL2

SERIAL

1

SHIELDIN

SERIAL2

SERIAL

1

SHIELDIN

SERIAL2

SERIAL

1

Figure 8-2. Genius Bus Wiring Schematic

SERIES 90-70

C

P

U

GC

M

G

C

M

SERIES 90-30 SERIES 90-30

GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS BUS

BG

C

Figure 8-3. Example of Genius Communications Network

GCM Documentation

For detailed information on the Genius Communications Module, including installation

instructions, refer to GFK-0412, the Series 90-30 Genius Communications Module User’s Manual.


8

IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+)

The Enhanced Genius Communications Module (GCM+), IC693CMM302, is an intelligent module

that provides automatic global data communications between a Series 90-30 PLC and up to 31

other devices on a Genius bus.

The GCM+ can be located in any standard Series 90-30 CPU baseplate, expansion baseplate, or

remote baseplate. However, for most efficient operation, it is recommended that the module be

installed in the CPU baseplate since the sweep impact time of the GCM+ module depends on the

model of PLC and the baseplate where it is located. Note: if a GCM module is present in a

system, GCM+ modules cannot be included in the system.

Multiple GCM+ modules can be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC system with each GCM+ having

its own Genius bus serving up to 31 additional devices on the bus. For example, this allows a

Series 90-30 PLC with three GCM+ modules to exchange global data with as many as 93 other

Genius devices automatically. In addition to basic global data exchange, the GCM+ module can be

used for various applications such as:

Data monitoring by a personal computer or an industrial computer.

Monitoring data from Genius I/O blocks (although it cannot control Genius I/O blocks).

Peer-to-peer communications among devices on the bus.

Master-slave communications among devices on the bus (emulates remote I/O).

The Genius bus connects to the terminal board on front of the GCM+ module.

OK

COM

ENHANCEDGENIUSCOMM

GENIUSCOMMUNICATIONS

MODULE

1

3

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

44A729182-016R02FOR USE WITH

IC693CMM301 / 302

SER1

SER2

SHDIN

SHDOUT

Figure 8-4. Enhanced Genius Communications Module


8

Status LEDs

The LEDs on the front of the GBC indicate its operating status and should be on during normal

operation.

OK Shows the status of the GBC module. This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are

completed.




GCM+ Documentation

For more information about the GCM+, refer to GFK-0695, Series 90-30 Enhanced Genius

Communications Module User’s Guide.


8

IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller (GBC)

The Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller (GBC), catalog number IC693BEM331, provides the

interface between a Series 90-30 PLC and a Genius I/O serial bus. The GBC receives and

transmits control data of up to 128 bytes for up to 31 devices on the Genius I/O bus. A Genius Bus

Controller can serve:

Genius blocks, which provide an interface to a wide range of discrete, analog, and special-

purpose field devices. Note that the GCM and GCM+ modules, described earlier, cannot

control Genius blocks.

Remote Drops, which consist of Series 90-70 I/O racks interfaced to the bus through Remote

I/O Scanner modules. Each of these drops can have any mix of Series 90-70 discrete and

analog I/O modules, providing up to 128 bytes of input data and 128 bytes of output data.

Field Control I/O Station, which consists of a Bus Interface Unit (BIU) and up to eight

additional Field Control modules. The BIU provides intelligent processing, I/O scanning, and

feature configuration for the I/O station.

Genius Hand-Held Monitor (HHM), which is a portable device that can also be permanently

mounted. The HHM provides a convenient operator interface for block setup, data monitoring,

and diagnostics.

Multiple hosts, for communications using datagrams and Global Data.

OK

COM

GENIUS

BUS

CONTROL

GENIUS

1

3

2

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

44A729182-068R01FOR USE WITH

IC693BEM331

SER1

SER2

SHDIN

SHDOUT

BUS

CONTROLLER

10

Figure 8-5. Genius Bus Controller Module

A bus may feature I/O control, enhanced by communications commands in the program. Or, a bus

can be used entirely for I/O control, with many I/O devices and no additional communications. A

bus can also be dedicated to CPU communications, with multiple CPUs and no I/O devices. More


8

complex systems can also be developed, with dual CPUs and one or more additional CPUs for data

monitoring.

Number of Genius Bus Controllers

Up to eight Genius Bus Controllers or Enhanced Genius Communications Modules can be includedin a Series 90-30 PLC system that has release 5.0 or later CPU firmware. A GBC cannot beinstalled in a system with a GCM.

The I/O devices on a bus may be Genius I/O blocks, or standard Series 90-70 I/O modules in one or

more remote drops. The total number of I/O circuits that can be served by one Genius bus depends

on the types of I/O devices that are used and the memory available in the CPU.

Many Genius I/O blocks have both inputs and outputs on the same block. Blocks configured in the

programming software as having both inputs and outputs occupy the identical number of references

in both %I and %Q memory, regardless of the block’s software configuration. Unused references

cannot be assigned to other inputs or outputs, and should not be used in the application program.

Status LEDs

The LEDs on the front of the GBC indicate its operating status and should be on during normal

operation.

OK Shows the status of the GBC module. This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are

completed.




Compatibility

Specific equipment or software versions required for compatibility with the GBC module are listed

below.

Series 90-30 PLC

CPU: The GBC module can be used with CPU models: IC693CPU311K, 321K, 331L or later, or

any version of the IC693CPU313, 323, 340, 341, 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364. The CPU

firmware must be release 5.0 or later.

Logicmaster 90-30 version 5.0 (IC641SWP301L, 304J, 306F, 307F), VersaPro, or

Logic Developer-PLC software is required.

Series Six PLC

To exchange global data with a Genius Bus Controller, the Series Six Bus Controller must becatalog number IC660CBB902F/903F (firmware version 1.5), or later.


8

Genius Hand-Held Monitor

The Genius Hand-Held Monitor can be used to display the GBC bus address, its software version,and the Series Six register address configured for global data. HHM version IC660HHM501H(revision 4.5) or later is required. There is no Hand-Held Monitor connector on the GBC module,but a Hand-Held Monitor can communicate with the GBC while connected to any other device onthe bus. Optionally, an additional HHM mating connector can be installed on the bus near theGBC.

Hand-Held Programmer

The GBC can be configured using a Series 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer (IC693PRG300).

Genius I/O Blocks

Genius I/O blocks can be present on the same bus as the GBC. However, because the Bus

Controller is not compatible with older phase A blocks, they should not be installed on the same

bus.

Genius Bus

The Genius bus is a shielded twisted-pair wire, daisy-chained between devices, and terminated at

both ends. Proper cable selection is critical to successful operation of the system. Suitable cable

types are listed in GEK-90486-1, the Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual.

Diagnostics

Genius blocks and other devices on the bus automatically report faults, alarms and certain other

predefined conditions to the PLC.

INPUTS AND FAULT MESSAGE

FROM BLOCK 3

1 2 3 4

GBC

F FF

TOKEN

FAULT

Only one diagnostic message can be sent during any bus scan. If a fault message has already been

sent (by another device) during that scan, a device saves its own diagnostic message until the next

available bus scan. For example, if the communications token is currently at device 3, and faults

occur at devices 3 and 4 at the same time, device 3 can send its diagnostic message if another

message has not already been sent. Device 4 must wait at least one more bus scan to send its

diagnostic message.

The GBC stores any diagnostic messages it receives. They are read automatically by the Series 90-

30 CPU. Faults can then be displayed in the fault table using the programming software. A Genius

Hand-held Monitor must be used to clear the faults from the fault table.


8

Datagrams

The Series 90-30 GBC supports all Genius datagrams. Refer to chapter 3 of the Genius I/O System

and Communications User’s Manual, GEK-90486-1, for details on using datagrams.

Global Data

Global Data is data that is automatically and repeatedly broadcast by a GBC. The Series 90-30

GBC can send up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus scan. It can receive up to 128 bytes of

Global Data each bus scan from each GBC on its bus.

Sending Global Data

Once set up by configuration, Global Data is broadcast automatically. Other devices that receive

the Global Data sent by a Series 90-30 PLC place it in these memory locations:

Series 90-30 PLC Sends

Global Data To: Other CPU Places Global Data in these Memory Location:

Series 90-30 PLC %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, %AQ. Memory type and beginningaddress are chosen during configuration of the receiving GBC.

Series 90-30 GCM+ %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, %AQ

Series 90-30 PLC/GCM %G memory location corresponding to Device Number (16-23)of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.

Series Six PLC Register memory. Beginning Series Six address selected duringconfiguration of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.

Series Five PLC Register memory. Beginning Series Five address selected duringconfiguration of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.

Computer PCIM or QBIM Input Table Segment corresponding to DeviceNumber of the Series 90-30 GBC that sent the data.

Receiving Global Data

The GBC can be configured to receive or ignore Global Data from any other GBC. The memory

type and length for incoming Global Data are also selected during configuration. The Series 90-30

CPU can place incoming Global Data in %I, %Q, %G, %R, %AI, or %AQ memory.

Genius Bus Controller Documentation

See the following manuals for detailed information on the Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller and

the Genius I/O system:

GFK-1034, Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual

GEK-90486-1, Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual

GEK-90486-2, Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual

GFK-0825, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - Genius Bus Interface Unit

User’s Manual

GFK-0826, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - I/O Modules User’s Manual


8

IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (FBC) Module

The Series 90-30 PLC FIP (Factory Instrumentation Protocol) Bus Controller (catalog number

IC693BEM340) is used to interface a FIP I/O serial bus to a Series 90-30 PLC.

Interface Unit

FIP I/O BusField Control

I/O Station

Remote I/O Rack

FIP Bus PS

PS

CPU

FB

C

Up to 8 Field Controlmodules (4

shown).

Series 90-70 PLC

GenericDevice

FIP Inter-face Module

Optional Redundant FIP I/O Bus

Optional Expansion Rack

P

S

CPU

FB

C

Series 90-70 PLC

CP

U

Series 90-30 PLC

PS

FBC

Remote I/O Nest

Scann

er

Figure 8-6. Example of FIP I/O System Configuration

A FIP bus is used primarily for I/O control. It also is used to store configuration data to remote

devices and to report faults. Devices that can be on a FIP bus in a Series 90-30 PLC system

include:

Series 90-70 PLC, interfaced to a FIP bus by a FIP Bus Controller.

Field Control Stations, Field Control I/O modules that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP Bus

Interface Unit (BIU).

Remote Drops, Series 90-30 I/O racks that are interfaced to the bus via FIP Remote I/O

Scanner Modules. Each remote drop can include one 5- or 10-slot main rack, one 5- or 10-slot

expansion rack and any mix of discrete and analog I/O modules.

Generic Devices, such as general-purpose computers that are interfaced to the bus via a FIP

Interface Module.


8

The FIP Bus Controller is a standard, rack-mounted Series 90-30 PLC module. It plugs easily into

the PLC’s backplane. The latch on the bottom of the module secures it in position.

9-Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector(channel 1)

9-Pin FIP Fieldbus Connector (channel 2)

15-Pin Serial Connector RS-485

Module OK

Run

Carrier Detect Ch. 1

Transmit Enable Ch. 1

Carrier Detect Ch. 2

Transmit Enable Ch. 2

Figure 8-7. Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller

There are no DIP switches or jumpers to set on the module.

The Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller has six status LEDs, an RS-485 serial port, and two identical

FIP bus connectors.

Status LEDs

The 6 LEDs on the front of the FIP Bus Controller display module status and communications

activity.

Serial Port

The 15-pin serial port is used to connect a computer for upgrading the operating firmware of the

Bus Controller and for configuring by an external configuration tool.

FIP Bus Connectors

The two 9-pin connectors on the FIP Bus Controller provide for attachment of one or two FIP

busses. The two busses provide a redundant bus capability.


8

IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner Module

The FIP (Factory Instrumentation Protocol) Remote I/O Scanner (catalog number IC693BEM330)

is an intelligent module that interfaces Series 90-30 I/O modules to a FIP bus. Up to 19 I/O

modules can be accommodated by using two 10-slot baseplates connected by an expansion cable.

Together, the Remote I/O Scanner and the modules it serves are referred to as an I/O Nest. The FIP

Nest can include most Series 90-30 I/O modules.

The host CPU can be any type of CPU capable of communicating on a FIP bus. A module in the

host (such as a FIP Bus Controller) provides the necessary interface between the FIP bus and the

host CPU.

FIPBus

Controller

CPU

FIP Bus

Host CPU

Up to 128 devices

I/O Nest

Hand-heldProgrammer

Expansion Cable,up to 50 feet (15 Meters)S

canner

Figure 8-8. Example of FIP Remote I/O Scanner System Configuration

The Series 90-30 Hand-Held Programmer provides a convenient way to perform setup, monitoring,

and control functions.

Features of the Remote I/O Scanner

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner performs the following basic functions:

controls operation of the I/O nest in the selected mode

scans discrete and analog I/O modules and maintains I/O scan timing

maps I/O data to FIP application variables

detects module and system faults and reports them to the FIP network

permits standalone configuration using Hand-Held Programmer

retains its network configuration through loss of power


8

permits I/O forcing from the Hand-Held Programmer

detects and records input transitions

supports FIP messaging services

responds to an external synchronization signal

can provide blinking or pulsed outputs

can provide input filtering and chatter detection

FIP Bus Interface

The Remote I/O Scanner communicates at a data rate of 1MHz. There are two versions of the FIP

communications standard: FIP and WORLD FIP. A DIP switch on the module is used to select the

version that will be used by the Remote I/O Scanner. (The same communications method will then

be used on both bus cables).

The DIP switch on the module must be set to the FIP position for the Remote I/O Scanner to

communicate with a Series 90-70 PLC.

Module Description

The FIP Remote I/O Scanner is a standard Series 90-30 PLC module that plugs easily into the

backplane of the baseplate.

FIP CH S21.0 MHz

CD1

TEN1

CD2

TEN2

LEDs

FIP Bus Connectors

Synchro Connector

Lug for Ground Wire

CHANNEL

1

CHANNEL

2

SYNCHRO

Figure 8-9. FIP Bus Interface Module


8

Connectors

The front of the module has the following connectors:

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL2

9-pin male D connectors for two FIP bus cables. A bus can be disconnected

from the module without disturbing the continuity of the bus. The second bus is

a backup for the first bus; its use is optional.

SYNCHRO Connector for a FIP synchronization cable. It requires a mating connector such

as Molex #39-01-4031. The synchronization capability is not used in a Series

90-70 PLC application.

(ground) The lug below the Synchro connector is used for the module ground wire

(provided). The other end of the ground wire must be connected to the mounting

bolt on the lower left corner of the baseplate and to chassis ground.

LEDs

There are two pairs of LEDs at the top of the module. The upper pair is for channel 1 and the lower

pair is for channel 2.

CD1/CD2 The green Carrier Detected LEDs indicate the presence of a carrier-detect signal

on their respective channels.

TEN1/TEN2 The red Transmission Enabled LEDs indicate the module is generating

transmissions on their respective channels.

FIP Remote I/O Scanner Documentation:

GFK-1037, Series 90-30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual

GFK-1038, FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual


8

IC693APU301/302 Motion Mate Axis Positioning Module (APM)

The Motion Mate APM is an easy-to-use intelligent, fully programmable one-axis (IC693APU301)

or two-axis (IC693APU302) motion control module for the Series 90-30 PLC. The APM allows a

PLC user to combine high-performance control with PLC logic solving functions in one integrated

system. The APM can be configured to operate in either Standard mode or Follower mode. When

used in Standard mode, it combines high-performance motion control with PLC logic solving

functions in one integrated system. When used in Follower mode, it provides high-performance

“electronic gearing” for continuous master/slave applications. The desired mode is easily selected

by configuring a setup parameter in the configuration software.

AXIS POSMODULE

STAT

OK

CFG

EN1

EN2

ONEAXIS

AB

COMM

Figure 8-10. Motion Mate APM Module

The Series 90-30 and APM operate together as one integrated motion control package. The APM

controls axis motion and handles all direct communications to the drive and machine while the

PLC automatically transfers data between PLC tables and the APM.

The PLC also provides a means for connecting Operator Interfaces, which can control and monitor

system operation. An example of an APM servo system showing the hardware and software used

to configure, program, and operate the system is shown below.

The APM can be installed in any Series 90-30 CPU, expansion, or remote baseplate. For

embedded CPUs (311, 313, or 323), you may have up to three APM modules. For a modular CPU

(331 or higher), you may have up to eight APM modules in one system, with a maximum of three

APM modules per baseplate.

Multiple motion programs may be created and stored in the APM (maximum of 10 may be stored

in the APM) with the Motion Programmer software package. The APM is configured and

programmed with VersaPro software (Version 1.1 or later) or Logic Developer-PLC.


8

The APM faceplate (front panel) has two 24-pin high-density connectors for servo connections.

The connector labeled A contains connections for Axis 1. Connector B, for a 1-axis APM, contains

general purpose connections. Connector B, for a 2-axis APM, has connections for Axis 2 as well

general purpose connections. To make wiring easier to the drive and machine, each high-density

connector is typically connected by a short cable to a terminal block.

CPU

DRIVE

MACHINE 1

ENCODER 1

DRIVE

MACHINE 2

ENCODER 2Configuration Software Motion Programming

Software

APM

Figure 8-11. Example of Motion Mate APM Servo System

APM Cables

These cables consists of a 24-pin I/O connector , a cable, and a 25-pin D-type terminal block

connector. (Cables are documented in Chapter 10.) Available cables are:

IC693CBL311 (10 feet/3 meters)

IC693CBL319 (3 feet/1 meter)

IC693CBL317 (10 feet/3 meters) with an 8” external shield pigtail

C693CBL320 (3 feet/1 meter) with an 8” external shield pigtail

For building custom-length cables, the 24-pin I/O cable connector is available in three different kits

(solder eyelet receptacle, crimp wire receptacle, and IDC (ribbon) receptacle). The terminal block

is Weidmuller RD25 910648 or equivalent (must be compatible with the I/O cable

IC693CBL311/319/317/320 - see Chapter 10 for details).

Motion Mate APM Module Documentation

See the following manuals for detailed information on Power Mate APM Modules:

GFK-0840 Motion Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual

GFK-0781 Motion Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Follower Mode User’s Manual

GFK-0664 Series 90 PLC APM Programmer’s Manual

Related servo manual:

GFK-1581 SL Series Servo User’s Manual


8


The Motion Mate DSM302 is a high-performance, two-axis motion control module that is highly

integrated with the logic solving and communications functions of the Series 90-30 PLC. In digital

mode, this module controls GE Fanuc digital servos. Beginning with firmware version 1.40, this

module has the ability to control servos with an analog command input, such as the GE Fanuc SL

Series Servos, or third party analog servos.

COMM STAT

OK

CFG

Motion Mate DSM302

AC

BD

EN2EN4

EN1EN3

Connector C

Aux Axis 3

(Follower Master Axis)

Status LEDs

STAT

OK

CFG

EN1 - EN4

Connector D

Aux Axis 4

COMM

Connector A

Servo Axis 1

Connector B

Servo Axis 2

Grounding Tab

6–pin, RJ–11 connectorused to upgrade firmwareand load motion programs

(use cable IC693CBL316)

RS–232PORT 1

Pin 1

Figure 8-12. Motion Mate DSM302 Module


8

Features.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) control of GE Fanuc Servos

Block Processing time under 5 milliseconds

Velocity Feed forward and Position Error Integrator to enhance tracking accuracy

High resolution of programming units

- Position: –8,388,608...+8,388,607 User Units

- Velocity: 1 ... 8,388,607 User Units/sec

- Acceleration: 1 .. 134,217,727 User Units/sec/sec

Simple and powerful Motion Program instruction set

Simple 1- or 2-axis motion programs with synchronized block start

Program support for a short motion program, called Program 0, which can be created in the

configuration software

Non-volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines, created with the APM Motion

Programming software.

User scaling of programming units (User Units)

DSM firmware, stored in Flash memory, is updated via its front panel COMM port.

Generic programming using command parameters as operands for Acceleration, Velocity,

Move, and Dwell Commands

Automatic Data Transfer between PLC tables and DSM302 without user programming

Ease of I/O connection with factory cables and terminal blocks as well as a serial port for

connecting programming devices. The serial port also allows ”soft“ upgrades to firmware,

which is stored in Flash memory.

Control of GE Fanuc Digital servos, analog SL Series Servos, or third party analog servos.

Home and overtravel switch inputs for each Servo Axis

Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each Position Feedback Input

5v , 24v and analog I/O for use by PLC

A Quad B Encoder input for Follower Master axis

13 bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Servo Tuning monitor

IC693DSM302 Documentation

GFK-1464, Motion Mate DSM302 for Series 90-30PLCs User’s Manual.

GFK-0664, Series 90-30 PLC APM Programmer’s Manual

Related servo manuals:

GFK-1581, SL Series Servo User’s Manual


8

GFH-001, Beta Series Servo Products Specification Guide

GFZ-65192EN, Alpha Series Servo Amplifier (SVU) Descriptions Manual

GFZ-65162E, Control Motor Amplifier, Alpha Series

GFZ-65142E, GFZ-65150E, GFZ-65165E, Alpha Series Servo Motor Manuals


8


The Motion Mate DSM314 is a high-performance motion control module that is highly integrated

with the logic solving and communications functions of the Series 90-30 PLC. In digital mode, this

module controls GE Fanuc digital servos. In analog mode, this module controls servos with an

analog command input, such as the GE Fanuc SL Series Servos, or third party analog servos.

COMM STAT OK CFG

EN3 EN1

EN4 EN2C A

D B

Status LED’s

Stat

OK

CFG

EN1 - EN4

COMM

6-pin RJ-11 connector.

Provides RS-232

connection for firmware

update

Connector A

Servo Axis 1

Connector B

Servo Axis 2

Grounding Tab on

Bottom of Module

Connector C

Servo Axis 3

Connector D

Servo Axis 4

Motion MateDSM314

Figure 8-13. Motion Mate DSM314 Module


8

Features

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) control of GE Fanuc Servos

Block Processing time under 5 milliseconds

Velocity Feed Forward and Position Error Integrator to enhance tracking accuracy

High resolution of programming units

- Position: -536,870,912...+536,870,911 User Units

- Velocity: 1 ... 8,388,607 User Units/sec

- Acceleration: 1 … 1,073,741,823 User Units/sec/sec

Simple and powerful motion program instruction set

Simple 1- to 4-axis motion programs. Multi-axis programs using Axes 1 and 2 may utilize a

synchronized block start.

Non-volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines created with VersaPro software

(Version 1.1 or later).

Compatible with Series 90-30 CPUs equipped with firmware release 10.0 or later (will not

work with CPUs 311 – 341 and 351).

Single point of connection for all programming and configuration tasks, including motion

program creation (Motion Programs 1 – 10) and Local Logic programming. All programming

and configuration is loaded through the PLC’s programming communications port. In turn, the

CPU loads all configuration, motion programs, and Local Logic programs to the DSM314

across the PLC backplane.

User scaling of programming units (User Units) in both Standard and Follower modes.

DSM314 firmware, stored in Flash memory, is updated via its front panel COMM port.

Firmware update kits provide firmware and Loader software on floppy disk. Firmware is also

available for download on the GE Fanuc web site (http://www.gefanuc.com/support).

Recipe programming using command parameters as operands for Acceleration, Velocity,

Move, and Dwell Commands

Automatic Data Transfer between PLC tables and DSM314 without user programming

Ease of I/O connection with factory cables and terminal blocks

Electronic CAM capability, starting with Firmware Release (Version) 2.0

Control of GE Fanuc α Series and β Series Digital servos, SL-Series servos, or third party

servos with analog velocity command or analog torque command interface.

Home and overtravel switch inputs for each Servo Axis

Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each axis can capture axis and/or master position with

an accuracy of +/-2 counts plus 10 microseconds of variance.

5V , 24V and analog I/O for use by PLC

Incremental Quadrature Encoder input on each axis for Encoder/Analog mode

Quadrature Encoder input for Follower Master axis

13 bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Digital Servo Tuning monitor

High speed digital output (four each 24V and four each 5V) via on-board Local Logic control

http://www.gefanuc.com/support


8

IC693DSM314 Documentation

GFK-1742, Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90-30 PLC User’s Manual

Related servo manuals:

GFK-1581, SL Series Servo User’s Manual

GFH-001, Beta Series Servo Products Specification Guide

GFZ-65192EN, Alpha Series Servo Amplifier (SVU) Descriptions Manual

GFZ-65162E, Control Motor Amplifier, Alpha Series

GFZ-65142E, GFZ-65150E, GFZ-65165E, Alpha Series Servo Motor Manuals


8

IC693APU300 High Speed Counter (HSC) Module

The High Speed Counter (IC693APU300) for the Series 90-30 PLC is a single-slot module which

can be used in applications where pulse input rates exceed the input capability of the PLC or where

too large a percentage of PLC processing capability would be required. The High Speed Counter

provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 80 KHz for industrial applications such as:

meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement, material handling, motion control and

process control.

With direct processing, the High Speed Counter module is able to sense inputs, count, and respond

with outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU. It can be configured to count either up

or down, to count both up and down, or to count the difference between two changing values. The

module can be configured to provide 1, 2, or 4 counters of differing complexity.

a43971A

SLOT

HIGH SPEEDCOUNTER

5/12/24 VDC

I1

OK

CFG

HIGHSPEEDCOUNTER

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

I8

I9

I10

I11

I12

O1

O2

O3

O4

OK

CFG

HIGHSPEEDCOUNTER

5/12/24

1

3

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

01

02

03

04

HIGH SPEED

5V OPTION

I2

I1

I4

I3

I6

I5

I8

I7

I10

I12

I11

I9

44A729182-FOR USEIC693APU30

Figure 8-14. High Speed Counter (HSC)

The High Speed Counter can be installed in any Series 90-30 baseplate and is configured using the

Hand-Held Programmer, Logicmaster 90-30/20, VersaPro software, or Logic Developer-PLC.

Many features can also be configured from the user’s application program. There are no jumpers to

be set on the module. Two LEDs at the top of the module indicate the operating status of the

module and the status of configuration parameters.

For details on the HSC, refer toGFK-0293, Series 90-30 High Speed Counter User’s Manual.


8

IC693BEM320 I/O LINK Interface (Slave) Module

The I/O LINK Interface module (IC693BEM320) provides an interface between a Series 90-30

PLC and a proprietary Fanuc I/O LINK in a Fanuc CNC (Computer Numerical Control), or a

Series 90-70 PLC. This module is configured as a slave device only (see the IC693BEM321 for

master applications). The Fanuc I/O LINK is a serial interface which provides high speed

exchange of data between a master and up to 16 slaves. An example of a Series 90-30 PLC in a

Fanuc I/O LINK system configuration is shown in the following illustration.

HHP

PROGRAMMER

SERIES 90-30

I/O LINK

MASTER

Figure 8-15. Example of a Series 90-30 PLC in a Fanuc I/O LINK Configuration

The Series 90-30 I/O LINK Interface module is configured as a slave device only and allows the

Series 90-30 PLC to send either 32 or 64 I/O points to the I/O LINK. The I/O LINK module must

be configured as either a 32 or 64 point I/O module during installation by setting a jumper plug

inside of the front cover of the module to either 32 I/O or 64 I/O.

An I/O LINK Interface module can be installed in any model of Series 90-30 PLC, and any

number of I/O LINK Interface modules can be installed in a system within the current limits of the

baseplate and other I/O modules installed in the baseplate. For more details, see ”Load

Requirements for Hardware Components” in Chapter 12 of this manual.

I/O Link Interface Documentation

For detailed information on this module, refer to GFK-0631, the Series 90-30 I/O LINK Interface

Module User’s Manual.


8

IC693BEM321 I/O LINK Master Module

The Series 90-30 I/O LINK Master Module (IC693BEM321) allows a Series 90-30 PLC to act as a

master on a proprietary Fanuc I/O LINK. The Fanuc I/O LINK is a serial interface which provides

high-speed exchange of I/O data between the master and up to 16 slaves. The master can receive

1024 discrete inputs from slaves, and send up to 1024 discrete outputs.

HHP

Series 90-30 PLC

I/O LINK

Master

Power Mate CNC

I/O

Lin

k M

aste

r

Figure 8-16. Example of I/O LINK Master System Configuration

The illustration above shows a simple I/O LINK system: a Series 90-30 PLC used as a master, a

Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer, an I/O LINK, and one slave. In the illustration, the slave is a

Power Mate CNC. Other devices that can be used as slaves include the Series 90-70 PLC, the

Series 90-30 PLC, the Fanuc Series 0 CNC, Fanuc Connection Units, and Fanuc Operator Panels.

The module can be configured using a Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer (HHP) or the

configuration software.


8

Any number of I/O LINK Master Modules can be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC. When there are

multiple I/O LINK Master Modules in the same PLC, they must be on separate I/O LINKs. An I/O

LINK Master Module can be installed in any I/O slot in any baseplate. The maximum number of

I/O LINK Master Modules that can be installed in the CPU baseplate is six,

Restart Pushbutton

The LINK RESTART pushbutton provides a convenient means of restart if a failure occurs.

Pushing the Restart pushbutton restarts the operation of the LINK.

Serial Port

The front of the module has one 20-pin, Honda-type connector, used for connection to the first

slave on the I/O LINK. Signal levels are RS422/485 compatible.

Compatibility

The Series 90-30 I/O LINK Master Module is compatible with the following devices:

Host CPU

Series 90-30 CPU models 311, 313, 321, 323, 331, and 341 release 4.4 or later, and all

versions of the CPU models 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364.

Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer (HHP)

Programmer


Logicmaster 90-30 Programming Software Configurator, release 4.5 or later.

VersaPro Software.

Control programming software, Version 2.0 or later.

Logic Developer-PLC software

Slave Units

Power Mate models A, C, D, and E

Series 0 CNC

Fanuc Operator Panel Unit

Fanuc Connection Unit 1

Fanuc Connection Unit 2

Series 90-30 PLC with 90-30 I/O LINK Slave Module

Series 90-70 PLCs with 90-70 I/O LINK Interface Module set up as slave

I/O Link Master Module Documentation

For detailed information on this module, refer to GFK-0823, the Series 90-30 I/O LINK Master

Module User’s Manual,


8

IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module

The I/O Processor (IOP) module (IC693APU305) for the Series 90-30 PLC provides direct

processing of rapid pulse signals for industrial control applications such as:

Fast response process control

Velocity measurement

Material handling, marking, and packaging

Direct processing means that the module is able to sense inputs, process the input information, and

control the outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU.

During each CPU sweep, the I/O Processor communicates with the CPU through 32 discrete inputs

(%I), 15 words of analog inputs (%AI), 32 discrete outputs (%Q), and 6 words of analog outputs

(%AQ). The %AQ outputs can be used by the CPU program to set up timer values or send other

controlling parameters to the I/O Processor.

IN12/OUT8

1-4: 1.0A @ 12/24

5/12/24 VDC

2

4

OK

I/O

PROC

MODULE

1

3

CFG

a45380

I/O PROCESSOR

2

4

OK

I/O

PROC

MODULE

5/12/24 VDC

I/O PROCESSOR

1

3

7

2

5

6

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

OUT1

SHIELD

IN2

IN1

IN4

IN3

IN6

IN5

IN8

IN7

IN9/OUT5

44A729182-070R01

FOR USE WITH

IC693APU305

IN10/OUT6

IN11/OUT7

INCOM

OUTCOM

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4

IN

TE

RN

AL

V

V

1

3

CFG

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

IN6

IN7

IN8

I9/05

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4

I10/06

I11/07

I12/08

OUT

OUT

OUT

1-8: 0.02A @ 5

5-8: 0.5A @ 12/24

4.0A/MODUL

Figure 8-17. I/O Processor Module


8

The I/O Processor is configured using the Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer, Logicmaster

90-30, VersaPro, or Logic Developer-PLC software. Many configuration parameters can be

modified from the user’s application program as well. Each configuration parameter is set to a

factory default value which is suitable for many applications. There are no jumpers or DIP

switches to set on the module. Six green LEDs at the top of the module indicate the operating

status of the module, the status of configuration parameters, and the state of hardware outputs 1

through 4.

Module Features

Module features include:

Up to 12 positive logic (source) inputs with input voltage range selection of either 5 VDC

(TTL) or 10 to 30 VDC (non-TTL).

Up to eight positive logic (source) outputs: four outputs with 1 amp rating and four

configurable outputs with 0.5 amp rating

Outputs protected by replaceable fuse (one fuse common to all outputs)

Dedicated processor provides 500 ∝ s I/O update

Counts per Timebase register for input rate measurement

Total Counts register (32-bit) accumulates total counts received by module

Four Strobe data registers for input position capture

Two Timer data registers for indicating input pulse length or input spacing in milliseconds

Thirty-two range comparators (outputs returned in %I and %AI data)

Software configuration

Internal module diagnostics

Individual LEDs that indicate Module OK and Configured OK status

Individual LEDs that indicate state of Outputs 1 through 4

A removable terminal board for connection of field wiring.

Inputs can be used as count signals or edge-sensitive strobe signals. Outputs can be used to drive

indicating lights, solenoids, relays, and other devices.

Power to operate the module’s logic circuitry is obtained from the 5 VDC bus on the baseplate

backplane. Power sources for the input and output devices must be supplied by the user or by the

+24 VDC isolated output of the Series 90-30 power supply. The I/O Processor module provides a

selectable threshold voltage to allow the inputs to respond to either a 5 VDC signal level or a 10 to

30 VDC signal level. The threshold is selected by configuration.

All configuration parameters for the module are downloaded from the PLC to the I/O Processor

after it passes its internal diagnostics. Once the module has been successfully configured, the

CONFIG OK LED will turn on. Configuration parameters can be changed using the

programming/configuration software or the Hand-Held Programmer.

Operation of the I/O Processor module is monitored by a watchdog timer circuit. If the watchdog

timer detects a module failure, it will force all outputs off and turn off the MODULE OK LED.

I/O Processor Module Documentation

Please refer to publication GFK-1028, Series 90-30 I/O Processor User’s Manual.


8

IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module

The Ethernet Interface module (IC693CMM321) provides an interface that allows you to attach the

Series 90-30 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via an external transceiver and AAUI cable, and to

communicate with hosts and other control devices on the network.

The Ethernet Interface for the Series 90-30 PLC has client/server capability. As a client it can

initiate communications with other PLCs containing Ethernet Interfaces. This is done from the

ladder program using the COMMREQ Function Block. As a server it responds only to requests

from other devices such as a Host computer running a Host Communications Toolkit application or

another Series 90-30 PLC acting as a client.

The Ethernet Interface allows you to:

Directly attach your PLC to an Ethernet network

Initiate transfer of data to the PLC from another device

Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices with up to 16 server connections

Interface with other GE Fanuc devices, as well as with devices from other vendors

Communicate from a Host computer (or other control device)

Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools

The Ethernet Interface does not support the Series 90-30/20/Micro Hand-Held Programmer. Either

one or two Ethernet Interface modules can be installed in any Series 90-30 baseplate.

The Ethernet Interface connects to an Ethernet network through an external SQE enabled

transceiver (GE Fanuc catalog no. IC649AEA102 or IC649AEA103 or equivalent. See Appendix

J). The following figure shows the layout of the Ethernet Interface.

CMM 321ETHERNETINTERFACE

OK

LAN

SER

STAT

SER

OK

LAN

RESTART

STAT

SERIALNUMBER

LABEL

TRANSCEIVERPORT

STATIONMANAGER

PORT

MACADDRESS

LABEL

FIRMWAREUPGRAD PORT

Pin 1

Figure 8-18. Ethernet Interface Module


8

Four LEDs are located at the top of the board. The Restart pushbutton is located immediately

below the LEDs. The RS-232 serial port with the RJ-11 connector is the Station Manager port.

The RS-485 serial port with the 15-pin D connector located below the Station Manager port is the

module’s Downloader port. The 14-pin AAUI connector, facing downward, is the Transceiver

port. The Default MAC Address label is attached to the outside of the plastic housing.

Board Indicators

There are four LEDs on the Ethernet Interface: OK, LAN, SER, and STAT. These LEDs can be

ON, OFF, BLINKING slow, or BLINKING fast. They indicate the state the Interface is in, traffic

on the Transceiver port and Downloader port, and when an exception event has occurred.

Restart Button

The Restart button serves four functions: LED test, Restart, Restart and Reload, and Restart and

Enter Maintenance Utility. The Restart button is inaccessible when the front cover of the Ethernet

Interface is closed.

Serial Ports

There are two serial ports on the Ethernet Interface: the Station Manager Port and the Downloader

Port.

The Station Manager Port. This RS-232 port is used to connect a terminal or terminal emulator

to access the Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface. This port uses a 6-pin, RJ-11

connector. The IC693CBL316 Station Manager cable is ideal for connecting to this port (see

Chapter 10 for details).

The Firmware Upgrade Port. The 15-pin, D-type, RS-485 port is used to connect to the PC

Downloader in case the communications software in the Ethernet Interface needs to be updated.

Use the IC690ACC901 miniconverter/cable kit for this connection (see Appendix E for details).

AAUI (Transceiver) Port

The 14-pin AAUI port connects to an external Ethernet-compatible transceiver via an IEEE 802.3

transceiver cable. GE Fanuc catalog number IC649AEA102 (for 10Base T) or IC649AEA103 (for

10Base2) are suitable transceivers (see Appendix J for details).

Default MAC Address Label

The Default MAC Address label lists the Ethernet MAC address to be used by this module.

Serial Number Label

The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number of this Interface.

Ethernet Interface Module Documentation

For details, refer to GFK-1541, Series 90-30 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual.


8

IC693PCM300/301/311 Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)

The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) is a high performance coprocessor for the Series

90-30 Modular CPUs (will not work with Embedded CPU models 311, 313, or 323). The PCM

supports the Modbus RTU and GE Fanuc CCM protocols, as well as the MegaBasic and C

programming languages. A free program for using this module as an RTU Master can be

downloaded from the GE Fanuc website. The PCM has two separate ports, both accessed on one

front panel connector.

The PCM is available in three versions. Each version is listed below with the total memory on the

board and the nominal user-available MegaBasic program memory size.

PCM Catalog Number Total Memory User Megabasic memory

IC693PCM300 160K 35K

IC693PCM301 192K 47K

IC693PCM311 640K 190K

a43734

PCM300COPROC

OK

US1

US2

BD OK

P1 OK

P2 OK

RESTART

BATTERY

PORTS 1 & 2

CONNECTOR

Figure 8-19. Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM)


8

Applications

These modules are used for communicating with programming terminals, CRTs, bar code readers,

scales, printers, ASCII devices, RTU master devices, etc.

PCM Module Location

A PCM can be installed in any slot in the CPU baseplate only, except slot 1 (labeled CPU/1), which

must contain the CPU module. A PCM will not work in Expansion or Remote racks or in an

Embedded CPU (CPU311, 313, or 323) rack.

Protocols Supported

Modbus RTU and GE Fanuc CCM.

LED Indicator Lights

OK -Normally ON. Indicates the basic condition of the module.

US1 and US2 - By default, LED US1 flashes to indicate activity on Port 1, and LED US2

flashes to indicate activity on Port 2. Both LEDs stay OFF when there is no port activity.

However, the function of these two LEDs can be custom configured by the user. Please see

GFK-0255 for custom configuration details.

Restart Pushbutton

Used to place the module in either the RUN mode or the PROGRAM mode. Please see “PCM

Operation Modes” in GFK-0255, Chapter 1.

Memory Backup Battery

The Lithium battery for backup of RAM memory is installed in a battery mounting clip on the

inside of the PCM faceplate. This battery is disconnected for shipment from the factory and must

be connected prior to installation of the module. When the PCM is stored for extended periods of

time, the battery should be disconnected, unless you wish to retain the program in RAM memory.

Order replacement batteries using catalog number IC693ACC301 (package of two).

Cables

IC693CBL304/305 - These Wye cables split out the two PCM port connections from the single

connector on the front of the PCM modules. One of these cables is supplied with each PCM

module. The IC693CBL304 is for the PCM300. The IC693CBL305 is for the PCM301 and

PCM311. Please see Chapter 10 for details on these cables.

IC690CBL701/702/705 - These cables provides a direct RS-232 connection between the PCM and

various programmers’ serial ports. These cables are not supplied with the PCM modules. Please

see Chapter 10 for details on these cables.


8

Programmable Coprocessor Module Documentation

GFK-0255, Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s

Manual

GFK-0256, Megabasic Language Reference and Programmer’s Guide Reference Manual

GFK-0487, Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual

GFK-0771, C Programmer’s Toolkit for Series 90 PCMs User’s Manual


8

IC693CMM311 Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM)

The Communications Coprocessor Module (IC693CMM311) provides a high performance

coprocessor for all Series 90-30 modular CPUs (cannot be used with embedded CPUs - models

311, 313, or 323). This module supports the GE Fanuc CCM communications protocol, the RTU

(Modbus) slave communications protocol, and the SNP protocol. This module has two serial ports.

Port 1 supports RS-232 applications and Port 2 supports either RS-232 or RS-485 applications.

The module can be configured using the configuration software, or by using a default setup.

Since both serial ports are wired to the module’s single connector, an IC693CBL305 Wye cable is

supplied with this module to separate the two ports for ease of wiring. A system with a 331 or

higher CPU can have up to four CMMs (in the CPU baseplate only).

PORT1&

PORT2

a44902

COMMCOPROC

OK

US1

US2

OK

US1

US2

RESTART

COMBINEDSERIAL PORT

Figure 8-20. Communications Control Module

Communications Control Module Documentation

For more information, refer to GFK-0582, the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver User’s

Manual.


8

IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)

The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor module (IC693ADC311) is a coprocessor to the Series

90-30 PLC CPU and is used in a CIMPLICITY 90-ADS system. It performs CIMPLICITY

90-ADS display, report, and alarm functions when interfaced to an Operator Interface Terminal

(OIT). The OIT can be a variety of GE Fanuc devices, a VT100 compatible terminal, or IBM

compatible personal computer running TERMF. Communications with the Series 90-30 CPU is

done over the PLC system backplane.

ADC311COPROC

OK

US1

US2

BD OK

P1 OK

P2 OK

RESTART

BATTERY

Figure 8-21. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module (ADC)

Features of the Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor include:

Single slot module

Runs CIMPLICITY 90-ADS System software

8 Mhz, 80C188 microprocessor

High performance access to PLC memory

Real time calendar clock synchronized to PLC

Reset pushbutton; three status LEDs

Soft Configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)

Easy fill-in-the-blank system building

Pop-up windows; pull down menus

Fifteen User definable function keys per screen

Printer logging to a serial printer


8

Multiple Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors can be supported in a single Series 90-30 PLC

system with modular CPU (331 and higher) and must be located in the CPU baseplate. This

module has a single connector which supports two serial ports, with each port being dedicated to a

specific operation. Port 1 is most often used to connect to an RS-232 serial COM port of a

computer running GE Fanuc PCM Development Software (PCOP). Alternately, port 1 may be

connected to a serial RS-232 printer (see the “Cables” section below.). By default, Port 2 is

configured as a 19.2 Kbaud RS-232 port. It can be used to interface to a terminal with keyboard

input and screen output.

Serial port programming and configuration are done using a Workmaster II, Workmaster, or an

IBM-compatible PC, XT, AT, or PS/2 computer with PCM Development Software (PCOP)

installed. The programming computer connects to Port 1 (see the “Cables” section below) . The

default setting is 19,200 bps. The PCM Development Software is used to configure the serial port

parameters and to install the CIMPLICITY 90-ADS software onto the ADC.

There are no DIP switches or jumpers on this board that need to be set for configuration. The ADC

module must be configured with the configuration software prior to use.

Cables

IC693CBL305 - This Wye cable is used to split out the two ADC port connections from the single

connector on the front of the ADC module. This cable is supplied with the module. Please see

Chapter 10 for details on this cable.

IC690CBL702 - This cable provides a direct RS-232 connection between the ADC and another

serial device such as a Personal Computer. This cable is not supplied with the module. Please see

Chapter 10 for details on this cable.

Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module Documentation:

See the following manuals for detailed information on Series 90-30 Alphanumeric Display

Coprocessor Modules:

GFK-0499 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual

GFK-0641 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual

GFK-0487 Series 90-30 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual


8

IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Modules (TCM)

The Temperature Control Modules (TCM) provides temperature control for up to eight channels.

The two TCM models are identical except for temperature range and resolution ratings (see

comparison table). They have the following features:

Can operate in either open loop or closed loop mode

Each channel has a thermocouple input and a relay output

RTD input

12V common mode voltage capability

Open and reverse thermocouple detection and reporting

Out of tolerance temperature detection and reporting

4

8

1

5

P R F S

R-S-S+R1+1-2+2-3+3-4+4-5+5-6+6-7+7-8+8-

1+1-2+2-3+3-4+4-5+5-6+6-7+7-8+8-

P+P-G

TCMRTD+ 1/P

PWR+ 0/P

Output ConnectorInput Connector

Output Status LEDs (1 – 8)

Power, Run, Fault,

and Short LEDs

Front Cover Location of Fuse(Behind Front Cover)

RTD Input External Power Input

for Output Relays

Figure 8-22. IC693TCM302/303 Temperature Control Module (TCM)

Connections

Field devices (thermocouples, relays), RTD and external power for output relays are connected to

the module using a pair of plug-in connectors which are supplied with the module. These

connectors have captive screw terminals for ease of connecting field wiring. The signal name for

each terminal is labeled on the module’s front cover next to each connector, as shown in the

drawing above. For example, Channel 8 connections are labeled 8+ and 8- on each connector.

Input connections are on the left-hand connector and output connections are on the right-hand

connector.


8

LED Indicators

P (External Power) - This green LED is normally ON, indicating that the module is receiving

power. If this LED is OFF, it may indicate that the TCM’s internal fuse is open.

R (Run) - This green LED is normally ON. When there is an internal module fault, this LED

will alternately flash with the red Fault (F) LED.

F (Fault) - This red LED is normally OFF. This light flashes upon module startup and goes

out when the TCM finishes its internal startup routine. When there is an internal module fault,

this LED will alternately flash with the green Run (R) LED.

S (Short) - This red LED is normally OFF. This LED lights when there is a short on one of

the output circuits.

1 – 8 (Output Status) - These green LEDs normally turn ON and OFF while the module is

regulating their outputs. The percentage of time that one of these LEDs is ON verses OFF is

representative of the PWM period of that output. Each of the eight LEDs corresponds to an

output channel. The output connector is the one on the right side of the module. The channels

numbers are labeled on the module next to the connector. For example, LED 8 corresponds to

the connections labeled 8+ and 8- on the right-hand connector.

Internal Fuse

The TCM’s internal fuse is a 2 Amp, 125V subminiature type (Littlefuse Microfuse, Catalog

Number 273 002 or equivalent). If the P (External Power) LED will not light, the internal fuse may

be open. To access this fuse:

Turn off power to the PLC, then remove the TCM module.

While gently pulling outward on the front cover, release the front cover side tabs with a small

(“pocket-size”) standard screwdriver.

Gently remove the fuse by pulling it forward, out of the front of the module, with a small pair

of needle nose pliers.

Warning

Replace fuse only with the correct size and type. Using an incorrect fuse can

result in harm to personnel, damage to equipment, or both.

Automatic Data Transfers Between TCM and PLC

The PLC CPU controls the TCM by automatically passing commands to it on each PLC sweep.

These commands are contained in %Q bits and %AQ words that command such things as

Enable/Disable Output, Auto/Manual Mode, Do Autotuning, Setpoint values, and Alarm Limit

values.

In return, the TCM sends information to the PLC CPU by automatically passing %I bits and %AI

words each PLC sweep. The information sent by the TCM includes Alarm and Output Short

Circuit status, Current Temperature, PWM Period, and TCM Error Code.


8

Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303 Modules

The TCM303 an extended range TCM302 as shown in the table below. For additional information

about the TCM, refer to GFK-1466, Temperature Control Module for the Series 90-30 PLC User’s

Manual.

Table 8-1. Comparison of TCM302 and TCM303

Item IC693TCM302 IC693TCM303

Temperature range, J and L Thermocouples 0 – 450 °C 0 – 750 °C

Temperature range, K Thermocouples 0 – 600 °C 0 – 1050 °C

Resolution 12 bits / 0.2 °C 12 bits / 0.5 °C


8

IC693PTM100/101 Power Transducer (PTM)

The PTM is used for measuring electrical power consumption or for monitoring voltages between

an electrical generator and its power grid. It connects to user-supplied current and potential

transformers, which furnish the input signals the PTM uses to calculate its data. Since one of the

PTM’s components is a Series 90-30 PLC module, the PLC can use the data gathered by the PTM

for data reporting, fault monitoring, generator control, or demand charge reduction/load shedding

applications. The PTM consists of three parts, which are all included under one catalog number:

PTM Processing Module (PTMPM) - a module that mounts in a Series 90-30 Rack.

PTM Interface Module (PTMIM) - a panel-mounted circuit board. This board interfaces

between the PTMPM module and the input transformers (current and potential).

Interface cable - connects the PTMPM module to the PTMIM circuit board.

Difference Between PTM100 and PTM101

The only difference between the IC693PTM100 and IC693PTM101 is in the length of their

interface cables. The PTM100 comes with a 19” (0.5 meter) cable, and the PTM101 comes with a

39” (1 meter) cable.

Capabilities

A single PTM is capable of performing any one of the following tasks, as selected by the

appropriate %Q bit:

Measure power parameters for three individual single phase circuits.

Measure power parameters for one 3-wire single phase circuit (120/240 VAC).

Measure power parameters for one 3-phase circuit (selectable between Wye or Delta type).

Measure and compare power parameters between a 3-phase generator’s output phases and one

power grid phase.

Measure and compare power parameters between one generator output phase and one power

grid phase.

Operating Modes

The PTM can operate in either of the following two modes, which are selectable by a %Q bit in the

PLC application program:

Power Monitor Mode - In this mode, the PTM samples either Single Phase or 3-Phase AC

voltages and currents and uses the data to calculate numerous power values. For 3-Phase

operation, Wye or Delta, can be selected.

Synchro Monitor Mode - In this mode, the PTM samples a Single-Phase or 3-Phase AC

voltage produced by a generator, and one voltage from the associated power grid, then

develops voltage, frequency, and relative phase information.


8

Automatic Data Transfers Between PTMPM and PLC

The PLC CPU controls the PTM Processor Module (PTMPM) by sending it several %Q bits and

%AQ words during each PLC sweep. These %Q bits and %AQ words represent commands such

as Enabled/Disabled, Power/Synchro Mode, Display Mode, and Gain values.

In return, the PTMPM provides information to the PLC CPU by sending it several %I bits and %AI

words each PLC sweep. The information sent by the PTMPM includes voltage, current, power,

and phase values, as well as discrete fault status.

Compatibility

The PTM is compatible with all Series 90-30 CPUs, and the PTMPM module may be mounted in

any type of baseplate (CPU, Expansion, Remote).

F

RPTM

FGND

Vg

In+

In-

Va

Ia+

Ia-

Vb

Ib+

Ib-

Vc

Ic+

Ic-

COM

PTMIMPTMPM

Length*

*Length of IC693CBL340 Cable is 19" (0.5 meter)

*Length of IC693CBL341 Cable is 39" (1 meter)

Interface Cable

Figure 8-23. IC693PTM100/101 Components


8

Dimensions

PTMPM Standard size Series 90-30 module, mounts in a Series 90-30 baseplate.

PTMIM Interface module. Approximately 4.5” (114 mm) long by 3” (76 mm) wide. It ismounted on a standard 35 mm DIN-rail.

IC693CBL340

Interface cable

Approximately 19” (0.5 Meter) long.

IC693CBL341

Interface cable

Approximately 39” (1 Meter) long.

PTMPM Indicator LEDs

F (Fault) - This RED LED, when OFF, indicates that there are no interface faults. When ON,

either steady or flashing, it indicates that one or more of three possible faults is present: (1)

Phase A input not present, (2) over-range condition on one or more inputs (voltage or current

values too high), and (3) phase polarity fault. Each of these three fault signals has a %I status

bit in the PLC.

R (Running) - This Green LED, when ON, indicates that the module is “running” (functioning

properly). When OFF, it indicates a module failure.

General Mounting Information

It is recommended the PTMPM modules be mounted in a slot at or near the end of the PLC and that

the PTMIM be mounted to the panel to the side of the PLC (the PTMIM mounts on a standard

DIN-rail). This will keep the power wiring to the PTMIM physically separated from PLC signal

wiring, thus reducing the opportunity for noise coupling. The PTMIM ground requirements

must be strictly adhered to - refer to the user’s manual, GFK-1734 for instructions. See

Warning note below.

Series 90-30 PLC

PTMIM

PTM

IC693CBL340/341 PTM Cable

PTMPM

Figure 8-24. IC693PTM100/101 Component Mounting

Warning

The PTMIM board connects to hazardous voltages. Before installing,

testing, or troubleshooting this board, you should read the complete

instructions in the PTM User’s Manual, GFK-1734. Failure to follow the

guidelines in the PTM User’s Manual may result in personal injury,

equipment damage, or both.


8

Baseplate Type and Allowable Number of PTMPM Modules

The PTMPM module may be installed in any type of Series 90-30 baseplate (CPU, Expansion, or

Remote). There are no restrictions as to the maximum number of PTMPM modules per PLC

system, or per PLC baseplate, as long as the PLC power supply has sufficient capacity and there is

sufficient %I, %Q, %AI, and %AQ memory available. However, as noted in the “Mounting

Information” section, it is beneficial to keep the PTMIM power wiring physically separated from

PLC signal wiring in order to reduce noise coupling; this can have a bearing on which baseplate

slots to choose when mounting PTMPM modules.

Power Supply Requirement

The PTMPM module requires 400 mA @ 5 VDC from the PLC power supply. The PTMIM does

not require a control power input.

Memory Requirement

Each PTMPM requires the following PLC memory allocation:

%I - 16 bits

%Q - 16 bits

%AI - 25 words

%AQ - 2 words

Configuration

The PTMPM module should be configured in the Series 90-30 PLC as a “Foreign” module.

Ordering Information

The PTMPM module and its PTMIM interface board are considered to be a matched set and,

therefore, they are not sold separately. The two cables, however, may be ordered as separate items.

There are four catalog numbers in the PTM product line:

IC693PTM100 - This system contains the PTMPM, its matched PTMIM, and the 19”

(0.5 meter) interface cable.

IC693PTM101 - This system contains the PTMPM, its matched PTMIM, and the 39”

(1 meter) interface cable.

IC693CBL340 - The 19” (0.5 meter) interface cable.

IC693CBL341 - The 39” (1 meter) interface cable.

Documentation

For details, refer to GFK-1734, Series 90-30 PLC Power Transducer User’s Manual

GFK-0356Q 9-1

State Logic Products

State Logic Overview

State Logic, unlike other Series 90-30 PLC systems, does not use ladder logic type instructions.

Instead, it uses ”Natural Language” programming instructions. For example, to program a rung of

logic that turns on a motor at a specific time in a State Logic system, you could create a statement,

“If hour is past 8 AM, start the exhaust system.” This type of programming instruction cannot be

handled currently by standard Series 90-30 CPUs, so a State Logic CPU is required. This chapter

only provides an overview of State Logic products. For details, please see GFK-1056, Series 90-30

State Logic Control System User’s Manual.


The State Logic product line consist of just a few key hardware and software items. To complete a

State Logic system, standard Series 90-30 products are used. The primary State Logic products

are:

State Logic CPUs. There are five models: 3 , 3 3, 323, 33 , and 340.

State Logic Processor Module (IC693SLP300). This module can reside in a Series 90-30

PLC system containing a standard CPU, providing the user with both standard ladder logic and

State Logic capabilities.

Serial Communications Module (AD693CMM301). Provides two additional serial ports for

the State Logic system. Requires a 33 or 340 State Logic CPU.

ECLiPS software. Provides Natural Language programming and online debugging functions.

OnTOP software. A debugging tool, it provides operator interface, maintenance, or

troubleshooting functions. It has all the capabilities of the ECLiPS debugging function.

Baseplates and Power Supply, I/O, and Option Modules

The State Logic CPUs and modules work with most standard Series 90-30 baseplates, power

supplies, input and output modules (discrete and analog), and option modules. Please see

GFK- 056, Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual, for details.

9Chapter


9

AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module (SCM)

Description

This module provides two additional serial ports for a Series 90-30 State Logic PLC System. A

model 33 or 340 State Logic CPU is required.

PORT1&

PORT2

OK OK

RESTART

COMBINEDSERIAL PORT

Figure 9-1. AD693CMM301 State Logic Serial Communications Module

OK LED

The SCM turns on its OK LED after completing its start-up internal self test procedure. The OK

LED remains ON as long as the module is functioning properly. If the OK LED turns OFF while

power is applied to the system, turn OFF PLC power and make sure the module is properly seated

in the baseplate. Turn power back ON. If the OK LED remains OFF when power comes back up,

it indicates a probable hardware failure in the SCM and it should be returned for repair. The other

two LEDs on this module are not used.

Reset Button

Pressing the Reset pushbutton when the OK LED is ON re-initializes the module. However, if the

OK LED is off (indicating a module failure), pressing the Reset button will have no effect.

GFK-0356Q Chapter 9 State Logic Products 9-3

9

Serial Connector

The SCM front-mounted serial port connector provides all of the connections for the two SCM

serial ports. Separate pins on this connector are assigned for Port and Port 2. Both ports support

RS-232 standard. Only Port 2 supports the RS-485 standard. A special WYE cable, described

below, is available from GE Fanuc to separate the two port connections on the connector.

Cable Information

Cable IC693CBL305 can be used in applications that require use of both SCM serial ports. This is

a Wye-type cable that breaks out the Port and Port 2 connections on the module’s single

connector to two individual connectors. A data sheet for this cable can be found in the “Cables”

chapter of this manual. (Additional SCM cable information is found in the two documents

referenced in the next section.) This cable wouldn’t be required for applications that use only one

SCM port. Also, this cable should not be used in a multidrop network (see Caution note below).

Caution

The IC693CBL305 Wye cable should not be used with an SCM connected to

a multidrop network because it introduces signal reflections on the network.

Multidrop networks should be cabled directly to the SCM serial connector.

1 FOOT

PORT 1

PORT 2

PCM COMM.CABLEIC693CBL305

B

RS-23225-PIN FEMALE

CONNECTOR PIN 1

PIN 1RS-232/RS-48525-PIN FEMALECONNECTOR

LABEL

PIN 1 RS-23225-PIN MALECONNECTOR

(+2.0 INCH, -0 INCH)

Figure 9-2. IC693CBL305 WYE Cable

State Logic SCM Documentation

GFK- 66 (Data Sheet), Serial Communications Module, Series 90-30 State Logic

GFK- 056, Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual


9

IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module

Description

The State Logic Processor Module (SLP) installs in a Series 90-30 PLC ladder logic control

system to provide real time multi-tasking control for machine and process applications. It can be

programmed to perform computations, data acquisition, data communications and operator

interface functions. Also, the SLP module can provide machine or process simulation capabilities

to Series 90-30 PLC ladder logic control system to help reduce debug and startup times. This dual

processor architecture allows a user to create both ladder logic and state logic application programs

in any combination for efficient parallel processing solutions.

The SLP is programmed using the English Control Language Programming System (ECLiPS)

software package. It communicates with the PLC CPU over the backplane and can access user and

system data. Many SLPs can be supported in a single Series 90-30 PLC system and each SLP can

support up to 5 2 inputs and 5 2 outputs.

Figure 9-3. IC693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module for Series 90-30


9

SLP Features

Natural English Language Programming using ECLiPS Structured State Logic program architecture

Advanced Diagnostics

Simulation capabilities

PID Loop control

Handles complex math easily (floating point, square root, trig. functions)

Allows any combination of Natural English State Logic and Ladder Logic programs in samesystem

Configurable to operate with a Series 90-30 PLC system that uses a model 33 , 340, or 34CPU

Up to 5 2 inputs and 5 2 outputs

CCM2 Protocol

8 Mhz, 80C 88 microprocessor

46 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS logic memory on board

One RS-422/RS-485 port and one RS-232 serial port

Soft configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)

Restart/Reset Pushbutton

OK Status LED

Occupies a single slot in a Series 90-30 rack

Memory

The SLP module has 46 Kbytes of user program memory space. Additional memory exists for

Input, Output, Register, and other variable data. The battery which supports this memory is

located on the SLP module, as shown in the following figure.

Installation

Installation should not be attempted without referring to the State Logic Processor User’sGuide (see reference ).

The Series 90-30 SLP can only be installed in a Series 90-30 PLC system that uses a model33 , model 340, or model 34 CPU.

Make sure rack power is off.

Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (See figure E-3).

Install the SLP Module in the rack.

Turn on power.

The module should power up and blink the top LED, indicating that power up diagnostics are in

progress. When the diagnostics have completed successfully the top LED stays on. The other

LEDs on this module are not used and will always stay off.


9

OK BD OK

RESTART

BATTERY

CURRENTLY

INSTALLEDBATTERY

CONNECTOR

OPENREPLACEMENT

BATTERYCONNECTOR

PORTS1 AND 2

SLP 300

Figure 9-4. State Logic Processor Module User Details

Status Light

Three Status LEDs exist on the SLP module. The top LED (see figure above) indicates the

condition of the module. It will blink ON and OFF while the module is booting up, then will stay

ON during normal operation. The bottom two LEDs are not used and will always be off.

Pushbutton

See Caution note below before operating the pushbutton. One pushbutton is provided. Pushing

and holding the pushbutton for less than 5 seconds will simply restart the user application program

if it was configured to “auto-run” at power up. Pushing and holding for more than 5 seconds will

reinitialize the module and require that the user application program be reloaded.

Caution

Pushing and holding the pushbutton for more than 5 seconds will reinitialize

the module and require that the user application program be reloaded.


9

Battery

A lithium battery (IC697ACC30 ) is installed as shown in the previous figure. This battery

maintains user memory when power is removed. Be sure to install a new battery before removing

the old battery (two connectors are provided). Indication of a low battery is provided through the

ECLiPS programming system software and Logicmaster 90-30 software.

Cable Information

Cable IC693CBL305 can be used in applications that require use of both SLP serial ports. This is a

Wye-type cable that breaks out the Port and Port 2 connections on the module’s single connector

to two individual connectors. A data sheet for this cable can be found in the “Cables” chapter of

this manual. (Additional SLP cable information is found in publication GFK-0726 - see

“Documentation” section.) This cable is not required for applications that use only one SLP port.

Hardware Specifications

Battery:

Shelf Life 5 years at 20°C (68°F)

Memory Retention 6 months nominal without applied power

Internal Power Consumption 400 mA from 5V bus on backplane

Serial Ports: Two RS-232/422/485 compatible

State Logic Processor (SLP) Documentation

Please refer to the following publications for more State Logic Processor information.

Title Part Number

Series 90-30 PLC State Logic Processor User’s Guide GFK-0726

Series 90-30 PLC ECLiPS User’s Manual GFK-0732

Series 90-30 PLC OnTOP User’s Guide GFK-0747

OnTOP for Series 90-30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator Program User’s

Manual

GFK-0750

Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual GFK- 056


9

State Logic CPUs

Five models of State Logic CPUs are available that support State Logic programming. Three of

these CPUs are of the embedded baseplate type, and two are modular CPUs. Data sheets for these

modules are located at the back of this chapter. The available State Logic CPUs for the Series 90-

30 PLC are:

IC693CSE311 and IC693CSE313, both are 5-slot embedded CPU (CPU is built-in)

baseplates.

IC693CSE323, 0-slot embedded CPU baseplate.

IC693CSE331 and IC693CSE340, single-slot CPU modules (can be installed in standard

IC693CHS397 5-slot CPU baseplate, or standard IC693CHS39 0-slot CPU baseplate).

Features of State Logic CPUs

Support State Logic programming

Support Floating Point calculations

Support Clock/Calendar functions (CSE33 and 340 are battery backed)

Support discrete and analog overrides

Programmed by State Logic software products

Provide from 0K to 98K Bytes of program memory depending on model

Program memory is battery backed

Control two Status LEDs on the power supply

Software configuration (no DIP switches or jumpers to set)

Serial port on power supply used as a programming port, a simple ASCII interface, or a CCM

port

Password controlled access

Support Series 90-30 I/O products

Alarm Processor Function for module diagnostics

Simulation mode

EPROM and EEPROM program memory

Store histogram of State Changes


9

Model CSE311, CSE313 and CSE323 Embedded CPU Baseplates

The Programmable Logic Controller with a built-in State Logic CPU is available in three models.

The CSE3 and CSE3 3 with built-in CPU has 5 slots available for modules and the CSE323 with

built-in CPU has 0 slots available for modules. Each baseplate also has a power supply slot.

The CSE 3 , 3 3 and 323 CPUs can be programmed in the State Logic programming language

using the State Logic software products. The State logic software products are also used to

configure the Programmable Controller and communicate on-line with the State Logic CPU for

debugging and troubleshooting operations.

The CSE3 , CSE3 3, and CSE323 communicate with I/O modules, smart option modules, and

Third Party modules across the PLC backplane. Most of the available Series 90-30 discrete,

analog, and special purpose modules are supported (with Release 3.0 of State Logic). Foreign or

3rd party modules are also supported.

A socket labeled PROGRAM PROM is provided to install an EEPROM or EPROM. This option

allows the control program to be stored in a PROM instead of RAM memory. It also is convenient

in that it allows the PROM to be copied for installation in multiple CPUs.

POWER 1 2 3 4 5

1

USER PROGRAM


SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



i HOUR

Figure 9-5. Model CSE311 or CSE313 5-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate

CONTROLLER

6POWER 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10

PROGRAMMABLE

SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

USER PROGRAMAND REGISTERVALUES MAY BELOST IF POWER


1 HOUR.

CAUTION

SUPPLY

Figure 9-6. Model CSE323 10-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate


9

Model CSE331 and CSE340 Modular CPUs

The CSE 33 CPU (IC693CSE33 ) and CSE 340 (IC693CSE340) CPUs are single slot modules

which must be installed in slot one (labeled CPU/ ) of a CPU baseplate (IC693CHS39 or

IC693CHS397). An illustration of the State Logic CPU modules is shown below.

Figure 9-7. CPU Models CSE 331 or CSE 340

The CSE 33 and CSE 340 CPU modules provide the same functionality as the models CSE 3 ,

3 3 and 323, and offer several more advanced features such as more I/O points and more User

Program memory. See the table at the end of this chapter to compare CPU specifications.


9

CPU Serial Port Connector on Power Supply

The 5-pin D-connector provides the connection to an RS-485 compatible serial port. The

connection is made from the serial port on the power supply to the serial port on the programming

computer or other serial device through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900)

or RS-422 to RS-232 Miniconverter (IC690ACC90 ).

The serial port has three possible uses:

as a programming port for the State Logic software to download programs and to send

instructions to the PLC;

as an ASCII port providing a connection from the CPU to any ASCII device;

as a CCM port providing an interface connection for MMI and other host computer systems.


Figure 9-8. Serial Port Connector

Notes

The serial port connector is functional only in a power supply that is installedin a baseplate that also contains the CPU; this includes the Model CSE 3and CSE 3 3 5-slot baseplates with built-in CPU, CSE 323 0-slot baseplatewith built-in CPU, and the Model CSE 33 and CSE 340 single slot CPUs.

The serial port is not functional when a power supply is installed in a Series90-30 expansion or remote baseplate.

Additionally, any device connected to the serial port that uses +5 VDC powerfrom the Series 90-30 power supply must be included in the calculation formaximum power consumption (see Sample Calculations for Power Supply

Loads in Chapter 3 of this manual).

Configuring the State Logic CPUs

All of the State Logic CPUs and attached I/O system are configured with the State Logic software.

There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual


9

module configuration at power-up and periodically throughout the operation. The actual

configuration must match the programmed configuration. Any detected deviations are reported to

the CPU alarm processor function for the configured fault response. Refer to GFK- 056, the Series

90-30 State Logic CPU User’s Manual for more information.

Table 9-1. System Specifications for Series 90-30 State Logic CPUs

State Logic CPU Model

CSE 340 CSE 331 CSE 313/323 CSE 311

Digital Inputs, %I 024 024 5 2 5 2

Digital Outputs, %Q 024 024 5 2 5 2

Global I/O, %G 280 280 280 280

Internal Flags 000 000 500 500

Analog Inputs, %AI 256 256 28 28

Analog Outputs, %AQ 28 28 64 64

PID Loops 20 20 20 20

Integer Variables 000 000 250 250

Floating Point Variables 250 250 6 6

String Variables 20 20 8 8

Character Variables 64 64 64 64

Tables 20 20 0 0

Program Memory 98K Bytes 48K Bytes 20K Bytes 0K Bytes

Processor Speed 20 MHz 0 MHz 0 MHz 0 MHz

Number of Baseplates 5 5

Baseplate Size 5 or 0 slots 5 or 0 slots 5 slots (CSE3 3)0 slots (CSE323)

5 slots

Supports SCM Yes Yes No No

Serial Ports

Clock/Calendar Hardware Hardware Software Software

Table Memory Space 4K Bytes 4K Bytes K Bytes K Bytes

For more detailed information on State Logic CPU specifications, see GFK- 056, the Series 90-30

State Logic Control System User’s Manual.


9

State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Configurations

State Logic CPU Firmware and PROM Table

CPU

Firmware

(standard)

EPROM

(for user

memory)

EEPROM

(for user

memory)

Flash

(for user

memory)

CSE311 EPROM Optional N/A N/A




CSE340 EPROM N/A N/A Optional

State Logic CPU Data Sheets

This section provides data sheets describing each of the Series 90-30 State Logic CPU modules.

Each CPU is described in a one-page data sheet, which provides a quick reference to all of the

available CPU models.

IC693CSE3 State Logic, 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

IC693CSE3 3 State Logic, 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

IC693CSE323 State Logic, 0-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

IC693CSE33 State Logic, CPU module, 0 MHz

IC693CSE340 State Logic, CPU module, 20 MHz


9

CSE311 Catalog Number IC693CSE311

POWER 1 2 3 4 5

1

USER PROGRAM


SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



1 HOUR

CPU Type State Logic 5-slot baseplate with embedded CPU

Total Baseplates per System

Load Required from Power Supply 4 0 milliamps from +5 VDC supply

Processor Type and Speed 80 88, 0 MHz

Typical Scan Rate 8 milliseconds per K of logic (boolean contacts)

Serial Ports

Type of memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM

Clock Software

Program Memory 0K Bytes

Digital I/O (%I, %Q) 024

Tasks 256

Task Groups 6

States per task 254

I/O and Variable Names 3000

Analog Inputs and Outputs 28 (%AI), 64 (%AQ)

Internal Flags 500

%G 280

%T, %S, %M, %R n/a

Integer Variables 250

Floating Point Variables 6

String Variables 8

Characters / String 80

Character Variables 64

Characters / Write 5 2

Serial Protocols SNP, CCM

Tables 0

Table Memory (Bytes) K

Timers Unlimited

Timer Resolution .0 seconds

Timer-Counters 00

Trace Size 00

PID Loops 20


9


POWER1 2 3 4 5

1

USER PROGRAM


SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

CAUTION

SUPPLY



i HOUR





Typical Scan Rate 0.6 milliseconds per K of logic (boolean contacts)

Serial Ports

Type of Memory Storage RAM, EPROM, EEPROM

Clock Software



Tasks 256

Task Groups 6

States per task 254



Internal Flags 500

%G 280

%T, %S, %M, %R n/a



String Variables 8





Tables 0


Timers Unlimited


Timer-Counters 00

Trace Size 00

PID Loops 20


9


CONTROLLER

6POWER 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10

1PROGRAMMABLE

SYSTEMPROM

PROGRAMPROM

USER PROGRAMAND REGISTERVALUES MAY BELOST IF POWER


1 HOUR.

CAUTION

SUPPLY






Serial Ports


Clock Software



Tasks 256

Task Groups 6

States per task 254



Internal Flags 500

%G 280

%T, %S, %M, %R n/a



String Variables 8





Tables 0


Timers Unlimited


Timer-Counters 00

Trace Size 00

PID Loops 20


9


CPU Type State Logic single slot CPU module

Total Baseplates per System 5 ( CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remote baseplates)




Serial Ports


Clock Hardware



Tasks 256

Task Groups 6

States per task 254



Internal Flags 000

%G 280

%T, %S, %M, %R n/a



String Variables 20




Serial Protocols SNP, CCM, RTU

Tables 20

Table Memory (Bytes) 4K

Timers Unlimited


Timer-Counters 00

Trace Size 00

PID Loops 20


9


CPU Type State Logic single slot CPU module

Total Baseplates per System 5 ( CPU baseplate + 4 expansion and/or remotebaseplates)

Load Required from Power

Supply

490 milliamps from +5 VDC supply

Processor Type and Speed 80C 88XL, 20 MHz


Serial Ports

Type of Memory Storage RAM, Flash, EEPROM

Clock Hardware



Tasks 256

Task Groups 6

States per task 254



Internal Flags 000

%G 280

%T, %S, %M, %R n/a



String Variables 20




Serial Protocols SNP, CCM, RTU

Tables 20

Table Memory (Bytes) 4K

Timers Unlimited


Timer-Counters 00

Trace Size 00

PID Loops 20

GFK-0356Q 10-1

Cables

The following table serves as a cable catalog number/application cross-reference:

Table 10-1. Series 90-30 Cable Cross-Reference

Series 90-30 Cable Cross-Reference

Catalog No. Description Applications

A03B-0807-K802(Equivalent to catalognumber 44C741558-004)

33’ (10 meter) I/O Link module tomodule cable. See publication GFK-0823 for details on I/O Link cables.

I/O Link modules:IC693BEM321 (Master)IC693BEM320 (Slave/Interface)

A03B-0807-K803(Equivalent to catalognumber 44C741558-002)

1.5’ (0.45) meter I/O Link opticaladapter to module cable. Seepublication GFK-0823 for details on I/OLink cables.


A66L-6001-009#LxxxxxNote: xxxxx portionof the numberdepends on the cablelength. Lengths are10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50,60, 80, 90, and 100meters.

I/O Link fiber optic cable, available inten lengths. Catalog number depends onlength. For example, the 10 metercable’s catalog number is A66L-6001-009#L10R03.See publication GFK-0823 for detailson these length choices.


IC647CBL704 Programmer serial cable to connectWork Station Interface board to theserial connector on the PLC PowerSupply.

For GE Fanuc Work Station Interface(WSI) boards:IC647WMI310IC647WMI320

IC690ACC901Miniconverter andcable kit

Contains RS-422 to RS-232miniconverter, a 6’ (2 meter) serialcable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter.

For connecting a computer’s RS-232serial port to a PLC RS-422/485 serialport. See Appendix F for details on thisproduct.

IC690CBL701

(Note: Used on oldercomputers)

Connects a PCM, CMM, or ADCmodule to a GE Fanuc Workmaster I orIBM XT or compatible personalcomputer.

Use with the following modules:IC693PCM300/301/311,IC693CMM311IC693ADC311

IC690CBL702 Connects a PCM, CMM, or ADCmodule to an IBM AT or compatiblepersonal computer.


10Chapter


10



IC690CBL705 Connects a PCM, CMM, or ADCmodule to a GE Fanuc Workmaster II orIBM PS/2 or compatible personalcomputer


IC690CBL714A Dual-port multi-drop cable. Allows theinterconnecting of individual PLCsusing SNP serial ports. Connections arein a daisy-chain configuration.

Series 90 PLCs.

IC693CBK002 Cable kit. Contains both theIC693CBL329 and IC693CBL330 3’ (1m) cables. Used for 32-point I/Omodules having dual 24-pin connectors.

Used with Terminal Block QuickConnect (TBQC) assemblies. SeeAppendix H for a module list and cableselection information. See also, the datasheet for the

IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334cables for additional information.

IC693CBK003 Cable kit. Contains both theIC693CBL331 and IC693CBL332 6’ (2m) cables. Used for 32-point I/Omodules having dual 24-pin connectors.



IC693CBK004 Cable kit. Contains both theIC693CBL333 and IC693CBL334 19”(0.5 m) cables. Used for 32-point I/Omodules having dual 24-pin connectors.



IC693CBL300 3’ (1 meter) I/O expansion cableinterconnects baseplate expansion ports.This is a Wye type cable for daisy-chaining baseplates.

To interconnect CPU, expansion, andremote baseplates.



IC693CBL302

Note:

This cable is identicalto cableIC693CBL314

50’ (15 meter) I/O expansion cableinterconnects baseplate expansion ports.This is a special type with built-intermination resistors. It is not a Wyetype cable – it is for use as the last cableon the link.


IC693CBL303 Programmer serial cable to connectHand-Held Programmer (HHP) to serialconnector on PLC Power Supply.

For Hand-Held Programmer:IC693PRG300

IC693CBL304 Wye cable for splitting out two serialport connections from one moduleconnector.

For use with:IC693PCM300 module

Cables

GFK-0356Q Chapter 10 Cables 10-3

10



IC693CBL305 Wye cable for splitting out two serialport connections from one moduleconnector. (Use cable IC693CBL304with the IC693PCM300 module.)

For use with the following modules:IC693PCM301IC693PCM311IC693CMM311IC693ADC311AD693CMM301IC693SLP300

IC693CBL306 3’ (1 meter) extension cable connectsbetween the 50-pin connector on themodule faceplate and the connector onthe terminal block.

For High Density (32-point) I/Omodules having a single 50-pinconnector:IC693MDL652IC693MDL653IC693MDL750IC693MDL751

IC693CBL307 6’ (2 meter) extension cable connectsbetween the 50-pin connector on themodule faceplate and the connector onthe terminal block.


IC693CBL308 3’ (1 meter) I/O cable connects to the50-pin connector on the modulefaceplate. The other end has stripped,tinned, and labeled leads.


IC693CBL309 6’ (2 meter) I/O cable connects to the50-pin connector on the modulefaceplate. The other end has stripped,tinned, and labeled leads.


IC693CBL310

(Obsolete. Use

IC693CBL327 and

IC693CBL328)

10’ (3 meter) I/O cable connects to oneof the 24-pin connectors on the module.The other end has stripped, tinned, andlabeled leads.

Two cables are required per module.

For High Density (32-point) I/Omodules having dual 24-pin connectors:IC693MDL654IC693MDL655IC693MDL752IC693MDL753

IC693CBL311 10’ (3 meter) APM I/O cable connectsbetween one of the 24-pin connectors onthe module and the connector on theterminal block.


APM modules:IC693APU301IC693APU302

IC693CBL312 0.5’ (152 mm) I/O expansion cableinterconnects baseplate expansion ports.This is a Wye type cable for daisy-chaining baseplates.





10



IC693CBL314

Note:

This cable is identicalto cableIC693CBL302

50’ (15 meter) I/O expansion cableinterconnects baseplate expansion ports.This is a special type with built-intermination resistors. It is not a Wyetype cable – it is for use as the last cableon the link.


IC693CBL315

(Obsolete. Use

IC693CBL327 and

IC693CBL328)

10’ (3 meter) I/O cable connects to oneof the 24-pin connectors on the module.The other end has stripped, tinned, andlabeled leads.



IC693CBL316 3’ (1 meter) serial cable with 9-pin D-shell connector that connects to aPersonal Computer’s serial port. Theother end has an RJ-11 connector.

For connecting to modules with an RJ-11 communications port:IC693CMM321IC693CPU351, 352, 363IC693DSM302, 314

IC693CBL317 Special 10’ (3 meter) APM I/O cableconnects between one of the 24-pinconnectors on the module and theconnector on the terminal block. Thiscable is similar to IC693CBL311 exceptthat its drain shield wire is broughtoutside of the connector.


APM modules:IC693APU301IC693APU302s

IC693CBL318 Unused or inactive number

IC693CBL319 3’ (1 meter) APM I/O cable connectsbetween one of the 24-pin connectors onthe module and the connector on theterminal block.



IC693CBL320 Special 3’ (1 meter) APM I/O cableconnects between one of the 24-pinconnectors on the module and theconnector on the terminal block. Thiscable is similar to IC693CBL319 exceptthat its drain shield wire is broughtoutside of the connector.



IC693CBL321

(Obsolete. Use

IC693CBL329 and

IC693CBL330)

3’ (1 meter) I/O cable connects betweena 24-pin connector on the module andthe connector on the terminal block.

Used with the Terminal Block QuickConnect assemblies. See Appendix Hfor a module list and cable selectioninformation.

IC693CBL322

(Obsolete. Use

IC693CBL331 and

IC693CBL332)

6’ (2 meter) I/O cable connects betweena 24-pin connector on the module andthe connector on the terminal block.


Cables


10



IC693CBL323

(Obsolete. Use

IC693CBL333 and

IC693CBL334)

1.5’ (0.5 meter) I/O cable connectsbetween a 24-pin connector on themodule and the connector on theterminal block.


IC693CBL324 3’ (1 meter) cable connects between aDSM module and either a servos axisterminal block or an aux axis terminalblock. See the DSM user’s manuals(GFK-1464, GFK-1742) for details.

DSM modules:IC693DSM302IC693DSM314

IC693CBL325 10’ (3 meter) cable connects between aDSM module and either a servo axisterminal block or an aux axis terminalblock. See the DSM user’s manuals(GFK-1464, GFK-1742) for details.

DSM modules:IC693DSM302IC693DSM314

IC693CBL326 Unused or inactive number

IC693CBL327 10’ (3 meter) right angle I/O cableconnects to the left side 24-pinconnector on a 32-point module. Theother end has stripped, tinned, andlabeled leads. Replaces straight cableIC693CBL315 on the left side of themodule.


IC693CBL328 10’ (3 meter) right angle I/O cableconnects to the right side 24-pinconnector on a 32-point module. Theother end has stripped, tinned, andlabeled leads. Replaces straight cableIC693CBL315 on the right side of themodule.


IC693CBL329 3’ (1 meter) right angle I/O cableconnects between the left side 24-pinconnector on a 32-point module and theconnector on the terminal block.Replaces cable IC693CBL321.

Used with the Terminal Block QuickConnect (TBQC) assemblies. SeeAppendix H for a module list and cableselection information.

IC693CBL330 3’ (1 meter) right angle (bothconnectors) I/O cable connects betweenthe right 24-pin connector on a 32-pointmodule or the single connector on aTBQC faceplate and the connector onthe terminal block. Replaces cableIC693CBL321.


IC693CBL331 6’ (2 meters) right angle (bothconnectors) I/O cable connects betweenthe left 24-pin connector on a 32-pointmodule and the connector on theterminal block. Replaces cableIC693CBL322.


IC693CBL332 6’ (2 meters) right angle I/O cableconnects between the right 24-pinconnector on a 32-point module or thesingle connector on a TBQC faceplateand the connector on the terminal block.Replaces cable IC693CBL322.



10



IC693CBL333 20” (0.5 meter) right angle I/O cableconnects between the left 24-pinconnector on a 32-point module and theconnector on the terminal block.Replaces cable IC693CBL323.


IC693CBL334 20” (0.5 meter) right angle I/O cableconnects between the right 24-pinconnector on a 32-point module or thesingle connector on a TBQC faceplateand the connector on the terminal block.Replaces cable IC693CBL323.


IC693CBL340 PTM interface cable. 19” (0.45 meter)length. Connects between PTMPMSeries 90-30 PLC module and thePTMIM DIN-rail mounted interfacemodule.

Part of IC693PTM100 assembly. Thisassembly includes PTMPM module,PTMIM interface module, andIC693CBL340 cable. This cable alsoavailable as separate item.

IC693CBL341 PTM interface cable. 39” (1 meter)length. Connects between PTMPMSeries 90-30 PLC module and thePTMIM DIN-rail mounted interfacemodule.

Part of IC693PTM101 assembly. Thisassembly includes PTMPM module,PTMIM interface module, andIC693CBL341 cable. This cable alsoavailable as separate item.

IC693CBL803 3’ (1 meter) redundant communicationscable.

IC800CBL001 3’ (1 meter) Digital Servo Commandcable connects between a DSM moduleand either a digital servo amplifier or adigital servo axis terminal block. Seethe DSM user’s manuals (GFK-1464,GFK-1742) for details.

Used with DSM modules:IC693DSM302IC693DSM314

IC800CBL002 10’ (3 meter) Digital Servo Commandcable connects between a DSM moduleand either a digital servo amplifier or adigital servo axis terminal block. Seethe DSM user’s manuals (GFK-1464,GFK-1742) for details.

Used with DSM modules:IC693DSM302IC693DSM314d

Cables


10

Cable Data Sheets

The next section of this chapter contains cable data sheets. These are listed in numerical order by

catalog number, where possible. However, some data sheets cover more than one catalog number,

so some catalog numbers may be out of order.

Cable data sheets are listed in this order:

Cable Data Sheet Catalog

Numbers

Description

IC647CBL704 Workstation Interface board to Series 90 CPU

IC690CBL701 PCM to Workmaster (IBM PC-XT)

IC690CBL702 PCM to IBM PC-AT

IC690CBL705 PCM to Workmaster II (IBM PS/2)

IC690CBL714 Series 90 Multidrop

IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313/314 I/O Bus Expansion cables, continuous shield. This data sheet alsoincludes information on building custom length I/O Bus ExpansionCables.

IC693CBL303 Hand-Held Programmer cable, 6 feet (2 meters)

IC693CBL304/305 WYE cables – Port expansion cable s used with PCM 300,PCM301, PCM311, and CMM311

IC693CBL306/307 Extension cables for 50-pin connectors on high-density I/Omodules

IC693CBL308/309 I/O Interface cables for 50-pin connectors on high-density I/Omodules

IC693CBL310 I/O Interface cable for 24-pin connectors on high-density I/Omodules, 10 ft. (3 m). Obsolete.

IC693CBL311/317/319/320 I/O Interface cables for 24-pin connectors on APU301/302

IC693CBL315 I/O Interface cable for 24-pin connectors on high-density I/Omodules, 10 ft. (3 m). Obsolete.

IC693CBL316 “Station Manager Cable.” Serial cable, 3-feet long, with 9-pin D-shell to 6-pin RJ-11 connectors.

IC693CBL321/322/323 I/O straight connector cables, faceplate to terminal block, 24-pins.Obsolete.

IC693CBL327/328 I/O right angle connector cables, faceplate to stripped leads

IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 I/O right angle connector, faceplate to terminal block, 24-pin.Includes information on cable kits IC693CBK002/003/004.

IC693CBL340/341 PTM interface cables. Connect between PTMPM module (mountsin Series 90-30 baseplate) and PTMIM board (DIN-rail mounted).


10

IC647CBL704Workstation Interface to Series 90 CPU (SNP Port) Cable

(Includes Instructions on Building Custom Length Cables)

Function of cable

The serial Work Station Interface cable has a 15-pin D connector on one end and a 37-pin D

connector on the other end. This cable connects the CPUs serial port to the Work station Interface

board installed in the programming computer through an isolated shielded, twisted pair.

Cable Specifications

Cable Length 10 feet (3 meters)

Connectors CPU Side

Programmer Side

15-pin male, D-subminiature type with M3 screws and AMP hood 207908-4, orequivalent37-pin male, D-subminiature type with 4-40 screws and AMP hood 1-207908-0, orequivalent

Hardware Kit AMP 207871-1. Kit includes two metric screws and two screw clips.

Cable Type 24 AWG (.21 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible constructionrecommended for short lengths.

Connecting the Cable

Attach the 15-pin D connector to the serial connector on the PLC power supply on the CPU

baseplate.

Attach the 37-pin D connector to the 37-pin D connector on the Work Station Interface board.

WSISERIAL

SERIALCABLE

PROGRAMMER

SERIES 90-30

Figure 10-1. Serial Port to Work Station Interface Board Cable Connection

Cables


10

Building Custom Length Cables

The following information is provided for those users who may want to build a serial cable with a

different length for connecting a Series 90 PLC to a Workmaster II computer.

PINPIN

SERIES90-70(CPU)

SERIES90-30(PS)

WORKSTATIONINTERFACE

(WS9A1)

SHLD SHLD

15- PINMALE

D-TYPECONNECTOR

15- PINFEMALED-TYPE

CONNECTOR

37- PINMALE

D-TYPECONNECTOR

37- PINFEMALED-TYPE

CONNECTOR

0V

SD (B)

SD (A)

CTS (A)

CTS (B)

RTS (B)

RTS (A)

RD (B)

RD (A)

1

26

27

30

31

32

34

35

37

7

11

10

14

6

8

15

13

1

12

9

36RT

33

0V

RD (B')

RD (A')

RTS (B)

RTS (A)

CTS (B')

CTS (A')

SD (B)

SD (A)

RT

4000 FEET(1200 METERS)

MAXIMUM

Figure 10-2. Series 90 PLC to Workmaster II Serial Cable

Cable Type – 24 AWG (.22 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible construction

recommended for short lengths.

Connectors – 37-pin male D-type with 4-40 screws and AMP hood No. 1-207908-0 or

equivalent. 15-pin male D-type with M3 screws and AMP hood No. 207908-4, or equivalent.

An AMP connector is not supplied with M3 (metric) screws.

Hardware Kit – AMP 207871-1. This kit includes two metric screws, and two screw clips.

Multidrop Configuration, Workmaster II to Series 90 PLCs

The following illustrations show the wiring diagram and requirements for connecting a

Workmaster II, Workmaster, or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs in an 8-wire multidrop,

serial data configuration.

The figure below is an example of the wiring configuration required for the multidrop

configuration when using the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter.

Note

The connector to the PLC serial port in the Series 90-30 PLC must be a rightangle connector in order for the hinged door to close properly.


10

DCD ( A ) DCD ( B ) RD ( A' ) RD ( B' ) SD ( A )

SD ( B )RT

CTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )RTS ( A )RTS ( B )

+5V0V

SHLD

RS-232/RS-422CONVERTER

(IC690ACC900)

23

101112139

1586

14571

POWERSOURCE

FORCONVERTER

SD ( A )SD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B' )RDRTS ( A )RTS ( B )CTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )+5V0VSHLD

ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY CONNECTIONSINSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC. IT ISNOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES OFCONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION LINE.

NOTE

WHEN WIRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THETRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN ADAISY CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW.

CONVERTERMASTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION

GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWER SOURCE, MUST HAVE COMMON GROUND POTENTIALS OR GROUND ISOLATION FOR PROPEROPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADEON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES

90-70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

25- PINMALE

25- PINFEMALE

23458

207

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

RS-232PORT

WORKMASTER II

15-PINFEMALERS-422PORT


IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENTRS-232 SHIELDED PAIRS

PLC 15-PIN CONNECTOR

SERIES 90-30 LOCATED

ON POWER SUPPLYSERIES 90-70 LOCATED

ON THE CPU BOARD

5V

0V

PIN

SERIES90-70CPU

RS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

SLAVESTATION

*

RDTDCTSDTRDCDGNDSHLD

325

20871

PIN

25- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

PIN

23

1213101196

14158571

RS-422MAKE CONNECTIONS

INSIDE D-CONNECTORS

TO OTHER PLCs

PIN

SERIES90-30

PSRS-422PORT

LASTSTATION

*


*

23

1213101196

14158571

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

Figure 10-3. Example of Multidrop Configuration with Converter

The following figure is an example of the wiring configuration required when a Work Station

Interface board is installed in the computer. The 15-pin serial port connector for the 90-30 PLC is

on the power supply; the 37-pin serial port connector for Workmaster II and Workmaster

computers is on the Work Station Interface board in the programming computer. The cable type

for these connections should be 24 AWG (.22 mm2), 30V computer grade. Extra flexible

construction is recommended for short lengths.

Cables


10

37-PINCONNECTOR

WHEN WIRING RS-422/485 MULTIDROPCABLES, REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANS-MISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN A DAISY CHAINFASHION AS SHOWN BELOW.

ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANYNECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THECABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ONTHE PLC.IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPES OF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THETRANSMISSION LINE.

PLC 1WORKMASTER

PLC 2PLC 3

TO OTHER PLCs(MAXIMUM OF 8 PLCs ON A MULTIDROP)

UP TO AMAXIMUM OF

4,000 FEET(1,200 METERS)

MAKE CONNECTIONSINSIDE D-CONNECTORS

NOTE

SHIELDEDTWISTED

PAIRS

SD (A)SD (B)RD (A')RD (B')

CTS (A')CTS (B')RTS (A)

RTS (B) RT

PIN

*

10111213

61415

8971

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)RTS (A)RTS (B)CTS (A')CTS (B')RT0VSHIELD

PIN

10111213

61415

8971


PIN

WSI

SERIES90 PLC

10111213

61415

8971


PIN

SERIES90 PLC

SERIES90 PLC

15-PINCONNECTOR

15-PINCONNECTOR

15-PINCONNECTOR

WORKMASTER II

WORKMASTER OR

GROUND POTENTIAL: MULTIPLE UNITS, NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME POWERSOURCE, MUST HAVE GROUND POTENTIAL WITHIN " 7V FOR PROPER OPERATIONOF THIS SYSTEM. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A COMMON GROUND MAY CAUSE DAMAGETO PLC COMPONENTS.

*

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ONTHE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL, WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90-70 PLCs,CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FORRD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

*

*

*

CAUTION

27

26

35

34

31

30

33

32

36

1

37

0V

SHIELD

IMPORTANT !

DO NOTUSE TERMINAL STRIPS

OR OTHER TYPES OF

CONNECTORS ALONG THE

LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION

LINE WHEN WIRING A

CONFIGURATION

MULTIDROP SERIAL DATA

Figure 10-4. Series 90 PLC to Programmer 8-Wire Multidrop, Serial Data Configuration


10

IC690CBL701PCM, ADC, CMM to Workmaster (PC-XT) Cable

Note: This cable was designed for use with older computers such as PC or XTtypes and would not likely be used for new projects.

Function of cable

This cable provides RS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC, or

CMM module and a serial port on a Workmaster computer or IBM-XT or equivalent Personal

Computer.



Connectors

PCM/ADC/CMM Side

Programmer Side

25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1, or equivalent

Cable Clamps

25-pin

9-pin

AMP 207908-7 or equivalentAMP 207908-1 or equivalent

Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536 orequivalent

Wiring Diagram

2345897

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

PIN

RDTDCTSDTRDCDSHLDGND

325

20817

PIN

PCM

25- PINMALE

25- PINFEMALE

9- PINFEMALE

WORKMASTER

9- PINMALE

OR

IBM PC-XT

Figure 10-5. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-XT Serial Cable

Note

Although the IC690CBL701 and 702 cables look identical (except for catalognumber labeling), the internal pin connections are different.

Cables


10

PCM to Programmer Cable Installation

Caution

The Series 90-30 PLC baseplate that contains the PCM, ADC, or CMM and

the programmer ground connections must be at the same ground potential.

Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the programmer or the module.

Select the WYE cable (IC693CBL305 or IC693CBL304).

Connect the IC690CBL701 cable’s 9-pin female connector to the male RS-232 connector

(serial port) on the selected programming device.

Connect the cable’s 25-pin male connector to the Port 1 connector on the WYE cable.

Connect the 25-pin male connector on the WYE cable to the female connector on the front of

the PCM, ADC, or CMM module.

WORKMASTER

RS-232(DEFAULT PORT)

IC690CBL701PCM

IC693CBL305B

PORT 1

Figure 10-6. PCM to Workmaster Computer or PC-XT Personal Computer


10

IC690CBL702PC-AT to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable

Function of cable

This cable provides RS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC, or

CMM module and a serial port on an IBM PC-AT or equivalent Personal Computer.



ConnectorsPCM/ADC/CMM SideProgrammer Side

25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent9-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205203-1, or equivalent

Cable Clamps25-pin9-pin

AMP 207908-7 or equivalentAMP 207908-1 or equivalent

Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden9536 or equivalent

Wiring Diagram

1234785

DCDRDTD

DTRRTSCTSGND

PIN

SHLDTDRDDCDCTSDTRGND

12385

207

PIN

PCM

a42832

25- PINMALE

25- PINFEMALE

9- PINMALE

PC-AT

9- PINFEMALE

Figure 10-7. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster or PC-AT Serial Cable

Note

Although the IC690CBL701 and 702 cables physically look identical (except forcatalog number labeling), the internal pin connections are different.

Cables


10


Caution










PC-AT


IC690CBL702PCM

IC693CBL305B

PORT 1

Figure 10-8. PCM to PC-AT Personal Computer


10

IC690CBL705Workmaster II (PS/2) to PCM, ADC, CMM Cable

Function of cable

This cable provides RTS-232 signal connections between the RS-232 port on a PCM, ADC, or

CMM module and a serial port on a Workmaster II or an IBM Personal System 2 (PS/2) or

equivalent Personal Computer.



Connectors

PCM/ADC/CMM Side

Programmer Side

25-pin male, D-subminiature type, AMP 205208-1, or equivalent25-pin female, D-subminiature type, AMP 205207-1, or equivalent

Cable Clamps

25-pin AMP 207908-7 or equivalent

Cable Type Six conductor, overall shield, non-paired AWG #24 (.21 mm2), Belden 9536 orequivalent

Wiring Diagram

23458

207

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

PIN

RDTDCTSDTRDCDSHLDGND

325

20817

PIN

PCM

25- PINMALE

25- PINFEMALE

25- PINMALE

WORKMASTER IIAND

IBM PS/2

25- PINFEMALE

Figure 10-9. PCM, ADC, or CMM to Workmaster II or PS/2 Serial Cable

Cables


10


Caution










WORKMASTER II


IC690CBL705PCM

IC693CBL305B

PORT 1

Figure 10-10. PCM to Workmaster II Computer or PS/2 Computer


10

IC690CBL714A Multidrop Cable

Purpose

This cable has a number of possible applications with Series 90 products:

To interconnect Series 90-30 PLCs or redundant Series 90-30 PLCs in a multidrop

configuration.

To interconnect a Series 90-30 PLC and APM module in a multidrop configuration with a

single personal computer (programmer). This allows programming and troubleshooting both

PLC and APM without moving connection cables.

To interconnect Series 90-70 or redundant Series 90-70 PLCs in a multidrop configuration.

Specifications

Connector A: DB15F, 15-pin female connector with M3 latchblocks

Connectors B and C: DB15M, 15-pin right angle, male connector with spring clips

Wire: Cable consists of three individually shielded pairs of 22-gauge stranded conductors.

Belden #8777 or equivalent.

Jumpers: All jumpers are made of #22 AWG (UL1061) type individual wires.

Length: The length from the back of Connector A to entry into Connector B is 6 inches (+/-

0.5 inch). The length from the back of Connector C to entry into Connector B is 40 inches (+/-

1.0 inch).

Connector B

Pin 1

Pin 1

Connector C

Connector A

M3 pan head screws (2).Screws must not protrudethrough the end of the LatchingBlocks.

M3 LatchingBlocks (2)

Cables


10

IC690CBL714A Multi-Drop Cable Wiring Diagram

5

7

10

11

12

13

6

8

14

15

6

8

14

15

5

7

10

11

12

13

9

7

10

11

12

13

6

8

14

15

9 N.C.

5N.C.

Connector B, 15-pin male, to CPU SNP Port

Connector A, 15-pin Female,to other CPU or Adapter

Connector C, 15-pin male, tonext CPU or final term.

9N.C.

Note: Trim all drain wires flush with the jacket.

Figure 10-11. Connecting Diagram for Multidrop Cable IC690CBL714A


10

Connection Diagrams for IC690CBL714A Cable

IC690ACC901

Conn. B

Conn. A

Conn. C

Series 90-30 PLC Series 90-30 PLC

IC690CBL714A Cable

Serial Cable

Figure 10-12. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System

IC690ACC901

Conn. B

Conn. A

Conn. C to APM Comm. Port

Series 90-30 PLC

IC690CBL714A Cable

Serial Cable

APMPS CPU

Figure 10-13. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable

Cables


10

CPU

CPU

CPU

RS-232/422Converter

PLC A PLC CPLC B

IC690CBL714A IC690CBL714A

Conn. A

Conn. B Conn. B Conn. C

Conn. C Conn. A

Figure 10-14. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System


10

IC693CBL300/301/302/312/313/314I/O Bus Expansion Cables

(Includes Instructions for Building Custom Length Cables)

Description

I/O bus expansion cables (IC693CBL300, 301, 312, 313, 314), called “Wye cables,” have a single

male 25-pin D connector on one end and a two-headed (one male, one female) 25-pin D connector

on the other end as shown in (A) of the figure. The 50 foot (15m) (IC693CBL302) cable has a

single male connector on the CPU baseplate end and a single terminated male connector on the

expansion baseplate end. The 3 foot cable (IC693CBL300) can also be used as a WYE adapter

cable to simplify building custom length cables (see the section “Cable Application Suggestions”

later in this Chapter).

.5, 3, 6, 26 FOOTCABLES

50 FOOTCABLE

FEMALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

MALECONNECTOR

A

B

Figure 10-15. Detail of I/O Bus Expansion Cables

Cable Lengths

IC693CBL300 3 feet (1 meter), continuous shieldIC693CBL301 6 feet (2 meters), continuous shield

IC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314 50 feet (15 meters), continuous shield

IC693CBL312 0.5 feet (0.15 meters), continuous shield

IC693CBL313 25 feet (8 meters), continuous shield

Function of Cables

The I/O Bus expansion cables are used to extend the I/O bus to expansion or remote baseplates in

a Series 90-30 I/O system when additional I/O slots are needed or baseplates are required some

distance from the CPU baseplate. The prewired I/O bus expansion cables can be used for

connecting either expansion or remote baseplates. Where required cable length is not available in a

Cables


10

standard cable, a custom cable must be built (see the section “Building Custom Length I/O Bus

Expansion Cables” for detailed instructions).

Connecting the Cables

Connect the single male connector to the 25-pin female connector on the right side of the CPU

baseplate.

Connect the male connector on the dual connector end of the cable to the 25-pin female

connector on the first expansion baseplate.

Connect the unused 25-pin female connector on the dual connector end of the cable to either

the single male connector of a second I/O bus expansion cable to continue the I/O bus

expansion chain, or to an I/O bus Terminator plug if this is the last cable in the expansion

chain.

Important Notes About I/O Bus Expansion Cables

1. The maximum number of cables that can be included in an I/O expansion system is seven, and

the total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last expansion baseplate is

50 feet (15 meters). The total maximum cable length between the CPU baseplate and the last

remote baseplate is 700 feet (213 meters). Failure to observe these maximum cable lengths

could result in erratic operation of the PLC system.

2. CPUs 350 - 374 support a maximum of seven I/O expansion cables. CPUs 331 - 341 support a

maximum of four I/O expansion cables.

3. The 50 foot (15 meter) I/O bus expansion cable (IC693CBL302), which has a male connector

on each end, has the I/O bus terminating resistors built into the end connector on the cable. If

this cable is used, you would not install a separate terminator block.

Caution

I/O Bus Expansion cables should NOT be connected or disconnected with

power applied to the I/O expansion baseplate(s). Unexpected PLC operation

may result.

Cable Application Suggestions

In general, it is advantageous to use standard, factory-built cables, where possible, to save time and

avoid wiring errors.

Using Standard Cables

For connecting between baseplates (either between a CPU and expansion baseplate, between

two expansion baseplates or between two remote baseplates) in the same cabinet when a

standard length (0.5, 1, 2, 8, or 15 meters) will fit the need.

As a Wye jumper for custom built point-to-point cables (IC693CBL300 is often used for this).

This combination saves time since a point-to-point cable can be built much faster than a Wye

cable. An example of this is shown in Figure 10-23.


10

Using Custom Built cables

When you need a cable length not available in a standard size.

When a cable must be routed through a conduit that is not large enough for a standard cable’s

connector to fit through.

Building Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables

This section provides details needed to create custom length I/O Bus Expansion cables.

Two Types of Custom Built Cables

The two types are:

Point-to-Point - these have a single male connector on one end and a single female connector

on the other end. These are usually used with the IC693CBL300 which supplies the Wye

connection. This combination saves time since a point-to-point cable can be built much faster

than a Wye cable.

Wye - these have a single male connector on one end and two connectors (one male and one

female) on the other end.

Components Needed to Build Custom Length I/O Bus Expansion Cables

Note: the special two-headed Wye connector used on the standard Wye cablesis not available as a separate component.

Item Description

Cable: Belden 8107 only (no substitutes):

Computer cable, overall braid over foil shield, twisted-pair

30 volt/80°C (176°F)

24 AWG (.22 mm2) tinned copper, 7 x 32 stranding

Velocity of propagation = 70% *

Nominal impedance = 100Ω25 Pin Male Connector: Crimp Plug = Amp 207464-1; Pin = Amp 66506-9

Solder Plug = Amp 747912-2

25 Pin Female Connector: Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463-2; Pin = Amp 66504-9

Solder Receptacle = Amp 747913-2

Connector Shell: Kit – Amp 745833-5:

Metal-plated plastic (plastic with nickel over copper) **Crimp ring – Amp 745508-1, split ring ferrule

* = Critical Information

** Vendor part numbers listed for user assembled cables are provided for reference only and do not suggestor imply that they are preferred. Any part meeting the same specification can be used.

Cables


10

Expansion Port Pin Assignments

The following table lists the expansion port pin assignments you will need when building remote

cables. All connections between cables are point-to point, that is, pin 2 of one end to pin 2 of the

opposite end, pin 3 to pin 3, etc.

Table 10-2. Expansion Port Pin Assignments

Pin Number Signal Name Function

16 DIODT I/O Serial Data Positive

17 DIODT/ I/O Serial Data Negative

24 DIOCLK I/O Serial Clock Positive

25 DIOCLK/ I/O Serial Clock Negative

20 DRSEL Remote Select Positive

21 DRSEL/ Remote Select Negative

12 DRPERR Parity Error Positive

13 DRPERR/ Parity Error Negative

8 DRMRUN Remote Run Positive

9 DRMRUN/ Remote Run Negative

2 DFRAME Cycle Frame Positive

3 DFRAME/ Cycle Frame Negative

1 FGND Frame Ground for Cable Shield

7 0V Logic Ground

I/O Expansion Bus Termination

When two or more baseplates are cabled together in an expansion system, the I/O expansion bus

must be properly terminated. The I/O bus must be terminated at the last baseplate in an expansion

system. Each signal pair is terminated with 120 ohm, 1/4 watt resistors wired between the

appropriate pins, as follows (see the above table, also):

pins 16 – 17; 24 – 25; 20 – 21; 12 – 13; 8 – 9; 2 – 3

The I/O bus termination can be done one of the following ways:

By installing an I/O Bus Terminator Plug, catalog number IC693ACC307, on the lastexpansion baseplate (local expansion baseplate or remote baseplate) in the system. TheTerminator Plug has a resistor pack physically mounted inside of a connector. The I/O BusTerminator Plug is shipped with each baseplate; only the last baseplate in the expansion chaincan have the I/O Bus Terminator Plug installed. Unused I/O Bus Terminator Plugs can bediscarded or saved as spares.

If an expansion system has only one expansion baseplate, the I/O bus can be terminated byinstalling as the last cable, the 50 foot (15 meter) I/O Expansion cable, catalog numberIC693CBL302 or IC693CBL314. These cables have the termination resistors installed in theend that connects to the expansion baseplate connector.

You can also build a custom cable with termination resistors wired to the appropriate pins forinstallation at the end of the bus.


10

Shield Treatment

All GE Fanuc factory made cables are made with a continuous, or 100% shield. This means that

the braided cable shield is connected to the metal shell of the connector around the entire perimeter

of the connector. This provides a low impedance path to frame ground for any noise energy that is

coupled onto the cable shield.

For custom length cables made per Figure 10-18, the best noise immunity is achieved when using a

metallized connector cover that makes contact with the cable’s braided and foil shielding and with

the connector shell on the terminating end.

Note

It is not sufficient to only solder the drain wire to the connector shell. It isrequired that the cable’s shield be continuous across the entire length of thecable, including at the terminations. The figure below shows the recommendedmethod for folding the braided shield back before inserting the cable into ametallized cover.

Split-Ring

Ferrule

Cable

Jacket

Ground Wire

Attach to Pin 1 for custom length cablesConductors

Foil & Braid

(to be folded back

over ferrule and

ground wire)

ORFold back for custom Wye cables. *

* See “Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions" for

description of when to attach drain wire to pin 1.

Figure 10-16. How to use Split-Ring Ferrules for Foil and Braided Cable Shield

For typical industrial applications, all expansion and remote baseplate cables can be made with

plastic shell covers and should be wired as shown in Figure 10-19. In either case, pin 1 should be

wired into both ends of the custom length cable and the recommendations listed below should be

followed for the Wye cables treatment in the remote (IC693CHS392/399) baseplates.

When using 100% shielded cables all local (CPU and expansion) baseplates in the system must be

solidly referenced to the same ground point or a potential difference between baseplates could

disturb signal transmission.

Alert for Users of Early Remote Baseplate Versions

In early remote baseplates versions, IC693CHS393E (and earlier) and IC693CHS399D (and

earlier), it is necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable where the cable plugs into the baseplate.

This means that when using a factory made Wye cable, such as IC693CBL300, you must break pin

1 out of the male end where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with one of these

baseplates. Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should be built using Figure 10-20.

Cables


10

Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a change

inside the baseplate which eliminates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating cable. When using

factory made Wye cable with these baseplates, it is not necessary to remove pin 1 from the cable.

Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made using either Figure 10-20 or Figure 10-

21. Figure 10-21 shows how the standard (factory made) Wye cables are made.

By removing pin 1 in custom built Wye cables made for the earlier versions of remote baseplates,

the pin 7 (0V) signal reference originates in the main (CPU) baseplate. In these earlier versions of

the remote baseplates, pin 1 was tied to pin 7 (0V) and also AC coupled to the remote frame

ground. When using these baseplates in combination with the 100% shielded Wye cables, the pin 7

(0V) reference would be improperly DC coupled to the remote frame ground through the D-

subminiature connector shell, which is DC coupled to the remote frame ground.

In the remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later) and IC693CHS399E (and later), the pin 1

shield signal is DC coupled to the remote frame ground and not attached to pin 7 (0V). This allows

the best noise immunity by providing a good continuous cable shield, and still allows the pin 7

(0V) signal reference to originate in the CPU baseplate without the need for removing pin 1 in any

factory or custom built cable. The D-subminiature connector shell is still DC coupled to the remote

frame ground.

Making a 100% Shielded Cable

Use the following steps to build a 100% shielded cable:

1. Strip approximately 5/8 inch of insulation from your custom cable to expose the shield.

2. Remove the male Pin 1 from any connector plugging directly into an older version remote

baseplate (IC693CHS393E, IC693CHS399D, or earlier).

3. Put split-ring ferrule over cable insulation (Figure 10-17).

4. Fold the shield back over top of the cable insulation and ferrule.

5. Place the collar of the metal hood over top of the folded shield and securely clamp the hood.

6. Test your cable for continuity between both connector shells. Connect an ohmmeter between

the shells and flex the cable at both ends. If the metallized connector hood is not making

proper contact with the cable shield at either end, the connection will show intermittent

continuity on the ohmmeter.

7. Plug the metal hooded cable onto a remote baseplate expansion port connector or into a GE

Fanuc WYE cable and securely tighten the two screws. Installing and tightening the screws

will electrically connect the shield to the remote baseplate frame ground, which should in turn

should be connected to earth ground as instructed in the “Installation” chapter, under the

heading “Baseplate Safety Grounding.”


10

Wiring Diagrams

The following wiring diagrams show the wiring configuration for I/O expansion system cables.

Wiring diagrams are provided for both point-to-point cables and Wye cables.

SHIELD DRAIN WIRE

PIN PIN

25-PIN

MALE

25-PIN

FEMALE

METALIZED SHELL

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DPRERR

DPRERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

FGND

16

17

24

25

20

21

12

13

8

9

2

3

7

1

Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.NOTE:

NC NC

16

17

24

25

20

21

12

13

8

9

2

3

7

1

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DPRERR

DPRERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

FGND

25-PIN

FEMALE

SERIES

90-30

BASEPLATE

EXPANSION

PORT

OR

WYE

CABLE

DOUBLE

CONNECTOR

END

25-PIN

MALE

METALIZED SHELL

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED

(7 PAIRS)

WYE

CABLE

SINGLE

CONNECTOR

END

a45525

Figure 10-17. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring for Continuous Shield Custom Length Cables

DFRAME

SHIELD DRAIN WIRE

16

17

24

25

20

21

12

13

8

9

2

3

7

1

16

17

24

25

20

21

12

13

8

9

2

3

7

1

a45527

PIN

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERR

DRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

0V

FGND

DFRAME

25-PIN

FEMALE

WYE

CABLE

SINGLE

CONNECTOR

END

DFRAME/

PIN

SERIES

90-30

BASEPLATE

EXPANSION

PORT

OR

WYE

CABLE

25- PIN

MALE

25- PIN

MALE

25- PIN

FEMALE

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERR

DRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

0V

FGND

DFRAME/

NC NC

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED(7 PAIRS)

Figure 10-18. Point-To-Point Cable Wiring Diagram for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity

Cables


10

CUT PIN 1 HEREFACTORY MADE WYE

ORSHIELD DRAINNOT CONNECTED

CABLETO

DOWNSTREAMRACK

ORTERMINATION

PLUG

25-PINMALE

Metallized

DIODT

FGND

PIN

25-PINMALE

Metallized Shell

25-PINFEMALE

Metallized Shell

PIN

25-PINFEMAL

Metallized

TWISTED SHIELDEDPAIRS PIN

25-PINMALE

Metallized Shell

25-PINFEMALE

Metallized Shell

REMOTEEXPANSIONBASEPLATE

CONNECTOR

CABLEFROM

UPSTREAMRACK

8

2

1

16

1724

2520

21

12

13

9

3

7

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERR

DRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

8

2

12

16

17

242520

21

13

9

3

7

1

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLKDIOCLK/DRSELDRSEL/

DRPERRDRPERR/DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

FGND

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERR

DRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

FGND

21

8

16

17

24

2520

12

13

92

3

7

1


SHIELD DRAIN WIRE

NC NC

NC

NC

ONLY FOR REMOTE BASEPLATESIC693CHS399D (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF

Figure 10-19. Earlier Versions of Remote Baseplate Custom WYE Cable Wiring Diagram

Note: In remote baseplates, IC693CHS393E (and earlier) and IC693CHS399D(and earlier), it is necessary to remove pin 1 of the mating cable wherethe cable plugs into the baseplate. This means that when using a factorymade Wye cable, IC693CBL300, you must break pin 1 out of the maleend where it plugs into the remote baseplate before using it with one ofthese baseplates. Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates should

be built using Figure 10-20. See the section “Alert to Users of EarlyRemote Baseplate Versions” for more details.


10

Remote baseplates IC693CHS393F (and later( and IC693CHS399E (and later) have a change

inside the baseplate which alleviates the need to remove pin 1 from the mating cable. When using

factory made Wye cable with these baseplates, it is not necessary to remove pin 1 from the cable.

Custom built Wye cables for these baseplates can be made using either Figure 10-20 or Figure 10-

21. Figure 10-21 shows how the factory made Wye cable are made.

SHIELD DRAINCONNECTED

CABLETO

DOWNSTREAMRACK

ORTERMINATION

PLUG

25-PINMALE

Metallized Shell

DIODT

FGND

PIN

25-PINMALE

Metallized Shell

25-PINFEMALE

Metallized Shell

PIN

25-PINFEMAL

Metallized

TWISTED SHIELDEDPAIRS PIN

25-PINMALE

Metallized Shell

25-PINFEMALE

Metallized Shell

REMOTEEXPANSIONBASEPLATE

CONNECTOR

CABLEFROM

UPSTREAMRACK

17

25

12

8

2

1

16

24

20

21

13

9

3

7

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERR

DRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

24

21

13

16

17

2520

12

8

9

2

3

7

1

DIODT

DIODT/

DIOCLKDIOCLK/DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERRDRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

FGND

DIODT/

DIOCLK

DIOCLK/

DRSEL

DRSEL/

DRPERR

DRPERR/

DRMRUN

DRMRUN/

DPFRAME

DPFRAME/

0V

FGND

16

17

24

252021

12

138

92

3

7

1


SHIELD DRAIN WIRE

NC NC

NC

FOR REMOTE BASEPLATESIC693CHS399E (AND EARLIER REVISIONS OF EACH)

Figure 10-20. Current Remote baseplate (IC693CHS393/399) Custom Wye Cable Wiring Diagram

Cables


10

Application Examples

Expansion System Cable Connections

The following example shows cable connections in a system that has expansion baseplates but no

remote baseplates.

CPU BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE



I/O BUS

TERMINATOR

PLUG (See *NOTE)

IC693ACC307

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE




NOTE

TOTAL MAXIMUM

DISTANCE FROM

CPU BASEPLATE

TO LAST EXPANSION

BASEPLATE IS

50 FEET (15 METERS)

I/O EXPANSION CABLES

PROGRAMMER

SERIAL CPU

IC693CBL300, 3 FT. (1 METER)

IC693CBL301, 6 FT. (1.8 METERS)

IC693CBL302/314, 50 FT. (15 METERS) *

IC693CBL312, 0.5 FT. (.15 METERS)

IC693CBL313, 25 FT. (8 METERS)

*NOTE

Each signal pair on the I/O bus mustbe terminated at the end of the I/Obus with120 ohm resistors. This

termination can be done with the I/OBus Terminator Plug (IC693ACC307),by using the 50 foot (15 meter) cable

(IC693CBL302/314) with built-in terminating resistors, or by building a

custom cable with the resistors

installedin the connector at the end of the bus.

* See NOTE

Figure 10-21. Example of Connecting Expansion Baseplates

Remote and Expansion System Cable Connection Example

The following example shows cable connections in a system that includes both remote and

expansion baseplates. A system can have a combination of remote and expansion baseplates as

long as the distance and cable requirements are followed.


10

CPU

CPU BASEPLATE

EXPANSION BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATE

IC693CHS392/398

EXPANSIONBASEPLATE

MAXIMUM DISTANCE

FROM CPU 50 FEET

(15 METERS)

IC693CHS391/397

CPUBASEPLATE

IC693CHS393/399

REMOTE

BASEPLATE

REMOTE BASEPLATEIC693CHS393/399

REMOTEBASEPLATE

MAXIMUM DISTANCEFROM CPU= 700 FEET

(213 METERS)

IC693CHS393/399

REMOTEBASEPLATE

1

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Standard Wye Cable

Custom Built Point-to-Point Cable

IC693CBL300 Standard Wye Cable, Used as Wye Jumper

IC693ACC307 Bus Terminator

Figure 10-22. Example of Connecting Expansion and Remote Baseplates

Cables


10

IC693CBL303Hand-Hand Programmer and Converter (IC690ACC900) Cable

Function of cable

The Hand-Held Programmer cable provides the connections that allow the Hand-Held Programmer

and the Programmable Logic Controller to communicate. This cable also provides the power

connections for the HHP, and a signal which indicates to the PLC that the HHP is attached to the

PLC serial port. It can also be used to connect the RS-485 serial port on the PLC to the RS-

422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter (IC690ACC900).


The prewired cable (IC693CBL303) is 6 feet (2 meters) long. If a different length cable is required

for connection to the converter, refer to the information below for specifications and wiring

information.

This information is essential if you intend to build your own cable. The recommended cable types

for this cable are listed below and depend on the length of the cable.

Specifications for IC693CBL303 Prewired cable

Item Description

Connectors

Same connector is on

both

ends

15-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Canon DA15S (solder pot)

Hood AMP 207470-1 connector shell

Hardware kit AMP 207871-1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips

Cable Type Belden 9508:

AWG #24 (.22 mm2)


Wire Types for Custom Cables

Cable Length Wire Size Catalog Number

30 feet (10m) 22 (.36 mm2) Belden 9309>30 (10m) feet to980 feet (300m)

22 (.36 mm2) Same as for 30 feet. In addition, the+5 VDC logic power source for theconverter cannot be supplied by the PLC. It must be provided by anexternal power supply connected to the +5V and SG pins at the converter end ofthe connector. The +5V pin at the PLC connector must not be connected to thecable. The +5V and SG connections from the power supply must be isolated fromits own power line ground connection. Be sure that there is no connection betweenthe external supply and the PLC except the SG cable connection.

1. Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical characteristics is acceptable.It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desirednumber of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309 has an extra pair), you may end up with a cable with extra pairs.

2. A greater cable length between the PLC and the converter increases the possibility of noise coupling into the data andconverter logic power circuits within the cable. The cable should be as short as possible in noisy environments. Inextreme cases, additional noise protection measures, such as double-shielded cables, may be required.


10

Wiring Diagram

The following wiring diagram applies to the IC693CBL303 cable and to custom-built cables.

a44750

PIN

SERIES90 PLCRS-422PORT

RS-422TWISTED SHIELDED PAIRSRS-232/RS-485

CONVERTER(IC690ACC900)

PIN

15-PINFEMALE

RS-485 PORT

25-PI FEMALE

RS-232 PORT

15-PINMALE

PINS 9 AND 10 ARE JUMPERED AT BOTH ENDS OF CABLE TO CONNECT TERMINATINGRESISTORS FOR THE RD SIGNAL WHICH IS INSIDE THE PLC POWER SUPPLY.

15-PINMALE

15-PINFEMALE

NOTE:

SHLD

ATTCH

DCD (A)

DCD (B)

RT

RD (A')

RD (B')

SD (A)

SD (B)

+5V

0V

RTS (A)

RTS (B)

CTS (A')

CTS (B')

1

4

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

5

7

6

14

15

8

1

4

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

5

7

6

14

15

8

SHLD

ATTCH

DCD (A)

DCD (B)

RT

RD (A')

RD (B')

SD (A)

SD (B)

+5V

0V

RTS (A)

RTS (B)

CTS (A')

CTS (B')

Figure 10-23. Wiring Connections for IC693CBL303 and Custom-Built Cables

Connecting the Cable

Attach the 15-pin male D connector to the serial port connector on the PLC power supply.

Attach the D connector on the other end to the mating connector on the HHP. These

connections are shown in the following figure.

C

P

U

SERIES 90-30

CABLE(IC693CBL303)

HAND-HELDPROGRAMMER

Figure 10-24. Hand-Held Programmer Cable Connection to a Series 90-30 PLC

Cables


10

IC693CBL304/305Port Expansion (WYE) Cables for PCM, ADC, and CMM

Function of cable

A WYE cable (IC693CBL304 for PCM300; IC693CBL305 for PCM301/311, ADC311, CMM311,

AD693CMM301, and SLP300) is supplied with each PCM, ADC, and CMM module. The WYE

cable is used to separate two ports available on a single physical connector; the cable separates the

RS-232 from the RS-485 signals. In addition, the WYE cable allows cables used with the Series

90-70 PCM to be fully compatible with the Series 90-30 PCM. The WYE cable and cable

connections are shown below and on the following page.

Each WYE cable is 1 foot in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that connects

to the PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector with one connector for port 1 and

the other for port 2.

1 FOOT

PORT 1

PORT 2PCM COMM. CABLE

IC693CBL305

RS-23225-PIN FEMALE

CONNECTOR PIN 1

PIN 1RS-232/RS-48525-PIN FEMALECONNECTOR

LABEL

PIN 1 RS-23225-PIN MALECONNECTOR

(+2.0 INCH, -0 INCH)

Figure 10-25. Wye Cable


Cable Length 1 foot (0.3 meters)

25 Pin Male Connector: Crimp Plug = Amp 207464-1; Pin = Amp 66506-9

Solder Plug = Amp 747912-2

25 Pin Female Connector: Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463-2; Pin = Amp 66504-9

Solder Receptacle = Amp 747913-2

Connector Shell: Kit - Amp 207908-7

Separate Shell = Amp 207345-1;Male Screw Retainer = Amp 205980-1

Cable Type 27 conductor cable, 28 AWG (.09 mm2), with overall shield, extraflexible


10

Wiring Information

The following figure shows the pin configuration for each of the connectors on the WYE cable.

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

14

RS-232 DTR

SHIELD

RS-232 TD

RS-232 RD

RS-232 RTS

RS-232 CTS

SIGNAL GROUND

RS-232 DCD

2

1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

14

RS-232 DTR

RS-485 SD ( B )

RS-485 RTS ( B )

RS-485 CTS ( B' )

TERMINATION ( RD )

RS-485 RD ( B' )

SHIELD

RS-232 TD

RS-232 RD

RS-232 RTS

RS-232 CTS

SIGNAL GROUND

RS-232 DCD

RS-485 SD ( A )

RS-485 RTS ( A )

RS-485 CTS ( A' )

TERMINATION ( CTS )

RS-485 RD ( A' )

PORT 1 PORT 2

DUAL FEMALE CONNECTORS

Figure 10-26. Wye Cable Connections

The WYE cable is 1 foot in length and has a right angle male connector on one end that connects to

the PCM module. The other end has a dual female connector with one connector for port 1 and the

other for port 2.

Cables


10

In order to use an RS-232 cable on port 2 of the Series 90-30 PLC, either a special cable must be

made following the serial port pin assignments shown above or a WYE cable must be used. The

WYE cable allows use of standard Series 90-70 cables (IC690CBL701/702/705) for the PCM or

ADC. When installing the CMM module, use the WYE cable in conjunction with cables that you

build for the CMM module according to directions in Chapter 8 of GFK-0582, the Series 90 PLC

Serial Communications Manual.


10

IC693CBL306/307 Extension Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules

Function of cable

This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50-pin male Honda connector

mounted on the front of the module. The extension cables have a 50-pin male connector on one

end and a 50-pin female connector on the other end. This cable provides a connection from the

module to a connector mounted on a DIN-rail-mounted terminal block assembly. This cable is

wired pin-to-pin (That is, pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, etc.). The modules that use these cables

are: IC693MDL652, IC693MDL653, IC693MDL750, and IC693MDL751.

The connector on the module is oriented with the notch towards the top of the module with pin 1 at

the top of the right row of pins as you are looking at it, as shown below:

133

19

1850

32


Cable Length

IC693CBL306

IC693CBL307

3 feet (1 meter),6 feet (2 meters)

Connectors 50-pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module.50-pin male connector on end that connects to Connector Interface Assembly.

We recommend the use of a terminal block for connecting field wiring to the 50-pin high-density

I/O modules. The use of a connector interface provides a convenient method of terminating field

wiring to the modules.

Weidmuller Electrical and Electronic Connection Systems makes a suitable terminal block

assembly RS-MR 50 B, catalog number 912263 (female Honda connector). An example of using

an IC693CBL306 or 307 cable to connect a 32 point I/O module to one of these terminal blocks is

shown in the following figure.

Cables


10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

SERIES 90-30 PLC

ENDVIEW

TOPVIEWMounts

on DIN-Rail

1

50

WeidmullerTerminal BlocK(DIN-Rail Mounted)

Extension Cable50-Pin, 32-PointI/O Module

Figure 10-27. 32 Point I/O Module to Weidmuller Terminal Block Assembly


10

IC693CBL308/309I/O Cables (50-Pin) for 32 Point Modules

Function of cable

This cable is used with 32 point High Density modules that have a 50-pin Honda connector

mounted on the front of the module. The modules that use these cable are: IC693MDL652,

IC693MDL653, IC693MDL750, and IC693MDL751.

The I/O cables have a female connector on one end, and stripped and tinned wires on the other end.

Each of the stripped and tinned wires has a label attached to it for ease of identification. The

numbers on these labels correspond with the pin number of the connector wired to the opposite

end.

Specifications

Cable LengthIC693CBL308IC693CBL309

3 feet (1 meter)6 feet (2 meters)

Connectors 50-pin female Honda on end that connects to male connector on module.Opposite end has stripped and tinned labeled wires for connection toConnector Interface Assembly

Wiring Information

Table 10-3. Wire List for 32 Point I/O Cables

Connector

Pin

Number

Color Code

Label

Number

Loose End

Connector

Pin

Number

Color Code

Label

Number

Loose End

1 Black 1 26 White/Black/Violet 26

2 Brown 2 27 White/Black/Gray 27

3 Red 3 28 White/Brown/Red 28

4 Orange 4 29 White/Brown/Orange 29

5 Yellow 5 30 White/Brown/Yellow 30

6 Green 6 31 White/Brown/Green 31

7 Blue 7 32 White/Brown/Blue 32

8 Violet 8 33 White/Brown/Violet 33

9 Gray 9 34 White/Brown/Gray 34

10 White 10 35 White/Red/Orange 35

11 White/Black 11 36 White/Red/Yellow 36

12 White/Brown 12 37 White/Red/Green 37

13 White/Red 13 38 White/Red/Blue 38

14 White/Orange 14 39 White/Red/Violet 39

15 White/Yellow 15 40 White/Red/Gray 40

16 White/Green 16 41 White/Orange/Yellow 41

Cables


10

Connector

Pin

Number

Color Code

Label

Number

Loose End

Connector

Pin

Number

Color Code

Label

Number

Loose End

17 White/Blue 17 42 White/Orange/Green 42

18 White/Violet 18 43 White/Orange/Blue 43

19 White/Gray 19 44 White/Orange/Violet 44

20 White/Black/Brown 20 45 White/Orange/Gray 45

21 White/Black/Red 21 46 White/Yellow/Green 46

22 White/Black/Orange 22 47 White/Yellow/Blue 47

23 White/Black/Yellow 23 48 White/Yellow/Violet 48

24 White/Black/Green 24 49 White/Yellow/Gray 49

25 White/Black/Blue 25 50 White/Green/Blue 50


10

IC693CBL310I/O Interface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules

Note: This cable is obsolete. Please use IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328.See the data sheet for these cables for details. The replacement cableshave right-angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required infront of the PLC.

Function of cable

This 10' (3 meter) prewired cable was used with all Series 90-30 high-density (32 point) I/O

modules that use the Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O connector. Each of these modules has two of these

connectors mounted side-by-side. I/O Interface cables have a 24-pin female connector on one end

for connection to the module, and stripped and tinned wires on the other end. Catalog numbers for

32 point modules having two 24-pin connectors are: IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655,

IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753.

Connections to module input circuits are made from the user’s input devices to two male (pin-type)

24-pin connectors (Fujitsu FCN-365P024-AU) mounted on the front of the module. The

connector mounted on the right of the module (front view) interfaces with groups A and B; the

connector on the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D. If a different length cable

is required for connections to these modules, you can build your own cable (information on

building your own cable is found in the data sheet for cable IC693CBL315).

A1B1

A12B12

Length = 10’ (3 meters) Connector: Fujitsu FCN–365S024–AU

Figure 10-28. IC693CBL310 Cable

Cables


10

Table 10-4. Wire List for 24-Pin Connectors

Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code

A1 1 BLACK B1 7 BLUE

A2 1 WHITE B2 7 WHITE

A3 2 BROWN B3 8 VIOLET


A5 3 RED B5 9 GRAY


A7 4 ORANGE B7 10 BROWN

A8 4 WHITE B8 10 BLACK

A9 5 YELLOW B9 11 RED


A11 6 GREEN B11 12 ORANGE


CONNECTOR

3 2 1

12

12

3 2 1B ROW

A ROW

NOTEEach pair of wires should be tied together with heath i ktubing for identification purposes. For example, ah tpiece of heat shrink tubing should be placed around the

BLACK and WHITE wire pair (Pair #1) that connect to

Pins A1 and A2, etc.

Replacement/Obsolescence Information

This cable became obsolete and was replaced by cable IC693CBL315 (now obsolete also).

The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding.

When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete, the replacement for these cables became

IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. Cables IC693CBL310/315 have straight connectors.

Cables IC693CBL327/328 have right angle connectors. The right angle connectors require

less depth in front of the PLC, so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some applications.

Data sheets for cables IC693CBL315 and IC693CBL327/328 can be found in this chapter.

Connector Depth for Cable IC693CBL310

The following illustration shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is

connected to a module. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the

depth added by this connector.


10

2.187"1.5-2.5"Typical

PLC (Side View)

Figure 10-29. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC

Cables


10

IC693CBL311/317/319/320I/O Interface Cables for Power Mate APM Modules

Function of cable

The I/O Interface Cable assembly consists of a 24-pin I/O connector, a cable, and a 25-pin D-type

terminal block connector. This cable is used to connect the Power Mate APM Modules

(IC693APU301 and IC693APU302) to drives and machines. There are two male 24-pin

connectors mounted on the front of each Power Mate APM. Two of these I/O Interface cables are

required for connections to and from the drive and machine. Catalog number IC693CBL311 is 10

feet (3 meters) in length and IC693CBL319 is 3 feet (1 meter) in length. The cable wire code list

for these cables is provided in Table H-4.

An I/O cable assembly similar to IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319, but with the drain shield wire

disconnected from pin B12 and brought outside of the cable housing through an 8” pigtail, is also

available in two lengths. Catalog number IC693CBL317 is 10 feet (3 meters) in length and

IC693CBL320 is 3 feet (1 meter) in length. This cable improves the Power Mate APM’s noise

immunity. The cable wire code list for these cables is provided in Table 10-5.

To make wiring to the drive and machine easier, each connector on the module is typically

connected by a short cable (the I/O Interface cable) to a terminal block. The cable that connects

from the I/O connector to an external terminal block can be shortened to meet the requirements of

your installation. See manuals GFK-0840 (standard mode) or GFK-0781 (follower mode) for

details on APM terminal blocks.

1 or 3 METERS

A1

A12

I/O

CONNECTOR

TERMINAL BLOCK

CONNECTOR

B1

B12

* Cable for IC693CBL311/319 shown. Cables IC693CBL317/320 have 8" external wire connected to drain shield.

Figure 10-30. I/O Connector Cable Specifications

Specifications

Cable Length 10 feet (3 meters) and 3 feet (1 meter)

Connector 24-pin female, Fujitsu part number FCN-363J024 (crimp wire type.


10

Wiring Information

You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin connectors (which mate with the I/O

Connector on the faceplate of the APM). This connector is available under catalog number

IC693ACC317. This connector has a solder eyelet receptacle and is part of an accessory kit.

Optionally, other types of the 24-pin connector (for different physical connections) are also

available.

Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table.

The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin, and ribbon

cable. Each accessory kit contains enough components (D-connectors, backshells, contact pins,

etc.) to assemble ten single-ended cables of the type specified for each kit.

Table 10-5. Catalog Numbers for 24-Pin Connector Kits

GE Fanuc

Catalog Number

Vendor


IC693ACC316 FCN-361J024-AU Solder eyelet receptacle

(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)

IC693ACC317 FCN-363J024 Crimp wire receptacle

(Crimp Type) FCN-363J-AU Crimp pin (for above, 24 needed)

FCN-360C024-B Backshell (for above)

IC693ACC318 FCN-367J024-AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle, closed cover

(Ribbon or IDC Type) FCN-367J024-AUH IDC (ribbon) receptacle, open cover

Note: Wire for cables is 12 twisted pairs, #24 AWG (0.22mm2).

Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon

cable type connectors. The solder eyelet connectors (as provided in IC693ACC316) do not require

any special tooling.

Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require:

Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H

Contact Extraction Tool FCN-360T-T001/H

Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require:

Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H

Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H

Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H

These tools need to be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor. Three of the largest US

distributors for Fujitsu connectors are Marshall at (800)522-0084, Milgray at (800)MILGRAY, and

Vantage at (800)843-0707. If none of these distributors service your area, contact Fujitsu

Microelectronics in San Jose, California, USA via telephone at (408) 922-9000 or via fax at (408)

954-0616 for further information.

It is recommended that you order any necessary connector tooling with sufficient lead time to meet

your assembly requirements for these connectors. These tools are generally not stock items and

can have significant lead times from distribution. If you have any further questions about this

issue, please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Hotline at 1-800-GE FANUC (1-800-433-

2682) or 804-978-6036.

Cables


10

The following tables provides wiring information for the I/O Interface cables:

Table 10-6. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL311 and IC693CBL319

I/O Connector

Pin Number Cable Wire

25-Pin Connector

Terminal Number*

no connection Wire 1 Pair 1 25

A1 Wire 2 Pair 1 12

B1 Wire 1 Pair 2 24

A2 Wire 2 Pair 2 11

B2 Wire 1 Pair 3 23

A3 Wire 2 Pair 3 10

B3 Wire 1 Pair 4 22

A4 Wire 2 Pair 4 9

B4 Wire 1 Pair 5 15

A5 Wire 2 Pair 5 2

B5 Wire 1 Pair 6 14

A6 Wire 2 Pair 6 1

B6 Wire 1 Pair 7 16

A7 Wire 2 Pair 7 3

B7 Wire 1 Pair 8 17

A8 Wire 2 Pair 8 4

B8 Wire 1 Pair 9 21

A9 Wire 2 Pair 9 8

B9 Wire 1 Pair 10 20

A10 Wire 2 Pair 10 7





B12 Drain Wire (Shield) 13

* Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number. See manuals GFK-0840 (standard mode) or GFK-0781 (followermode) for terminal block details.


10

Table 10-7. I/O Cable Wire Coding for IC693CBL317 and IC693CBL320

I/O Connector

Pin Number Cable Wire Color Codes

25-Pin Connector

Terminal Number 1

no connection Wire 1 Pair 1 (Brown/Black) 25

A1 Wire 2 Pair 1 (Brown) 12

B1 Wire 1 Pair 2 (Red/Black) 24

A2 Wire 2 Pair 2 (Red) 11

B2 Wire 1 Pair 3 (Orange/Black) 23

A3 Wire 2 Pair 3 (Orange) 10

B3 Wire 1 Pair 4 (Yellow/Black) 22

A4 Wire 2 Pair 4 (Yellow) 9

B4 Wire 1 Pair 5 (Green/Black) 15

A5 Wire 2 Pair 5 (Green) 2

B5 Wire 1 Pair 6 (Blue/Black) 14

A6 Wire 2 Pair 6 (Blue) 1

B6 Wire 1 Pair 7 (Violet/Black) 16

A7 Wire 2 Pair 7 (Violet) 3

B7 Wire 1 Pair 8 (White/Black) 17

A8 Wire 2 Pair 8 (White) 4

B8 Wire 1 Pair 9 (Gray/Black) 21

A9 Wire 2 Pair 9 (Gray) 8

B9 Wire 1 Pair 10 (Pink/Black) 20

A10 Wire 2 Pair 10 (Pink) 7

B10 Wire 1 Pair 11 (Light Blue/Black)

19

A11 Wire 2 Pair 11 (Light Blue) 6

B11 Wire 1 Pair 12 (Light Green/Black) 18

A12 Wire 2 Pair 12 (Light Green) 5

External Ring Terminal Drain Wire (Shield) 2 13

1 Same as Terminal Block Terminal Number.2 16 gauge wire, green w/yellow tracer. 8” length (from back of connector), terminates with a

#10 ring terminal.

Cables


10

IC693CBL315I/O Interface Cable (24-Pin) for 32 Point Modules

Note: This cable became obsolete in late 1998. It was replaced by two cables:IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. See the data sheet for these cablesfor details. The replacement cables have right-angle connectors toreduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC.

Function of cable

This prewired cable is available for use with all Series 90-30 high-density (32 point) I/O modules

that use the Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O connector. Each of these modules has two of these connectors

mounted side-by-side. I/O Interface cables have a 24-pin connector on one end for connection to

the module, and stripped and tinned wires on the other end. Catalog numbers for 32 point modules

having two 24-pin connectors are: IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655, IC693MDL752, and

IC693MDL753.

Connections to input circuits are made from the user’s input devices to two male (pin-type) 24-pin

connectors (Fujitsu FCN-365P024-AU) mounted on the front of the module. The connector

mounted on the right of the module (front view) interfaces with groups A and B; the connector on

the left side of the module interfaces with groups C and D. If a different length cable is required

for connections to these modules, you can build your own cable.

A1B1

A12B12

Length = 10’ (3 meters) Connector: Fujitsu FCN–365S024–AU

Figure 10-31. IC693CBL315 Cable

Building Custom Length Cables for 24-Pin Connectors

Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for individual

applications. You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin connectors. The 24-pin

connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Fanuc. Catalog numbers for these

connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table. The list includes catalog

numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin, and ribbon cable. Each accessory kit

contains enough components (D-connectors, backshells, contact pins, etc.) to assemble ten single-

ended cables of the type specified for each kit.


10


GE Fanuc

Catalog Number

Vendor












Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require :



Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require :






Vantage at (800)843-0707. If none of these distributors service your area, then contact Fujitsu






issue, please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support Hotline at 1-800-GE

FANUC (1-800-433-2682), or International dial direct 804-978-6036.

Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table. Cables are made of 12 twisted

pairs; wire size is #24 AWG (0.22mm2).

Cables


10


Pin

Number

Pair # Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code


A2 1 BROWN/BLACK B2 7 VIOLET/BLACK

A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE

A4 2 RED/BLACK B4 8 WHITE/BLACK

A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY

A6 3 ORANGE/BLACK B6 9 GRAY/BLACK

A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK

A8 4 YELLOW/BLACK B8 10 PINK/BLACK

A9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE

A10 5 DARK GREEN/BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE/BLACK

A11 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHT GREEN

A12 6 DARK BLUE/BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN/BLACK

CONNECTOR

3 2 1

12

12

3 2 1B ROW

A ROW

NOTE

Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same color

wire with a black tracer. For example, Pair 1 has a solid

brown wire paired with a brown wire with a black tracer.

Replacement/Obsolescence Information

Cable IC693CBL315 (now obsolete also) replaced cable IC693CBL310 when that cable

became obsolete. The only difference between these two cables is in the wire color coding.

When cable IC693CBL315 became obsolete, the replacement for these cables became

IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328. Cables IC693CBL310/315 have straight connectors.

Cables IC693CBL327/328 have right angle connectors. The right angle connectors require

less depth in front of the PLC, so allow the use of a smaller enclosure in some applications.

Connector Depth for IC693CBL315





10

2.187"1.5-2.5"Typical

PLC (Side View)


Cables


10

IC693CBL316Serial Cable, 9-Pin D-Shell to RJ-11 Connector

Description

The IC693CBL316 cable is a 3-feet (1 meter) long, shielded cable with a 9-pin D-shell connector

one end and a 6-pin RJ-11 connector on the other. This cable is also known as a “Station Manager

Cable.” This cable can interconnect RS-232 ports without the need for a converter.

Typical Applications

Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to the RJ-11 faceplate serial port on CPUs

351, 352, and 363 for programming, configuring, firmware updating, and monitoring purposes.

Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to the Station Manager port on an

IC693CMM321 Ethernet module, a IC693CPU364 CPU, or a IC693CPU374 CPU module.

Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to an IC693DSM302 module’s RJ-11 COMM

port for loading motion programs (1 – 10) and firmware.

Connect a Personal Computer’s 9-pin serial port to an IC693DSM314 module’s RJ-11 COMM

port for loading firmware (motion programs for this module are loaded across the PLC

backplane).

RJ-11

CONNECTOR

9-PIN

FEMALE

CONNECTOR

9-Pin Connector Pin Number RJ-11 Connector Pin Number

7 1 (Red)

2 2 (Yellow)

5 3 (Green)

5 4 (Brown)

3 5 (Black)

8 6 (Orange)

Figure 10-33. IC693CBL316A Serial Cable Illustration and Connector Pinouts


10

IC693CBL321/322/323I/O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector, 24-Pin

Note: These cables became obsolete in late 1998. They were replaced by sixcables: IC693CBL329, IC693CBL330, IC693CBL331,IC693CBL332, IC693CBL333, and IC693CBL334. See the data sheetfor these cables for details. The replacement cables have right-angleconnectors to reduce the clearance space required in front of the PLC.

Function of cable

These cables are used with 16-point I/O modules that are equipped with a TBQC I/O faceplate

adapter. Each cable has a straight 24-pin female connector on both ends. Each cable provides a

connection from the module to a connector mounted on a terminal block assembly. These cables

are wired pin-to-pin (that is, pin A1 to pin A1, pin A2 to pin A2, etc.). An I/O faceplate assembly

(catalog number IC693ACC334) is required which snaps onto the module in place of the module’s

standard 20-pin terminal block assembly. Five different terminal blocks are available to allow a

variety of I/O modules to use this accessory (see Appendix H for details on the TBQC assemblies).


Item Description

Cable Length*IC693CBL321IC693CBL322IC693CBL323

3 feet (1 meter),6 feet (2 meters)1.5 feet (0.5 meters)

Cable Type: 12 twisted pairs with overall aluminum polyester shield and #24 AWGdrain wire.

24 Pin Female Connectors (2): Equivalent to Fujitsu FCN-363J024, or equivalent.

* Length of cable is measured from backs of connector shells as shown in figure on next page.

The connector on the I/O faceplate is oriented as shown below, with the rows labeled A1—A12

and B1—B12. A1 and B1 are towards the top of the module faceplate.

Cables


10

Pin A1

Pin A12

Pin B1

Pin B12

Top of I/O Faceplate

Figure 10-34. Connector Orientation on I/O Faceplate

Length*

B1 A1

B12 A12

A1 B1

A12 B12

* Length is measured from backs of connector shells as shown above

IC693CBL321 3 feet (1 meter)

IC693CBL322 6 feet (2 meters)

IC693CBL323 1.5 feet (0.5 meter)

Figure 10-35. I/O Faceplate to Terminal Block Cable

Connector Depth





10

2.187"1.5-2.5"Typical

PLC (Side View)


Cables


10

IC693CBL327/328 I/O Interface Cables with Right Angle 24-Pin Connector

Note: These cables replace obsolete I/O Interface cable IC693CBL315. Thesereplacement cables have right-angle connectors to reduce the clearancespace required in front of the PLC. These replacement cables use thesame pin-outs as the obsolete cables.

Description

These cables each have a right-angle 24-pin connector on one end and a set of stripped wire ends

on the other. These two cables are identical except for their opposite connector orientations. This

difference in the cables’ connector orientations is for the purpose of matching the opposing

connector orientations on the dual-connector type of 32-point I/O modules.

10 Feet (3 Meters)

Figure 10-37. C693CBL327/328 Cables

Note

Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 Amps. Ifusing these cables with a 16-point Output module with a higher output currentrating, you must use the lower value of 1.2 for the maximum load current rating .If you have field devices that require more than 1.2 Amps, do not use a TBQCassembly. Use the standard Terminal Board instead.

Applications

These cables are for use with Series 90-30 I/O modules that have the Fujitsu 24-pin user I/O

connector. There are two categories of these modules:

32 point modules with two 24-pin connectors (IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655,

IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753). The IC693CBL327 cable is for the modules’ left side

connector (front view), and the IC693CBL328 cable is for the modules’ right side connector.

The modules’ right side connector interfaces with I/O circuit groups A and B; the modules’ left

side connector interfaces with groups C and D. See Chapter 7, “Input and Output Modules”


10

for a drawing of these modules. See GFK-0898, the Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module

Specifications Manual, for details about these modules.

16-point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I/O faceplate adapter. See Appendix H

for information on the TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connector). Use the IC693CBL328

right side cable for this application.

If a different length cable is required, you can build your own cable, but only straight connector kits

are currently available. See “Building Custom Length Cables” below.

Specifications


Connector Fujitsu FCN-365S024-AU

Connector Depth for Cables IC693CBL327/328

The following figure shows that these cables extend 2” out from the face of the modules they are

connected to. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the 2” depth

added by this connector.

2.0"

Series 90-30 I/O Module

Figure 10-38. Dimension for Depth of Connector for IC693CBL327/328

Cables


10

Building Custom Length 24-pin Connector Cables

Cables connecting the module to field devices can be built to length as required for individual

applications. You must purchase the mating female (socket type) 24-pin connectors. The 24-pin

connector kit can be ordered as an accessory kit from GE Fanuc. Catalog numbers for these

connectors and their associated parts are listed in the following table. The list includes catalog

numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin, and ribbon cable. Each accessory kit

contains enough components (D-connectors, backshells, contact pins, etc.) to assemble ten single-

ended cables of the type specified for each kit.


GE Fanuc

Catalog Number

Vendor












Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require :



Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require :






Vantage at (800)843-0707. If none of these distributors service your area, then contact Fujitsu






issue, please feel free to contact the GE Fanuc PLC Technical Support Hotline at 1-800-GE

FANUC (1-800-433-2682), or International dial direct 804-978-6036.

Pin connections with color codes are shown in the following table. Cables are made of 12 twisted

pairs; wire size is #24 AWG (0.22mm2).


10


Pin

Number

Pair # Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code


A2 1 BROWN/BLACK B2 7 VIOLET/BLACK

A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE

A4 2 RED/BLACK B4 8 WHITE/BLACK

A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY

A6 3 ORANGE/BLACK B6 9 GRAY/BLACK

A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK

A8 4 YELLOW/BLACK B8 10 PINK/BLACK

A9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE

A10 5 DARK GREEN/BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE/BLACK

A11 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHT GREEN

A12 6 DARK BLUE/BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN/BLACK

CONNECTOR

3 2 1

12

12

3 2 1B ROW

A ROW

NOTE

Each wire pair has a solid color wire and that same color

wire with a black tracer. For example, Pair 1 has a solid

brown wire paired with a brown wire with a black tracer.

Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables

Because custom built cables use a straight connector, they require more space in front of the PLC

than is required for a factory built cable, which has a right-angle connector. The following figure

shows the space required in front of the PLC when this cable is connected to a module. The depth

of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the depth added by this connector.

Cables


10

2.187"1.5-2.5"Typical

PLC (Side View)

Figure 10-39. Dimensions for Depth of Connector in front of PLC for Custom Built Cables

Possible Uses for These Cables (Factory or Custom Built)

Connecting from the 24-pin connectors on a 32-point module to either a user-supplied terminal

strip/block or directly to I/O field devices (switches, lights, etc.).

Connecting from the 24-pin connector on a 16-point module that has a TBQC I/O faceplate

adapter to either a user-supplied terminal strip/block or directly to I/O field devices (switches,

lights, etc.). Use the right side cable, IC693CBL328, for this purpose. See Appendix H for

information about TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connect) options.

Connecting from the 24-pin connectors on a 32-point module through a conduit to a Terminal

Block Quick Connect terminal block. This can be accomplished by attaching one of the

optional 24-pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the cable through the conduit. See

the section “Building Custom Length Cables” for information on the connector options. See

Appendix H for information about TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connect) options.

Connecting from the connector on a 16-point module that has a TBQC I/O faceplate adapter

through a conduit to a TBQC terminal block. This can be accomplished by attaching one of

the optional 24-pin connectors to the stripped end after pulling the cable through the conduit.

Use the right side cable, IC693CBL328, for this purpose. See the section “Building Custom

Length Cables” for information on the connector options. See Appendix H for information

about TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connect) options.


10

IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables24-Pin I/O Faceplate Connector to Terminal Block Connector

Note: These cables replace obsolete cables IC693CBL321/322/323. Theobsolete cables had straight connectors. These replacement cables haveright-angle connectors to reduce the clearance space required in front ofthe PLC. They use the same pin-outs as the obsolete cables.

Description

These cables all have a right-angle 24-pin connector on each end. They are identical except for

connector orientation (right side and left side types) and cable length. The difference in connector

orientation is to allow them to work with the dual-connector type of 32-point I/O modules. These

cables are wired pin-to-pin (that is, pin A1 to pin A1, pin A2 to pin A2, etc.). Similar cables are

available in a 3 meter length that have a right angle connector on one end and stripped leads on the

other (see the data sheet for the IC693CBL327/328 cables for further information).

Figure 10-40. IC693CBL329/330/331/332/333/334 Cables

Note

Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 Amps. Ifusing these cables with a 16-point Output module with a higher output currentrating, you must use the lower value of 1.2 for the maximum load current rating .If you have field devices that require more than 1.2 Amps, do not use a TBQCassembly. Use the standard Terminal Board instead.

Cable Length (see table)

Cables


10

Table 10-12. TBQC Cable Cross-Reference Table

Cable Catalog

Number

Cable Description

and Length

Replaces Obsolete

Cable Number

IC693CBL329 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Left SideCable length = 1.0 Meter

IC693CBL321

IC693CBL330 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Right SideCable length = 1.0 Meter

IC693CBL321

IC693CBL331 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Left SideCable length = 2.0 Meters

IC693CBL322

IC693CBL332 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Right SideCable length = 2.0 Meters

IC693CBL322


IC693CBL323


IC693CBL323

Cable Kits

IC693CBK002 Cable Kit. Includes both the IC693CBL329 (left side) and IC693CBL330 (rightside) cables



Connector Depth

The following figure shows that the cable connectors extend 2” out from the face of the Series 90-

30 modules they are connected to. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should

allow for the 2” depth added by this connector.

2.0"

Series 90-30I/O Module

Figure 10-41. Dimension for Depth of Connector


10

Applications

These cables connect from Series 90-30 I/O modules that use the Fujitsu 24-pin I/O connector to

Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) blocks. There are two categories of these modules:

32 point modules with two 24-pin connectors: IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655,

IC693MDL752, and IC693MDL753. The IC693CBL329/331/333 cables are for the modules’

left side connector (front view), and the IC693CBL330/332/334 cables are for the modules’

right side connector. The modules’ right side connector interfaces with I/O circuit groups A

and B; the modules’ left side connector interfaces with groups C and D. The other end of the

cables connect to the TBQC IC693ACC337 terminal block. See GFK-0898, the Series 90-30

PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, for details about these modules. See Appendix H for

information on the TBQC components.

16-point modules that are equipped with the TBQC I/O faceplate adapter. Use the

IC693CBL330/332/334 right side cables for this application. See Appendix H for information

on the TBQC (Terminal Block Quick Connector) components.

Cables


10

IC693CBL340/341 PTM Interface Cables

These cables connect the PTM Processing module to the PTM Interface board. The only difference

between the two cables is their lengths:

• IC693CBL340 is 19 inches (0.5 meter) long

• IC693CBL341 is 39 inches (1 meter) long

Length*

*Length of IC693CBL340 Cable is 19" (0.50 meter)

*Length of IC693CBL341 Cable is 39" (1 meter)

PTM Interface Cable

Figure 10-42. Figure IC693CBL340/341 PTM Interface Cables

Series 90-30 PLCPTM

IC693CBL340/341 PTM Cable

Interface Board

Processing Module

Figure 10-43. PTM Component Mounting and Cable Connection

Warning

The PTM Interface board connects to hazardous voltages. Before installing,

testing, or troubleshooting this board, you should refer to the complete

instructions in this manual. Failure to follow the guidelines in the PTM

User’s Manual may result in personal injury, equipment damage, or both.


10

PTM Products Ordering Information

The Processing module and its Interface board are considered to be a matched set. Therefore, they

are not sold separately. The two cables, however, may be ordered as separate items. There are four

catalog numbers in the PTM product line:

• IC693PTM100 – Contains the Processing module, its matched Interface board, and the

19” (0.5 meter) interface cable.

• IC693PTM101 – Contains the Processing module, its matched Interface board, and the

39” (1 meter) interface cable.

• IC693CBL340 – 19” (0.5 meter) interface cable.

• IC693CBL341 – 39” (1 meter) interface cable.

Checking the IC693CBL340/341 Cables

The following information is supplied for the purpose of troubleshooting only (making continuity

checks of the cable). These cables have straight through connections (pin 1 connects to pin 1, pin 2

connects to pin 2, etc.), although some pins have no connections. One end is connected to a male,

all plastic DB-25 connector. The other end is connected to a female, all plastic DB-25 connector.

The cable is a twisted-pair type, connected to minimize noise and crosstalk between signals.

Warning

These cables connect to a circuit board that has hazardous voltages present.

These cables are carefully made to ensure the safety of the user and

associated equipment. Therefore, we recommend you use only factory-built

cables.

Cables


10

Connector Pin

Number (Either End) Signal Name and Function

1 VG+, Voltage Generator positive lead

2 IN+, Current Neutral positive lead

3 VA+, Voltage phase A positive lead

4 IA+, Current phase A positive lead

5 No Connection

6 VB+, Voltage phase B positive lead

7 IB+, Current phase B positive lead

8 VC+, Voltage phase C positive lead

9 IC+, Current phase C positive lead

10 Cable shield

11 No Connection

12 Frame Ground

13 No Connection

14 VG–, Voltage Generator negative lead

15 IN–, Current Neutral negative lead

16 VA–, Voltage phase A negative lead

17 IA–, Current phase A negative lead

18 No Connection

19 VB–, Voltage phase B negative lead

20 IB–, Current phase B negative lead

21 VC–, Voltage phase C negative lead

22 IC–, Current phase C negative lead

23 No Connection

24 No Connection

25 Frame Ground

Documentation

GFK-1734, Series 90-30 PLC Power Transducer Module User’s Manual

GFK-0356Q 11-1

Programmer Hardware Products

Products Discussed in this Chapter

The following table lists the programmer hardware products discussed in this chapter. Some of the

items are no longer available but are documented here for the convenience of customers still using

them.

Catalog Number Description Comment

IC640WMI310 Work Station Interface (WSI) Board For Workmaster or IBM PC andcompatibles.

IC640WMI320 Work Station Interface (WSI) Board For Workmaster II or IBM PS/2 andcompatibles.

IC690ACC900 RS-422/485 to RS-232 Converter No longer available. UseIC690ACC901 Miniconverter.

IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Converts RS-422/485 to RS-232.

IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP) Used to configure and program Series90-30 PLCs (except for CPU374).

IC693ACC303 Memory card for HHP Plugs into HHP. Used for file storage.

IC693PIF301 Personal Computer Interface Card Installs in PC. Enables PC to controlPLC I/O.

IC693PIF400 Personal Computer Interface Card More powerful than the IC693PIF301.

IC655CCM590(IC630CCM390)

Isolated Repeater/Converter (also knowas the “Brick”)

No longer available. UseIC690ACC903 Port Isolator.

IC690ACC903 Port Isolator Provides isolation for PLC serial port.

11Chapter


11

IC640WMI310/320 Work Station Interface Boards

The Work Station Interface (WSI) board provides an RS-485 serial interface between a Series 90-

30 PLC and a PC-compatible programmer running Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro software. This

board is available in two versions.

IC640WMI310 (serial operation only) for Workmaster or IBM PC XT or AT or compatible

personal computers.

IC647WMI320 (serial operation only) for Workmaster II or IBM PS/2 or compatible personal

computers.

The WSI board can be ordered as part of a package with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro

programming software. When a Workmaster II computer was ordered as the programming device,

the WSI board was installed at the factory. The WSI resides in a full length computer slot. The

computer can be a Workmaster, Workmaster II, Cimstar industrial computer, or a PC-compatible

personal computer.

a44734

SERIAL OPERATION ONLYIC647WMI320

Figure 11-1. WSI Board for the Workmaster II Computer

WSISERIAL

SERIALCABLE

PROGRAMMER

SERIES 90-30

Figure 11-2. Location of WSI in a Series II 90-30 PLC System


GFK-0356Q Chapter 11 Programmer Hardware Products 11-3

11

Replacing Workmaster Computers

The Workmaster and Workmaster II computers are no longer available. However, the Work

Station Interface boards are still sold, largely to support customers still using the Workmaster and

related products. GE Fanuc currently sells industrially hardened programming computer/software

packages that are updated replacements for the Workmaster computers. For details, please contact

the GE Fanuc Hotline at 1-800-GE FANUC (1-800-433-2682), or for international customers,

direct dial 804-978-6036.

IC690ACC900 RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter

This item is no longer available. The information provided in this manual is for the

convenience of those still using this product.

Note

GE Fanuc offers the IC690ACC901 Miniconverter kit, documented in the

next section of this chapter, as a replacement for the IC690ACC900

Converter.

This Converter lets you connect a standard RS-232 serial port, such as found on a PC-compatible

computer, to the RS-422/RS-485 ports in a Series 90-30 PLC.

If using a Workmaster II computer, this converter eliminates the need to have a Work Station

Interface board.

This converter is a small, self-contained device that requires only a cable connection to the Series

90-30 RS-422/RS-485 port on one end and a cable connection to the RS-232 port on the opposite

end.

SERIES 90-30 PROGRAMMER

RS-485 RS-232

CONVERTER

Figure 11-3. Example of IC690ACC900 Converter Connection

The converter operates from a +5 VDC source, which is provided from the PLC backplane +5

VDC bus through the cable connection. The pin assignments for the connections on the cable

required for the RS-232 connection are compatible with available PCM compatible serial cables

(IC690CBL701, PCM to Workmaster; IC690CBL705, PCM to Workmaster II; and IC690CBL702,

PCM to PC-AT). The RS-422/RS-485 connection at the Series 90-30 serial port on the power

supply can be made with an available cable (same cable that is used with the Hand-Held

Programmer), IC693CBL303.

The three PCM compatible cables (IC690CBL701/702/705) are 10 feet (3 meters) in length, and

the HHP compatible cable (IC693CBL303) is 6 feet (2 meters) in length. For those user’s who

may want to build their own cables, pin assignments and recommended cable types for both cables


11

required for use with the converter are provided in the “Cables” chapter of this manual. For

detailed information on this converter, refer to Appendix B.

The IC690ACC903 Port Isolator is available for applications requiring ground isolation or for

connection distances up to 4,000 feet. For detailed information, refer to Appendix E.

IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit

The Miniconverter Kit consists of an RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232 Miniconverter, a 6 foot (2 meter)

serial extension cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter. The 15-pin SNP port connector on the

Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series 90-30 power supply,

Series 90-70 CPU, or Series 90-20 CPU. The 9-pin RS-232 port connector on the Miniconverter

connects to an RS-232 compatible device.

When used with an IBM PC-AT or compatible computer, one end of the extension cable plugs into

the Miniconverter’s 9-pin serial port connector, the other end plugs into the 9-pin serial port of the

computer. The adapter (supplied with kit) is required to adapt the 9-pin serial port connector on

the Miniconverter to the 25-pin serial port connector on the GE Fanuc Workmaster II computer,

or an IBM PC-XT or PS/2 Personal Computer. The GE Fanuc Workmaster computer requires an

additional adapter (not supplied with kit - please contact your local GE Fanuc PLC distributor) for

use with the Miniconverter.

The Miniconverter is shown in the following figure. For more information on the Miniconverter,

refer to Appendix D.

RS–232

PORT

RS–422

PORT

Figure 11-4. IC690ACC901 Series 90 SNP Port to RS-232 Adapter



11

IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer (HHP)

Some models of the Series 90-30 PLC can be programmed with the GE Fanuc Hand-Held

Programmer (HHP). The HHP uses the Statement List Language. With the HHP, you can develop,

debug, and monitor logic programs, monitor data tables, and configure PLC and I/O parameters.

Note

The user logic program in Series 90-30 CPU numbers 350 and above cannot beviewed or edited with the Hand-Held Programmer. You must useLogicmaster 90-30, Control, VersaPro, or Logic Developer-PLC programmingsoftware with those CPUs.

The HHP connects to the CPU serial port through a 15-pin D-type connector on the Series 90-30

PLC power supply in the CPU baseplate. The physical connection is through a 6-foot (2-meters)

long cable (IC693CBL303). This cable also provides power connections to the HHP, and provides

a signal that tells the PLC that an HHP is attached. The HHP can be connected or disconnected

while the PLC is powered-up. The HHP does not require communications parameter configuration

in order to communicate with a PLC. This makes it useful for troubleshooting a communications

problem between a PC and the PLC.

AQ

UPCTR

DNCTR

ENT

TMR

ONDTR

RSTM

RST

SETM

SETLD MODE

OUT

OUTM

AND

D ORE

NOT

FBLK RUN

I

A I

A QB M

T

C G

SFUNC DEL

7 8 9 R

4 5 6

1 2 3

0

WRITE

#

CLR

READ

VRFY

SRCH

INS

HEX

DEC

SERIES 90-30


GE Fanuc

HAND HELD PROGRAMMER

a43052

SERIAL PORT CONNECTORTO CPU SERIAL PORT

SLOT

FOR

MEMORY

CARD

Figure 11-5. Hand-Held Programmer for the Series 90-30 PLC


11

HHP Features

The HHP has a sealed-type keypad with tactile feedback and 42 keys, arranged in a matrix of six

keys across by seven keys down. It has a two-line by 16 character LCD display screen.

HHP Memory Card (IC693ACC303)

The HHP has a slot for a removable memory card , which provides a means for non-volatile, off-

line program storage and restoration. The memory card can only be used with CPU numbers 311

through 341. CPU numbers 350 and above do not support either the HHP or the memory card.

The memory card plugs into a connector accessed through a slot on the lower right side of the HHP

(see previous figure).

HHP Modes of Operation

The HHP functionality is basically divided into four modes of operation that are selected through a

key sequence on the keypad.

Program Mode:

Allows you to create, change, monitor, and debug Statement List logic. This mode also

allows read, write, and verify functions with the memory card, EEPROM, or flash

memory.

Protection Mode

Provides a way to control access to (protection of) certain PLC functions, including

program logic, reference data, and configuration information. The use of this function is

optional; however, it is convenient in that it allows you to protect parts of the PLC system

from accidental or deliberate modification. Protection is provided through four levels of

passwords assigned by the user.

Data Mode

Allows you to view, and optionally alter values in various reference tables. Several

display formats can be selected in which to view this data: binary, hexadecimal, signed

decimal, and timer/counter.

Configuration Mode

Allows you to define the types of I/O modules installed in the PLC system. You can also

assign I/O module addresses to these modules. This feature is convenient in that it allows

you to write and test logic programs using discrete references assigned to I/O modules that

are not yet installed. In this mode, you can also configure CPU data, such as real-time

clock , coil check, and HHP characteristics, such as keyclick on or off.

Documentation

For detailed information about the Hand-Held Programmer, refer to GFK-0402, the Series

90-30/20/Micro Hand-Held Programmer User’s Manual.



11

IC693PIF301/400 Personal Computer Interface (PCIF) Cards

These two Personal Computer Interface cards (PCIF and PCIF2) provide an alternative method of

controlling Series 90-30 I/O. Either card can be used in place of a Series 90-30 PLC CPU. These

ISA-compatible cards can be installed in any IBM-PC/AT ISA bus computer. The cards are

implemented using computer language software (for example, C), or PC control software.

Table 11-1. Personal Computer Interface Card Comparison Table

ITEM PCIF PCIF2

Catalog Number IC693PIF301 IC693PIF400

Amount of I/O controlled 1,280 bytes 25,886 bytes

Number of Series 90-30 rackscontrolled

Up to four Expansion or Remoteracks

Up to seven Expansion or Remoteracks

Slot requirement IBM-PC/AT ISA, 8-bit, half size IBM-PC/AT ISA, 16-bit, full size

Documentation GFK-0889 (IPI) GFK-1540 (data sheet)

SERIES 90-30 I/O SERIES 90-30 I/O SERIES 90-30 I/O SERIES 90-30 I/O

PCIF or PCIF2

DOS-BASEDSOFTWARE

DOS TSR ROUTINE

MS-DOS

MICROSOFT C/TURBO C

PROGRAMS

C LIBRARYOR OR

WINDOWS-BASED

SOFTWARE

WINDOWS DLL

MS WINDOWSMS-DOS

5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT 5 OR 10 SLOT

I/O EXPANSION CABLE

I/O EXPANSION CABLE I/O EXPANSION CABLE I/O EXPANSION CABLE

BASEPLATE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE BASEPLATE

Figure 11-6. Example of PCIF Interface to Series 90-30 I/O

Both of these PCIF cards have a 25-pin I/O expansion connector that connects to standard Series

90-30 Expansion and Remote baseplates (see the “Baseplates” chapter) via I/O expansion cabling.

Remote racks can be located up to 700 feet ( 213 meters) and Expansion racks up to 50 feet (15

meters) from the personal computer. Several standard prewired I/O expansion cables are available

from GE Fanuc. Alternately, custom length cables can be built. Please refer to the “Cables”

chapter of this manual for information on standard and custom I/O expansion cables.

These cards also provide connections to an internal watchdog-supervised RUN output relay

contact. This contact is closed under normal operating conditions, but opens if the computer or

software application fails, which makes it useful for interfacing with external safety circuits.


11

These cards support all Series 90-30 discrete and analog I/O modules (except 16-channel analog

modules). A variety of smart modules from Horner Electric, Inc. are also supported.

A C Language Interface software product, available from Horner Electric, works with both

Borland Turbo C and Microsoft C. The source code for this interface is available from Horner

Electric (catalog number HE693SRC844).

Documentation

Documentation for these cards is noted in the table above. Additional user’s documentation is

available from Horner Electric, Inc.

IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter

This item is no longer available. The information provided in this manual is for the

convenience of those still using this product. This product also went by an earlier catalog

number, IC630CCM390, and is nicknamed, the “Brick.” Details can be found in Appendix C.

Note

In most applications, the newer IC690ACC903 Port Isolator can be used in

place of the IC655CCM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter.

IC690ACC903 Port Isolator

This product was produced to fill the need created when the IC655CCM590 Isolated

Repeater/Converter became obsolete. It provides 500 volts of isolation between connected RS-485

ports. It can be used in either single or multi-drop applications, and has a cable length working

distance of 4,000 feet (1,219 meters). It is physically smaller than the IC655CCM590. For details

about this product, please refer to Appendix D.

GFK-0356Q 12-1

System Design

Introduction

This chapter is not intended to cover every possible aspect of designing a Series 90-30 system, but

it does provide you with basic product selection guidelines and with help in finding the information

you need.

Step 1: Planning Your System

Planning is an important part of designing a system. The better you plan the system, the less

trouble you will have installing and implementing it. The following list discusses some basic

things to know or have when planning your system:

Expectations. If a new system, what is it expected to do? If retrofitting an existing system,

what does it do now, and what is it expected to do after it is retrofitted.

Specifications (preferably in writing). These include such things as operating environment

information, speed, accuracy, repeatability, size, conformance to standards, cost restrictions,

time requirements, etc.

Documentation. If retrofitting existing equipment, you can refer to its documentation (layout

drawings, schematics, etc.). If the documentation is lost, perhaps a copy is available from the

manufacturer. Additional information may be gathered from discussions with the equipment

operators and maintenance technicians. For a new design, there are probably mechanical or

process drawings of the equipment.

Step 2: Determining I/O Requirements

This step comes next because other Series 90-30 component choices are dependent on the number

of I/O points required. In particular, the number of modules required, and their locations,

determines what type and how many baseplates are needed and also is a major factor in CPU

selection. Note that there are some restrictions on the maximum number of certain types of

modules (Analog I/O and Option) that can be supported in one PLC system. See the table

“Maximum Number of Modules Per System” for data.

To start, determine how many I/O points, both analog and discrete, are needed for your system.

If retrofitting an existing system, use the schematic diagrams for the system. If designing a

new system, use the mechanical drawings or specifications to determine what inputs and

12Chapter


12

outputs are needed. Make a list of inputs and outputs needed, separating them into four types:

Discrete Input, Discrete Output, Analog Input, Analog Output. If there are any special

requirements, such as fast response, etc., make a note of them on the page. Also, if parts of

your system are physically separated from other parts, requiring Expansion or Remote Racks,

create a separate list for each location.

When you have finished developing your I/O lists, determine how many I/O modules of each

type you need. Although the “I/O Modules” chapter in this manual contains brief descriptions,

you should refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications User’s Manual

for complete details.

Additional I/O Module Selection Factors

Voltage/Current Requirements - A wide variety of possible operating voltage and current

requirements can be met with Series 90-30 I/O modules.

Positive or Negative Logic - The applicable type can be selected to match sink or source

signal requirements. See GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications User’s

Manual, for details.

Isolation Requirements - Isolated discrete I/O and relay output modules may be selected to

meet isolation requirements.

Hard Contact Requirements - Relay output modules can be used.

Cost - The selection of certain modules can possibly reduce the number of racks required in

your system. For example, 32-point discrete I/O modules can save rack space compared to

lower density modules.

Standardization - Sometimes a company standardizes on particular types of modules to

simplify training or stocking of spare parts.

Response Time and Noise immunity - In general, higher response speed is attained at the

sacrifice of some noise immunity. Therefore, if high response speed is not a requirement, it

would be better to select a slower I/O module that has higher noise immunity. However, all

I/O modules, regardless of their response time rating, have a reasonable level of noise

immunity. Note that the IC693APU305 I/O Processor Option module, with its 500µs update

time, can handle I/O signals that are too fast for the CPU to handle directly (see GFK-1028,

Series 90-30 I/O Processor Module User’s Manual).

Step 3: Selecting Option Modules

There are several application requirements that determine Option module selection. However, note

that there are some restrictions on the maximum number of certain types of modules (Analog and

Option) that can be supported in one PLC system. See the table “Maximum Number of Modules

Per System” for data.

Interfacing with a Particular Protocol or Standard - CCM, Ethernet, FIP, Genius, RTU,

SNP, etc.

Interfacing with GE Fanuc CNC controls - Use the IC693BEM320 and IC693BEM321 I/O

Link modules.

Distance - Genius controller modules can communicate at distances up to 7,500 feet (2,286

meters). Serial communications using the RS-485 standard can cover up to 4,000 feet

System Design and Layout

GFK-0356Q Chapter 12 System Design 12-3

12

(1,219 meters). FIP networks are rated for 1,640 feet (500 meters). Modules with serial ports

communicating via modems and telephone lines or satellite links can cover unlimited

distances.

High speed inputs - The IC693APU300 High Speed Counter can be used with encoders to

count high speed pulse trains. The IC693APU305 I/O Processor module is an intelligent

module that can satisfy high speed input and output requirements independent of the PLC scan.

Motion needs - The IC693APM301/302, IC693DSM302, and IC693DSM314 motion control

modules work with servo motor controllers and other motion devices. The IC693APU300

High Speed Counter module counts high speed pulses from encoders for use in measuring

motion-related data.

Temperature control - The IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module (TCM) has

thermocouple inputs and PWM outputs.

Extended features - Where there are two or more Option module choices for a particular

application, often an extended feature requirement determines which one to choose. For

example, there are two Ethernet choices, the IC693CMM321 and the IC693CPU364, but only

the IC693CPU364 has Ethernet Global Data (EGD) capability.

Remote or distributed I/O needs - One distributed I/O solution is the use of GE Fanuc’s

Genius Blocks, which can be mounted at the point of use and connected with a PLC’s Genius

Bus Controller (GBC) module via a twisted-pair cable. The GBC is the only Series 90-30

module that can control Genius Blocks. Other modules (GCM, GCM+) can read input data

broadcast by Genius Blocks, but cannot send commands to them. By selecting the applicable

bus interface unit (BIU), you can use GE Fanuc Field Control distributed I/O to interface to

Series 90-30 WorldFIP, Profibus, and Genius buses.

State Logic - These products allow “Natural Language programming” as an alternative to

ladder logic. This makes program creation, documenting, and editing easier for those not

trained in ladder logic programming. Industries that are required by law to thoroughly

document any changes to their system find State Logic to be especially useful.

Cost – In the case where either of two modules are capable of filling a need, an Option module

choice can be made based on the basis of cost.

Performance - Higher data transfer rate or amount of data often dictates which Option module

is used. For example, the IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module can

transmit and receive many times more data than the IC693CMM301 Genius Communications

Module, and it transfers data to the PLC CPU at a faster rate. A comparison table for these

two modules is found in Appendix A of GFK-0695.

Standardization - Sometimes a company standardizes on particular types of modules to

simplify training or stocking of spare parts.

Display requirements - Several options are available for interfacing with GE Fanuc

Human-Machine Interface (HMI) devices. For details, see the GE Fanuc web site,

http://www.gefanuc.com/

Third-party solutions - Many automation solutions are created by combining GE Fanuc

products with third-party products. Examples of third-party Series 90-30 modules are

Profibus, DeviceNet, SDS, LonWorks, Interbus-S, RTU/Modbus, ASCII Basic, RTD, and

Millivolt/Strain Gauge Input. Contact your GE Fanuc distributor for further information, or

check the GE Fanuc Web site for third-party product information.



12

Step 4: Selecting a CPU

Once you have determined how many and what type of I/O and Option modules you require, you

can select a CPU. Many of the factors that apply to selecting Option modules, such as

performance, cost, standardization, etc. also apply to selecting a CPU. Details on CPU capabilities

are found in the “CPUs” chapter.

Number of modules required by the system - Embedded CPUs come in 5-slot or 10-slot

sizes and they do not support Extension or Remote baseplates. Therefore, if a system requires

only a few modules, these may be an option. If more than 10 modules are required, you must

select a Modular CPU. The CPU331-341 CPUs support up to 5 total baseplates, and the

CPU350-364 CPUs support up to 8 total baseplates. If you need more than 49 total Option and

I/O modules, you will need to use one of the CPU350-364 group of CPUs.

Modules with Quantity Restrictions- Many modules are restricted as to how many may be

used in one system. This number also varies by CPU. For example, in the case of an

8-channel Analog Output module, the maximum number per system is:

4 if using a 311, 313, or 323 CPU

8 if using a 331, 340,or 341 CPU

79 if using a 360-364 CPU

Please see the section “Maximum Number of Modules Per System” for data.

Types of Option Modules - The PCM, ADC, CMM, and SLP modules can only work in a

Modular CPU baseplate. Use of these modules therefore rules out the use of Embedded CPUs

(311, 313, 323). See the section “Location of Modules in the PLC Racks” for more

information.

Performance - as shown in the “CPUs” chapter, the CPU350 - 364 CPUs use a more powerful

microprocessor than the lower numbered CPUs. For applications where higher performance is

required, one of these would be a good choice. For math-intensive applications, the CPU352,

with its built-in math coprocessor, would give the best performance. For Ethernet applications,

the CPU364 with its built-in Ethernet interface, provides faster performance than separate CPU

and Ethernet modules. This is because the separate modules have to communicate over the

PLC backplane, which is slower than the CPU364’s internal path. For a similar reason, when

using serial communications, the CPUs 351, 352, and 363 (using Ports 1 and 2) perform faster

than a separate serial communications module (IC693CMM311) and CPU combination.

Extended features - The IC693CPU364 has a built-in Ethernet interface which would

eliminate the need for a separate Ethernet module. This would save a PLC slot. The CPU351,

CPU352, and CPU353 each have two additional built-in serial ports which eliminate the need

for a separate serial communications Option module. The CPUs 350-364 have extra features

and capabilities that the other CPUs do not have such as, Floating Point Math, Sequential

Event Recorder, and Memory Protect Key Switch. Also, CPUs 351-364 have larger total

memory size, as well as configurable analog and register memory.

Memory requirements - The CPU351-364 CPUs have configurable analog and register

memory. This makes them more capable of meeting the needs of Option modules that require

this type of memory and user programs that require larger amounts of register or analog

memory. The CPU360 does not have configurable memory and has a lower base memory size

than the CPU351–364 CPUs. The CPU360–364 CPUs have standard Flash PROM for user



12

data storage. This is not available in some of the other CPUs. See the “CPU Firmware and

PROM Configurations” table in the “CPUs” chapter for details.

Expansion and Upgrade - The Embedded CPUs do not support Expansion or Remote racks

and do not allow changing CPU type. Therefore, they have limited options for expansion or

upgrade. Modular CPUs can usually be upgraded to more powerful CPUs. The type of

modular CPU determines whether a system can have a total of 5 or 8 baseplates, which can

have a direct bearing on the future expansion capabilities of a system. For example, if you

only need 49 total Option and I/O Modules, you could use one of the CPU331-341 CPUs.

However, you would be at the maximum module limit and would not be able to add any more

to the system without changing the CPU. If you used, instead, one of the CPU360-364 CPUs,

you could later add up to 30 more modules while keeping the same CPU.

Cost - If some of the other factors such as performance or extended features are not major

issues, one of the lower cost CPUs can be applied. However, sometimes purchasing a more

expensive CPU with extended features can be less costly than purchasing a lower cost CPU

and an additional Option module to cover the feature needed. Besides the direct cost of the

modules, using the single CPU would save a PLC slot, which could help avoid the need for,

and cost of, an extra Baseplate, Power Supply, I/O Bus Expansion Cable, etc. Since prices are

subject to change, it would not be practical to give an example of this. Please check with your

distributor for current pricing information.

Display requirements - The CPU351, CPU352, CPU363, and CMM311 have serial ports that

are often used to communicate with HMI or Operator Interface (OI) devices.

Time of day (TOD) clock requirements - The Embedded CPUs do not have one, the Modular

CPUs do.

System size limitation - If you are close to the maximum number of modules limit of your

system, you can use modules that have dual functions to conserve rack slots. For example, the

CPU364 has CPU and Ethernet communications capability in one module. The CPUs 351,

352, and 363 have CPU and Serial Communications capability in one module. There are

discrete and analog combination I/O modules that provide a limited number of both inputs and

outputs in one module. Also, the 32-point discrete I/O modules conserve rack slots compared

with lower density (16-point and less) I/O modules. You may also be able to use Genius

Blocks or Field Control distributed I/O to accommodate the need for additional I/O, since these

do not require a PLC slot; they communicate with the PLC over a communications bus.

Protection against unauthorized changes. CPUs 360—364 have a keylock switch that can

be locked to protect against unauthorized changes to the PLC. CPUs 311—341 do not have a

keylock switch. However, all CPUs have the capability of password protection for the

application program.

Step 5: Selecting Baseplates

The requirements determined in the previous steps will largely dictate what baseplates to select.

Please refer to the “Baseplates” chapter for additional details.

Embedded CPU baseplate - If the previous selections dictate the use of an Embedded CPU,

you have three choices. The CPU311 and CPU313 are 5-slot sizes, and the CPU323 is a 10-

slot size. The CPU311 has 6K Bytes of memory and the CPU313 has 12K Bytes.

Modular CPU Baseplate - If you need a modular CPU, you must use a Modular CPU

baseplate. There can be only one CPU baseplate per system. There are two types, 5-slot and


12

10-slot. If you only need a 5-slot size, you may want to consider whether the extra slots that a

10-slot size provides would be advantageous for possible future expansion. On the other hand,

the 5-slot size requires less space.

Expansion and Remote baseplates - These also come in 5-slot and 10-slot sizes. In general,

it is best to use Expansion baseplates where possible instead of Remote baseplates because of

the better speed performance of the Expansion baseplates. Where a total cable distance of over

50 feet is required, Remote baseplates must be used. In cases where you only need a 5-slot

size, you may want to consider whether it would be advantageous to use a 10-slot size in order

to have open slots for future expansion. That factor should be weighed against the fact that the

5-slot size requires less space and costs less.

Physical size - For locations with size limitations, one or more 5-slot baseplates may be a good

choice. See the “Baseplates” chapter for baseplate dimensions and clearance requirements.

Number of Modules Required - The number of modules needed at each location will have a

bearing on the sizes of racks required. You may choose to use a smaller rack (5-slot), if

possible, to save cost and space. However, as noted below, a larger rack (10-slot) with unused

slots will leave some room for future expansion, if desired.

Step 6: Selecting Power Supplies

The following factors affect your Power Supply selection decisions. See the “Power Supplies”

chapter for additional details.

Power capacity - All Series 90-30 Power Supplies have three individual outputs: +5VDC,

+24VDC (Relay), and +24VDC (Isolated). Although all of these Power Supplies are rated at

30 Watts maximum total output, the rating of the +5VDC output varies from supply to supply,

as shown in the following table. For applications requiring heavy loading of the +5VDC

supply, choose one of the “High Output” power supplies: IC693PWR330 or IC693PWR331.

Input voltage - As seen in the next table, nominal input voltage choices are 24VDC, 48VDC,

120VAC, 125VDC, and 240VAC.

Table 12-1. Power Supply Feature Comparison Table

Catalog

Number

Load

Capacity

Nominal



+5 VDC15 watts




+5 VDC30 watts












12

Reducing PLC Module Count by Using Other GE Fanuc Products

If system size limitations (more than 79 modules are needed) are a problem in a system using

Remote racks, a possible solution could be the use of GE Fanuc Genius Blocks, Field Control, or

VersaMax products. These distributed I/O devices can be used instead of Remote racks in remote

locations in some cases, and their use would not add to the Series 90-30 module count.

Genius Blocks

These are intelligent distributed I/O blocks that are panel-mounted at the point of use. They

communicate with a Genius Bus Controller (GBC) module in the PLC via a shielded, twisted-pair

cable. They are not included in the PLC module count, but do require I/O memory allocation. A

single GBC module in a PLC rack can control up to 31 Genius Blocks. Genius Blocks come in

discrete and analog I/O, high speed counter, RTD, and thermocouple interface types. For more

information on using Genius Blocks, see GEK-90486-1, Genius I/O System and Communications

User’s Manual, and GEK-90486-2, Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual.

Field Control

These are intelligent distributed I/O units that mount at the point-of-use on a 35mm x 7.5mm DIN-

rail. They can communicate over Genius, FIP, or Profibus buses. They are not included in the

PLC module count, but do require I/O memory allocation. A Field Control unit consists of a Bus

Interface Unit (BIU) that interfaces to the applicable bus, from one to eight I/O modules, and

cabling. I/O modules come in various discrete, analog, and RTD types. A local logic processor

module (MFP) is also available. For further information on Field Control, see the following:

GFK-0826, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System I/O Modules User’s Manual

GFK-0825, Field Control Genius Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual

GFK-1175, Field Control FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual

GFK-1291, Field Control Profibus Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual

VersaMax

VersaMax I/O modules can be used as distributed I/O, communicating with a Series 90-30 PLC

over one of three bus types: Genius, Profibus, or Device Net. This arrangement would require an

Option module for the desired bus type in the Series 90-30 PLC as well as the applicable Network

Interface Module in the VersaMax system. For more information on the VersaMax products,

please see GFK-1504, VersaMax Modules, Power Supplies, and Carriers Manual.


12

Designing For Safety

A good design should not only function properly and efficiently, but must also protect personnel

and equipment from harm. Although some basic guidelines are found in the “Installation”

chapter of this manual, it is not possible to cover every aspect of safety because of the diversity of

applications. Additionally, it is not practical for this manual to try to cover all the possible codes

and regulations that may apply to your locality or type of equipment. You have the ultimate

responsibility to consult applicable safety codes for your locality, or that pertain to the

particular type of equipment you are designing, and ensure that your design complies with

these standards. In the United States, the National Electric Code (NEC) has been adopted by

many localities. The United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

regulations also contain many safety regulations that apply to all industrial equipment in the United

States. In the absence of local regulations, the NEC and OSHA regulations should be followed

when designing your system, in addition to the information contained in this manual. OSHA

regulations can be accessed on-line at www.osha.gov. Some key safety issues are outlined below:

Protection From Electrical Shock

Proper wiring design, including grounding and circuit protection issues, should be followed.

Personnel should be prevented from accidentally coming in contact with hazardous voltages. Also,

unauthorized personnel should be prevented from gaining access to high voltage cabinets and

panels. Interlock circuits are often used for this purpose.

Fire Prevention

The guidelines in the NEC and OSHA regulations protect against fires, especially those caused by

faulty electrical design.

Protection From Mechanical Hazards

Personnel should be protected from physical hazards, such as moving mechanisms like conveyors

or index tables or mechanical pinch points. The use of interlocked safety gates, light curtains,

safety mat switches, dual hand buttons, physical barriers (guards), etc. can be used for this purpose.

See the applicable section of the OSHA regulations for details.

Protection From Electrical Failure

In the event of a system component failure, the design should be an acceptable “fail-safe” one in

which the failure does not cause a safety hazard such as a runaway condition or a disabling of

emergency stop circuits. Emergency stop and other safety circuits should consist of hard-wired

components that tend to fail in a harmless manner.

For example, in a Master Control Relay (MCR) circuit, use series-wired, normally closed

Emergency Stop pushbutton switches and interlocks to control an electro-mechanical Master

Control Relay (see next figure). This relay should directly disable motor starters, PLC output



12

circuits, etc. This type of circuit tends to fail “open,” which disables the equipment. For example,

if a wire breaks or a contact wears out, the circuit opens and the MCR drops out. If solid state

devices fail, they tend to fail “shorted,” which in the case of PLC output circuits would cause the

controlled device to turn on or stay on.

In the circuit below, the MCR is an electro-mechanical relay. It is energized by the application of

power to its solenoid coil which magnetically pulls the contacts to their energized states. When de-

energized, the contacts move to their normal, at rest states by the pull of a mechanical spring.

When the Reset pushbutton is pressed, and if all four of the E-Stop and Gate switches are closed,

the MCR relay will energize and “latch” in the energized state through its MCR contact in parallel

with the Reset pushbutton. Its other MCR contact applies power to the motor starter and PLC

output circuits. If any one of the E-Stop or Gate switches opens, or if a wire breaks in this circuit,

or if the MCR coil becomes defective, MCR will de-energize and open the circuit to the motor

starters and PLC output circuits.

As shown, the PLC’s main power and input circuits are not controlled by the MCR since they do

not directly control any outputs. Keeping these circuits energized is desirable because this allows

the PLC to continue gathering data, recording fault information, and controlling communications,

even if its Output module outputs are disabled by the MCR.

If an additional margin of safety were desired, two MCR relays could be used. Their coils would

be wired in parallel, their normally open contacts wired in series, and their normally closed contacts

wired in parallel. This would help guard against the possibility of a “welded contact” on a single

MCR relay.

MCR

MCR

Reset E-Stop 1 E-Stop 2 Gate 1 Gate 2

MCR

To Motor Starters, PLCOutput Module Circuits, etc.

Master Control Relay (MCR)

PLC Main Power andInput Power Circuits

Figure 12-1. Hard-Wired MCR Circuit Example

Protection From Design Changes or Overrides

Only authorized personnel should be allowed to make changes that could impact the safe operation

of the equipment. Passwords and lockout circuits may be used to accomplish this. Some Series

90-30 CPUs have keylock switches to protect against program changes (see “CPUs” chapter for

keylock switch details).


12

Safety Documentation

PLC Program Documentation. Thorough documentation will help you and others who work

on the equipment remember and understand how the safety circuits and features work. (In

some industries, applicable regulations may require this type of documentation.) The PLC

programming software gives you extensive documentation abilities.

For example, you can create Nicknames such as “PSTOP,” Descriptions such as “Program

Stop Coil,” and Comments such as “This coil is used to stop the program cycle, but it does not

turn off power to the main hydraulic circuit. However, if the operator opens the safety gate,

the Safety Gate Interlock switch will open and shut off the hydraulic pump.” These

Nicknames, Descriptions, and Comments become part of the PLC program and can be viewed

with the applicable software.

As an alternative to ladder logic programming, the State Logic programming language makes

it easier to document PLC program design because it uses “Natural Language” expressions

instead of ladder logic symbols.

Electrical and mechanical prints should contain notations pertaining to safety issues.

Written operating and maintenance instructions as well as training should be provided to

operators and maintenance personnel. These should address any applicable safety issues.

Guarding Against Unauthorized Operation

Keylock switches and passwords are frequently used for this purpose.

Labeling, Guarding, and Lighting Issues

Labeling. Operator devices such as pushbuttons, switches, or on-screen (software) buttons

should be clearly labeled as to their function.

Guarding. Operator devices should be guarded, where applicable, to prevent them from being

activated accidentally. Recessed pushbutton designs or pushbuttons with surrounding guard

rings might help prevent the pushbutton from being depressed if, for example, a tool were

dropped or laid upon it. Mounting pushbutton stations to vertical surfaces also may help avoid

this problem.

Lighting. Illumination levels in the working area should be adequate so that all labels can be

clearly seen.

Equipment Accessibility Issues

The equipment should be laid out so as to give operators sufficient room to perform their tasks

safely. Also, sufficient clearance should be provided so that maintenance personnel have safe

access to electrical panels, control boxes, etc. These minimum clearances are specified in the NEC

and OSHA requirements.



12

Number of Modules Per Series 90-30 PLC System

The following table lists the maximum number of each type of I/O and option modules that can be

installed in a Series 90-30 PLC system. The number of modules that can be installed in a system

depends on several factors, including available references for each CPU model, the current rating

for each module to be installed in the system, and other installed modules. Before installing

modules in a baseplate, verify that the total current rating of all of those modules does not exceed

the power rating of the power supply.

Table 12-2. Maximum Number of Modules Per System

Module Type

CPU

Model 311/313/323

CPU

Model 331/340/341

CPU

Model 350 - 364

Input and Output, Discrete 5 (5-slot baseplate)10 (10-slot baseplate)

49 (331/340/341) 79

Input Module, Analog , 4-Channel 5 (5-slot baseplate)8 (10-slot baseplate)

40 64

Input Module, Analog, 16-Channel 4 8 (Model 331)12 (Model 340/341)

51

Output Module (Voltage), Analog, 2-Channel 5 (5-slot baseplate)6 (10-slot baseplate)

16 (Model 331)30 (Model 340/341)

48

Output Module (Current), Analog, 2-Channel 3 (5-slot baseplate)3 (10-slot baseplate)

15 (Model 331)15 (Model 340/341)

24

Output Module, Analog, 8-Channel 4 8 (Model 331)32 (Model 340/341)

79

Combination Input/Output Module, Analog4-Ch In/2-Ch Out

5 (5-slot baseplate)10 (10-slot baseplate)

21 (Model 331/40/341) 79

Programmable Coprocessor Module n/a 4 4

Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module n/a 4 4

Communications Control Module n/a 9 9

State Logic Processor Module n/a Refer to the State Logic User’s Guide, GFK-0726.

Genius Communications Module (1) 1 1 1

Enhanced Genius Communications Module (1) 2 2 2

High Speed Counter 4 (5/10-slot baseplate) 8 (Model 331)32 (Model 340/341)

79

I/O Link Interface Module 5 (5/10-slot baseplate) 49 79

I/O Processor Module 2 (5-slot baseplate)4 (10-slot baseplate)

8 (Model 331)16 (Model 340/341)

64

Genius Bus Controller (2) 8 8 8

Ethernet Interface Module Refer to the Series 90-30 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User’s Manual,

GFK-1084 for details.

Motion Mate APM300 Module Refer to the Motion Mate APM300 User’s Manuals, GFK-0840 or GFK-0781

for details.

Motion Mate DSM302 Module Refer to the Motion Mate DSM302 User’s Manual, GFK-1464 , for details.

Motion Mate DSM314 Module Refer to the Motion Mate DSM314 User’s Manual, GFK-1742 , for details

Temperature Control Module Refer to the Temperature Control User’s Manual, GFK-1466 for details

Power Transducer Module Refer to the Power Transducer Module User’s Manual, GFK-1734, for details

(1) The Enhanced Genius Communications Module and the Genius Communications Module cannot be installed inthe same PLC baseplate; however, both modules can be present on the same bus.(2) Refer to GFK-1034, Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual for details.


12

Calculating Power Supply Loading

The load placed on a power supply in a Series 90-30 PLC baseplate is the sum of the internal and

external loads placed on it by all of the hardware components in the baseplate (backplane, modules,

etc.), as well as external loads connected to the Isolated + 24 VDC supply. Use of the Isolated +24

Volt power supply output is optional; however, this output can be used to drive a limited number

of input devices. The maximum total power output rating of the Power Supplies is 30 watts;

however, the individual +5VDC outputs can be rated for either 15 or 30 Watts, depending on the

Power Supply catalog number. See Table 12-1, “Power Supply Feature Comparison Table,” for

details.

Load Requirements for Hardware Components

The following table shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component. All

ratings are in milliamps (except where noted). Input and Output module current ratings are with all

inputs or outputs on. Three voltages are listed in the table:

+5 VDC provides primary power to operate most internal circuits

+24 VDC Relay Power provides power for circuits that drive the relays on Relay modules

+24 VDC Isolated provides power to operate a number of input circuits (input modules only),

and any external circuits connected to the 24 VDC Output terminals on the power supply

terminal strip.

Note that the figures listed in the following table are maximum (worst case) requirements , not

typical requirements.

Table 12-3. Load Requirements (in milliamps)

Catalog

Number Description +5 VDC

+24 VDC Relay

Power

+24 VDC

Isolated

AD693SLP300 State Logic Processor Module 425 – –

IC693ACC300 Input Simulator, 8/16 Points 120 – –

IC693ACC307 Expansion Bus Termination Plug 72 – –

IC690ACC900 RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter 170 – –

IC690ACC901 RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232, Miniconverter Kit (Version A)(version B, or later )

150100

––

––

IC693ADC311 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module 400 – –

IC693ALG220 Analog Input, Voltage, 4 Channel 27 – 98

IC693ALG221 Analog Input, Current, 4 Channel 25 – 100

IC693ALG222 Analog Input, Voltage, High Density (16 Channel) 112 41

IC693ALG223 Analog Input, Current, High Density (16 Channel) 120 – –

IC693ALG390 Analog Output, Voltage, 2 Channel 32 – 120

IC693ALG391 Analog Output, Current, 2 Channel 30 – 215

IC693ALG392 Analog Current/Voltage Output, 8 Channel 110 –

IC693ALG442 Analog Current/Voltage Combination 4 Ch In/2 Ch Out 95 – 129

IC693APU300 High Speed Counter 250 – –

IC693APU301 Motion Mate APM300, 1-Axis 800 – –

IC693APU302 Motion Mate APM300, 2-Axis 800 – –

IC693APU305 I/O Processor Module 360 – –



12

Catalog


+24 VDC Relay

Power

+24 VDC

Isolated

IC693BEM320 I/O Link Interface Module (slave) 205 – –

IC693BEM321 I/O Link Interface Master Module (w/o optical adapter)(with Optical Adapter)

415615

– –

IC693BEM330 FIP Remote I/O Scanner 609 – –

IC693BEM331 Genius Bus Controller 300 – –

IC693BEM340 FIP Bus Controller (maximum)(typical)

1.2A800

IC693CHS391 10-slot Modular CPU Baseplate 250 – –

IC693CHS392 10-slot Expansion Baseplate 150 – –

IC693CHS393 10-slot Remote Baseplate 460 – –

IC693CHS397 5-slot Modular CPU Baseplate 270 – –

IC693CHS398 5-slot Expansion Baseplate 170 – –

IC693CHS399 5-slot Remote Baseplate 480 – –

IC693CMM301 Genius Communications Module 200 – –

IC693CMM302 Enhanced Genius Communications Module 300 – –

IC693CMM311 Communications Control Module 400 – –

IC693CMM321 Ethernet Interface Module 750 – –

IC693CPU311 Series 90-30 5-Slot Embedded CPU Baseplate 410 – –



IC693CPU331 CPU (Model 331) 350 – –

IC693CPU340 CPU (Model 340) 490 – –

IC693CPU341 CPU (Model 341) 490 – –

IC693CPU350 CPU (Model 350) 670 **

IC693CPU351 CPU (Model 351) 890 **

IC693CPU352 CPU (Model 352) 910 **

IC693CPU360 CPU (Model 360) 670 **

IC693CPU363 CPU (Model 363) 890 **

IC693CPU364 CPU (Model 364) 1.51A**

IC693CSE313 State Logic CPU, 5-slot baseplate 430 – –

IC693CSE323 State Logic CPU, 10-slot baseplate 430 – –

IC693CSE340 State Logic CPU Module 490 – –

IC693DSM302/314 Motion Mate DSM302 or DSM314 Module 800

1300 withexternalencoder

– –

IC693MAR590 120 VAC Input, relay Output, 8 In/8 Out 80 70 –

IC693MDL230 120 VAC Isolated, 8 Point Input 60 – –

IC693MDL231 240 VAC Isolated, 8 Point Input 60 – –

IC693MDL240 120 VAC, 16 Point Input 90 – –

IC693MDL241 24 VAC/DC Pos/Neg logic, 16 Point 80 – 125

IC693MDL310 120 VAC, 0.5A, 12 Point Output 210 – –

IC693MDL330 120/240 VAC, 1A, 8 Point Output 160 – –

IC693MDL340 120 VAC, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 315 – –

IC693MDL390 120/240 VAC Isolated, 2A, 5 Point Output 110 – –

IC693MDL630 24 VDC Positive Logic, 8 Point Input 2.5 – 60

IC693MDL632 125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 8 Point Input 40 – –

IC693MDL633 24 VDC Negative Logic, 8 Point Input 5 – 60

IC693MDL634 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 8 Point Input 80 – 125

IC693MDL640 24 VDC Positive Logic, 16 Point Input 5 – 120

IC693MDL641 24 VDC Negative Logic, 16 Point Input 5 – 120


12

Catalog


+24 VDC Relay

Power

+24 VDC

Isolated

IC693MDL643 24 VDC Positive Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 5 – 120

IC693MDL644 24 VDC Negative Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 5 – 120

IC693MDL645 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 16 Point Input 80 – 125

IC693MDL646 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, FAST, 16 Point Input 80 – 125

IC693MDL652 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic 32 Point Input 5 – –

IC693MDL653 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, FAST, 32 Point Input 5 – –

IC693MDL654 5/12 VDC (TTL) Pos/Neg Logic, 32 Point 195/440* – –

IC693MDL655 24 VDC Pos/Neg, 32 Point Input 195 – 224

IC693MDL730 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 2A, 8 Point Output 55 – –

IC693MDL731 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A, 8 Point Output 55 – –

IC693MDL732 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 0.5A, 8 Point Output 50 – –

IC693MDL733 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A, 8 Point Output 50 – –

IC693MDL734 125 VDC Pos/Neg Logic, 6 Point Output 90 – –


IC693MDL741 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 0.5A, 16 Point Output 110 – –

IC693MDL742 12/24 VDC Pos. Logic ESCP, 1A, 16 Point Output 130 – –

IC693MDL750 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 32 Point Output 21 – –

IC693MDL751 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 32 Point Output 21 – –

IC693MDL752 5/24 VDC (TTL) Negative Logic, 0.5A, 32 Point 260 – –


IC693MDL930 Relay, N.O., 4A Isolated, 8 Point Output 6 70 –

IC693MDL931 Relay, N.C. and Form C, 8A Isolated, 8 Point Out 6 110 –

IC693MDL940 Relay, N.O., 2A, 16 Point Output 7 135 –

IC693MDR390 24 VDC Input, Relay Output, 8 In/8 Out 80 70 –

IC693PCM300 Programmable Coprocessor Module, 65K 425 – –



IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer 170 – –

IC693PTM100 Power Transducer Module 400

IC693TCM302 Temperature Control Module 150 – –

* Refer to module specifications in GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual for more details.

** Note that the model 350-364 CPUs do not support the A version (IC690ACC901A) of the Miniconverter.

Power Supply Loading Calculation Examples

Following are examples of calculations for determining the total load placed on a Series 90-30 PLC

power supply by the Series 90-30 PLC hardware. All current figures are expressed in milliamps.

Note that although each output is rated at 15 or 20 watts (with the exception that the +5 VDC

output for the High Capacity power supply is rated at 30 watts), the total combined output can be

no more than 30 watts. The power required by external circuits connected to the 24 VDC

OUTPUT terminals on the power supply terminal strip should be added to the calculation.



12

Example 1: Series 90-30, Model 323 Embedded CPU (10-slot baseplate)

Component +5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay

IC693CPU323 Embedded CPUBaseplate

430

IC693PRG300 Hand-Held Programmer 170

IC693ALG390 Analog Output 32 120

IC693ALG220 Analog Input 27 98

IC693APU300 HS Counter 190

24 VDC Input (16 points) 5 120

IC693MDL340 Input Module 5 120

IC693MDL740 Output Module 110

IC693MDL240 Input Module 90


IC693MDL940 Relay Out. Mod. 7 135


Totals (milliamps)(Watts)

12816.41

45810.99

2054.92

Total Watts = 22.32

Example 2: Series 90-30, Model 351 Modular CPU (10-slot baseplate)

Component +5V +24V Isolated +24V Relay

IC693CHS391 Modular CPU Baseplate 250

IC693CPU351 CPU Module 890

IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit 100

IC693PCM301 PCM Module 425

IC693ALG390 Analog Output 32 120

IC693ALG220 Analog Input 27 98

IC693APU300 HS Counter 190

IC693MDL340 Input Module 5 120


IC693MDL240 Input Module 90



Totals (milliamps) (Watts)

233611.68

3388.11

1353.24

Total Watts = 23.03

Scan (Sweep) Time Calculation

Scan or Sweep time is the time it takes the PLC CPU to perform all of its tasks one time. Scan

time contribution is the amount of time added to the PLC scan by the software and hardware

components of the system. For systems that may be time-sensitive, this factor should be made part

of the design specification. To help avoid timing issues, the theoretical scan time should be

calculated so that appropriate solutions can be designed into the system up-front.


12

Major Design Factors Affecting Scan Time

Size of ladder program

Type of CPU. Some CPUs have faster clock speeds and architecture than others.

Types of instructions used in ladder program

Number of modules

Types of modules. Some modules, such as several of the Option modules, have a much greater

impact than others such as discrete I/O modules.

Location of modules. This refers to the type of rack (CPU, Expansion, or Remote) that they

are installed in.

Connections to other devices such as an HMI, or to other systems via communications

modules or ports.

Cable types. Cable type can have a significant impact on scan time, especially when

connecting Remote racks or communicating over long distances. Propagation time of data

should be minimized to ensure proper system timing and margins. Suggested cable types for

I/O Bus Expansion and communication cables are documented in the “Cables” chapter. Any

deviation in cable types from those recommended may result in erratic or improper

system operation.

Where to Find Scan Time Information

For information on calculating scan time, please refer to the “Sweep Time Calculation” section of

GFK-0467, Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual.



12

Calculating PLC Heat Dissipation

The amount of heat dissipated by a PLC mounted in an enclosure can be an important factor in

determining the enclosure size needed for the system. This is because the enclosure must be able to

adequately dissipate the heat generated by all of the components mounted inside so that no

components overheat. PLC heat dissipation is also a factor in determining the need for enclosure

cooling options such as fans and air conditioning. Enclosure manufacturers generally consider

enclosure heat dissipation as a factor in their enclosure selection guidelines. Instructions for

calculating Series 90-30 PLC heat dissipation can be found in Appendix F, “Series 90-30 Heat

Dissipation.”

System Layout Guidelines

Because of the differences from one system to another, it is not practical to try to discuss every

possible layout. Instead, this section offers guidelines and an example to help you lay out your

system.

Benefits of a Good Layout - Safe, Reliable, and Accessible

The layout of your system has a lot to do with how reliably your system will operate, how easy it is

to install, how well it looks, and how easy and safe it is to maintain:

Safety and Maintenance - A good layout helps minimize the chance of electrical shock to

personnel working on the system. It lets maintenance technicians easily access the unit to

make measurements, load software, check indicator lights, remove and replace modules, etc. It

also makes it easier to trace wiring and locate components while troubleshooting.

Reliability -Proper layout promotes good heat dissipation and helps eliminate electrical noise

from the system. Excess heat and noise are two major causes of electronic component failure.

Installation Efficiency- A well designed layout allows sufficient room to mount and wire the

unit. This saves time and frustration.

Appearance - A neat and orderly layout gives others a favorable impression of your system.

It lets others know that careful thought went into the design of the system.

PLC Rack Location and Clearance Requirement

The following list provides PLC rack mounting location guidelines. For an example layout, see the

figure “Series 90-30 Example Layout” later in this chapter.

Locate PLC racks away from other components that generate a lot of heat, such as

transformers, power supplies, or power resistors.

Locate PLC racks away from components that generate electrical noise such as relays and

contacts.

Locate PLC racks away from high voltages components and wiring such as circuit breakers

and fusible disconnects, transformers, motor wiring, etc. This not only reduces electrical

noise, but makes it safer for personnel working on the PLC.


12

Locate PLC racks at a convenient level that allows technicians reasonable access for

maintaining the system.

Route sensitive input wires away from electrically noisy wires such as discrete output and AC

wiring. This can be facilitated by grouping I/O modules to keep Output modules separated

from sensitive Input modules.

The PLC racks each require a 4" clearance space on all four sides (6 inches on the right end if

using I/O Bus Expansion Cables) to ensure adequate ventilation/cooling. See the “Baseplates”

chapter for baseplate size and clearance requirement information.

Location of Modules in the PLC Racks

There are several factors to consider when laying out your PLC racks.

Location restrictions - Although most modules can be located in any type of baseplate, a few

of the Option modules (PCM, ADC, CMM, SLP) will only work in a CPU baseplate. The next

figure identifies where you can locate the modules in your system.

Power Supply capacity - Since some modules draw considerably more power than others, it is

possible to overload the power supply by placing many of the modules requiring higher power

in one rack. Therefore, before finalizing your rack layout you should calculate the power

supply loading to ensure that you will not overload the power supply. See the section

“Calculating Power Supply Loading.”

Noise Reduction - Group I/O modules to keep Output modules separated from sensitive Input

modules. This facilitates keeping noisy wiring separated from sensitive wiring, as

recommended in a previous section.



12

Allowable Module Locations

MODEL 331/340/341and 350/351/352/360/363/364 5-Slot Expansion

HIGH SPEED COUNTER

GENIUS COMMUNICATIONS

DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUT

HIGH SPEED COUNTER


MODEL 311/313(5-SLOT)

MODEL 331/340/341and 350/351/352/360/

363/364 10-Slot Expansion


HIGH SPEED COUNTER

GENIUS COMMUNICATIONSMODEL 313(10-SLOT)


HIGH SPEED COUNTER

GENIUS COMMUNICATIONSMODEL 331/340/341and 350/351/352/360/363/364 10-Slot CPU


HIGH SPEED COUNTER

GENIUS COMMUNICATIONSMODEL 331/340/341and 350/351/352/360/

363/364 5-Slot CPU

CPU

CPU


ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT

MOTION MATE APM300/DSM302I/O LINK INTERFACE

ENHANCED GENIUS COMM.





PCM / ADC / CMM / SLP



PCM / ADC / CMM / SLP



HIGH SPEED COUNTER


DISCRETE INPUT/OUTPUTANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT



I/O PROCESSOR

I/O PROCESSOR

I/O PROCESSOR

I/O PROCESSOR

I/O PROCESSOR

I/O PROCESSOR

GENIUS BUS CONTROLLER






ETHERNET INTERFACE

ETHERNET INTERFACE

ETHERNET INTERFACE

ETHERNET INTERFACE

ETHERNET INTERFACE

ETHERNET INTERFACE

* For location of FIP modules in baseplates, refer to the applicable FIP module user's manual.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Figure 12-2. Allowable Location of Modules


12

Series 90-30 PLC Layout Example

1

2

3 4

8

6

7

5

9

10

Figure 12-3. Series 90-30 Example Layout

1. Series 90-30 PLC, 10-slot rack

2. Wireway (Wire Duct)

3. Field device connection terminal block

4. Motor connection terminal block

5. Motor starters

6. Circuit board

7. Power supply

8. Control transformer

9. Fusible disconnect or circuit breaker

10. Control relays



12

PLC Mounting Position

Power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the baseplate and the ambient

temperature.

Recommended Upright Mounting Orientation

The load rating with the baseplate mounted upright on a panel is:

100% at 60°C (140°F )

Figure 12-4. Recommended PLC Mounting Orientation

Derated Horizontal Mounting Orientation

Power supply load ratings with the baseplate mounted horizontally are:

Temperature at 25° C (77°F ) – full load

Temperature at 60°C (140°F ) – 50% of full load

Figure 12-5. Derated PLC Mounting Orientation

GFK-0356Q 13-1

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Features of Series 90-30 Hardware

Indicator Lights (LEDs) and Terminal Board

The following figure shows how the indicator LEDs correspond to the circuit connection points on

an I/O Module’s terminal board. The terminal board terminals are numbered from the top, with the

top terminal in the left row being number 1 and the top terminal in the right row being number 2.

The numbers alternate between rows with even numbers on the right and odd numbers on the left,

as shown in the circuit diagram on the back of the hinged cover.

A1

A2

A4

A3

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

RELAYOUTPUT

2 AMP

1

2

3 V

V

V

V

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

4

A7

A8

B1

B2

B4

B7

B8

44A726782-015FOR USE WITHIC693MDL940

B6

B5

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

B3

Fuse Indicator LED

LED A6 corresponds to circuit A6:

Circuit A6 connects

to terminal 8

Hinged Cover

Indicates ExternalPower Supply

Figure 13-1. Relationship of Indicator Lights to Terminal Board Connections

13Chapter


13

Module LED Indicators

Input Module LED Indicators

When a discrete input device closes, the corresponding input LED should light to indicate that the

signal reached the module. If the light does not turn ON, a voltage check can be made on the

module’s terminal board or block:

If the correct voltage is present at the terminal, the corresponding input bit can be checked in

the PLC with your programming software. If the software shows that the input bit is at logic 1,

the module’s LED circuit is defective.

If the correct voltage level is not present at the terminal, a check can be made at the input field

device to determine if the device or interconnecting wiring is defective.

If none of an input module’s inputs are working, it may be that the external (field) input power

supply is defective, not powered up, or not connected properly. (Input and output devices are

powered from an external power supply, not from inside the module). Input modules are not fused,

so the Fuse Indicator LED in the previous figure does not apply to them.

Output Module LED Indicators

When a discrete output address (%Q) is turned on in the ladder program, the corresponding output

LED should light to indicate that the signal reached the module.

If the light does not turn ON, the module may be defective or the LED light may be bad.

If the light turns on but the output device doesn’t operate, a voltage check can be made on the

module’s terminal board or block. If the correct voltage level is present there, the output

device or wiring should be checked.

If none of an output module’s outputs are working, it may be that the external (field) output power

supply is defective, is not powered up or is not connected properly. (Input and output devices are

powered from an external power supply, not from inside the module). If the output module is a

type that has built-in fuses (some have electronic short circuit protection instead), the Fuse

Indicator LED (labeled “F”), shown in the previous figure, will light if a fuse blows.

Power Supply LED Indicators

The power supplies have four LED indicators. Their functions are explained in the “Power

Supplies” chapter.

CPU LED Indicators

There are several different LED arrangements on the various CPUs. These are explained in the

“CPUs” chapter.

Option Module LED Indicators

There are numerous LED arrangements on the various option modules. The “Option Modules”

chapter has some information on this subject. It also directs you, for each module, to further

information in the “Documentation” heading for each module. Also, Appendix G contains a

catalog number to documentation cross-reference.


GFK-0356Q Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13-3

13

Troubleshooting Features of Programming Software

Detailed information about the following items are found in GFK-0467, Series 90-30/20/Micro

PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, and GFK-0466, Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming

Software User’s Manual.

Ladder Screens

Contacts, connections, and coils displayed on the ladder screens that are ON (passing power or

energized) are displayed in enhance brightness, allowing the tracing of signals through the

program. Addresses that refer to physical input (%I and %AI) and output signals (%Q and %AQ)

can be checked against module status lights, voltages, etc. to verify that the hardware is working

properly.

Configuration Screens

Normally, the following information is obtained from the system documentation. However, if they

are not available, the configuration screens can be used to determine:

• If the software configuration matches the actual hardware. Sometimes, while

troubleshooting, a module is installed in an incorrect slot by mistake. This will create a fault in

one of the two fault tables. The correct configuration can be determined from the

Configuration Screens.

• The memory addresses that a particular module is using.

Fault Tables

There are two fault tables, the “PLC Fault Table,” and the “I/O Fault Table.” The fault tables can

be viewed using the PLC programming software. These fault tables will not report such things as a

defective limit switch, but will identify system faults such as:

• Loss of or Missing Modules, System Configuration Mismatch.

• CPU hardware failure, Low Battery

• PLC Software Failure, Program Checksum Failure, No User Program, PLC Store Failures.

System Status References

These discrete references (%S, %SA, %SB, and %SC) can be viewed in the System Reference

(Status) Table, or on-screen if used in the ladder program, for determining the status of various

conditions and faults. For example, the %SC0009 bit turns on if a fault is logged in either fault

table. Another example is that bit %SA0011 will turn on if the CPU memory backup battery is low.

The Series 90-30 PLC CPU Instruction Set Reference Manual, GFK-0467, includes a “System

Status Reference Table.”


13

Reference Tables

There are two types of reference tables, standard and mixed. These tables show groups of memory

addresses and their status. For discrete addresses, the status of these will be shown as either logic 1

or logic 0. For analog and register addresses, values will be displayed. Standard tables display

only one type of memory address, such as all of the %I bits. Mixed reference tables are created by

the user, who selects what addresses to display in the tables. These mixed tables can contain

discrete, analog, and register references all in one table. This makes them useful for gathering

numerous related addresses on one screen where they can all be viewed or monitored at the same

time. This saves time compared with searching or scrolling through the ladder logic screens to find

these addresses.

Override feature

This feature must be used with caution to ensure the safety of personnel and equipment.

Normally, the machine should not be cycling, and all conditions should be such that the

output device can be turned on without any harm being done. This method can be used to

check an output circuit from the ladder screen all the way to the device being controlled. For

example, when overriding and toggling a %Q output to an ON state, the relay, solenoid, or other

device being controlled should turn on or pick up. If it does not, the status light on the output

module could be checked, then voltage checks could be made at the module terminal board, the

system terminal strip, the machinery terminal strip, the solenoid or relay connections, etc. until the

source of the fault is found.

Sequential Event Recorder (SER), DOIO functional instruction

These can be set up to capture the status of specified discrete addresses upon receiving a trigger

signal. They may be used to monitor and capture data about certain portions of the program, even

when unattended. They can be useful for locating the cause of an intermittent problem. For

example, a contact in a string of contacts that maintain power to a coil may, from time to time,

momentarily open and interrupt normal operation. However, when maintenance personnel attempt

to locate the problem, all of these contacts may test OK. By using the SER or DOIO instruction,

the status of all of these contacts can be captured within milliseconds of the time the fault occurs,

and the contact that opened will show a status of logic 0 at the moment of capture.



13

Replacing Modules

Modules do not contain configuration switches. The slot in each baseplate (rack) is configured

(using the configuration software) to hold a particular module type (catalog number). This

configuration information is stored in CPU memory. Therefore, when replacing a module, you do

not have to make any hardware settings on the module itself. You do, however, have to ensure that

you install the correct module type in a particular slot.

Be aware that some “intelligent” modules, such as the CPU, PCM, APM, or DSM302, may contain

application programs that will need to be reloaded after the module is replaced. For such modules,

make sure that up-to-date copies of the application programs are maintained in case they have to be

restored later.

For I/O modules with terminal boards, you do not have to rewire a new terminal board in order to

replace the module. If the old terminal board is not defective, it can be removed from the old

module and reinstalled on the new module without removing any of the wiring. Procedures for

removing and installing modules and terminal boards are found in Chapter 2.

Series 90-30 Product Repair

The Series 90-30 products are, for the most part, not considered to be field-repairable. The one

major exception are the few modules that have replaceable fuses. The next section, “Module Fuse

List,” identifies these modules and their applicable fuses.

GE Fanuc offers a repair/product warranty service through your local distributor. Contact your

distributor for details.


13

Module Fuse List

Warning

Replace fuse only with the correct size and type. Using an incorrect fuse can

result in harm to personnel, damage to equipment, or both.

Table 13-1. Fuse List for Series 90-30 Modules

Module

Catalog

Number

Module Type

Current

Rating

Quantity on

Module

GE Fanuc Fuse

Part Number

Third Party Sources

and Part Numbers

IC693CPU364 CPU Module withembedded Ethernetinterface

1A 1 44A725214-001 Littlefuse – R454 001

IC693DVM300 Digital Valve Driver 1A2A

14

N/AN/A

Bussman – GDB-1ALittlefuse – 239002

IC693MDL310 120 VAC, 0.5A 3A 2 44A724627-111 (1) Bussman – GMC-3Littlefuse – 239003

IC693MDL330 120/240 VAC, 1A 5A 2 44A724627-114 (1) Bussman – GDC-5Bussman S506-5

IC693MDL340 120 VAC, 0.5A 3A 2 44A724627-111 (1) Bussman – GMC-3Littlefuse – 239003

IC693MDL390 120/240 VAC, 2A 3A 5 44A724627-111 (1) Bussman – GMC-3Littlefuse – 239003

IC693MDL730 12/24 VDC Positive Logic, 2A

5A 2 259A9578P16 (1) Bussman – AGC-5Littlefuse – 312005

IC693MDL731 12/24 VDC Negative Logic, 2A

5A 2 259A9578P16 (1) Bussman, AGC-5Littlefuse – 312005

IC693PWR321 andIC693PWR330

120/240 VAC or 125 VDCInput, 30 Watt PowerSupply

2A 1 44A724627-109 (2) Bussman – 215-002 (GDC-2 or GMC-2)

Littlefuse – 239-002

IC693PWR322 24/48 VDC Input,30 Watt Power Supply

5A 1 44A724627-114 (2) Bussman – MDL-5Littlefuse – 313005

IC693PWR328 48 VDC Input30 Watt Power Supply


IC693PWR331 24 VDC Input,30 Watt Power Supply


IC693TCM302 Temperature ControlModule

2A 1 N/A Littlefuse – 273002

(1) Mounted in clip. Accessible by removing circuit board from module housing.(2) Line fuse. Mounted in clip – accessible by removing module front.



13

Spare/Replacement Parts

Two kits (IC693ACC319 and IC693ACC320) provide mechanical spare parts for Series 90-30

modules. One covers I/O CPU, PCM, and other modules; the other is for power supply modules.

These kits provide parts such as module levers, front covers, cases, etc. The following table

describes the contents of each kit.

Table 13-2. Spare/Replacement Parts

Spare Parts Contents

IC693ACC319:

Spare parts kit for I/O, CPU,and PCM modules

(qty. 10) I/O, CPU, PCM case lever(qty. 10) Spring pins cap(qty. 2) PCM module front cover(qty. 2) PCM lens cap(qty. 2) CPU module case

IC693ACC320:

Spare parts kit for powersupplies

(qty. 2) Power supply lever(qty. 2) Spring pin for power supply lever(qty. 2) Spring for power supply lever(qty. 2) Power supply lens cap(qty. 2) Power supply terminal cover

IC693ACC301 (see Note)

Memory Backup Battery(qty. 2) Memory backup battery for CPU and PCM modules

Fuses See “Fuse List For Series 90-30 Modules“ table in this chapter.

Modules You may wish to maintain spare PLC modules. Many systemshave more than one of a particular catalog number, such aspower supplies (each rack has one) and I/O modules. In thesecases, one of each type would serve as backups for severalmodules.

IC693ACC311

Removable Module TerminalBoard

(qty. 6) Removable terminal boards used on many I/Omodules and some Option modules.

44A736756-G01

CPU (CPU350 – 364) Key KitKit contains three sets (6 keys). Same key fits all applicableCPUs.

Note: The IC693ACC301 batteries have a shelf life of 5 years (see Chapter 6 for instructions on how to read battery

date codes). Periodically, outdated batteries should be removed from stock and disposed of according to the battery

manufacturer’s recommendations.


13

Preventive Maintenance Suggestions

Series 90-30 PLC Preventive Maintenance

Item

No.

Description Recommendation

1 Safety ground andelectrical system

Check frequently to ensure that safety ground connections are secure andthat electrical cables and conduits are secure and in good condition.

2 CPU Memory backupbattery

Replace annually or as appropriate for your application.* Check Chapter5 for instructions on how to avoid loss of memory contents whenreplacing battery.

3 Option Modulebackup battery

Replace annually. Check user’s manual for additional instructions.Check Chapter 5 for instructions on how to avoid loss of memorycontents when replacing battery.

4 Ventilation If using ventilation fan in enclosure, check for proper operation. Keepfingers and tools away from moving fans. Clean or replace ventilationair filter, if using one, at least monthly.

5 Mechanical tightness With power OFF, check that connectors and modules are seated securelyin their sockets and that wire connections are secure. For low vibrationinstallations, perform annually. For high vibration installations, check atleast quarterly.

6 Enclosure Check annually. With power OFF, remove manuals, prints, or otherloose material that could cause shorts or ventilation blockage, or that areflammable, from inside of enclosure. Gently vacuum dust and dirt thathas collected on components. Use vacuum cleaner, not compressed air,for this task.

7 Program backup Do this initially after creating any application programs, such as theladder logic program, motion programs, etc. Then, any time a change ismade to a program, make at least one (several is better) new backupcopy. Keep old copies (clearly marked) for a reasonable period of timein case you need to go back to the old design.

Document each backup copy as to what equipment it is for, date it wascreated or modified, version number (if any), and author’s name.

Keep master backup copies in a safe place. Make working copiesavailable to those responsible for maintaining the equipment.

*See “Factors Affecting Battery Life” in Chapter 5.



13

Getting Additional Help and Information

There are several ways to get additional help and information:

GE Fanuc Web Site

There is a large amount of information on the Technical Support section of the GE Fanuc Web site.

Sections such as Technical Documentation, Application Notes, Revision Histories, Frequently

Asked Questions, and Field Service Bulletins may have the exact information you need. You can

access this site at:

http://www.gefanuc.com/support/

Fax Link System

This system lets you choose technical help documents to be sent to you on your Fax machine. To

use this system follow these steps:

• Call Fax Link at (804) 978-5824 on a touch tone type phone (rotary dial phones will not work

for this application).

• Follow the instructions to have a master list (called “Document 1”) of Fax Link documents

Faxed to you. A master Fax Link list is also available on the GE Fanuc Web site in the

Technical Support section (see the “GE Fanuc Web Site” section above).

• Select desired document(s) from the master list, then call Fax Link and specify the document

number(s) you want to be Faxed to you. Up to three documents can be ordered per call.

GE Fanuc Telephone Numbers

If you need to speak with a GE Fanuc technical help person, use the applicable telephone number

from the following list.

Location Telephone Number

North America, Canada, Mexico (Technical Support Hotline) Toll Free: 800 GE FanucDirect Dial: 804 978-6036

Latin America (for Mexico, see above) Direct Dial: 804 978-6036

France, Germany, Luxembourg, Switzerland, and United Kingdom Toll Free: 00800 433 268 23

Italy Toll Free: 16 77 80 596

Other European Countries +352 727 979 309

Asia / Pacific – Singapore 65 566 4918

India 91 80 552 0107

GFK-0356Q A-1

Serial Ports and Cables

This appendix describes the serial port, converter, and cables used to connect Series 90 PLCs for

Series 90 Protocol (SNP). This information is included for reference and for those users who have

applications that require cable lengths different than the factory-supplied cables.

This appendix contains the following information:

Communications Interface

Cable and Connector Specifications

Serial Port Configuration

RS-232/RS-485 Converter (Catalog No. IC690ACC900)

Serial Cable Diagrams

Point-to-Point Connection

Multidrop Connection

RS-422 Interface

The Series 90 PLC family of products are compatible with EIA RS-422 specifications. RS-422

drivers and receivers are utilized to accomplish communications between several system

components using multiple driver/receiver combinations on a single cable with five twisted pairs.

The cable length between master and any slave cannot exceed 4,000 ( ,2 9 meters) feet.

A multi-drop system of eight drivers and receivers can be configured. The maximum common

mode voltage between each additional drop is the RS-422 standard of +7 Volts to -7 Volts. The

driver output must be capable of 2 V minimum into 00 ohms. The driver output impedance must

be at least 20 K ohms in the high impedance state. The receiver input resistance is 2 K ohms or

greater. Receiver sensitivity is 200 millivolt.

Caution

Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met.

Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors in

transmission and/or damage to Series 90 PLC components. When the

common mode voltage specification is exceeded, a port isolator such as the

IC690ACC903 must be used. See Appendix E for details on this port

isolator.

AAppendix

A-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

A


The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure. For best

performance construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended connector parts and

specifications.

Table A-1. Connector/Cable Specifications

Item Description

Series 90 PLC: Serial (RS-422) port with metric hardware

Connector: 5-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA 5S (solder pot) Hood: AMP207470- connector shellHardware Kit: AMP 20787 - Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips

Workmaster II: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector

MatingConnectors:

Connector: 25-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DB25S (solder pot) withDB 0963-3 hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)

Workmaster: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector

Connector: 9-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with DE 0963-hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)

IBM-AT/XT: Serial (RS-232) port with standard RS-232 connector

Connector: 9-pin female, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DE9S (solder pot) with DE 0963-3hood or equivalent (standard RS-232 connector)

RS-232/RS-485 Converter: one 5-pin male, and one 25-pin maleconnector

5-pin male connector requires metric hardware (same connector, hood, and hardware as forSeries 90 PLC listed above)

25-pin male D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA25S (solder pot) with DB 0963-3 hood orequivalent (standard RS-232 connector)

Computer grade, 24 AWG (.22 mm2), minimum with overall shield

Catalog Numbers: Belden 9505, Belden 9306, Belden 9832

Cable: These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 9.2 Kbpsas follows:RS-232: 50 feet ( 5 meters) maximum cable lengthRS-422/RS-422: 4000 feet ( 200 meters) maximum length. Must not

exceed the maximum RS-422 Common Mode specifi-cation of +7V to -7V. Isolation at the remote end maybe used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages.

For distances under 50 feet ( 5 meters), almost any twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cablewill work, as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly.

When using RS-422/RS-422, the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signalsmake up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair. If this isignored, cross-task resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of thecommunications system.

When routing communication cables outdoors, transient suppression devices can be used toreduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge.

Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point.

Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment.


GFK-0356Q Appendix A Serial Ports and Cables A-3

A

Series 90 PLC Serial Port

The Series 90 PLC serial port is compatible with RS-422. An RS-232 to RS-422 converter is

required to interface to systems that provide RS-232 compatible interfaces. The Series 90 PLC

RS-422 serial port provides the physical connection for SNP communication. This port is a 5-pin

D-type female connector located as follows:

Series 90-70 PLC and Series 90-20 - CPU Module

Series 90-30 PLC - Power Supply

Figure A- shows the serial port orientation and connector layout for the Series 90 PLC types.

(The orientation of the connector on the Series 90-20 CPU is rotated 90 degrees from the Series

90-30 connector with pin to the upper right.) Table A-2 shows the pin numbering and signal

assignment applicable to both PLCs.

SERIES 90-70 PLC

15 89

815

SERIES 90-30 PLC

PIN1

9PIN

1

SERIES 90 PLC CONNECTORSUSE METRIC HARDWARE.

(SEE CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS)

NOTE

Figure A-1. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Connector Configuration


A

Table A-2. Series 90 PLC, RS-422 Serial Port Pin-out

Pin Number Signal Name Description

234

Shield

ATCH *

No ConnectionNo ConnectionHand-Held Programmer attach signal

5678

+5V *RTS (A)Signal GroundCTS (B’)

+5V Power for: HHP and RS-232/485 ConverterRequest To SendSignal Ground, OVClear To Send

90

2

RT *RD (A’)RD (B’)SD (A)

Terminating Resistor for RD **Receive DataReceive DataSend Data

345

SD (B)RTS (B)CTS (A’)

Send DataRequest To SendClear To Send

* Signals available at the Connector but are not included in the RS-422 specification.

SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD (used in the Series Six

PLC).

(A) and (B) are the same as - and +. A and B denote outputs, and A’ and B’ denote inputs.

** Termination resistance for the Receive Data (RD) signal needs to be connected only on units at the

end of the lines. This termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper

between pins 9 and 0 inside the 5-pin D-shell with the following exception

For Series 90-70 PLCs with Catalog Numbers IC697CPU73 J, and IC697CPU77 G and earlier the

termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pins 9 and .

Workmaster Serial Port

The Workmaster II industrial computer, RS-232 serial port is a 25-pin D-type male connector, and

the early model Workmaster is a 9-pin male connector.

Figure A-2 shows the serial port connector layout for both computers. Table A-3 shows the pin

numbering and signal assignment for both connector types.

a44522

1325 9

WORKMASTER(EARLY MODEL)

PIN1

12

5

6

PIN1

WORKMASTER II

Figure A-2. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Connector Configuration



A

Table A-3. Workmaster RS-232 Serial Port Pins-out

Workmaster II (25-pin connector) Workmaster (9-pin connector)

Pin No. Signal Description Pin No. Signal Description

NC NC

2 TD Transmit Data 2 TD Transmit Data

3 RD Receive Data 3 RD Receive Data

4 RTS Request to Send 4 RTS Request to Send

5 CTS Clear to Send 5 CTS Clear to Send

6 NC 6 NC

7 GND Signal Ground 7 GND Signal Ground, 0V

8 DCD Data Carrier Detect 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect

9, 0 NC 9 DTR Data Terminal Ready

Tied to line 20 NC = Not Connected

2– 9 NC

20 DTR Data Terminal Ready

2 NC

22 Ring Indicate

23–25 NC

For more information about the Workmaster industrial computer serial port refer to the following

manuals:

GFK-0401 Workmaster II PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation

GEK-25373 Workmaster Programmable Control Information Center Guide to Operation

IBM-AT/XT Serial Port

The IBM-AT, IBM-XT or compatible computer’s RS-232 serial port is a 9-pin D-type male

connector as shown in the figure below.

9

PIN1

5

6

a44523

IBM-AT/XT

Figure A-3. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port


A

Table A-4. IBM-AT/XT Serial Port Pins-out

IB

M-

AT

Pin

No.

Signal Description

IBM-XT

Pin No. Signal Description

DCD Data Carrier Detect NC

2 RD Receive Data 2 TD Transmit Data

3 TD Transmit Data 3 RD Receive Data

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 4 RTS Request to Send

5 GND Signal Ground 5 CTS Clear to Send

6 NC 6 NC

7 RTS Request to Send 7 GND Signal Ground

8 CTS Clear to Send 8 DCD Data Carrier Detect

9 NC 9 DTR Data Terminal Ready

NC = Not Connected



A

RS-232/RS-485 Converter


This kit consists of an RS-422 to RS-232 miniconverter, a 6 foot (2 meter) serial cable, and a 9-pin

to 25-pin serial port converter plug. This miniconverter is documented in Appendix D. This

miniconverter has replaced the older, larger, obsolete IC690ACC900 converter.

IC690ACC900 Obsolete Converter

The obsolete RS-232/RS-485 Converter (IC690ACC900) converts from RS-232 to RS-422/RS-485

communications. The converter has one 5-pin female D-type port, and one 25-pin female D-type

port.

This converter is no longer available. Please substitute the IC690ACC90 miniconverter.

Information about this converter is included in this manual for reference and troubleshooting

purposes.

For detailed information on the converter, refer to Appendix D. Examples of serial cable diagrams,

which include the converter, are provided in the remainder of this appendix..


A

Serial Cable Diagrams

This section describes only a few of the many and various Point-to-Point, and Multidrop serial port

connections for Series 90 PLCs.

In the point-to-point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same communication

line. The communication line can be directly connected using RS-232 (50 feet, 5 meters

maximum) or RS-485 (4000 feet, 200 meters maximum). Modems can be used for longer

distances.

Note

The cable connector for the Series 90-70 and Series 90-30 PLCs serial port mustbe a right angle connector in order for the hinged door on the module to closeproperly. Refer to Table A- Connector/Cable Specification.

RS-232 Point-to-Point Connections

The next three figures illustrate typical RS-232 point-to-point connection to Series 90 PLCs.

23

10111213

915

86

14571

a44506



(IC690ACC900)


RDTDCTSRTSDCDGNDSHLD

3254871

PIN

25-PINMALE

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

IC690CBL705 OR EQUIVALENTRS-232

SHIELDED PAIRS

23458

207

25-PINMALE

25-PINFEMALE

RS-232PORT

WORKMASTER

* *

23

1213101196

14158571

SD ( A )SD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B ' )RDRTS ( B )RTS ( A )CTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )+5V0VSHLD

DCD ( B )DCD ( A )

RD ( B' )RD ( A' )SD ( B )SD ( A )

RT CTS ( B' )CTS ( A' )RTS ( A )RTS ( B )

+5V 0V

SHLD

POWER SOURCE FOR POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET (3 METERS) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET (3 METERS) AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.

*

PIN

PIN

15- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE


RS-422TWISTED SHIELDED

PAIRS

**

* *

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90-70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.



A

DCD ( A )DCD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B' )SD ( A )SD ( B )

RTCTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )RTS ( A ) RTS ( B )

+5V0V

SHLD

23

10111213

915

86

14571

* *

23

12131011

96

1415

8571

SD ( A )SD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B )RDRTS ( A )RTS ( B )CTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )+5V0VSHLD

POWER SOURCE FOR POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET (3 METERS) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET (3 METERS) AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTIONMUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.

*

9-PINFEMALE

a44507

PIN



(IC690ACC900)


TDRDCTSDTRDCDGNDSHLD

235

20871

PIN PIN

15- PINMALE

PIN

RDTD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND


SHIELDED PAIRS

2378145

9-PINMALE

25-PINMALE 15- PIN

MALE15- PIN

FEMALE


RS-232PORT

IBM-AT(COMPATIBLE)


PAIRS

**

* *

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THESERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90-70 PLCs,CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure A-4. IBM-AT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs

* *

23

12131011

96

1415

8571

SD ( A )SD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B' )RDRTS ( A )RTS ( B )CTS ( A' )CTS ( B') +5V0VSHLD


RTCTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )RTS ( A )RTS ( B )

+5V0V

SHLD

23

10111213

915

86

14571

POWER SOURCE FOR POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION 10 FEET (3 METERS) ONLY. CONVERTER POWER SOURCE BEYOND 10 FEET (3 METERS) AND FOR MULTIDROP CONNECTION MUST BE EXTERNAL SOURCE.

*

PIN

PIN

15- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE



PAIRS

**

* *

9-PINFEMALE

a44508



(IC690ACC900)



325

20871

PINPIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND


SHIELDED PAIRS

2345897

9-PINMALE

25-PINMALE

RS-232PORT

WORKMASTER

IBM-XTOR

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90-70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

Figure A-5. Workmaster or IBM-XT (compatibles) Personal Computer to Series 90 PLCs


A

RS-422 Point-to-Point Connection

If your host device is equipped with a RS-422 card you can connect directly to Series 90 PLCs as

illustrated in Figure A-6.

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TOCONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION ISON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR90-70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE

O

FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN

*

SHIELDED TWISTED PAIRSPIN PIN

PLC

UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 50 FEET (15.2 METERS)(WITHOUT ISOLATION)

HOSTCOMPUTER

12131011

96

148

153271

SD ( A )SD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B ' )RDRTS ( A )RTS ( B )CTS ( B' )CTS ( A' )GNDSHLD

*

RD (A')

RD (B')

SD (A)

SD (B)

CTS (A')

CTS (B')

RTS (B')

RTS (A)

GND

SHLD

Figure A-6. Typical RS-422, Host to PLC Connection, with Handshaking

Multidrop Connections

In the multidrop configuration, the host device is configured as the master and one or more PLCs

are configured as slaves. This method can be used when the maximum distance between the master

and any slave does not exceed 4000 feet ( 200 meters). This figure assumes good quality cables

and a moderately noisy environment. A maximum of 8 slaves can be connected using RS-422 in a

daisy chain or multidrop configuration. The RS-422 line must include handshaking and use wire

type as specified in the “Cable and Connector Specifications” section.

The following illustrations shows wiring diagrams and requirements for connecting a

Workmaster II or IBM-PS/2, Workmaster, IBM-AT/XT or compatible computer to Series 90 PLCs

in an 8-wire multidrop, serial data configuration.



A


SD ( B )RT


+5V0V

SHLD


(IC690ACC900)

23

10111213

915

86

14571

POWERSOURCE

FORCONVERTER



NOTE

WHEN WIRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THETRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN ADAISY

CHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN BELOW.

CONVERTERMASTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION


TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE

ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES


25- PINMALE

25- PINFEMALE

23458

207

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

RS-232PORT

WORKMASTER







ON THE CPU BOARD

5V

0V

PIN

SERIES90-70CPU

RS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

SLAVESTATION

*


325

20871

PIN

25- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

PIN

23

12131011

96

1415

8571


INSIDE D-CONNECTORS

TO OTHER PLC's

PIN

SERIES90-30

PSRS-422PORT

LASTSTATION

*


*

23

12131011

96

1415

8571

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

Figure A-7. Workmaster II/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection

Note

The cable connector for the Series 90-70 serial port must be a right angleconnector in order for the hinged door on the module to close properly. Refer toTable A- , “Connector/Cable Specification.”


A

LASTSTATION


SLAVESTATION

15- PINFEMALE



23

12131011

96

1415

8571

WHEN WIRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON THETRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLEIN A DAISY

MASTER


NOTE


CONVERTER SLAVE STATION LAST STATION






POWERSOURCE

FORCONVERTER

5V

0V

PIN

SERIES90-70CPU

RS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

*

*


(IC690ACC900)

325

20871

PIN

25- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

PIN



+5V0V

SHLD

23

101112139

1586

14571


INSIDE D-CONNECTORS

*

PIN

SERIES90-30

PSRS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

23

12131011

96

1415

8571

9- PINFEMALE

2345897

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

RS-232PORT

9- PINMALE

WORKMASTER




ON THE CPU BOARD

TO OTHER PLC's

Figure A-8. Workmaster/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection

LASTSTATION


SLAVESTATION



MASTER


NOTE








POWERSOURCE

FORCONVERTER

5V

0V

PIN

SERIES90-70CPU

RS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

*

*


(IC690ACC900)


PIN

25- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

PIN



+5V0V

SHLD

23

10111213

915

86

14571

23

1213101196

14158571


INSIDE D-CONNECTORS

*

PIN

SERIES90-30

PSRS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

23

1213101196

14158571

9- PINFEMALE

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

RS-232PORT

9- PINMALE




ON THE CPU BOARD

TO OTHER PLC's

IBM-AT

(COMPATIBLE)

2378145

235

20871

Figure A-9. IBM-AT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection



A

15- PINFEMALE

LASTSTATION


SLAVESTATION



MASTER


NOTE








POWERSOURCE

FORCONVERTER

5V

0V

PIN

SERIES90-70CPU

RS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

*

*


(IC690ACC900)


325

20871

PIN

25- PINMALE

15- PINMALE

PIN



+5V0V

SHLD

23

10111213

915

86

14571

23

1213101196

14158571


INSIDE D-CONNECTORS

*

PIN

SERIES90-30

PSRS-422PORT

15- PINMALE

23

1213101196

14158571

9- PINFEMALE

2345897

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

RS-232PORT

9- PINMALE




ON THE CPU BOARD

TO OTHER PLC's

IBM-XT

(COMPATIBLE)

Figure A-10. IBM-XT/Series 90 PLC Multidrop Connection

GFK-0356Q B-1

IC690ACC900 Converter

Note: This product is no longer available. This appendix is for reference for those already using

this converter. We recommend the IC690ACC901 as a replacement for most applications

(see Appendix D for details).

This appendix provides a detailed description of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter

(IC690ACC900) for the Series 90 Programmable Logic Controllers.

Features

Provides the Series 90 PLCs with an interface to devices that use the RS-232 interface.

Allows connection to programming computer without a Work Station Interface board.

Easy cable connection to either a Series 90-70 PLC or a Series 90-30 PLC.

No external power needed; operates from +5 volt DC power on the Series 90 PLC backplane.

Convenient, light weight self-contained unit.

Functions

The RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter provides an RS-232 serial interface for the Series 90-70

and Series 90-30 PLCs, which have a built-in RS-422/RS-485 interface. Specifically, it provides a

serial connection between a Series 90-30 or Series 90-70 PLC serial port and the serial port on the

programming computer without the need for a Work Station Interface to be installed in the

computer. The programming computer can be a Workmaster II computer, or IBM PS/2 or

compatible computer.

BAppendix

B-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

B

Location in System

The RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter is a free-standing device which requires two cables as the

connections between the PLC and the programmer. Its location is limited only by the length of the

connecting cables as listed in the interface specifications. The cable at the PLC end that connects

to the RS-422/RS-485 connector on the converter can be up to 10 feet in length (without an

external source of +5 VDC) and up to 1000 feet (300m) in length with an external source of

+5VDC. The cable from the RS-232 connector on the converter to the programming computer’s

serial port can be up to 50 feet (15m) in length.

REAR VIEWFRONT VIEW

GE Fanu c

CABLE ADAPTERIC690ACC900A

MADE IN USA

Figure B-1. Front and Rear View of Converter

Installation

Installation of the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter consists of connecting two cables. Select

the proper cables for your installation. Prewired cables (see below) are available from GE Fanuc,

or if cables of different lengths are required by your application, you can build your own cables.

Specifications for building these cables are provided later in this appendix.

You do not need to connect an external source of power to the converter for a cable length of 10

feet, or less, since the necessary power connections of +5 VDC and signal ground are derived from

the PLCs backplane bus through the cable which connects to the Series 90-30 or 90-70 PLC.

1. Select one of the three RS-232 compatible cables (10 feet in length) that will connect the

programmer’s (or other serial device) RS-232 serial port to the RS-232 port on the converter.

The catalog numbers of these cables are: IC690CBL701 (use with Workmaster industrial

computer, or IBM PC-XT or compatible personal computer), IC690CBL702 (use with IBM

PC-AT or compatible personal computer), and IC690CBL705 (use with Workmaster II

industrial computer, or IBM PS/2 or compatible personal computer).

2. A standard 6-foot cable (HHP compatible) is available to connect the RS-422/RS-485 port on

the converter to the RS-485 port on the Series 90-30 or Series 90-70 PLC. The catalog number

of this cable is IC693CBL303.

Installation of these cables should be done with the PLC powered-down.

• Connect the 25-pin male connector on the 10 foot cable to the 25-pin female connector on the

converter.

GFK-0356Q Appendix B IC690ACC900 Converter B-3

B

• Connect the female connector (9-pin or 25-pin) on the opposite end of this cable to the male

RS-232 connector (serial port) on the selected programming (or other serial) device. If you

build you own cable, use a connector that is compatible with your serial device.

• Notice that both ends of the 6-foot RS-422/RS-485 compatible cable are the same; a 15-pin

male connector is attached at both ends. Connect one end of this cable to the 15-pin female

connector on the RS-422/RS-485 connector on the converter.

• Connect the other end of this cable to the 15-pin female connector, which interfaces to the RS-

485 compatible serial port on the Series 90-30 or Series 90-70 PLC. For the Series 90-30 PLC,

this connector is accessed by opening the hinged door on the power supply. The serial port

connector for the Series 90-70 PLC is on the CPU module, and is accessed by opening the

hinged door on the module.

Cable Description

The serial connection to the Series 90-70 PLC (see Figure B-1) is to the RS-422/RS-485

compatible serial port connector, located at the bottom of the CPU module behind the hinged door,

through a 6 foot (2 meter) serial interface cable, IC693CBL303. Wiring information and

recommended cable and connectors are provided for those who may want to build their own cable

having a different length.

The serial connection to the Series 90-30 PLC is to the RS-485 compatible serial port connector

located behind the hinged door on the right front of the power supply, through the same 6 foot

serial interface cable, IC693CBL303, or equivalent, Figure B-2).

PROGRAMMER

RS-485

CONVERTER

SERIES 90-70

CP

U

RS-232

Figure B-2. Typical Configuration with Series 90-70 PLC


B

SERIES 90-30 PROGRAMMER

RS-485 RS-232

CONVERTER

Figure B-3. Typical Configuration with Series 90-30 PLC

RS-232 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS-232 interface are listed below.

Table B-1. RS-232 Interface for Converter

Pin Signal Name Function I/O

1 Shield Cable shield -

2 SD Transmitted Data Out

3 RD Received Data In

4 RTS Request To Send Out

5 CTS Clear To Send In

6 - No connection -

7 SG Signal Ground -

8 DCD Data Carrier Detect In

9/19 - No connection -

20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Out

21 to 25 - No connection -


B

RS-422/RS-485 Interface Pin Assignments

Pin assignments and signal definitions for the RS-422/RS-485 interface are listed below.

Table B-2. RS-422/RS-485 Interface for Converter

Pin Signal Name Function I/O

1 Cable Shield

2 DCD(A) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out

3 DCD(B) Differential Data Carrier Detect Out

4 ATCH/ Attach (used with HHP) n/a

5 +5 VDC Logic Power In

6 RTS(A) Differential Request To Send Out

7 SG Signal Ground, 0V In

8 CTS(B’) Differential Clear To Send In

9 RT Resistor Terminator n/a

10 RD(A’) Differential Receive Data In

11 RD(B’) Differential Receive Data In

12 SD(A) Differential Send Data Out

13 SD(B) Differential Send Data Out

14 RTS(B) Differential Request To Send Out

15 CTS(A’) Differential Clear To Send In


B

Logic Diagram

The following figure shows the logic diagram for the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter.

20

7

5

4

3

2

8

a44539

MODEM

DCD

LOGICPOWER

NC

SHIELD

TERMINATOR

RD ( B' )

RD ( A' )

SD (B )

SD (A )

CTS ( B' )

CTS ( A' )

RTS ( B )

RTS ( A )

DCD ( B )

DCD ( A )

+5

SG

ATCH/ATTACH

1

9

11

10

13

12

8

15

14

6

3

2

5

7

4

SHIELD

SD

RD

RTS

CTS

DCD

SG

1


(IC690ACC900)

RESISTOR120

RS-48515-PIN

RS-23225-PIN

DTR

Ω

Figure B-4. RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram


B

Jumper Configuration

There are three jumper locations on the converter board for selection of user options. Each jumper

position has three pins, as shown in the following illustration. These jumper positions, labeled JP2,

JP3, and JP4, are accessed by removing the square plastic cover on the top of the converter.

Configuration can be changed as required by carefully removing one or more of the jumpers with a

pair of needle nose pliers and placing it on the desired pair of pins.

Refer to the description of these selectable jumper positions in the following table and place the

jumper on the selected pair of pins. The pin numbers are 1, 2, and 3. Default jumper locations are

indicated by a rectangle around the pins to be jumpered for each position. The default pin numbers

are 1 and 2.

12

3

RS-422/RS485 RS-232

Figure B-5. Location of Jumpers for User Options


B

Table B-3. Jumper Configuration for RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter

Jumper Label Jumper

Position

Description*

JP2 DCD 1 2 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when the device communicatingwith the PLC does not supply the Carrier Detect signal. JP2 forcesthe DCD signal active on the RS-485 port.

1 2 3 Use jumper positions 2 and 3 if the device does supply the CarrierDetect signal. This allows the programming device to controlDCD.

JP3 MODEM 1 2 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used when an attached Modem does notrequire the Clear To Send (CTS) signal. This allows theprogramming device to control the RTS signal.

1 2 3 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used when the attached Modem doesrequire the CTS signal (most modems require this signal). ForcesRTS to be continually active.

JP4 ATTACH 1 2 3 Default position 1 and 2 is used for most applicationscommunicating with the PLC via a serial programming device.

1 2 3 Jumper positions 2 and 3 are used if the device communicating withthe PLC is intended to emulate the HHP protocol.

* Refer to the documentation for your serial device for signal requirements.


B

Example of Cable Configurations

Examples of cable configurations required when using the converter can be found in Appendix C.

Specifications for the converter are shown in the following table.

Table B-4. Specifications for IC690ACC900 Converter

Power Requirements:

Voltage 5 volts DC, +5%

Current 170 mA, ±5%

RS-422/RS-485 Interface Cables:

Maximum cable length 1000 feet(300m)

Cable Type: *

6 feet (2m) Cable type: Belden 9508, AWG #24 (0.22 mm2)

30 feet (10m) ** Cable type: Belden 9309, AWG #22 (0.36 mm2)

≥≥≥≥30 feet, up to 1000 feet (300m) ] Same cable as for 30 feet.

Connector Type 15-pin D-type Male Subminiature (both ends)

RS-232 Interface Cable:

Maximum cable length

Up to 50 feet (15m)

50 feet (15m)

Connector Type 25-pin D-type Female Subminiature (converter end) 9-pin, 15-pin, or25-pin (depending on type of connector on your serial device) D-typeFemale Subminiature (programming device end)

* Catalog numbers are provided as suggestions only. Any cable having the same electrical

characteristics is acceptable. It is strongly recommended that you use stranded wire. Since it

is sometimes hard to find a cable with the desired number of twisted pairs (the Belden 9309

has an extra pair), you may end up with a cable with extra pairs.

** For distances over 10 feet, the +5 volt DC logic power source must be provided externally by

connecting an external power supply to the +5V and SG (0V) connections at the converter end

of the cable. The +5V pin at the PLC connector end of the cable must not be connected to

the cable. The +5V and SG connections from the external power supply must be isolated from

its own power line ground connection. Ensure that there is no connection between the external

supply and the PLC except the SG cable connection.

GFK-0356Q C-1

IC655CCM690 Isolated Repeater/Converter

Note: This product is no longer available. This appendix is for reference bythose already using this product. It has been replaced by catalog numberIC690ACC903 (see Appendix E for details).

This appendix describes how to use the Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) with Series

90 PLCs. The following topics are covered in this appendix.

Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter

System Configurations

Cable Diagrams

Note: The catalog number for the Isolated Repeater/Converter was previouslyIC630CCM390.

Description of the Isolated Repeater/Converter

The Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) can be used for the following purposes.

To provide ground isolation where a common ground cannot be established between

components.

To boost RS-422 signals for greater distance and more drops.

To convert signals from RS-232 to RS-422 or RS-422 to RS-232.

The figure on the next page shows the appearance of the unit and the locations of key features.

CAppendix

C-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

C

H

N

N

GISOLATEDRS232ADAPTOR

J1 J2

POWER

FUSE-1AMP

(SIDEVIEW)

POWERCORD

POWERCORD

SWITCH

FUSE

FUSE

115VAC

230VAC

G

GE Fanuc

RS232C

RS422RS422

(TOP VIEW)

(BACKVIEW)

Figure C-1. Isolated/Repeater Converter

Items of interest to the user on the Isolated Repeater/Converter are described below.

Two 25-pin female D-type connectors (Two 25-pin male, D-type connectors (solder pot), are

included for user cabling.)

5/230 VAC power connection (internal) 4-position terminal block.

Fused Amp power protection.

Power ON (green) indicator LED.

Three-position toggle switch, recessed in the back of the unit, is set according to the system

configurations shown later in this appendix.

IC655CCM590 Converter

GFK-0356Q Appendix C IC655CCM690 Isolated Repeater/Converter C-3

C

Logic Diagram of the Isolated Repeater/Converter

The figure below provides a functional look at the unit. Note the 3-position switch for controlling

the J port transmitters. This switch is discussed in System Configurations later in this appendix..

14

RS-422/RS-232CJ2RS-422

J1

10CTS ( B' )

8

15

22

23

RD ( B' )

RD ( A' )

11

9CTS ( A' )

16

17SD ( B )

25

24SD ( A )

13

12

RTS (B )

RTS (A )

SD (RS-232C)2

15

14SD (B )

22

23SD (A )

11

10

RTS (RS-232C)

RTS (B )

4

RTS (A )

18

16

17RD ( B' )

19

RD ( A' )

3

RD (RS-232C)

9

13

12CTS ( B' )

8

CTS ( A ')

5CTS (RS-232C)

RESISTOR

150

25SE (RS-232C)

( CTS)

(ON)

(SE)

115VAC

OPTICALISOLATION

ISOLATEDPOWER

SUPPLIES

Figure C-2. RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Logic Diagram

Note: All inputs are biased to the inactive state. Inputs left unconnected will produce a binary

(OFF) state on the corresponding output.


C

Pin Assignments for the Isolated Repeater/Converter

Table C-1. Isolated Repeater/Converter Pin Assignments

J1 RS-422 Port (25-pin female connector) J2 RS-422/RS-232 Port (25-pin female connector)

Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description

NC NC

2 NC 2 SD Send Data (RS-232)

3 NC 3 RD Receive Data (RS-232)

4 NC 4 RTS Request to Send (RS-232)

5 NC 5 CTS Clear to Send (RS-232)

6 NC 6 NC

7 0V Ground Connection 7 0V Ground Connection

8 CTS(B’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination) 8 CTS(B’) Clear to Send Optional Termination)

9 CTS(A’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination) 9 CTS(A’) Clear to Send (Optional Termination)

0 CTS(B’) Clear to Send 0 RTS(B) Request to Send

CTS(A’) Clear to Send RTS(A) Request to Send

2 RTS(B) Request to Send 2 CTS(B’) Clear to Send

3 RTS(A) Request to Send 3 CTS(A’) Clear to Send

4 RD(B’) Receive Data 4 SD(B) Send Data

5 RD(A’) Receive Data 5 SD(A) Send Data

6 SD(A) Send Data 6 RD(A’) Receive Data

7 SD(B) Send Data 7 RD(B’) Receive Data

8 NC 8 RD(A’) Receive Data (Optional Termination)

9 NC 9 RD(B’) Receive Data (Optional Termination)

20 NC 20 NC

2 NC 2 NC

22 RD(B’) Receive Data 22 SD(B) Send Data (Optional Termination)

23 RD(A’) Receive Data 23 SD(A) Send Data (Optional Termination)

24 SD(A) Send Data 24 NC

NC=No Connection

SD (Send Data) and RD (Receive Data) are the same as TXD and RXD (used in the Series Six PLC).

(A) and (B) are the same as – and + A and B denote outputs, and A’ and B’ denote inputs.

Caution

The signal ground connections (pin 7 on each connector) must be made

between the Isolated Repeater/Converter and the PLC for J1, and the

Isolated Repeater/Converter and the host computer for J2.

Pin 7 of the J1 port is connected to the metal shell of the J1 connector. Pin 7

of the J2 port is connected to the metal shell of the J2 connector. These two

signal ground connections are isolated from each other and from the power

system ground (green wire on the terminal block). To maintain proper

isolation, these signal grounds cannot be tied together.



C

RD ( A' )RD ( B' )SD ( A )SD ( B )



PAIRS

RS-232SHIELDED

PAIRS

*

23

12131011

96

1415

871

SD ( A )SD ( B )RD ( A' )RD ( B' )RTRTS ( A )RTS ( B )CTS ( A' )CTS ( B' )0VSHLD

a44783

PIN



RS-422 ISOLATED REPEATERRS-232 CONVERTER

(IC655CCM590)

25-PINFEMALERS-232/RS-422PORT

RDSDCTSRTSGND

32547

PIN

25-PINMALE

PIN

1514161711101312

7

25- PINMALE

PIN

TD RD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGNDHOST

COMPUTER *

15- PINMALE

15- PINFEMALE

J1J2

115VAC

TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES 90-70 PLCs, CATALOG NUMBERS IC697CPU731 AND IC697CPU771, THE TERMINATION FOR RD AT THE PLC IS IMPLEMENTED BY A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 11.

0V

2223

**RD (A')

RD (B')

** SWITCH IN CENTER POSITION

150 Ω

Figure C-3. Example RS-422 Isolated Repeater/RS-232 Converter Connection


The figures below show various ways you can connect the Isolated Repeater/Converter to convert

signals, expand the number of drops, and obtain greater distance. Any system configuration can be

reduced to a minimum number of cables each covering a part of the overall system configuration.

The following examples of system configurations refer to these cables as Cables A through E

which are described in Cable Diagrams later in this section.

Downstream and Upstream Contention. In this section, simple multidrop configurations are

those where a single Isolated Repeater/Converter is used. Complex multidrop configurations

contain one or more multidrop sections where an Isolated Repeater/Converter is included as one

of the drops. In both simple and complex multidrop configurations, the transmitters directed

downstream from the master can be on at all times. There will be no contention for the

communication line because only one device (the master) transmits downstream.

In simple multidrop configurations, there will be no contention when transmitting upstream as long

as devices tri-state their drivers when idle and turn them on only when they have something to

transmit. This is the case for the Series 90-70 and Series 90-30 CMMs.

In complex multidrop configurations, however, special steps must be taken to switch the upstream

transmitters of the Isolated Repeater/Converter.

Switching Upstream Transmitters. For the RS-422 drivers to be active at the J2 port of the

Isolated Repeater/Converter, the RTS input at J must be true. The state of the RS-422 drivers at

the J port depends on the position of the switch on the unit. When the switch is in the center

position, the J transmitters will always be turned on. When the switch is in the CTS position,

(toward the power cable), then either the RS-232 or RS-422 CTS signal must be true to turn on the

J drivers.

Note: Note the position of the switch on the Isolated/Repeater Converter in the system

configurations below.


C

Simple Multidrop Configuration

This configuration shows how to connect a single Isolated Repeater/Converter for signal

conversion or greater distance.

*

RS-422(CABLE B)

BRICKJ2 J1

SW ON

RS-422(CABLE D)

RS-232(CABLE A)

SERIES 90 PLC

SERIES 90 PLC

SERIES 90 PLCOR

HOST

* BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THEISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER

Figure C-4. Simple System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter

Complex Multidrop Configuration

This configuration shows how to connect multiple Isolated Repeater/Converters for signal

conversion, greater distance, and more drops.

RS-422(CABLED)

J2 J1

*

RS-422(CABLED)

J2 J1

*

RS-422(CABLED)

J2 J1*

J2 J1

SW ONSW ON

*

RS-422(CABLED)

J1 J2

SW CTS

*

RS-232(CABLE

)

RS-232(CABLE

)

RS-422(CABLEB)

RS-422(CABLEC)

BRICK

SERIES 90C OR

HOST

BRICK

BRICKBRICK

SERIES 90C

BRICK

SERIES 90C

SERIES 90PLC

SERIES 90C

SERIES 90C

SERIES 90PLC

SERIES 90PLC

SWON

SWON

* BRICK IS THE NICKNAME FOR THEISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER

Figure C-5. Complex System Configuration Using the Isolated Repeater/Converter



C

Rules for Using Repeater/Converters in Complex Networks

When designing a complex multidrop network including PLCs and RS-422 repeater/converters

(bricks), the following rules apply:

Rule 1: When using a brick as a repeater, port J2 should always be directed toward the host

device, and Port J should always be directed away from the host device. The switch located on

the side of the brick should always be in the center position (ON). The only case in which Port J

is directed toward the host is when the brick is used as a converter (RS-232) at the slave. The

switch is in the right position (CTS).

Rule 2: If a Series 90 CMM slave device is located downstream of a brick, set the configuration of

the CMM serial port to NONE flow control with a 0 ms Modem Turnaround Delay (Applies to

CCM, SNP, and SNP-X protocols only).

Rule 3: Do not place more than three bricks in a single communication path between the host and

the slave devices.


C

Cable Diagrams

The cable diagrams below are referred to as Cables A–E from the system configurations in the

previous figures. These diagrams show the principles for constructing your own cables and can be

modified to fit your specific application.

RDSDRTSCTSGND

23458

2071

32457

PIN

25- PINMALE

25- PINMALE

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

a44929

25- PINFEMALE

PIN

TDRD

RTSCTSDCDDTRGND

SHLD

SW ONJ2 J1

25- PINFEMALE

SERIES 90CMMPORT1 OR 2

Figure C-6. Cable A; RS-232 CMM To Converter


RTS (A) CTS (A')RTS (B)CTS (B')

GNDSHLD

25- PINFEMALE


RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)RTS (B)CTS (B')RTS (A)CTS (A')GND

9211325122410112223

71

16171514191810121113

7

PIN

25- PINMALE

25- PINMALE

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

a44930

25- PINFEMALE

PIN

TERMTERM *

TERMTERM

*

SW ONJ2 J1

* TERMINATE CONNECTION: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHM RESISTOR.ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED).

Figure C-7. Cable B; RS-422 CMM To Converter



C

150 OHMS*

150 OHMS*


RTS (B)CTS (B')RTS (A)CTS (A')

TERMTERM

GND


RTS (A)CTS (A')RTS (B)CTS (B')

GNDSHLD

ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANYCONNECTIONS INSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTORMOUNTED ON THE CMM. IT IS NOTUSE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPESCONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OFTRANSMISSION

NOTE

WHEN WIRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROPREFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSION LINEREDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN ACHAIN FASHION AS SHOWN

CMM SLAVE 1MASTER

CMM SLAVE 2CPU BUILT-IN PORT

161715141210131122237

25- PINFEMALE


TO OTHER DEVICES(MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)


SHIELDEDTWISTED

PAIRS

25- PINMALE

1325

921122410112223

71

PIN

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)TERMTERMRTS (A)CTS (A')RTS (B)CTS (B')0VSHLD

25- PINFEMALE

SERIES 90CMMPORT

IOR2

**

9211325122410112223

71

25- PINMALE

PIN

TERMTERM *

PIN

25- PINMALE

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

25- PINFEMALE

SW

SUBSTITUTE APPROPRIATE UP STREAM DEVICE(WITHIN DOTTED BOX) PER SYSTEM DIAGRAMS.

TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL 120 OHMRESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)*

** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS-422/RS-485.

TERMINATE THE RD (B') SIGNAL ONLY AT ENDOF MULTIDROP CABLE

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)TERMTERMGND

1514161722237

PIN

25- PINMALE

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

(USED AS ACONVERTER)

CTSSW

25- PINFEMALE

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)TERMTERMGND

1617151419187

PIN

25- PINMALE

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

(USED AS AREPEATER)

SWJ1

25- PINFEMALE

*

150 OHMS*

ONJ2 J1 J1 J2

ONJ2 J1

Figure C-8. Cable C; RS422 Twisted Pair


C

* 150 OHMS

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)RTS (A)RTS (B)TERMTERMGND

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)RTS (A)RTS (B)TERMTERMGND

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

(USED AS ACONVERTER)

25- PINMALE

1514161713122223 7

PIN

25- PINFEMALE

SWCTS

150 OHMS*

** ON THE CMM311, ONLY PORT 2 CAN SUPPORT RS-422/RS-485.

* TERMINATE CONNECTION ON FIRST AND LAST DROPS ONLY: ON THE CMM, INSTALL JUMPER TO CONNECT INTERNAL120 OHM RESISTOR. ON THE ISOLATED REPEATER/CONVERTER, INSTALL 150 OHM RESISTOR (SUPPLIED)

TO OTHER DEVICES(MAXIMUM OF 8 DEVICES ON A MULTIDROP)

TERMINATE THE RD (B') SIGNAL ONLY AT END OF MULTIDROP CABLE

25- PINMALE

1617151411101918 7

PIN

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

(USED AS AREPEATER)

25- PINFEMALE

SW ON

J1 J2

J2 J1


CTS (A')CTS (B')

TERMTERM

GND


a44932

25- PINMALE

1325

921102224

71

PIN

RD (A')RD (B')SD (A)SD (B)RTS (A)RTS (B)TERMGNDSHLD

SHIELDEDTWISTED

PAIRS

25- PINFEMALE

SERIES 90CMMPORT

IOR2

**

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

25- PINFEMALE

SW

1617151411102223

7

25- PINMALE

PIN

150 OHMS**

ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANYNECESSARY CONNECTIONS INSIDE THECABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ONTHE CMM. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS OR OTHER TYPESOF CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OFTHE TRANSMISSION LINE.

NOTE

WHEN WIRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES,REFLECTIONS ON THE TRANSMISSIONLINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THECABLE IN A DAISY CHAIN FASHION ASSHOWN BELOW.

CMM SLAVE 1MASTER

CMM SLAVE 2CPU BUILT-IN PORT

ONJ2 J1

Figure C-9. Cable D; RS-422 Twisted Pair

CTS

RD

SDCTSRTSGNDDCDDTRSHLD

2357

325478

201

PIN

25- PINMALE

25- PINMALE

PIN

SDRD

CTSGND SERIES 90

CMMPORT

1OR2

25- PINFEMALE

a45239

ISOLATEDREPEATER/

CONVERTER(BRICK)

25- PINFEMALE

J1 J2SW

Figure C-10. Cable E; RS-232 Converter to CMM

GFK-0356Q D-1


Description of Miniconverter

The Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901) consists of an RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232 Miniconverter, a 6

foot (2 meter) serial extension cable, and a 9-pin to 25-pin Converter Plug assembly. The 15-pin

SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series

90-30 power supply, Series 90-70 CPU or Series 90-20 CPU. The 9-pin RS-232 port connector on

the Miniconverter connects to an RS-232 compatible device.

a44985

RS-232

PORT

RS-422

PORT

Figure D-1. Series 90 SNP to RS-232 Miniconverter

When used with an IBM PC-AT, or compatible computer, one end of the extension cable plugs into

the Miniconverter’s 9-pin serial port connector, the other end plugs into the 9-pin serial port of the

computer. The Converter plug (supplied with kit) is required to convert the 9-pin serial port

connector on the Miniconverter to the 25-pin serial port connector on the GE Fanuc Workmaster II

computer, or an IBM PC-XT or PS/2 Personal Computer.

The GE Fanuc Workmaster computer requires an additional adapter (not supplied with kit – please

contact your local GE Fanuc PLC distributor) for use with the Miniconverter.

DAppendix

D-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

D

Pin Assignments

The pinouts of the Miniconverter are shown in the following two tables. The first table shows the

pinout for the RS-232 port, the second table shows the RS-422 port.

Pin Assignments, RS-232 Port

Table D-1 is for the RS-232 port. The direction of signal flow is with respect to the Miniconverter.

Table D-1. Miniconverter RS-232 Port

Pin Signal Name Direction

2 SD – Send Data Output

3 RD – Receive Data Input

5 GND – Ground n/a

7 CTS – Clear To Send Input

8 RTS – Request To Send Output

The pinouts were chosen to allow direct connection (using a straight through, or 1 to 1 cable (as

provided with kit)) to the IBM PC-AT. Most IBM compatible computers equipped with an RS-232

port will provide a pinout compatible with the one shown above.

Pin Assignments, RS-422 Port

Table D-2 is the pinout for the Miniconverter’s RS-422 serial port. The direction of signal flow is

also with respect to the Miniconverter.

Table D-2. Miniconverter RS-422 Port

Pin Signal Name Direction

1 SHLD - Shield n/a

5 +5 VDC - Power Input

6 CTS(A’) - Clear To Send Input

7 GND - Ground n/a

8 RTS(B) - Request To Send Output

9 RT - Receive Termination Output

10 SD(A) - Send Data Output

11 SD(B) - Send Data Output

12 RD(A’) - Receive Data Input

13 RD(B’) - Receive Data Input

14 CTS(B’) Clear To Send Input

15 RTS(A) - Request To Send Output

GFK-0356Q Appendix D IC690ACC901 Miniconverter Kit D-3

D


The Miniconverter can be used in a point-to-point configuration as described above, or in a

multidrop configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more PLCs

configured as slaves.

The multidrop configuration requires a straight through (1 to 1) cable from the Miniconverter’s RS-

422 port to the first slave PLC’s SNP port. Other slaves will require a daisy chain connection

between slaves. A maximum of eight devices can be connected in an RS-422 multidrop

configuration. All of the devices must have a common ground. If ground isolation is required, you

can use the GE Fanuc Isolated Repeater/Converter (IC655CCM590) in place of the Miniconverter.

When using the Miniconverter with a modem connection, it may be necessary to jumper RTS to

CTS (consult the user’s manual for your modem).

Cable Diagrams (Point-To-Point)

When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and compatible computers with hardware

handshaking, the following cable connections should be used.

Figure D-2. Miniconverter to PC-AT

Figure D-3. Miniconverter to Workmaster II, PC-XT, PS/2

RXD

TXD

RTS

CTS

GND

DCD

DSR

DTR

RXD

TXD

RTS

CTS

GND

DCD

DSR

DTR

2

3

7

8

5

2

3

7

8

5

TXD

RXD

CTS

RTS

GND

TXD

RXD

CTS

RTS

GND

PIN

PIN

2

3

7

8

5

1

6

4

3

2

4

5

7

8

6

20

MINICONVERTER

RS-232 PORT

9-PIN

CONNECTOR

MINICONVERTER

RS-232 PORT

9-PIN

CONNECTOR

IBM PC-AT

9-PIN

CONNECTOR

WORKMASTER II,

IBM PC-XT, PS/2

25-PIN

CONNECTOR

PIN

PIN

a44982

a44983

D-4 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

D

Note: Additional adapter required

Figure D-4. Miniconverter to 9-Pin Workmaster or PC-XT Computer

Table D-3. Miniconverter Specifications

Mechanical:

RS-422 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to Series 90 serial port.

RS-232 9-pin D shell male for connection to RS-232 serial port of a WorkmasterII computer or Personal Computer.

Electrical and General:

Voltage Supply +5 VDC (supplied by PLC power supply)

Typical Current Version A (IC690ACC901A) – 150 mAVersion B (IC690ACC901B) – 100 mA

Operating Temperature 0 to 70° C (32 to 158° F)

Baud Rate 38.4K Baud maximum

Conformance EIA-422 (Balanced Line) or EIA-423 (Unbalanced Line)

Ground Isolation Not provided

3

2

4

5

7

MINICONVERTER

RS-232 PORT

9-PIN

CONNECTOR

RXD

TXD

RTS

CTS

GND

2

3

7

8

5

PIN PINa44984

WORKMASTER

9-PIN

CONNECTOR

TXD

RXD

CTS

RTS

GND

GFK-0356Q E-1

IC690ACC903 Port Isolator

The IC690ACC903 RS-485 Port Isolator replaces the IC655CMM590 Isolated Repeater/Converter

(also referred to as the “Brick”). The device features 500 volts of isolation in a compact package

servicing all IC693, IC697, and IC200 PLC product lines. The product connects directly to an RS-

485 serial port or though a short extender cable provided with the device. The extension cable is

intended for use in applications where direct connection to the port is obstructed by surrounding

equipment or when it is not acceptable for the device to protrude from a PLC module. The Port

Isolator can operate in either single- or multi-drop mode, which is selected by a slide switch on the

top of the module.

The Port Isolator provides the following features:

• Four opto-isolated signal channels: SD, RD, RTS, and CTS

• Electrical compatibility with RS-485

• Single- or multi-drop operation

• Input termination consistent with standard for serial channels

• A 5V DC/DC converter for power isolation

• Hot insertion is supported

1.7 in FRONT VIEW

0.7 in

TOP VIEW

FRONT VIEW

Multidrop

Switch

2.6 in

Figure E-1. RS485 Port Isolator

EAppendix

E-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

E

Connectors The Isolator provides two connectors, one 15 pin male D-type (PL1) and one

15 pin female D-type (PL2).

RS-485 Connectors

Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description

PL1 1 SHLD - Chassis Ground

2 NC -

3 NC -

4 NC -

5 5V - +5V power

6 CTS (A') In Clear to send -

7 0V - Signal Ground

8 RTS (B) Out Request to send +

9 NC -

10 SD (A) Out Send data -

11 SD (B) Out Send data +

12 RD (A') In Read data -

13 RD (B') In Read data +

14 CTS (B') In Clear to send +

15 RTS (A) Out Request to send -

Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description

PL2 1 NC -

2 NC -

3 NC -

4 NC -

5 5V - +5V power

6 RTS (A) Out Request to send -

7 0V - Signal Ground

8 CTS (B') In Clear to send +

9 RT - Terminating Resistor*

10 RD (A') In Read data -

11 RD (B') In Read data +

12 SD (A) Out Send data -

13 SD (B) Out Send data +

14 RTS (B) Out Request to send +

15 CTS (A') In Clear to send -

* Use the terminating resistor if the Port Isolator is used in port-to-port mode or at the end of a multi-drop

configuration. To terminate the RD balanced line, place a jumper wire from pin 9 to pin 10.

* A denotes – and B denotes +. A and B denote outputs and A' and B' denote inputs.

GFK-0356Q Appendix E IC690ACC903 Port Isolator E-3

E

Logic DiagramOptical Isolation

Always on(single port mode)

RTS Driven(multidrop mode)

+5V

Multidrop

Switch

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

14

6

14

6

Output Enable

Output Enable

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

13

12

13

12

Ground 2Ground 1

DC/DC

Converter

+5Vdc

GND

+5Vdc

GND

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')15

8

15

8

15-pin male D-connector

PL1

15-pin female D-connector

PL2

SD(B)

SD(A)

RD(B')

RD(A')

11

10

11

10

RT121 ohms

9

Figure E-2. IC690ACC903 Block Diagram

E-4 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

E

InstallationThe Isolator is packaged in a contoured plastic enclosure designed for either direct attachment to a

serial port or through a 12” extender cable for panel mounted applications. Two M3 thumbscrews

secure the device to its mating connector. The device can be easily inserted into an existing

communication channel with no additional hardware. In Figure E-2, the Isolator is shown

connected directly to a CPU module. Alternatively, the Isolator can be mounted separately from the

PLC system using the extender cable provided. For mounting separately to a panel, you will need

to provide two #6-32 (4 mm)mounting screws (Figure E-3).

When installing the Isolator, tighten the connector screws and panel mounting screws (if used) to

the following torque values:

Screws Type Torque

Connector Thumbscrews (supplied withIsolator)

M3 8 in./lbs. (0.9 Newton-meter)

Panel Mounting Screws (user-supplied) #6/32 (4 mm) 12 in./lbs. (1.4 Newton-meters)

PS CPU

CPU

4000 ft

SNP

Cable

RS-485 Port

Isolator

PLC 1

PLC 2

PS

Figure E-3. RS-485 Port Isolator in PLC Network

TOP

VIEW

Multidrop Switch

#6-32 (4 mm) screw

#6-32 (4 mm) screw

Figure E-4. Mounting Port Isolator to Panel


E

The RS485 Port Isolator supports both port-to-port and multi-drop configurations (Figure E-4). For

installation information, refer to section 3 of the Serial Communications User's Manual

(GFK-0582). One configuration not covered in the User's Manual is the case where the Isolator is

powered by a source other than the host port. This configuration is used to prevent an interrupt in

communications if the host system requires a power cycle. It also prevents power loss to equipment

using the port for power. For this, you will need to build a custom cable as shown in Figure E-5.

Master PLC

To Other Slave Devices

(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)

Slave Device

15 pin port

Slave Device

15 pin port

Terminate at first

and last drop only

9

13

12

11

10

14

6

8

15

5

7

RT

SD(B)

SD(A)

RD(B')

RD(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

+5V

GND

9

11

10

13

12

8

15

14

6

1

5

7

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

SHLD

+5V

GND

9

11

10

13

12

8

15

14

6

1

5

7

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

SHLD

+5V

GND

24

25

13

21

9

23

11

22

10

7

1

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

GND

SHLD

Slave Device

25 pin port

Twisted PairsMake connectons

inside D connectors

Isolator

15pinFe

maleD-

connector

15pinMa

leD-co

nnector

Master PLC

To Other Slave Devices

(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)

Slave Device

15 pin port

Slave Device

15 pin port

Terminate at first

and last drop only

9

13

12

11

10

14

6

8

15

5

7

RT

SD(B)

SD(A)

RD(B')

RD(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

+5V

GND

9

11

10

13

12

8

15

14

6

1

5

7

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

SHLD

+5V

GND

9

11

10

13

12

8

15

14

6

1

5

7

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

SHLD

+5V

GND

24

25

13

21

9

23

11

22

10

7

1

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)

GND

SHLD

Slave Device

25 pin port

Twisted PairsMake connectons

inside D connectorsIs

ola

tor

15 p

in F

em

ale

D-c

on

necto

r

15 p

in M

ale

D-c

on

necto

r

Figure E-5. Multidrop Configuration Connecting Devices with 15-Pin Ports and 25-Pin Ports

E-6

Series 9

0-3

0 P

LC

Insta

llatio

n a

nd H

ard

ware M

anual

– A

ugust 2

002

GF

K-0

356Q

E

Slave Device

Iso

lato

r

15 p

in F

em

ale

D-c

onnecto

r

15 p

in M

ale

D-c

onnecto

r

Master PLC

To devicerequiring

externalpower

913

12

1110

14

68

15

57

1

RTSD(B)

SD(A)

RD(B')RD(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)CTS(B')

CTS(A')

+5VGND

SHLD

Terminate at firstand last drops only

Note: Do not daisy chain +5VDC pins.

9

1110

13

128

15

146

5

71

RT

RD(B')RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)CTS(B')

CTS(A')

RTS(B)RTS(A)

+5V

GNDSHLD

+5VDC

Ground

To Other Slave Devices(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)

Slave Device

Slave Device

Terminate at firstand last ports only

9

11

1013

12

815

14

65

7

1

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)+5V

GND

SHLD

9

11

1013

12

815

14

65

7

1

RT

RD(B')

RD(A')SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)+5V

GND

SHLD

Twisted Pair

Make connectionsinside D-connector

Twisted Pair

Make connectionsinside D-connector

To Other Slave Devices(Maximum of 8 devices on a multidrop)

1312

11

10

146

8

155

7

1

RD(B')RD(A')

SD(B)

SD(A)

CTS(B')CTS(A')

RTS(B)

RTS(A)+5V

GND

SHLD

9

13

1211

10

146

8

155

7

RT

SD(B)

SD(A)RD(B')

RD(A')

RTS(B)RTS(A)

CTS(B')

CTS(A')+5V

GND

Fig

ure E

-6. Cab

le for S

up

plyin

g E

xternal P

ow

er Th

rou

gh

the P

ort Iso

lator


E

Specifications

Mechanical

RS-485 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to serial port on the programmablecontroller

15-pin D shell female for communication cable

Installation Hardware Two M3 thread connector thumbscrews. Recommended torque: 8 in./lbs. (0.9Newton-meter). These are supplied with Isolator.

Two user supplied #6/32 (4mm) thread panel mounting screws. Recommendedtorque: 12 in./lbs. (1.4 Newton-meter)

Electrical

Voltage Supply

Typical Current

+5VDC (supplied by port)

25 mA100 mA available for external equipment

Ground Isolation

Conformance

500 Volts

EIA-422/485 Balanced Line

Operating

Temperature

0° - 60°C (32° - 140° F)

Baud Rate Those supported by PLC

Note: This appendix is based on Data Sheet GFK-1663.

GFK-0356Q F-1

Calculating Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation

Overview

Series 90-30 PLCs must be mounted in a protective enclosure. The enclosure should be capable of

properly dissipating the heat produced by all of the devices mounted inside it. This appendix

describes how to calculate heat dissipation for a Series 90-30 PLC. The strategy is to calculate a

heat dissipation value, in watts, for each individual module in the PLC. To obtain a total heat

dissipation figure for the PLC, add the individual values together.

The procedure consists of the following steps:

Step 1: Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation F-2

Step 2: Calculation for PLC Power Supplies F-3

Step 3: Output Calculations for Discrete Output Modules F-3

Step 4: Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules F-4

Step 5: Final Calculation F-6

Information Required

In addition to the information in this manual, you will need GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O

Module Specifications Manual.

You will need operating current values for the discrete output devices connected to the PLC’s

discrete output modules. These include control relays, motor starters, solenoids, pilot lights,

etc. Each device manufacturer publishes these values. If an exact value is not available for a

device, you can make a close estimate by obtaining the value for a similar device from a

catalog. These values are also needed for selecting Output modules during the design process

in order to ensure that the modules’ maximum ratings are not exceeded.

FAppendix

F-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

F

Procedure

Step 1: Basic Method to Calculate Module Dissipation

Note that this step does not apply to Power Supply Modules, which are covered in Step 2. The

values needed for this calculation are found in the “Load Requirements” table in Chapter 12.

Use the following electrical power formula in these calculations

Power (in watts) = Voltage (in volts) x Current (in Amps).

Assume that all input power to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat. The procedure is:

Look up the module in the “Load Requirements for Hardware Components” table (Chapter 12)

and obtain the current values for each of the three power supply voltages listed. The voltage is

printed at the head of each column. All modules use the 5VDC supply, and a relatively few

modules also use one or both of the two 24VDC supplies.

For a given module, calculate the power dissipation for each column in the table that contains a

current value by multiplying the current value (in Amps) times the voltage for that column. For

modules using more than one voltage, add the calculated power values to arrive at the total for

the module.

Example 1:

The “Load Requirements” table shows that the IC693CPU352 module draws:

910 mA from the +5VDC supply.

No current from either of the two 12VDC supplies

To calculate power dissipation, multiply 0.910 Amps times 5 volts. The answer is:

4.55 watts (of heat dissipated by this module)

Example 2:

The “Load Requirements” table shows that the IC693MDL241 module draws:

80 mA from the +5VDC supply

125 mA from the +24VDC Isolated supply

To calculate power dissipation from the +5VDC supply:

Multiply 0.08 Amps times 5 volts to arrive at a value of 0.40 watts.

To calculate power dissipation from the +24VDC supply:

Multiply 0.125 Amps times 24 volts to arrive at a value of 3.0 watts.

Adding the two together yields a total heat dissipation by this module of 3.4 watts.

GFK-0356Q Appendix F Calculating Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation F-3

F

Step 2: Calculation for PLC Power Supplies

A basic rule for Series 90 power supplies is that they are 66% efficient. Another way of stating this

is that the power supply dissipates 1 watt of power in the form of heat for every 2 watts of power it

delivers to the PLC. Therefore, you can calculate the total power requirement for all of the

modules in the rack served by a particular power supply using the method in Step 1 above, then

divide that figure by 2 to arrive at the power supply dissipation value. You cannot simply use the

rating of the power supply (such as 30 watts) for this calculation because the application may not

require the full capacity of the power supply. If you are using the +24VDC output on the power

supply’s terminal strip, you should calculate the power drawn, divide the value by 2, and add it to

the total for the power supply. Since each Series 90-30 rack has its own power supply, each rack

should be calculated on an individual basis.

Step 3: Output Calculations for Discrete Output Modules

Discrete solid state Output modules require two calculations, one for the module’s signal-level

circuits, which was already done in Step 1, and one for the output circuits. (This output circuit

calculation is not required for the Relay Output modules.) Since the solid state output switching

devices in these modules will drop a measurable amount of voltage, their power dissipation can be

calculated. Note that the power dissipated by the output circuits comes from a separate power

source, so it is not included in the figure used to calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2.

To calculate output circuit power dissipation:

In the Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, find the value for the

Output Voltage Drop for your particular module.

Obtain the required current value for each device (such as a relay, pilot light, solenoid,

etc.) connected to an output point on the module and estimate its percent of “on-time.” To

obtain the current values, check the device manufacturer’s documentation or an

electronics catalog. The percent of on-time can be estimated by someone familiar with

how the equipment operates or will operate.

Multiply the Output Voltage Drop times the current value times the estimated percent of

on-time to arrive at average power dissipation for that output.

Repeat for all outputs on the module. To save time, you could determine if several

outputs were similar in current draw and on-time so that you would only have to make

their calculation once.

Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Output modules in the rack.

Discrete Output Module Example:

The Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, lists the following for the

IC693MDL340 16-Point Discrete 120VAC Output Module:

Output Voltage Drop: 1.5 Volts maximum

Use that value for all of the calculations for this module.

In this example, two of the Output module’s output points drive solenoids that control the advance

and retract travel of a hydraulic cylinder. The solenoid manufacturer’s data sheet shows that each


F

solenoid draws 1.0 Amp. The cylinder advances and retracts once every 60 seconds that the

machine is cycling. It takes 6 seconds to advance and 6 seconds to retract.

Since the cylinder takes equal time to advance and retract, both solenoids are on for equal lengths

of time: 6 seconds out of every 60 seconds, which is 10% of the time. Therefore, since both

solenoids have equal current draws and on-times, our single calculation can be applied to both

outputs.

Use the formula Average Power Dissipation = Voltage Drop x Current Draw (in Amps) x Percent

(expressed as a decimal) of on-time:

1.5 x 1.0 x 0.10 = 0.15 watts per solenoid

Then multiply this result by 2 since we have two identical solenoids:

0.15 watts x 2 Solenoids = 0.30 watts total for the two solenoids

Also in this example, the other 14 output points on this 16-point module operate pilot lights on an

operator’s panel. Each pilot light requires .05 Amps of current. Seven of the pilot lights are on

100% of the time and seven are on an estimated 40%.

For the 7 lights that are on 100% of the time:

1.5 x .05 x 1.00 = 0.075 watts per light

Then multiply this value by 7:

0.075 watts x 7 lights = 0.525watts total dissipation for the first 7 lights

For the 7 lights that are on 40% of the time:

1.5 x .05 x 0.40 = .03 watts per light

Then multiply this value by 7:

0.03 watts x 7 lights = 0.21 watts total dissipation for the other 7 lights

Adding up the individual calculations, we get:

0.30 + 0.525 + 0.21 = 1.035 watts for the module’s total output calculation

Step 4: Input Calculations for Discrete Input Modules

A Discrete Input Module requires two calculations, one for the module’s signal-level circuits,

which was already done in Step 1, and one for the input circuits. Note that the power dissipated by

the input circuits comes from a separate power source, so are not included in the figure used to

calculate PLC power supply dissipation in Step 2. We will assume that all input circuit power

delivered to these modules is eventually dissipated as heat. The procedure is:

Find the value for the Input Current in the “Specifications” table for your input module in

the Series 90-30 I/O Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898.

Multiply the input voltage times the current value times the estimated percent of on-time

to arrive at average power dissipation for that input.

GFK-0356Q Appendix F Calculating Series 90-30 Heat Dissipation F-5

F

Repeat for all inputs on the module. To save time, you could determine if several inputs

were similar in current draw and on-time so that you would only have to make their

calculation once.

Repeat these calculations for all Discrete Input modules in the rack.

Discrete Input Module Example:

The “Specifications” table for the IC693MDL240 16-Point Discrete 120 VAC Input Module in the

Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specification Manual, GFK-0898, gives the following information:

Input Current: 12 mA (typical) at rated voltage

Use this value for all of the input calculations for this module.

In this example, eight of the Input Module’s points are used for switches that, for normal operation,

stay on (closed) 100% of the time. These include the Emergency Stop, Over Temperature, Lube

Pressure OK, and similar switches.

Use the formula Average Power Dissipation = Input Voltage x Input Current (in Amps) x Percent

(expressed as a decimal) of on-time:

120 x .012 x 1.0 = 1.44 watts per input

Then multiply this result by 8:

1.44 watts x 8 inputs = 11.52 watts total for the 8 inputs

Also in this example, two input points on this 16-point module are for the Control On and Pump

Start pushbuttons. Under normal conditions, these pushbuttons are only pressed once per day for

about one second – just long enough to start up the control and pump. Therefore, their effect on

our power calculation is negligible and we will assume a power dissipation of zero for them:

0.0 watts total for 2 inputs

For the remaining six inputs of our sixteen point module, it is estimated that they will be on for an

average of 20% of the time. So the following calculation is made for these six inputs:

Using the formula of Average Power Dissipation = Input Voltage x Input Current (in Amps) x

Percent (expressed as a decimal) of on-time:

120 x .012 x 0.20 = 0.288 watts per input

Then multiply this result by 6:

0.288 watts x 6 inputs = 1.728 watts total for the 6 inputs

Finally, adding up the individual calculations, we get:

11.52 + 0.0 + 1.728 = 13.248 watts for the module’s total input calculation


F

Step 5: Final Calculation

Once the individual power dissipations have been calculated, add them all to obtain total PLC heat

dissipation. Note that the PLC baseplate, analog input modules, and analog output modules have

been ignored in this procedure because their power dissipation values are negligible when

compared with the total. Also, since each Series 90-30 rack has its own power supply, each rack

should be calculated on an individual basis. The following table summarizes the final calculation:

Series 90-30 Rack Heat Dissipation Calculation Summary

Step Description Value (Watts)

1 Calculate total of dissipation values for all modules in the rack

2 Divide value obtained in Step 1 by 2 to obtain Power Supply value

3 Calculate total of all Output modules’ output dissipation values

4 Calculate total of all Input modules’ input dissipation values

5 Add the above four values to obtain the total dissipation of the rack

Other Information Related to Enclosure Sizing

The “Baseplates” chapter of this manual contains rack dimensions and minimum ventilation

clearance distances required around the racks. The “Cables” chapter contains clearance dimensions

for cables that mount on the front of modules.

GFK-0356Q G-1

Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference

Manuals are not shipped with many of the Series 90-30 products; they must be ordered separately.

This appendix can help you identify the correct documentation to order and use. Products are arranged

in this appendix by categories such as Analog I/O Modules, Baseplates, Communications Modules,

etc. The category headings are listed in alphabetical order. Modules that share common

documentation are grouped under a generic catalog number, such as IC693ALGxxx for the Analog I/O

modules.

Note that you may not need every publication listed for a particular product. Your need for some of

the publications depends on your application. For example, if you intend to use Logicmaster

programming software to configure and program your PLC, you will not need manuals for the other

programming software products or the Hand Held Programmer. Or, if you are going to program your

Programmable Coprocessor module using the C computer language, you will not need the MegaBasic

language manual. A list of publication titles is included at the end of this data sheet.

Abbreviations Used

HHP — Hand-Held Programmer

LM90 — Logicmaster, a DOS-based programming and configuration software

SFC — Sequential Function Chart

GAppendix

G-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

G

General System Information

90-30 PLC System Installation: GFK-0356

Installation for Conformance to Standards: GFK-1179

Configuration Options:

Configuration (HHP): GFK-0402

Configuration (LM90): GFK-0466

Configuration (Control): GFK-1295

Configuration (VersaPro): GFK-1670

Configuration (CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer-PLC: GFK-1868

Analog I/O Modules

Catalog Number Task: Publication Number

All Analog Input, Output, andCombination. Modules(IC693ALGxxx)

Installation, Configuration, Specifications: GFK-0898

Baseplates

All Series 90-30 Baseplates(IC693CHSxxx)

Installation: GFK-0356






Configuration (CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer-PLC:GFK-1868

GFK-0356Q Appendix G Catalog Number to Publication Cross-Reference G-3

G

Communications Modules

IC693BEM320

I/O Link Interface Module(slave)

Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide: GFK-0631

IC693BEM321

I/O Link Master Module


IC693BEM330

FIP Remote I/O ScannerModule


Related Publications:

Interfacing to Series 90-70: GFK-1038

Hand Held Programmer User’s Manual: GFK-0402

FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual: GFK-1213

IC693BEM340

FIP Bus Controller Module


Related Publications:

Hand Held Programmer User’s Manual: GFK-0402

FIP Bus Interface Unit: GFK-1175

FIP Remote I/O Scanner: GFK-1037

IC693CMM311

Comm. Coprocessor Module


IC693CMM321

Ethernet Module


Programming Options:

Ethernet Station Manager: GFK-1186

Host Communications Toolkit, C/C++: GFK-0870

Host Communications Drivers, MS Windows: GFK-1026

Host Communications Toolkit, Visual Basic: GFK-1063

CPU Modules, CPU311-CPU341

Series 90-30 CPUs

(IC693CPU311 -IC693CPU341)


Configuration and Programming Options:

Configuration and Programming (HHP): GFK-0402


Programming (LM90): GFK-0467

SFC Programming (LM90): GFK-0854

Configuration / Programming (VersaPro): GFK-1670



G

CPU Modules, CPU350 - CPU374

IC693CPU350

CPU Module



Configuration / Programming (HHP): GFK-0402


Programming (Control): GFK-1411

SFC Programming (Control): GFK-1385





Configuration/Programming CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer-PLC: GFK-1868

IC693CPU351

IC693CPU352

CPU Modules


Serial Communications: GFK-0582










Configuration/Programming (CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer-PLC: GFK-1868

IC693CPU360

CPU modules











Configuration/Programming (CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer- PLC: GFK-1868


G

IC693CPU363

CPU Module

Installation: GFK-0356P or later


Configuration and Programming (HHP): GFK-0402

Configuration/Programming (Control): GFK-1295







Serial Communications: GFK-0582

IC693CPU364

IC693CPU374

CPU Module


Specifications: GFK-0356










Ethernet Station Manager: GFK-1186

Host Communications Toolkit, C/C++: GFK-0870

Host Communications Drivers, MS Windows: GFK-1026

Host Communications Toolkit, Visual Basic: GFK-1063

Digital Valve Driver Module

IC693DVM300 Installation and Specifications: GFK-0356P or later


This module does not connect to PLC backplane; therefore, it mountsin an unconfigured slot.

Discrete I/O Modules

All Discrete Input, Output,and Combination Modules(IC693MDLxxx)

Installation and Specifications: GFK-0898








G

Genius Modules

IC693BEM331

Genius Bus Controller

Installation, Configuration, User Guide: GFK-1034

Related Publication:

Genius I/O System User’s Manual: GEK-90486-1

Genius Blocks User’s Manual: GEK-90486-2

IC693CMM301

Genius Comm. Module




IC693CMM302

Genius Comm. Module +(Enhanced)




Motion Modules

IC693APU300

High Speed Counter


IC693APU301

IC693APU302

Axis Positioning Modules

Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide:

Standard Mode: GFK-0840

Follower Mode: GFK-0781

Motion Programming: GFK-0664

IC693DSM302

Digital Servo Module

Installation, Configuration, User’s Guide (standard and follower modes):GFK-1464

Motion Programming: GFK-0664

IC693DSM314

Digital Servo Module

Installation, Configuration, Local Logic, Motion Programming User’s Guide(standard and follower modes): GFK-1742

Other Option Modules

IC693ADC311

Alphanumeric CoprocessorModule



Programming, PCOP Development Software: GFK-0487

ADS Display System Reference Manual: GFK-0641

IC693TCM302

Temperature Control Module


IC693APU305

I/O Processor Module



G

IC693PCM300IC693PCM301IC693PCM311

Programmable CoprocessorModules



Programming, PCOP Development Software: GFK-0487

Programming, MegaBasic: GFK-0256

Programming, C Language: GFK-0771

PCM C Function Library Reference: GFK-0772

PCM Quick Reference Guide: GFK-0260

PCOP Quick Reference Guide: GFK-0657

TERMF Quick Reference Guide: GFK-0655

IC693PTM100

Power Transducer Module(PTM)

(Not available until late 1999.)

Installation, configuration, user’s guide: GFK-1734

(Not available until late 1999.)

Power Supply Modules

All Series 90-30 PowerSupply Modules

(IC693PWRxxx)







Configuration(CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Logic Developer-PLC: GFK-1868

Programming Device

IC693PRG300


User’s Manual (using the HHP for configuration and programming):GFK-0402


IC693CSE311

IC693CSE313

IC693CSE323

IC693CSE331

IC693CSE340

State Logic CPUs



ECLiPS English Control Language: GFK-0732

OnTOP User’s Guide: GFK-0747

OnTOP Troubleshooting Manual: GFK-0750

AD693SLP300

State Logic Processor (SLP)Module


Software Options:

ECLiPS English Control Language: GFK-0732

OnTOP Troubleshooting Manual: GFK-0750

AD693CMM301

State Logic SerialCommunications (SCM)Module

Installation, Configuration, User’s Information Data Sheet: GFK-1529

See also: GFK-1056


G

Publication Revision Letters

When a GE Fanuc publication is revised, a letter is placed at the end of the publication number. For

example, in the publication number GFK-0356Q, the letter Q at the end indicates the version of the

manual. Manuals are revised when there are changes or additions to the products or product lines

covered in the manual. Since this is a continual process revision letters are not included in this

appendix, except in a few special cases. Therefore, when ordering these publications, ask for the latest

version.

Note: If a publication number does not have an ending letter (suffix), such as GFK-1581, the

publication has never been revised.

Other Sources of Information

GE Fanuc InfoLink PLC CD. This CD contains a collection of GE Fanuc PLC manuals for

Series 90-30, Series 90-70, Genius, VersaMax, etc.

GE Fanuc web site. This web site, at http://www.gefanuc.com, contains recently revised

publications, product revision histories, and an online catalog.

Note: The information in this appendix is based on Data Sheet GFK-1661.



G

Publication No. Titles of Series 90-30 Publications Cited in this Appendix

GFK-0255 Series 90 Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual

GFK-0256 MegaBasic Language Reference and Programmer’s Guide Reference Manual

GFK-0260 Programmable Coprocessor Module Quick Reference Guide

GFK-0293 Series 90-30 PLC High Speed Counter User’s Manual

GFK-0356 Series 90-30 PLC Installation Manual

GFK-0402 Hand-Held Programmer for Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC User’s Manual

GFK-0412 Series 90-30 Genius Communications Module User’s Manual

GFK-0466 Logicmaster 90, Series 90-30/20/Micro Programming Software User’s Manual

GFK-0467 Series 90-30/20/Micro PLC Reference Manual

GFK-0487 Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual

GFK-0499 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual

GFK-0582 Series 90 PLC Serial Communications Driver User’s Manual

GFK-0631 Series 90-30 I/O Link Slave Interface User’s Manual

GFK-0641 CIMPLICITY 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual

GFK-0655 Series 90 PCM Support Software (TERMF) Quick Reference Guide

GFK-0657 Series 90 PCM Development Software (PCOP) Quick Reference Guide

GFK-0664 Series 90-30 Axis Positioning Module Programmer’s Manual

GFK-0695 Series 90-30 Enhanced Genius Communications Module User’s Manual

GFK-0726 State Logic Processor For Series 90-30 PLC User’s Guide

GFK-0732 ECLiPS English Control Language Prog. System for Series 90-30 PLC User’s Guide

GFK-0750 OnTOP for Series 90-30 Online Troubleshooting and Operator Prog. User’s Manual

GFK-0771 C Programmer’s Toolkit for Series 90 PCMs User’s Manual

GFK-0772 PCM C Function Library Reference Manual

GFK-0781 Motion Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Follower Mode User’s Manual

GFK-0823 Series 90-30 I/O Link Master Module User’s Guide

GFK-0840 Power Mate APM for Series 90-30 PLC Standard Mode User’s Manual

GFK-0854 Series 90 Sequential Function Chart Programming Language User’s Manual

GFK-0870 Host Communications Toolkit for C/C++ Applications User’s Manual

GFK-0898 Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual

GFK-1026 Host Drivers &Comm. Config. Software for Windows Environments User’s Manual

GDK-1028 Series 90-30 I/O Processor Module User’s Manual

GFK-1034 Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller User’s Manual

GFK-1037 Series 90-30 FIP Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual

GFK-1038 Series 90-70 FIP Bus Controller’s User’s Manual

GFK-1056 Series 90-30 State Logic Control System User’s Manual

GFK-1063 Host Communications Toolkit for Visual Basic Applications User’s Manual

GFK-1175 Field Control Distributed I/O & Control Sys. FIP Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual

GFK-1179 Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards

GFK-1186 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC Station Manager Manual

GFK-1213 Series 90-30 FIP Bus Controller User’s Manual

GFK-1295 Using GE Fanuc Control

GFK-1385 GE Fanuc Control: Using the Sequential Function Chart Editor

GFK-1411 Series 90-30 System Manual

GFK-1464 Motion Mate DSM 302 for Series 90-30 PLCs User’s Manual


G

Publication No. Titles of Series 90-30 Publications Cited in this Appendix

GFK-1466 Temperature Control Module for the Series 90-30 PLC User’s Manual

GFK-1541 TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Manual

GFK-1670 VersaPro User’s Guide

GFK-1868 CIMPLICITY Machine Edition Getting Started

GEK-90486-1 Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual

GEK-90486-2 Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual

GFK-0356Q H-1

Terminal Block Quick Connect Components

This appendix describes the optional terminal block components for Series 90-30 discrete I/O

modules. This system is referred to as the Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) system. The

advantage of this system, is that it allows the listed discrete I/O modules to be quickly connected to

TBQC terminal blocks. In this system, the TBQC terminal block (shown below) is snapped onto a

standard DIN-rail. Then, a factory-made cable is connected between the terminal block’s

connector and the I/O module’s connector. An I/O module that has a terminal board instead of a

connector is converted into a connector type using an adapter faceplate.

The TBQC system is not recommended for use with Analog modules because it does not meet the

shielding recommendations for Analog module connections. (See the Series 90-30 PLC I/O

Module Specifications Manual, GFK-0898, for Analog module wiring information.)

This appendix contains two sections, one for discrete 16-point I/O modules and one for discrete 32-

point I/O modules.

Figure H-1. Typical TBQC Terminal Block

HAppendix

19

20

1

2

a45586A

Connector (Male Pins)

“Box” Terminals

H-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

H

Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 16-Point Modules

Installing a 16 point module typically takes 2 1/2 hours to wire from a PLC to a terminal blocks or

strip. With the TBQC, you simply snap the terminal block onto a DIN rail, remove the I/O

module’s terminal assembly, snap in the I/O faceplate, and connect the cable. This reduces wiring

time to about two minutes, thereby reducing wiring costs and errors. A complete assembly consists

of a terminal block, an I/O Face Plate, and a cable.

Terminal Blocks

Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals, arranged in three levels, as shown in Figure H-1.

These terminal blocks feature an easy to use captive-screw, “rising cage” type connection system.

Catalog numbers for the terminal blocks and the modules they can be used with are listed below.

Table H-1. TBQC Terminal Block Selection Table

Catalog

Number

Use With

These Modules

Module

Description

IC693ACC329* IC693MDL240 Input, 120 VAC - 16 points

IC693MDL645 Input, 24 VDC Pos./Neg Logic- 16 points

IC693MDL646 Input, 24 VDC Pos./Neg, Logic, FAST - 16 points

IC693ACC330 IC693MDL740 Output, 12/24 VDC Pos Logic, 0.5A - 16 points

IC693MDL742 Output, 12/24 VDC Pos Logic ESCP, 1A- 16 points

IC693ACC331 IC693MDL741 Output, 12/24 VDC Neg Logic, 0.5A- 16 points

IC693ACC332 IC693MDL940 Output, Relay, N.O. - 16 points

IC693ACC333 IC693MDL340 Output, 120 VAC, 0.5A - 16 points

* This Terminal Block may be used with most I/O modules that have up to 16 I/O points (can

not be used with 32 point modules). Jumpers may have to be added; for details of required

wiring connections, refer to module specifications in GFK-0898.

Cable Current Rating

Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 Amps. If using these cables

with a 16-point Output module with a higher output current rating, you must use the lower value of

1.2 Amps for the maximum load current rating . If you have field devices that require more than

1.2 Amps, do not use a TBQC assembly - use the standard Terminal Board that comes with the

module instead.

TBQC Components

GFK-0356Q Appendix H Terminal Block Quick Connect Components H-3

H

Cable Selection and Cross-Reference

Three cables are available for connecting between the module’s faceplate connector and the

terminal block. The only difference in these cables is their length. These cables have right-angle

connectors on the module end to minimize the space required in front of the modules. These three

cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight connectors. Use the following table to select

the correct cable.

Cable Catalog

Number

Description Replaces Obsolete

Cable Number

IC693CBL330 CBL Assembly, 24-pin, 90 Deg, Right Side, 1.0 Meterlength

IC693CBL321


IC693CBL322


IC693CBL323

I/O Face Plate for 16-Point Modules

The I/O Face Plate (catalog number IC693ACC334) has a 24-pin connector, which provides the

connection to the applicable terminal block through a 0.5, 1, or 2 meter cable. This face plate

replaces the standard terminal board on the listed modules.

I/O Face Plate Installation

Step 1: Install terminal block assembly on DIN rail

Place the terminal block over the desired location on the DIN rail and snap into place.

Step 2: Remove 20-pin terminal assembly from module

JACKINGLEVER

PULLTAB

Open the plastic terminal board

Push up on the jacking lever to release

the terminal block.

Grasp pull-tab towards you until contacts

separated from module housing and hook

disengaged for full removal.

1. 2.


H

Step 3: Snap I/O Face Plate assembly on module

Step 4: Connect cable to connector on terminal block

Finally, connect the selected length cable from the connector on the I/O Face Plate to the connector

on the interposing terminal block.

Module Wiring Information

Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for wiring connections

for each module.

Cable Information

Data sheets for the cables are found in the “Cables” chapter of this manual.

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

Installing the I/O Face Plate Module with I/O Face Plate Installed

a47118

TBQC Components


H

Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal

Figure H-2. TBQC Faceplate

Terminal Block Information

Terminal block data sheets are found on the next several pages.

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

Connector Pin Orientation

Pin A1

Pin A12

Pin B1

Pin B12

ModuleTerminal #

Connector Pin#

1 . . . . . . . . B12 . . . . . . . . A13 . . . . . . . . B24 . . . . . . . . A25 . . . . . . . . B36 . . . . . . . . A37 . . . . . . . . B48 . . . . . . . . A49 . . . . . . . . B510 . . . . . . . . A5 . . . . . . . . B6 (N.C.)

. . . . . . . . A6 (N.C.)

. . . . . . . . B7 (N.C.)

. . . . . . . . A7 (N.C.)

11 . . . . . . . . B812 . . . . . . . . A813 . . . . . . . . B914 . . . . . . . . A915 . . . . . . . . B1016 . . . . . . . . A1017 . . . . . . . . B1118 . . . . . . . . A1119 . . . . . . . . B1220 . . . . . . . . A12

a47119


H

IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block

Use with the following 16-point I/O modules:

IC693MDL240

IC693MDL645

IC693MDL646

Figure H-3. IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block

Note

The common row terminals (labeled with the letter C) are provided for wiringconvenience. Their use is optional. They are electrically isolated from the numberedterminals. You may use them as is, or jumper them to a numbered terminal. Refer toGFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for wiring diagrams ofthe modules.

Mounting

These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard, user-supplied 35 mm DIN-rail.

19

20

1

2

C

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

TERMINAL

BLOCK

a45586

(See Note 1

Below)

Maximum wire sizeper terminal: one#14 AWG (2.10 mm

2)

Width

Height (all blocks) 2.25” (57mm)Depth (all blocks) 1.7716” (45mm)

4.44” (112mm)

TBQC Components


H


Use with the following 16-point I/O modules:

IC693MDL740

IC693MDL742


Note

Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for requiredwiring connections.

Mounting


C C

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

CCCCCCCCCCCCC C C C

TERMINAL

BLOCK

a45587

19

20

1

2


2)

Width


4.64” (117.86mm)


H


Use with the following 16-point I/O module: IC693MDL741


Note

Refer to GFK-0898, Series 90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for requiredwiring connections.

Mounting


2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

+

TERMINAL

BLOCK

a45588

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

19

20

1

2


2)

Width


4.64” (117.86mm)

TBQC Components


H




Note


Mounting


CC

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C

TERMINAL

BLOCK

a45589

19

20

1

2

(See Note 1

Below)


2)

Width


5.04” (128mm)


H




Note

The neutral row terminals (labeled with the letter N) are provided for wiring convenience.Their use is optional. They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals. Youmay use them as is, or jumper them to a numbered terminal. Refer to GFK-0898, Series90-30 PLC I/O Module Specifications Manual for wiring diagrams of the modules.

Mounting


N NN

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N

19

20

1

2

a45590

(See Note 1

Below)


2)

Width


4.64” (117.86mm)

TERMINAL

BLOCK

TBQC Components


H

Terminal Block Quick Connect Components for 32-Point Modules

The 32-point modules do not require a new faceplate since they are equipped with a dual-connector

faceplate as a standard feature. Since each module has two 24-pin connectors, they each require

two cables and two terminal blocks. Also, since the modules’ two connectors are oriented

differently (see example in figure below), the two cables are different. One is called a “right side”

cable and the other, a “left side” cable.

Note: These terminal blocks will not work with the 32-point I/O modules that have 50-pin

connectors.

Pin B1

Pin B12Pin B1

Pin B12

A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8F

C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

D1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CD AB

INPUT5/12 VDC

POS/NEG LOGIC

3.0 mA/Pt at 5VDC

8.5 mA/Pt at 12VDC

Right SideConnector

Left SideConnector

Figure H-8. IC693MDL654 32-Point Module


H

Terminal Block

Terminal blocks have three rows of terminals, arranged in three levels, as shown in Figure H-1.

The terminals feature an easy to use captive-screw, “rising cage” type connection system. Catalog

numbers for the terminal block and the modules it can be used with are listed below.

Catalog

Number

Use With

These Modules

Module

Description

IC693ACC337 IC693MDL654IC693MDL655IC693MDL752IC693MDL753

Input, 5/12 VDC (TTL) Pos/Neg Logic- 32 pointsInput, 24 VDC Pos/Neg Logic - 32 pointsOutput, 5/24 VDC Neg Logic-32 pointsOutput, 12/24 VDC Pos Logic, 0.5A - 32 points

Cable Selection and Cross-Reference

Six cables are available for connecting between the modules’ faceplate connectors and the terminal

blocks. These cables have right-angle connectors on the module end to minimize the space

required in front of the modules. These six cables replace three obsolete cables that had straight

connectors. Since the modules’ two connectors are oriented differently (see previous figure), a

right-side and left-side cable is required. Use the following table to select the correct cables. The

table also lists cable kits that consist of a pair of same length, right side and left side cables.

Cable Current Rating

Each conductor in these 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 Amps, which is more than

adequate to handle the current requirement of any of the 32-point I/O modules listed in the previous

table.

Catalog Number Cable Description and Length

Replaces Obsolete

Cable Number


IC693CBL321


IC693CBL321

IC693CBL331 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Left SideCable length = 2.0 Meters

IC693CBL322

IC693CBL332 Dual 24-pin, 90 deg. connectors, Right SideCable length = 2.0 Meters

IC693CBL322


IC693CBL323


IC693CBL323

Cable Kits




TBQC Components


H

Cable Data

Data sheets for these cables are found in the “Cables” chapter of this manual.

Terminal Block Data


Use with the following 32-point I/O modules (2 required per module):

IC693MDL654, IC693MDL655

IC693MDL752, IC693MDL753

1

2

C

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

TERMINAL

BLOCK

(See Note 1

Below)

Maximum wire size

per terminal: one

#14 AWG (2.10 mm2)

Width

Height (all blocks) 2.15” (57mm)

Depth (all blocks) 1.7716” (45mm)

4.45” (112mm)

22

21 23

24

24–Pin

ConnectorB1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

24

23


Note


Mounting


GFK-0356Q I-1

SNP Multidrop

SNP Multidrop Overview

As used in this appendix, the term “SNP Multidrop” refers to a system that allows a programmer

(called the “master or host”), such as a personal computer running GE Fanuc programming

software, to connect to two or more PLCs or intelligent Option modules (called “slaves“) via a

single connection. In this arrangement the programmer is able to program, configure, test,

troubleshoot, etc., any one of the multidropped devices from one connection point.

Physically, a typical SNP multidrop system consists of a programmer and two or more PLCs

interconnected by a “daisy-chain“ type cabling arrangement, as shown in the figure below. It is

necessary to assign each slave device (PLC or Option module) a unique SNP (Series Ninety

Protocol) address, using programming software such as Logicmaster, VersaPro, or Logic

Developer-PLC. The SNP address is used by the programmer to designate which PLC it will

communicate with. The SNP protocol uses the RS-422 communications standard. Note that the

PLCs or Option modules do not communicate with each other over the multidrop system. They

only communicate with the programmer. And only one device, the one designated by the

programmer, can communicate with the programmer at a time.

IC690ACC901

Series 90-30 PLC (slave) Series 90-30 PLC (slave) Series 90-30 PLC (slave)

Multidrop Cable Multidrop Cable

Serial Cable

Multidrop Connector

15-pin MaleMultidrop Connector 15-pin Male

Multidrop Connector15-pin Male

MultidropConnector15-pin Female

Programmer (master)

Figure I-1. Series 90-30 Multidrop Example

IAppendix

I-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

I

Multidrop Cables

There are two sources of multidrop cables:

GE Fanuc cable, catalog number IC690CBL714A - This pre-made cable can be purchased

for applications where the PLCs are mounted in the same cabinet, such as in the case of

redundant systems. The length of this cable is 40 inches ( meter).

Custom built - For PLCs that are more than 40 inches ( meter) apart, it is necessary to build a

custom length cable. The specifications are provide below.

Limitations

The maximum cable length between a master (programmer) and slave device (PLC or Option

module) in a multidrop system is 4,000 feet ( ,2 9 meters).

The maximum number of slave devices is limited to eight.


The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure. For best

performance, construct the cable assemblies using the recommended connector parts and

specifications.

Table I-1. Connector and Cable Specifications

Item Description

Series 90 PLC: Serial (RS-422) port with metric hardware

Connectors Connector: 5-pin male, D-Subminiature Type, Cannon DA 5S (solder pot) Hood: AMP207470- connector shellHardware Kit: AMP 20787 - Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips

Miniconverter: For connecting to IC690ACC90 miniconverter

Connector: 5-pin female, DB 5F,Hood: AMP #207470- or equivalentM3 Latchblocks: AMP #208 0 or equivalent

Computer grade, 24 AWG (.22 mm2), minimum with overall shield

Catalog Numbers: Belden 9505, Belden 9306, Belden 9832

Cable These cables provide acceptable operation for data rates up to 9.2 Kbps as follows:

RS-422/RS-422: 4000 feet ( 200 meters) maximum length. Must not exceed the maximum RS-422 Common Mode specification of +7V to –7V. Isolation at the remote end may be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages.

When using RS-422/RS-422, the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signalsmake up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair. If this isignored, cross-task resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of thecommunications system.

When routing communication cables outdoors, transient suppression devices can be used toreduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge.

Care should be exercised that all connected devices are grounded to a common point.

Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment.

GFK-0356Q Appendix I SNP Multidrop I-3

I

MultiDrop Cable Wiring Diagram


SD ( B )RT


+5V0V

SHLD

23

10111213

915

86

14571



NOTE

WHEN WIRING RS-422 /485 MULTIDROP CABLES, REFLECTIONS ON THETRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CABLE IN ADAISY CHAIN FASHION, AS SHOWN BELOW.

MINI-CONVERTERPROGRAMMER

FIRST SLAVE STATION (PLC)

LAST SLAVESTATION (PLC)


TERMINATION RESISTANCE FOR THE RECEIVE DATA (RD) SIGNAL NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED ONLY ON UNITS AT THE END OF THE LINES. THIS TERMINATION IS MADE

ON THE SERIES 90 PLC PRODUCTS BY CONNECTING A JUMPER BETWEEN PIN 9 AND PIN 10 INSIDE THE 15-PIN D-SHELL WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION. FOR SERIES





ON THE CPU BOARD

PIN

15- PINMALE

*

15- PINFEMALE

PIN

23

12131011

96

1415

8571


INSIDE D-CONNECTORS

TO OTHER PLC'sIf applicable

PIN

*


*

23

12131011

96

1415

8571

15- PINMALE

To Miniconverter onProgrammer SerialCable

To First Slave PLC

To Second Slave PLC

Figure I-2. Multidrop Cable Wiring Diagram


I

SNP Multidrop Examples

IC690ACC90

Conn. B

Conn. A

Conn. C to APM Comm. Port

Series 90-30 PLC

IC690CBL714A Cable

Serial Cable

APMPS CPU

Figure I-3. Connecting CPU and APM to Programmer with IC690CBL714A Cable

CPU

CPU

CPU

RS-232/422Converter

PLC A PLC CPLC B

IC690CBL714A IC690CBL714A

Conn. A

Conn. B Conn. B Conn. C

Conn. C Conn. A

Figure I-4. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-70 TMR Redundant System


I

IC690ACC90

Conn. B

Conn. A

Conn. C

Series 90-30 PLC Series 90-30 PLC

IC690CBL714A Cable

Serial Cable

Figure I-5. Multidrop Arrangement for Series 90-30 Redundant System

Configuring and Connecting a Programmer to a Multidrop Network

Each slave device on a multidrop system must have its own unique SNP ID (identification). The

SNP ID assignment is made with a programmer running GE Fanuc programming software, or with

the Hand Held Programmer. Logicmaster, Control, or Versa Pro software packages all can be used

for this purpose. The following example uses Logicmaster. Please see your software user’s

manual or on-line help screens for instructions. Regardless of what software you use, the basic

steps are:

Connect your programmer to each individual PLC or module on the multidrop system and

assign each one a unique SNP ID.

Connect your programmer to the multidrop system and select Multidrop for the programmer’s

connection method.

In the programming software, select the SNP ID of the PLC or module you wish to connect to.


I

Assigning a PLC SNP ID to a PLC with Logicmaster

Take your programmer to the first PLC to be assigned, and connect directly to its programmer

port.

From the Logicmaster Main Menu, select F2, “Logicmaster 90 Configuration Package.“

Select F2, “CPU Configuration.”

Put the software in the ONLINE mode.

Select F3, “Assign PLC ID.” On the ASSIGN PLC ID screen, the CURRENT PLC ID field

will display an ID if the PLC has one. If the PLC does not currently have an SNP ID, this field

will be blank. (In the OFFLINE mode it will display a series of asterisks.)

Key in the new PLC ID. For newer CPUs, it may be from one to seven alpha-numeric

characters long. For older CPUs, it is limited to a maximum of six characters. For example, it

could be PLC , APM00 , A , B0000 , etc.

Press the Enter key. The new SNP ID will be written to the PLC and the CURRENT PLC ID

field on your screen will update to show this new SNP ID.

Repeat the above steps for each PLC that is on the multidrop system. If assigning an SNP ID

to a module, you must use the appropriate software. See the user’s manual for the module for

instructions.

Connecting your Logicmaster Programmer to a PLC on a Multidrop System

Connect your programmer to the programmer connection for the multidrop system.

From the Logicmaster Main Menu, select F2, “Logicmaster 90 Configuration Package.”

Select F7, “Programmer Mode and Setup.”

Select F3, “Select PLC Connections.”

In the SELECTED SNP ID field, enter the SNP ID of the PLC or device you wish to

communicate with.

In the PORT CONNECTION field, select MULTIDROP.

Press F6, “setup,” to connect to the selected PLC. You should connect to the selected PLC

within a few seconds. If you cannot connect, see the next section.


I

SNP Multidrop Troubleshooting

If you are having trouble connecting to a PLC or module over the multidrop system, check the

following:

Is there a problem with all PLCs or only one? Try connecting to other PLCs over the

multidrop system. If you cannot connect to any, check for a common problem such as a

defective cable. If you can connect to all but one PLC, use the direct connection method

described in the next paragraph. Also, if you only have a problem with the last PLC on the

multidrop link, the last section of cable may have a problem. Or, perhaps you can connect to

all PLCs up to a certain point, but none beyond that point. This would also strongly suggest

that there is a problem in a section of cable.

SNP ID may be incorrect. You may not be able to connect because you are specifying the

wrong SNP ID. If you are not sure of a PLC’s correct SNP ID and would like to check it, you

can connect your programmer directly to the PLC’s programmer port and read its SNP ID from

the software’s ASSIGN PLC ID screen, (as described in “Assigning an SNP ID to a PLC with

Logicmaster,” above). Make sure you change the programming software’s connection method

to Direct for this test. When set for Direct connection, the software will communicate with a

directly connected PLC without regard to its SNP ID.

Communications settings may not match. If the PLC’s serial port communication settings

and the programming software’s communication settings do not match, they will not be able to

communicate. These settings include such things as BAUD Rate, Parity, Stop Bits, etc. If you

suspect this to be the problem, try connecting directly to the PLC as described above in “SNP

ID may be incorrect.” If you cannot connect directly, there may be a communication settings

mismatch. If so, try setting the programming software to its default communication settings.

Multidrop may not be selected as the connection method. The default connection method

in the programming software is Direct, which requires that you be connected directly to a PLC

or module’s programmer port. If this default setting is not changed to Multidrop, you will not

be able to connect to a selected SNP ID over a multidrop system.

You may have a hardware problem. Inspect the multidrop cable; it may be wired

incorrectly, damaged, or disconnected. A wire may be loose on one of the connectors. Also

check the status of the PLC you are trying to connect to. It may not be powered up; it may be

stopped; or it may have some other problem. Eliminate the PLC itself as a possible problem

by connecting your programmer directly to the PLC’s programmer port. You should be able to

communicate with a PLC using this direct connection even if the programming software is

configured for Multidrop, as long as the SNP IDs match.

GFK-0356Q J-1

Ethernet Transceivers

IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver

• Compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specification for 10BASE-T.

• Connector on transceiver body is standard RJ-45 type for connection to unshielded twisted

pair (UTP) Ethernet cable. .

• This unit has an attached 40" (1 meter) cable with standard 14-pin AAUI connector for

connecting to a Series 90-30 Ethernet module (IC693CMM321) or CPU with Ethernet

interface (IC693CPU364/CPU374).

• SQE option is enabled.

• Power and Link Integrity LED indicator lights.

LI

40 inches (1 meter)

14-Pin AAUIConnector

8-Pin RJ-45Connector

3.5" (89 mm) 1"(25mm)

1.8"(46mm)

8 9 101112 13 14

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Figure J-1. IC649AEA102 Ethernet 10BASE-T Transceiver

Power Requirement

This unit draws 60 mA @ 5Vdc from the Ethernet interface via the AAUI connector.

LED Indicator Lights

These are located on the end of the unit next to the RJ-45 connector. The one labeled LI stays on

as long as Link Integrity is maintained. The one marked with a “jagged arrow” symbol indicates

the presence of 5Vdc power to the unit.

JAppendix

J-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

J

IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver

Note: This transceiver replaces obsolete catalog number IC649AEA101

• Compliant with the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet specification for 10BASE2.

• A standard BNC connector is mounted on the body of the transceiver for connection to thin

coaxial Ethernet cable.

• This unit has an attached 10” (254 mm) cable with standard 14-pin AAUI connector for

connecting to a Series 90-30 Ethernet module (IC693CMM321) or CPU with Ethernet

interface (IC693CPU364).

• SQE slide switch is set to enabled position at the factory. It must be in this position for proper

operation with GE Fanuc Ethernet products IC693CMM321 and IC693CPU364 (see figure

below).

• Power LED indicator light.

10 inches (254mm)

14-Pin AAUIConnector

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3.2 inches (81 mm)

2 inches(51 mm)

Green LEDPower Indicator

SQE Slide Switch (recessed in housing)

Slide Switch in this Direction to Enable SQE.

0.9"(23 mm)

BNC Connector

Figure J-2. IC649AEA103 Ethernet 10BASE2 Transceiver

Power Requirement

This unit draws 400 mA @ 5Vdc from the Ethernet Interface via the AAUI connector.

LED Indicator Light

Located on the side of the unit as shown in the figure. This green LED turns on to indicate the

presence of 5Vdc power to the unit.

GFK-0356Q K-1

Tables and Formulas

Table K-1. Standard ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) Codes

Char. Dec. Hex. Char. Dec. Hex. Char. Dec. Hex.NULSOHSTXETXEOTENQACKBELBSHTLFVTFFCRSOSI

DLEDC1DC2DC3DC4NAKSYNETBCANEMSUBESCFSGSRSUSSP!”#$%&′()*

0123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142

000102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718191A1B1C1D1E1F202122232425262728292A

+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

43444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485

2B2C2D2E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F404142434445464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455

VWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz|~“

8687888990919293949596979899

100101012103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127

565758595A5B5C5D5E5F606162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F707172737475767778797A7B7C7D7E7F

KAppendix

K-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

K

AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion

Since there is not an exact correspondence between American AWG wire sizes and metric sizes,

the metric values in the following table are close approximations. If you need greater precision,

contact your wire supplier.

Table K-2. AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion

AWG to Metric Wire Size Conversion

AWG Size Metric Cross Section in

square millimeters (mm2 )

1 42.4

2 33.6

4 21.2

6 13.2

8 8.37

10 5.26

12 3.31

14 2.08

16 1.31

18 0.82

20 0.52

22 0.32

24 0.21

26 0.13

28 0.081

30 0.051

GFK-0356Q Appendix K Tables and Formulas K-3

K

Temperature Conversion

Formulas

°C = 5/9(°F – 32)

°F = (9/5 x °C) + 32

Table K-3. Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion

Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion (to nearest degree)

Degrees

Celsius

Degrees

Fahrenheit

Degrees

Celsius

Degrees

Fahrenheit

Degrees

Celsius

Degrees

Fahrenheit

-50 -58 50 122 145 293

-45 -49 55 131 150 302

-40 -40 60 140 155 311

-30 -22 65 149 160 320

-25 -13 70 158 165 329

-20 -4 75 167 170 338

-15 5 80 176 175 347

-10 14 85 185 180 356

-5 23 90 194 185 365

0 32 95 203 190 374

5 41 100 212 195 383

10 50 105 221 200 392

15 59 110 230 205 401

20 68 115 239 210 410

25 77 120 248 215 419

30 86 125 257 220 428

35 95 130 266 225 437

40 104 135 275 230 446

45 113 140 284 235 455


K

Conversion Information

Table K-4. General Conversions

1 ounce (weight) = 28.35 grams

1 pound (weight) = 453.6 grams

1 pound (weight) = 16 ounces

1 pound (force) = 4.448 newtons

1 short ton (weight)= 907.2 kilograms

1 short ton (weight)= 2,000 pounds

1 horsepower (power)= 550 foot-pounds per second

1 horsepower (power) = 746 watts of electrical power

1 kilowatt (power) = 1.341 horsepower

1 kilowatt-hour (energy or work) = 3,412.142 Btu

1 kilowatt-hour (energy or work) = 1,000 watts/hr.

1 watt (power) = 3.412 Btu/hr.

1 watt (power) = 1 joule/sec.

1 joule/sec. (power) = 1 watt

1 joule (energy)= 1 newton-meter

1 Btu = 0.293 watt

1 Btu = 778.2 foot-pounds

1 Btu = 252 gram-calories

1 Btu (energy)= 1055 joules

1 newton-meter (torque or work) = 0.7376 pound-feet

1 newton-meter (torque or work) = 8.851 pound-inches

1 pound-foot (torque or work) = 1.3558 newton-meters

1 pound-inch (torque or work) = 0.113 newton-meters

1 ounce-inch (torque or work) = 72 gram-centimeters

1 degree (angular) = 0.0175 radians

1 minute (angular) = 0.01667 degrees

1 radian (angular) = 57.3 degrees

1 quadrant (angular) = 90 degrees

GFK-0356Q Appendix K Tables and Formulas K-5

K

English and Metric Equivalents

This section is based upon information published on the World Wide Web by the U.S.

government’s National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). For further information,

visit their web site at www.nist.gov.

Table K-5. Length Equivalents

Units of Length (Underlined Figures are Exact)

Units Inches Feet Yards Millimeters Centimeters Meters

1 inch = 1 0.083 333 0.027 777 25.4 2.54 0.025 4

1 foot = 12 1 0.333 333 304.8 30.48 0.304 8

1 yard = 36 3 1 914.4 91.44 0.914 4

1 mile = 63,360 5,280 1,760 1,609,344 160,934.4 1,609.344

1 mm = 0.0393 700 0.003 280 8 0.001 093 6 1 .1 .001

1 cm = 0.393 700 8 0.032 808 0.010 936 10 1 0.01

1 meter = 39.370 08 3.280 840 1.093 613 1000 100 1

Table K-6. Area Equivalents

Units of Area (Underlined Figures are Exact)

Units Square

Inches

Square Feet Square

Yards

Square

Centimeters

Square Meters

1 square inch = 1 0.006944 0.000 771 604 9 6.451 6 0.000 645 16

1 square foot = 144 1 0.111111 929.030 4 0.092 903 04

1 square yard = 1296 9 1 8,361.273 6 0.836 127 36

1 square mile = 4,014,489,600 27,878,400 3,097,600 25,899,881,103.36 2,589,988.110 336

1 square

centimeter =

0.155 000 3 0.001 076 391 0.0001195990 1 0.0001

1 square meter = 1,550.003 10.763 91 1.195 990 10,000 1

http://www.nist.gov/


K

Table K-7. Volume Equivalents I

Units of Volume (Underlined Figures are Exact)

Units Cubic Inches Cubic Feet Cubic Yards

1 cubic inch = 1 0.000 578 703 7 0.000 021 433 47

1 cubic foot = 1,728 1 0.037 037 04

1 cubic yard = 46,656 27 1

1 cubic centimeter = 0.061 023 74 0.000 035 314 67 0.000 001 307 951

1 cubic decimeter = 61.023 74 0.035 314 67 0.001 307 951

1 cubic meter 61,023.74 35.314 67 1.307 951

Table K-8. Volume Equivalents II

Units of Volume (Underlined Figures are Exact)

Units Milliliters

(Cubic Centimeters)

Liters

(Cubic Decimeters)

Cubic Meters

1 cubic Inch = 16.387 064 0.016 387 064 0.000 016 387 064

1 cubic foot = 28,316.846 592 28.316 846 592 0.028 316 846 592

1 cubic yard = 764,554.857 984 764.554 857 984 0.764 554 857 984

1 cubic centimeter = 1 0.001 0.000 001

1 cubic decimeter = 1,000 1 0.001

1 cubic meter = 1,000,000 1,000 1

GFK-0356Q L-1

44A420084-001 EMI Line Filter

44A720084-001 Optional EMI Line Filter

Note

This product is not required on later versions of the Series 90-30 PLC. Thisinformation is provided as a reference for those already using this product. Thisitem is still available for purchase from GE Fanuc.

Early versions of the Series 90-30 PLC and its associated hardware components were designed

primarily for use in industrial applications which are, in general, exempted from FCC

requirements. The AC power supply in those early PLCs may not comply with FCC requirements

in non-industrial applications for conducted EMI on AC power lines. In a situation where it was

desired to satisfy the FCC requirements for non-industrial applications, a line filter was used in

series with the AC power line input. Later versions of the Series 90-30 PLC meet FCC

requirements and do not require a separate line filter.

A line filter that satisfies the FCC requirements for non-industrial applications is available from GE

Fanuc as part number 44A720084-001. Figure L-1 provides a wiring diagram for connecting the

line filter in a Series 90-30 PLC.

LAppendix

L-2 Series 90-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

L

Figure L-1. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Connections to Series 90-30 Power Supply

The equivalent circuit for the line filter is shown below. This is provided in case you wish to

specify or design a line filter as an alternative to the one mentioned above.

7.06m H

1M .33 .0033

.33.33.33.33 .0033

L

G

N

7.06m H

L

N

µµµµf

µµµµfµµµµf

µµµµf

Figure L-2. Equivalent Circuit for 44A720084-001 Line Filter

a45627

BROWN

GRN/YEL

BLUE

TERMINAL

STRIP

H

N

G

L

G

N

NOTE:

BLUE

BROWN H

N

G

POWER

SUPPLY

FILTER

L

N

FILTER CASE AND ENCLOSURE SHOULD ALSO

BE GROUNDED, IF POSSIBLE.

GFK-0356Q Appendix L 44A420084-001 EMI Line Filter L-3

L

44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions

a45626

D

E

Oty.2 A

BLU

BRN

BLU

BRN

GRN/YELB

C

Dimension

2.09

53.09

A

1.84

46.74

B

1.29

32.77

C

.0102.375

.2560.32

D

2.75

69.85

E

Inches

Millimeters

Mtg. Holes

.008(2) .187

.0.20(2) 4.75

Mounting Holes

Figure L-3. 44A720084-001 Line Filter Mounting Dimensions

Index

GFK-0356Q Index-1

110BASE2

Ethernet transceiver, J-2

10BASE-TEthernet transceiver, J-1

332-Point modules

figure, 7-5installation, 2-20installing, 2-19TBQC, H-11wiring, 7-6

444A720084-001

EMI line filter, L-1

AAAUI

connector on CPU364, 5-24connector on transceiver, J-2

AAUI (transceiver) port, 8-30AC/DC high capacity power supply

illustration of, 4-4overvoltage protection devices, 2-24specifications, 4-5

AC/DC power suppliesovercurrent protection, 4-18status indicators, 4-16timing diagram, 4-18

AC/DC standard power supplyac power source connections, 4-5dc power source connections, 4-5illustration of, 4-2overvoltage protection devices, 2-24, 4-5, 4-16specifications, 4-3

Accompany Program, 8-1Acronyms and abbreviations

ADC, 3-12CMM, 3-12DIP, 2-28GCM, 8-2GCM+, 8-4HHP, 11-1HMI, 12-3PCM, 3-12PLC, 1-1SLP, 9-4TBQC, 2-18TCM, 8-2

AD693CMM301module drawing, 9-2

State Logic Serial Module, 9-2

AD693SLP300State Logic processor, 9-4

Adapter bracket for 10-slot baseplate, 2-8, 3-20ADC

Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor, 8-35Wye cable, 10-35

AddressMemory, 5-10

Analog I/O modulesFigure, 7-9Wiring methods, 2-21, 7-9

APMAxis Positioning Module, 8-15Cable data sheets, 10-45

AppendicesEthernet transceivers, J-1isolated repeater/converter, C-1

Axis Positioning Module(APM), 8-15

BBackplane

Baseplate, 3-12Definition, 3-3

BackupUser program, 6-3

Backup battery, 4-20Baseplate

Comparison table, 3-22expansion dimensions, 3-18Grounding, 2-12Modular CPU dimensions, 3-18mounting, 2-8remote 10-slot, 3-9remote 5-slot, 3-9remote dimensions, 3-18selecting, 12-5

Baseplate adapter bracketfor 10-slot baseplate, 2-8, 3-20installation, 2-9, 3-20

Baseplate installationmounting requirements, model 311/313/323, 3-16

Baseplate, remotefigure, 3-9

Baseplatesadapter bracket, 2-8, 3-20Common features, 3-1dimensions for mounting, 10-slot, 3-17, 3-18dimensions for mounting, 5-slot, 3-16, 3-17Embedded CPU dimensions, 3-16Expansion, 3-7Expansion and Remote in same system, 3-11Expansion, features, 3-7mounting in 19, 2-9, 3-21number in FIP Nest, 8-12

Index

Index-2 Series 90™-30 PLC Installation and Hardware Manual – August 2002 GFK-0356Q

power supply location, 4-2Remote, features, 3-8Serial number location, 3-2Sizes, 3-2Terminology, 3-3Types, 3-1

BatteryCPU memory backup, 6-1Date code, 6-7Determining age, 6-7installation

accessory kit, 6-10Life, 6-4Low warning, 6-4Memory backup, 4-20Operating without, 6-6RAM backup path, 6-8Replacement strategy, 6-3

Battery accessory kitFor embedded CPUs, 6-9

Blocks, Genius, 8-6Bracket, adapter, 2-8, 3-20Break-free SNP protocol, 5-13Bus

connectors, 8-11

Bus controller, FIP, 8-10Bus interface, 8-13

CCable

32-point I/O, 10-42, 10-49APM, 10-45Building 32-point, 10-59cross-reference table, 10-1Data sheet list, 10-7Extension for I/O module, 10-38HHP, 10-33I/O bus expansion, 10-22I/O for 32-point modules, 10-40I/O interface, 10-54, 10-57IC690CBL714A multidrop, 10-18Programmer, 10-12, 10-14, 10-16PTM interface, 10-65WSI, 10-8Wye port expansion, 10-35

Cable and connections for serial port, A-2multidrop cable, I-2

Cable diagrams for isolated repeater/converter,C-8

Cable diagrams, serial connection, A-8Cable for Series 90-30 installations

extension cable for 32 point modules, 10-38, 10-54, 10-62hand-held programmer cable, 10-33I/O cable for 32 point modules, 10-40

I/O cable for Power Mate APM to terminalblock, 10-45I/O interface cable for 32 point I/O modules, 10-42, 10-49, 10-57pcm to PC-AT, 10-14pcm to Workmaster (PC-XT), 10-12pcm to Workmaster II (PS/2), 10-16work station interface cable, 10-8wye cable wiring diagram, earlier versionbaseplates, 10-29wye cables, 10-35

Cable for Series 90-30 Installationsshield treatment, 10-26

CablesAPM, 8-16building I/O Bus Expansion, 10-22I/O Expansion Bus, 3-10picture, 10-65SNP multidrop, I-2

Calculations for power supply loadsexamples, 12-14

Catalog numberCPU, 5-7

Catalog number locationBaseplate, 3-2

Catalog numbers, cablesIC647CBL704, 10-8IC693CBL304, 10-35IC693CBL305, 10-35

CCM, 8-34CCM communications protocol, 8-34CCM protocol

PCM module, 8-31

Clearance requirementsPLC rack, 12-17

CMMComm. Coprocessor Module, 8-34Wye cable, 10-35

CNC, 8-24Color coding

Wires, 2-17

COM port, standard serial, 11-3Comm. Coprocessor Module

IC693CMM311, 8-34

Communicationsusing datagrams, 8-6

CompatibilityUser program to CPU type, 5-12

ConfigurableMemory, 5-14

Conformance to standards, 2-1Connector, serial port, 4-19, 5-3, 9-11Converter

IC690ACC900, 11-3IC690ACC901, 11-4

Converter board jumper configuration, B-8Converter, RS-232/RS-485, A-7

Index

GFK-0356Q Index Index-3

ConvertersIC655CCM590, C-1IC690ACC900, B-1IC690ACC901, D-1IC690ACC903, 11-4

CPU350 hardware features, 5-18350-374 features, 5-13351 hardware features, 5-19352 hardware features, 5-19360 hardware features, 5-18363 hardware features, 5-19364 hardware features, 5-23374 hardware features, 5-25capacities, 5-10Compatibility with HHP, 5-13Data sheets contents, 5-27, 9-13Embedded features figure, 5-2Embedded overview, 5-1Firmware, 5-6Firmware upgrade, 5-6jumpers for EPROM/EEPROM selection, model331, 5-8Keyswitch, 5-15Memory size table, 5-11Microprocessors, 5-3Modular features figure, 5-3Modular overview, 5-2Revision level, 5-7selecting, 12-4serial port connector, 4-19, 5-3, 9-11Serial ports, 5-15speed, 5-10State Logic, 9-8state logic, model CSE 331, 9-10state logic, model CSE 340, 9-10Time of day clock accuracy, 5-12Types, 5-1

CPU 350-374features table, 5-14

CPU 351grounding information, 2-14

CPU baseplateDefined, 3-3Types, 3-4

CPU baseplatesEmbedded, 3-4Modular, 3-6

CPU data sheetsCPU311, 5-28CPU313, 5-29CPU323, 5-30CPU331, 5-31CPU340, 5-32CPU341, 5-33CPU350, 5-34CPU351, 5-35CPU352, 5-36CPU360, 5-37

CPU363, 5-38CPU364, 5-39CPU374, 5-40CSE 311, 9-14CSE 313, 9-15CSE 323, 9-16CSE 331, 9-17CSE 340, 9-18

Current drawmodule, 12-12

Customer service, telephone number, 2-1

DData, global, 8-9Datagrams, 8-6Date code

Battery, 6-7

DC high capacity power supply5 vdc current derating diagram, 4-14calculating input power requirements, 4-15capacities, 4-13illustration of, 4-13output voltages to backplane, 4-17specifications, 4-14

DC power supplydc power connections, 4-15input power requirements, calculating, 4-8, 4-11,4-15isolated +24 vdc supply connections, 4-6, 4-15overcurrent protection, 4-18specifications, 4-8, 4-11status indicators, 4-16timing diagram, 4-18

DC power supply (24/48 VDC)illustration of, 4-7

DC power supply (48 VDC)illustration of, 4-10

Default station address label, 8-30Diagram, timing, 4-18Digital Servo Module

DSM302, 8-17DSM314, 8-20

Dimensions19-inch Rack Mounting w/ IC693ACC308

Adapter Bracket, 2-9baseplates, embedded CPU, 3-16baseplates, modular, 3-18for 19- inch rack mounting w/ IC693ACC308

adapter bracket, 3-21IC693ACC313 recessed mount adapter bracket,3-21IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount AdapterBracket, 2-10

Direct processing, definition, 8-27DOIO

instruction, 13-4

Index


Drops, remote, 8-6DSM

Digital Servo Module (DSM302), 8-17Digital Servo Module (DSM314), 8-20

EEEPROM, 5-5Embedded baseplates

State Logic, 9-9

Embedded CPU baseplates, 3-4Features (figure), 3-5

EMIfilter requirement, L-1

EMI line filter44A720084<#106>001, L-1

Enclosure, 2-1, F-1Enhanced Genius Comm. Module, 8-4EPROM, 5-5

Creating, 5-9

EPROM/EEPROM catalog numbersIC693ACC305, 5-9IC693ACC306, 5-9

EthernetCPU364/374 embedded, 5-17transceiver, J-1, J-2transceiver, obsolete, J-2

Ethernet interfacerestart pushbutton, 8-30

Ethernet interface module, 8-29board indicators, 8-30

Ethernet transceiverIC649AEA102, J-1IC649AEA103, 8-29, J-2

Expansionbaseplates, 3-7bus termination, 3-12, 10-25extension cables, description of, 10-38, 10-54,10-62port pin assignments, 10-25

Expansion baseplatedefined, 3-3IC693CHS392 figure, 3-8IC693CHS398 figure, 3-7

Expansion systemexample, 3-14remote connections, 3-15, 10-31requirements of, 12-16

Extension cables, I/O, 10-38, 10-54, 10-62External battery module, 6-10

FFaceplate, I/O, H-3Fax Link system, 13-9FBC

FIP Bus Controller, 8-10

Features of the DSM302Easy to Use, 8-18, 8-21High Performance, 8-18

Field control, 8-10Field Control

using with PLC, 12-7

Field wiringto AC/DC power supplies, 2-23

Field wiring connectionsto dc input power supply, 4-15to standard ac/dc power supply, 4-5

FIP bus, 8-12FIP bus controller, 8-10

description, 8-11

FIP nestdescription, 8-12

FIP remote I/O scanner, 8-12connectors, 8-13ground lug on module, 8-13LEDs, 8-13

FirmwareCPU, 5-6CPU table, 5-6CPU upgrade, 5-6CPU Version 9.0, 5-14Upgrading 350-364 CPUs, 5-14

Firmware upgrade procedure for flash memory,5-7

FlashMemory protection, 5-15

Flash memory, 5-5, 5-9, 5-15firmware upgrade procedure, 5-7

Floating neutral (IT) systems, 2-25Floating-point math, 5-15

GGBC

Genius Bus Controller, 8-6

GCMExample (figure), 1-9Genius Comm. Module, 8-2

GCM+Enhanced Genius Comm. Module, 8-4

Genius blocks, 8-6Genius Blocks

using with PLC, 12-7

Genius bus controller, 8-6compatibility

hand-held monitor, 8-7Logicmaster 90-30/20/micro software, 8-7Series 90-30 PLC, 8-7Series Six plc, 8-7

datagrams, 8-9diagnostics, 8-8

Index


global data operation, 8-9number in system, 8-7status LEDs, 8-3, 8-5, 8-7

COM, 8-3, 8-5, 8-7OK, 8-3, 8-5, 8-7

Genius bus scan, 8-8Genius Comm. Module

(GCM), 8-2

Genius hand-held monitor, 8-6, 8-8Genius I/O blocks, 8-8Global data, 8-6, 8-9

receiving, 8-9sending, 8-9

Ground bracketCPU351, 352 figure, 2-15

Ground conductor installation, 2-11Ground connections

equipment, 2-12programming device, 2-13safety and reference, 2-12shield ground, 2-14

Ground wireCPU363, 364 figure, 2-16

Grounding procedures, 2-11Baseplate, 2-12CPU shield, 2-14Module shield, 2-14Option modules, 2-16Programmer, 2-13system, 2-11

HHand-held monitor (Genius)

compatibility, 8-7

Hand-held monitor, Genius, 8-6Hand-held programmer

CPU compatibility, 5-13features of, 11-6GBC configuration, 8-8modes of operation, 11-6

Hand-held Programmerfunction with FIP I/O nest, 8-12

Hand-Held ProgrammerCable data sheet, 10-33general description, 11-5

Hand-held programmer cabledescription of, 10-33

Hardwareload requirements, 12-12

Heat dissipationcalculating, 12-17

Helpfrom GE Fanuc, 13-9

HHP, 11-5Cable data sheet, 10-33

High capacity AC/DC power supply

illustration of, 4-4overvoltage protection devices, 2-24specifications, 4-5

High capacity DC power supplyspecifications, 4-14

High Capacity DC power supply (24 VDC)illustration of, 4-13

High speed counter, 8-23Horner Electric, Inc., 11-8Host CPU, 8-12Hotline, PLC, 2-1HSC

High Speed Counter, 8-23

II/O bus expansion cable

description of, 10-22maximum cable distance, 10-23maximum number in system, 10-23

I/O Bus Expansion cablesApplication examples, 10-31building, 10-22wiring diagrams, 10-28

I/O bus termination information, 10-31I/O cables for 32-point modules, 10-40I/O expansion

bus termination, 3-12, 10-25system connections, 10-31

I/O Expansion Bus cables, 3-10I/O faceplate, H-3I/O interface cables

for 32-point modules, 10-42, 10-49, 10-57for Power Mate APM modules, 10-45

I/O link interface moduleslave, 8-24

I/O link master module, 8-25compatibility, 8-26restart pushbutton, 8-26serial port, 8-26

I/O moduleFigure, standard density, 7-3

I/O ModuleRelay protection, 7-4

I/O modules32-point figure, 7-532-point wiring figure, 7-6basic types, 7-1inserting a module, 2-3installing a terminal board, 2-5number in FIP Nest, 8-12removing a module, 2-4removing a terminal board, 2-6Wiring 32-point modules, 7-6wiring to modules, 2-18

I/O Modules32-point features, 7-4

Index


50-pin, 32-point figure, 7-5Analog features, 7-8Standard density, 7-2Wire routing, 7-11

I/O processor modulechanging configuration parameters, 8-28configuration

using Logicmaster 90 configurator, 8-28using the hand-held programmer, 8-28

features, 8-28threshold voltage, 8-28watchdog timer circuit, 8-28

I/O Processor Module, 8-27I/O terminal block

IC693ACC329, H-6IC693ACC330, H-7IC693ACC331, H-8IC693ACC332, H-9IC693ACC333, H-10IC693ACC377, H-13

IBM-AT/XT serial port, A-5IC640WMI310

WSI board, 11-2

IC640WMI320WSI board, 11-2

IC647CBL704Cable, WSI, 10-8

IC649AEA101Obsolete Ethernet transceiver, J-2

IC649AEA102Ethernet transceiver, 5-24, 8-29, 8-30, J-1

IC649AEA103Ethernet transceiver, 5-24, 8-29, 8-30, J-2

IC655CCM590isolated repeater/converter, C-1

IC655CMM590Obsolete repeater/converter, 11-8

IC690ACC900RS-232 to RS-485 Converter, 11-3

IC690ACC901Miniconverter, 11-4

IC690ACC903Port Isolator overview, 11-8

IC690CBL701Cable, programmer, 10-12

IC690CBL702Cable, programmer, 10-14use on PCM modules, 8-32, 8-36

IC690CBL705Cable, programmer, 10-16

IC690CBL714ACable, multidrop, 10-18multidrop cable, I-2

IC693ACC301Memory backup battery, 6-1

IC693ACC303HHP memory card, 11-6

IC693ACC308baseplate adapter bracket, 2-8, 3-20

IC693ACC308 Bracket19, 2-9, 3-21

IC693ACC313 Bracketrecessed 19, 2-10, 3-21

IC693ACC315Battery accessory kit, 6-9

IC693ACC329TBQC, H-6




IC693ACC333, H-10IC693ACC377

TBQC, H-13

IC693ADC311Alphanumeric Coprocessor, 8-35

IC693APU300High Speed Counter, 8-23

IC693APU301/302Axis Positioning Module, 8-15

IC693APU305I/O Processor Module, 8-27

IC693BEM320I/O link, slave, 8-24

IC693BEM321I/O Link, master, 8-25

IC693BEM330FIP Remote I/O Scanner, 8-12

IC693BEM331Genius Bus Controller, 8-6

IC693BEM340FIP Bus Controller Module, 8-10

IC693CBK002/003/004cable kits for TBQC, 10-63

IC693CBL300Cable, I/O Bus Expansion, 10-22



IC693CBL303Data sheet, 10-33

IC693CBL304Wye cable, 10-35

IC693CBL305use on CMM module, 8-34use on PCM modules, 8-32, 8-36Wye cable, 10-35

IC693CBL306Cable, 32-point I/O, 10-38

IC693CBL307

Index


Cable, 32-point I/O, 10-38




IC693CBL311APM cable, 8-16Cable, APM I/O, 10-45



IC693CBL314Cable, I/O Bus Expansion, 10-22use with DSM302, 8-17


IC693CBL316use on Ethernet module, 8-30use with DSM314, 8-20















IC693CBL340/341Cable, PTM interface, 10-65checking, 10-66connecting, 10-65

data sheet, 10-65lengths, 10-65ordering information, 10-66picture, 10-65pin-out list, 10-66

IC693CHS392figure, 3-8

IC693CHS393figure, 3-9remote baseplate, 3-9



IC693CMM302Genius Comm. Module +, 8-4

IC693CMM311Comm. Coprocessor, 8-34

IC693CMM321Ethernet Interface module, 8-29

IC693CPU311Data sheet, 5-28figure, 3-5

IC693CPU313Data sheet, 5-29

IC693CPU313 figure, 3-5IC693CPU323

Data Sheet, 5-30figure, 3-5




IC693CPU350Data sheet, 5-34Hareware features, 5-18

IC693CPU351Data sheet, 5-35Hardware features, 5-19


IC693CPU360Data sheet, 5-37Hareware features, 5-18




IC693CSE311

Index


Data sheet, 9-14

IC693CSE311 baseplatedrawing, 9-9

IC693CSE313Data sheet, 9-15


IC693CSE323Data sheet, 9-16


IC693CSE331Data sheet, 9-17drawing, 9-10State Logic CPU, 9-10

IC693CSE340Data sheet, 9-18drawing, 9-10State Logic CPU, 9-10

IC693DSM302Digital Servo Module, 8-17module drawing, 8-17

IC693DSM314Digital Servo Module, 8-20module drawing, 8-20

IC693DVM300connections, 7-14module drawing, 7-12specifications table, 7-13valve driver module, 7-12

IC693GCM301Genius Comm. Module, 8-2

IC693PCM300/301/311Prog. Coprocessor, 8-31

IC693PRG300Hand-Held Programmer, 11-5

IC693PTM100/101Power Transducer, 8-40

IC693PWR321power supply, 4-2





IC693SLP300module drawing, 9-4

IC693TCM302Temperature Contol Module, 8-37

IC693TCM302/303module drawing, 8-37

Illustration of the DSM302 Module, 8-18Illustration of the DSM314 Module, 8-21Indicator lights

relating to I/O terminals, 13-1see LED indicators also, 13-2

Inspection, new system, 2-1Installation

32-Point modules, 2-20baseplate adapter bracket, 2-8, 3-20baseplate, model 311/313, 3-16baseplate, model 323, 3-17Basic procedure, 2-28grounding procedures, 2-11I/O expansion system, 10-31load requirements for components, 12-12multidrop configuration, 10-9pcm to programmer cables, 10-13, 10-15, 10-17remote expansion system, 3-15, 10-31

Installing, I/O Module Term Board, 2-5Instructions for floating neutral (IT) systems,

2-25Internet

GE Fanuc site, 13-9

Interposing terminal blocks, 2-19, H-2, H-12Isolated Repeater/Conv.

overview (obsolete), 11-8

Isolated repeater/converter, 11-4cable diagrams, C-8complex multidrop configuration, C-6description of, C-1illustration of, C-2logic diagram, C-3pin assignments, C-4rules for using, C-7simple multidrop configuration, C-6system configurations, C-5

JJumper strap for overvoltage protection

devices, 4-6, 4-17Jumpers for EPROM/EEPROM selection, 5-8Jumpers, converter board, B-7

configuration of, B-8

KKey, CPU

replacement, 5-16, 13-7

KeyswitchCPU, 5-15

Kits, spare parts, mechanical, 13-7

LLayout PLC system

good layout benefits, 12-17

Layout, PLCfigure, 12-20

Index


Layout, PLC systemguidelines, 12-17

LED indicatorsCPU, 13-2Input modules, 13-2Option modules, 13-2Output modules, 13-2P1 (CPU 351/352), 5-20P2 (CPU 351/352), 5-20power supplies, 4-16relating to terminal board, 13-1SNP (CPU 351/352), 5-20

LEDs, 8-11, 8-30List of fuses, 13-6Lithium battery, 4-20Load capacity, power supply, 12-12Load requirements

hardware components, 12-12sample calculations, 12-14table of, 12-12

Local expansion systemexample, point-to-point wiring, 10-28

Locationof modules in racks, 12-18rack, 12-17

Low battery warning, 4-20, 6-1

MMAC address

for CPU374, 2-2

Machine references (% symbol), 5-10Maintenance, preventive

table, 13-8

Making a 100% shielded cable, 10-27Math

Floating point feature, 5-15

Maximum number of modules per system, 12-11

Mechanical spare parts kits, 13-7Megabasic, 8-31Memory

Comparing PROM devices, 5-8Configurable, 5-14CPU table, 5-11Flash, 5-9, 5-15Flash, protection, 5-15Maintaining during storage, 6-9PROM types, 5-5Protection strategy, 6-3RAM, 5-5User options, 5-8Volatility, 5-4

Memory cardHHP, 11-6

Microprocessor typesCPU, 5-3

Miniconverter kitcable diagrams, D-3IC690ACC901, 11-4RS-232 port pin assignments, D-2RS-422 (SNP) to RS-232, D-1RS-422 port pin assignments, D-2specifications, D-4system configurations, D-3

Model 331jumpers for EPROM/EEPROM, 5-8

Modulelocation, 12-18

Module count, 12-7maximum table, 12-11

Module features, 2-2Module load requirements

table, 12-12

Module locationDefined, 3-3figure, 12-19

Module location in baseplatenumber of, valid, 12-11

Modulesreplacing, 13-5

Motion Mate APM300, 8-15Axis Postioning Module, 8-15

Motion Mate DSMDSM302, 8-17DSM314, 8-20

Motion Mate DSM302Illustration of, 8-18

Motion Mate DSM314Illustration of, 8-21

Mountingbaseplates, 2-8

Multidropconfiguring, I-5system limitations, I-2

Multidrop cablesspecification table, I-2types, I-2

Multidrop configuration, 10-11with converter, 10-9with isolated repeater/converter, C-6

Multidrop connections, A-10Multidrop, SNP

connecting, I-6examples, I-4overview, I-1setting SNP ID, I-5troubleshooting, I-7wiring diagram, I-3

Multiple hosts, Genius, 8-6

Index


NNickname

Compared to address, 5-10

OOperation without battery, 6-7Operator interface terminal, 8-35Option module

list, 8-1

Option modulesalphanumeric display coprocessor, 8-35Comm. Coprocessor, 8-34DSM302, 8-17DSM314, 8-20enhanced genius communications, 8-4Ethernet interface, 8-29FIP bus controller, 8-10FIP remote I/O scanner, 8-12Genius bus controller, 8-6Genius communications, 8-2high speed counter, 8-23I/O link interface, slave, 8-24I/O link master, 8-25I/O processor, 8-27Motion Mate APM300, 8-15personal computer interface card, 11-7Power Transducer, 8-40programmable coprocessor modules, 8-31state logic processor, 9-5Temperature Control (TCM), 8-37

Output module fuses, 13-6Overvoltage protection devices, 4-5, 4-16

jumper strap installation, 2-24

PParts kits, mechanical, spare, 13-7PCIF/PCIF2

description, 11-7

PCMWye cable, 10-35

Personal Computer InterfaceData sheet, 11-7

Planning your system, 12-1PLC

basics, 1-1Customer service, 2-1hotline, 2-1mounting orientation, 12-21

PLC mountingmounting orientation, 12-21

Point-to-point RS-232 connections, A-8Point-to-point RS-422 connections, A-10

Port, 8-11Port expansion

Cables for PCM, ADC, CMM, 10-35

Port expansion cable, 10-35Port Isolator

overview, 11-8

Port, serialCPU351, 352, 353, 5-22

Port, serial, Series 90, A-3Ports, ethernet interface

AAUI, 8-30firmware upgrade, 8-30serial, ethernet interface, 8-30

station manager port, 8-30Posts, terminal board, 2-7Power supply

+24 vdc output connections, 2-2724/48 VDC input, 4-748 VDC input, 4-10AC power source connections, 2-23AC/DC input, 4-2Backup battery, location, 4-20comparison table, 12-6Feature comparison, 4-1field wiring to DC input supply, 4-15field wiring to standard AC/DC supply, 2-23, 4-5high capacity 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 4-4high capacity 24 VDC input, 4-13isolated +24 vdc supply connections, 4-6, 4-15load calculation, 12-12load capacity, 12-12load ratings, 3-19location in baseplate, 4-2mounting orientation, 3-19serial port connector, location of, 4-19, 5-3, 9-11standard 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 4-2temperature, 3-19, 12-21

Power SupplyDC input only, 4-7

Power supply capacitiesdc supply, 4-7, 4-10, 4-13high capacity AC/DC supply, 4-4standard AC/DC supply, 4-2

Power supply output voltages, 4-17Power supply rating

effect of mounting position, 12-21

Power Supply slot, 3-3Power supply specifications

dc supply, 4-8, 4-11high capacity ac/dc supply, 4-5high capacity dc supply, 4-14standard ac/dc supply, 4-3

Power TransducerIC693PTM100/101, 8-40

Powering downExpansion and remote racks, 3-12

Index


Preinstallation check, 2-1Preventive maintenance

table, 13-8

Product supportcustomer service, 2-1technical help, 2-1

Program compatibility, 5-12Programmable coprocessor modules, 8-31Programmer, Hand-Held

IC693PRG300, 11-5

PROMConfiguration table, 5-6Types, 5-5Use in Series 90-30, 5-5

PROM optionEPROM/EEPROM selection, model 331, 5-8

Protection devices, overvoltage, 2-24, 4-5, 4-16Protocol

CMM, 8-34RTU (Modbus), 8-34SNP, 8-34

PTMPower Transducer, 8-40

QQuick connect terminal block, H-2

RRack

Definition, 3-3

Rack numberSelection switch, 3-13

RAMMemory, 5-5

RAM memory backup battery, 4-20, 6-1Reference types, user, 5-11References, not used, 8-7Relay output module

Protection, 7-4

Remotebaseplates, 3-8

Remote baseplate10-slot, 3-9Defined, 3-3IC693CHS399, 3-9

Remote baseplatesFeatures, 3-8

Remote drops, 8-6, 8-10Remote expansion system

connections, 3-15, 10-31example of using wye cables, 10-30example, point-to-point wiring

applications requiring less noiseimmunity, 10-28

wye cable wiring diagram, earlier versionbaseplates, 10-29

Remote I/O scanner, FIPdescription of, 8-12features of, 8-12

Repeater/converter, isolated, 11-4cable diagrams, C-8complex multidrop configuration, C-6description of, C-1illustration of, C-2logic diagram, C-3pin assignments, C-4rules for using, C-7simple multidrop configuration, C-6system configurations, C-5

Replacing modules, 13-5Restart pushbutton

alphanumeric display coprocessor, 8-35communications control, 8-34ethernet interface, 8-30I/O link master, 8-26

RS-232converter, obsolete, 11-3

RS-232 point-to-point connections, A-8RS-232/RS-485 converter, A-7RS-422

cable specs., A-2pin-out, A-4Serial interface, A-1

RS-422 point-to-point connections, A-10RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 converter

cable description, B-3features, B-1functions, B-1installation procedures, B-2jumper configuration, user options, B-7location in system, B-2logic diagram, B-6RS-232 interface pin assignments, B-4RS-422/RS-485 interface assignments, B-5

RS-485converter, obsolete, 11-3

RS-485 compatible serial port, 4-19, 5-3RTU (Modbus) communications protocol, 8-34RTU master protocol

PCM module, 8-31

SScan time

factors affecting, 12-16

SCMState Logic Serial Module, 9-2

Sequential Event Recorder, 5-16SER, 5-16

instruction, 13-4

Serial number

Index


Baseplates, 3-2Ethernet interface module, 8-30

Serial numbers, recording, 2-1Serial port, 8-11

351 connectors, 5-20352 connectors, 5-20363 connectors, 5-20I/O link master module, 8-26IBM-AT/XT, A-5LED indicators, 5-20pin-out, IBM-AT/XT, A-6pin-out, Workmaster, A-5Series 90, A-3Workmaster, A-4

Serial Portethernet interface, 8-30

Serial port and cablesworkmaster serial port, A-4

Serial port and cables, appendix Acable and connector specifications, A-2IBM-AT/XT serial port, A-5multidrop connections, A-10RS-232 point-to-point connections, A-8RS-232/RS-485 converter, A-7RS-422 interface, A-1RS-422 point-to-point connection, A-10serial cable diagrams, A-8

Serial port connectorlocation of, 9-11on power supply, 4-19, 5-3when functional, 4-19, 5-4, 9-11

Serial Port Pin AssignmentsCPU351, 352, 363, 5-22

Serial portsCPU, 5-15

Series 90-30125 vdc supply, 4-2, 4-424/48 VDC supply, 4-748 VDC supply, 4-10high capacity 24 VDC supply, 4-13high capacity ac/dc supply, 4-4power supplies, 4-2, 4-4standard ac/dc supply, 4-2

Series 90-30 PLCbackplane, 3-12CPU capacities, 5-10recording serial numbers, 2-1user references, 5-10visual inspection of new system, 2-1

Series Six PLC, 8-7Shield ground

CPU351, 352 figure, 2-14

Shield groundingCPUs 351 and 352, 2-14CPUs 363 and 364, 2-16general information, 2-14

Shield treatment, cables, 10-26Shielded cable, making a, 10-27

Slot numberDefined, 3-3

SLPState Logic Processor, 9-4

SNP communications protocol, 8-34SNP ID

for multidrop, I-5

SNP multidropoverview, I-1

SNP port connection, 4-19, 5-3Spare parts

kits, 13-7

Spare parts kits, mechanical, 13-7Specifications

24 vdc high capacity power supply, 4-1424/48 vdc power supply, 4-848 vdc power supply, 4-11high capacity ac/dc power supply, 4-5IC690ACC900 converter, B-9serial port cables, A-2standard ac/dc power supply, 4-3

SQEEthernet products, J-1, J-2

Standard AC/DC power supplyac power source connections, 4-5dc power source connections, 4-5illustration of, 4-2overvoltage protection devices, 4-5, 4-16specifications, 4-3

Standard serial COM port, 11-3State Logic

CPU table, 9-12CPUs, 9-8Processor module (SLP), 9-4product listing, 9-1Serial Comm. module, 9-2

Sweep timefactors, 12-15factors affecting, 12-16

Symbol, %, use of, 5-10System design

baseplate selection, 12-5CPU selection, 12-4I/O requirements, 12-1Option module requirements, 12-2power supply selection, 12-6

TTBQC

cables and kits, 10-63for 32-point modules, H-11

TCMTemperature Control Module, 8-37

TCM comparison table, 8-39Technical support telephone number, 2-1Telephone numbers

Index


GE Fanuc help, 13-9

Terminal Block Quick Connect32-point cables, H-12cables, H-3I/O face plate, H-3installation, H-3terminal blocks, H-2, H-12

Terminal block quick connect assemblyfor 16-Point modules, 2-19

Terminal blocks, interposing, H-2, H-12Terminal board

connecting to, 2-18installing, 2-5posts, 2-7removing, 2-6with holding screws, 2-7

Termination, I/O bus, 10-31Third-party modules, 8-1Time of day clock

Accuracy, 5-12

Timing diagram, 4-18Troubleshooting

features of hardware, 13-1multidrop problems, I-7using software, 13-3

UUpgrading

CPU firmware, 5-6

User PROM optionEPROM/EEPROM selection, model 331, 5-8

User referencesdescription of, 5-10range and size

models 311-341, 5-11types of, 5-11

VVersion

CPU firmware, 5-7

Visual inspection of new system, 2-1Volatility

Memory, 5-4

WWarranty claims, 2-1Web site

GE Fanuc, 7-2, 13-9

Web site, GE Fanuc, 8-1Weidmuller

912263 terminal block, 2-19

Wire routingI/O Modules, 7-11

Wire sizepower supply wiring, 2-23

WiringColor coding, 2-17General guidelines, 2-17I/O module routing, 7-11I/O modules, 2-18Power supplies, 2-23Routing wires, 2-17

Wiring methods32-point modules, 7-6Analog I/O modules, 2-21, 7-9Standard density I/O modules, 7-4

Work station interfaceboard, 11-2

Workmaster computersreplacing, 11-3WSI board, 11-3

Workmaster serial port, A-4WSI

board, 11-2

WYE cable, 8-34connection to PCM modules, 10-13, 10-15, 10-17wiring diagram, 10-35wiring diagram for current remote baseplates,10-30wiring diagram for earlier version baseplates,10-29wiring diagram, remote system, 10-29, 10-30

manual hardware fanuc

Documents